diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36314-0.txt | 6610 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36314-0.zip | bin | 0 -> 109907 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36314-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 238111 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36314-h/36314-h.htm | 9721 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36314-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 67267 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36314-h/images/illus-emb.png | bin | 0 -> 10309 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36314-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg | bin | 0 -> 53105 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36314.txt | 6610 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 36314.zip | bin | 0 -> 108979 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
12 files changed, 22957 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/36314-0.txt b/36314-0.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3ccb95 --- /dev/null +++ b/36314-0.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6610 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska +Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition + +Author: Gerald Breckenridge + +Release Date: June 4, 2011 [EBook #36314] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + +[Illustration: “What does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?” Page 40] + + + + + THE RADIO BOYS + RESCUE THE + LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + + By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + + AUTHOR OF + + “The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border,” “The Radio + Boys on Secret Service Duty,” “The Radio Boys + with the Revenue Guards,” “The Radio Boys’ + Search for the Inca’s Treasure.” + + + A. L. BURT COMPANY + Publishers—New York + + + + + THE RADIO BOYS SERIES + + A Series of Stories for Boys of All Ages + + By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + + The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border + The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty + The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards + The Radio Boys’ Search for the Inca’s Treasure + The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition + + Copyright, 1922 + By A. L. BURT COMPANY + + THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + + Made in “U. S. A.” + + + + +The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition + + + + +CHAPTER I.—THE LOST EXPEDITION. + + +“Strange that you boys should be talking about the ‘Lost Expedition.’” + +“Oh, hello, Dad. Why strange?” + +“Because I have just come from a conference with a man who knows all +there is to know about it. And he was telling me——.” + +Mr. Hampton advanced from the doorway into the sitting room, and looked +at the faces of the three boys in turn. They were his son, Jack, and the +latter’s chums, Bob Temple and Frank Merrick, who together had gone +through many adventures related in other books of “The Radio Boys” +series. + +It was the sitting room of a suite in a Seattle hotel. Here the four, +arriving from South America, after finding and losing “The Enchanted +City of the Incas” as told of in “The Radio Boys Search for the Incas’ +Treasure,” were ensconced on their way to their Long Island homes. + +“Well, Dad, what was this man telling you?” + +“Yes, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” added Frank “We’re curious.” + +“What do you know about the ‘Lost Expedition?’” countered Mr. Hampton. +“I stood in the doorway unobserved a moment and heard you discussing +it.” + +“Nothing but what this article in the Sunday paper tells,” said big Bob, +grumblingly, “And the fellow that wrote this yarn didn’t know very much. +It’s mostly talk.” + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +“Speculation, I suppose,” he said. “Well, that’s the best the writer +could do. The facts aren’t generally known. However, wait a minute until +I get off this wet coat and get into something comfortable. It’s raining +again.” + +“Raining again?” said Jack. “Doesn’t it ever stop here?” + +“Oh, that’s just the Seattle Winter,” said his father. “The rains are +necessary, and, really, they are so mild one doesn’t mind them after a +time.” + +“Huh,” grumbled big Bob. “I’d think these people would grow web feet.” + +“Look here,” said Mr. Hampton, after getting into his smoking jacket and +slippers. “What I learned today ought to interest you boys.” + +“Why, Dad?” Jack leaned forward eagerly. + +“Well, wait until I tell you a bit about it,” said his father. “Then +you’ll see.” + +Then, while the three young fellows paid close attention, Mr. Hampton +proceeded to relate the story of the “Lost Expedition” so-called, the +expedition headed by Thorwald Thorwaldsson, the Norwegian explorer, +which had outfitted at Seattle the previous Spring, set out for an +unnamed destination in the Far North, and had never been heard of since. + +A great deal of secrecy as to its objects had attended the departure of +this expedition in its sturdy schooner, and many were the wild guesses +and surmises concerning it advanced in the papers and among the +hangers-on along the Seattle waterfront. Some said confidently that the +expedition was going to attempt to reach the North Pole by airplane, for +an airplane was carried dismantled on the schooner. Others declared the +object sought was gold. And, in this regard, the vague rumors of vast +gold fields found in the past by this or that old-time prospector who +died without making his secret public, were brought to light and +furbished up with a wealth of apocryphal detail in order to bear out the +contention. + +“But none of these assumptions,” said Mr. Hampton, “was correct. The +real object of the expedition never was made public, for the very good +reason that none of those in the know—and their numbers are few—ever +betrayed a word, or hint, of the secret.” + +“And you know it?” asked Jack, with quickened interest. + +Mr. Hampton nodded, and smiled teasingly. + +“Come on, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” said Frank. + +“You better, Mr. Hampton, or he’ll burst with curiosity,” advised big +Bob. “Show that boy a secret and he’s not content until he takes it +apart.” + +“How about yourself?” said Frank, indignantly. “I suppose you don’t care +to hear, hey? Oh, no.” + +Mr. Hampton interrupted. + +“Wait a minute, Bob. No need to perjure yourself. I know all you boys +are eager to know the answer to the mystery of the ‘Lost Expedition.’ +Well, I can tell it to you in one word. It is——” + +He paused. Then added: + +“Oil.” + +“Oil?” + +All three listeners asked the question as if in one breath. Big Bob was +no less inquisitive than the others, despite his twigging of Frank for +his curiosity. + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +“Yes,” he said. “Oil.” + +For a moment he was silent, collecting his thoughts. Then he leaned +forward, cleared his throat and continued: + +“Perhaps my words are a disappointment to you. The Northland for you, +probably, is invested in a mysterious glamor. It means either men +struggling through incalculable hardships to win their way to the North +Pole, to the top of the world, or else fighting against all the mighty +forces of Nature in a grim, ice-locked land to wrest a stream of golden +wealth from the bosom of the Earth. + +“Ah, yes,” he continued, smiling slightly, “I know how you feel. +Whenever our preconceived and heroic notions are upset we feel a sense +of disappointment. But, consider for a moment, the meaning of this +matter. Here, far away in the Northland, in a remote district to which +so far as known only two white men have ever penetrated, lies a mighty +river flowing north into the Arctic Ocean, along the banks of which are +such vast deposits of oil that it oozes through the soil and into the +river to such an extent that the river in reality is a river of oil and +never freezes.” + +“A river of oil that never freezes, Dad?” said Jack. “Do you expect us +to believe that?” + +“And flowing north, too?” said Frank, whose quick mind had seized upon +that point of contrariety in Nature. + +Mr. Hampton smiled. + +“Well, boys, it is hard to believe, I’ll admit,” he said. “Yet that this +river does flow north is undoubted. That it never freezes, however, is +an exaggeration. The truth is, probably, that at spots so much oil seeps +into the water that soft spots are formed. + +“Hitherto,” he continued, “there have been only two rivers known that +flow north into the Arctic in that region—the MacKenzie and the +Coppermine, along the shores of which are vast deposits of copper that +some day, undoubtedly, will be opened up to exploitation. However, this +other northward-flowing river in the midst of a vast oil field must now +be added to the list, if the word of the lone explorer is to believed, +of the one man who has been there and lived to return with the tale.” + +“But I thought you said this river was known to two white men, Dad?” +objected Jack. + +“So I did. So I did,” declared his father. “And two there were—Cameron +and Farrell. But Cameron died on the trip to the outside, and Farrell +alone lived despite incredible hardships, to finally reach Edmonton with +the tale. Now he, too, is gone—for he was a member of Thorwaldsson’s +‘Lost Expedition.’ + +“When he reached Edmonton, a thriving Canadian city, Farrell, an +adventurous fellow who at one time had worked in the Southwestern oil +fields as an employee of the syndicate of independent operators which +once employed me there as superintendent, realized the value of his +discovery and kept his mouth closed until he got in touch with Anderson, +the big man of the syndicate. Anderson saw at once the importance of the +find. But he also saw that Farrell’s marvelous oil field would virtually +have to be rediscovered before steps to develop it could be taken. For, +in struggling through to the outside, Farrell had suffered the loss of +his compass, had been turned about in Winter fogs, had lain delirious +for a long period in the igloo of friendly Eskimos within the Arctic +Circle and, in general, had suffered so many hardships that his mind was +clouded and he had no clear idea of where lay this oil field. + +“Anderson, however, placed such faith in Farrell’s report that he +decided to outfit an expedition to retrace the footsteps of Farrell and +Cameron into the Arctic in the hope of thus once more coming upon the +oil field. Inasmuch as they had gone in through Alaska, that was the way +which Thorwaldsson’s expedition took.” + +Mr. Hampton paused. Jack, who had been eyeing his father closely, now +put a hand on his arm. + +“And now what, Dad?” he asked. + +“Now Anderson wants me to attempt to go after the ‘Lost Expedition’ and +try to relocate the oil fields as well as find some trace of +Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton. + +“I thought so,” said Jack, in a tone of satisfaction. “When do we +start?” + +“We?” Mr. Hampton chuckled. “I like that. Just as cool as you please +about it, too. We? Well, well.” + +“Do we leave at once?” asked Jack, imperturbably, not one whit disturbed +by his father’s pleasantry. + +Mr. Hampton shook his head. + +“Whether I take you at all is questionable,” he said. “Certainly, I have +no intention of going at once. If I go at all, it will not be until the +Arctic Summer begins.” + +“Meantime, I suppose, I’m to return to Yale.” + +“Yes, you’ve missed a half year, thanks to our adventures in search of +the Incas’ treasure in South America, but that is no reason why you +should miss the balance of the term. I’ll tell you what,” he added, +taking pity on the three, “if you fellows go back to college and study +hard to make up for lost time until Summer, and if the ‘Lost Expedition’ +is still lost at that time, why, I’ll see what can be done.” + +“Hurray,” cried Jack. “That’s a promise.” + + + + +CHAPTER II.—SETTING OUT FROM NOME. + + +“Well, boys, where do we go from here?” + +It was Frank who asked the question, and he sat on a heap of luggage on +the beach at Nome, with Jack and Bob beside him looking alternately at +the mountain beyond the Alaskan outpost and at Mr. Hampton deep in +conversation with a short sturdy figure of a man, clad in khaki +breeches, high leather boots and a flannel shirt, a short distance away. +The figure was that of Tom Farnum, scout of the independent oil +interests at Nome. + +It was Summer, and Summer in Alaska as the boys were beginning to +realize meant hot weather, indeed. All had their coats off, and were +perspiring. Only an hour before they had been put ashore by the steamer +from Seattle, and Mr. Hampton had left them on the beach with their +luggage while he went in search of Tom Farnum, who had failed to meet +them at the landing as they had expected. + +“Where do we go from here?” Jack repeated Frank’s question. “Well, if +you ask me, almost any place would be better than Nome.” + +He looked with disfavor at the little town sprawling at the base of the +mountain. + +“Not just what I expected,” he said. “I’ve heard of Nome all my life, it +seems, and now, just look at it. Why, it’s hardly a spot on the map.” + +“But what a history it has had, Jack,” said Frank. “Don’t judge by +appearances too much. Remember this town has seen the Gold Rush.” + +“I wonder what Dad is talking about,” said Jack, ignoring Frank’s +remark. + +“Probably discussing how soon we can get away,” said big Bob, speaking +for the first time. “At any rate,” he added, “I see your father and his +companion pointing to that gasoline schooner off shore.” + +At this moment, their doubts were resolved, for Mr. Hampton and his +companion ended their conversation and approached the boys. + +“Well, boys, we’ll soon be under way,” said Mr. Hampton. Whereupon he +introduced Farnum all around. The latter was a prepossessing man with a +weather-beaten face and a grizzled mustache, above which jutted a +promontory of a nose between deep-set, wide, blue eyes. + +“That is our schooner out there,” Mr. Hampton continued, indicating the +boat to which Bob earlier had drawn attention. “Mr. Farnum,” he added, +“has stated casually around Nome that he is taking a party of hunters up +the MacKenzie. We’ll get away at once, as nothing is to be gained by a +stay in Nome and as, furthermore, we wish to avoid inquiries into our +aims. The story Farnum has told will do well enough.” + +Farnum nodded. + +“Just a white lie,” he said, grinning. “No use letting the curious know +all your secrets.” + +Then followed an hour of brisk work, at the end of which period the +luggage was safely stowed aboard the gasoline schooner, and its screw +began to turn. As the little vessel began to throb and draw away from +Nome, the boys leaned overside and watched the prospect dwindle in the +distance until the houses seemed like toys and the mountainside like a +painted backdrop in the theater. + +“Hurray,” cried Bob, at last, “we’re off for the Great Unknown.” + +“Yes,” agreed Frank, “I really feel that way, too. All the way up from +Seattle, I felt as if I were nothing more than a tourist, traveling a +beaten route. But this, well, this is different.” + +After that they were silent a long time, while the schooner shook and +throbbed and steadily pushed its way up the coast, each boy busy with +his thoughts. Yet those thoughts were much the same. + +Following that eventful discussion in Seattle, on their return from +South America and their adventures there in The Enchanted City of the +Incas, they had gone back to Yale and studied hard to make up for lost +time in the first half of the term. All three were clever and had the +knack of concentrating at their tasks, and all as a consequence had +succeeded in making up back work in classroom and lecture. As a result +they had entered the succeeding term, or at least were prepared to do +so, without conditions. This was a matter for congratulation, indeed, +and deserving of especial reward. + +That reward had been theirs. For Mr. Hampton and Mr. Temple both decided +that their respective sons and Frank, Mr. Temple’s ward, should be +permitted to accompany Mr. Hampton on his trip to attempt to find some +trace of the “Lost Expedition” and of the reputed oil field in search of +which Thorwaldsson had set out. + +“Farnum is reputed a wizard in knowledge of the Northland,” Mr. Hampton +had explained to Mr. Temple, “and, as a consequence, I do not consider +that we will run any danger. Our greatest danger, of course, would be to +become trapped in the Far North in the Fall and be prevented by the +rigors of Winter from regaining the outside. For I do not intend to +spend the Winter there. Instead, I hope to be back in civilization by +the early Fall. + +“That,” he added, “will give us plenty of opportunity to seek traces of +the ‘Lost Expedition.’ I have been in communication with Farnum. His +plan is for us to push up the MacKenzie to one of its tributaries, and +then strike eastward. We will leave the gasoline schooner to make its +way back to Nome, while we push on overland, lightening our journey on +rivers and lakes, in the hope of finding the River of Oil flowing north. + +“If we are unsuccessful, when the seasonal warnings of approaching +Winter come, we will turn to the southeast and come out in northern +Canada. + +“The boys are hard and fit, and such a trip will be of inestimable value +for them. It will make them self-reliant and teach them to depend upon +themselves. Not that they are not in a fair way to be youths of that +sort already,” he added, smiling. “If you could have seen them in South +America, George, it would have done your heart good.” + +“I know, I know,” said Mr. Temple, shaking his head slightly, and +smiling. “Several years ago, that time when you were captive in Mexico +and they set out to rescue you—” + +“Yes, and did,” supplied Mr. Hampton. + +“And did,” agreed Mr. Temple. “Well, they showed the stuff that was in +them then. And the very same Summer, when I took them to San Francisco +on what I considered was going to be a little pleasure trip combining a +bit of business with sight-seeing, and—” + +“And you became involved with the Chinese smugglers, and imprisoned, and +ended up by busting up their show—” + +“Yes,” resumed Mr. Temple, “and ended up by bringing the whole outfit +into the hands of Uncle Sam’s men. Well, I can tell you, they certainly +showed their calibre.” + +“So, I reckon it will be all right to take them along on this trip,” +said Mr. Hampton. + +“I suppose so,” agreed Mr. Temple. “But innocent as it looks now, I have +my doubts. I have my doubts. Wherever those three boys are found, there +you can look for things to move fast. Trouble courts them, it seems to +me.” + +Accordingly, the boys had been told they would be taken on the trip into +the Far North. And wildly excited they had gone about their +preparations. Jack, the keenest radio enthusiast, was all for packing up +radio field equipment of every sort right at home. But his father had +dissuaded him, pointing out that Seattle was a large city and there +everything necessary in the way of an outfit could be purchased, thus +saving the trouble and expense of transporting overland to the Pacific +port. + +“All right, Dad,” Jack had agreed. “But, remember, the selection of the +radio equipment is to be left to the fellows and me. We’ve had a lot of +experience with the value of radio when in a tight place, especially in +South America, and we want to put that experience to use and be prepared +for every contingency this time.” + +To this Mr. Hampton readily had agreed, with the result that in Seattle +the three boys had revelled in the radio equipment stores, which they +found well stocked, as the use of radio had developed greatly on the +Pacific. + +In consequence, their outfit included radio field equipment of the most +powerful, yet most compact, designs. For while Mr. Hampton fully +realized the value of having the very best yet he had issued a solemn +warning that bulk must be considered. + +“We will have to travel as lightly as consistent with safety and the +purpose of our expedition,” he had said. “So don’t pile up anything too +heavy or bulky, or it will have to be discarded.” + +Jack knew well that the distance which can be covered with a radiophone +transmitter is only about one-fourth as great as that of a wireless +telegraph transmitter having the same input of initial current. +Therefore, as a means of sending messages, supposedly for aid, over long +distances, the wireless telegraph would be the better, inasmuch as +equipment for it would be less bulky to transport than equipment for +transmitting the human voice. Nevertheless, he was reluctant to place +their sole dependence upon the wireless telegraph. + +“You see, Dad,” he had pointed out to his father, when the outfit was +being assembled, “to reach the outside we shall have to depend upon +wireless telegraph. But we will also need the radiophone for this +reason: that each one of us ought to have a means of calling the main +party in case we become separated through going on scouting or hunting +expeditions, or for any reason.” + +“Well, that sounds sensible,” his father had agreed. “Go ahead with your +plans, but, remember, hold down the bulk.” + +The result was that equipment capable of telegraphing five hundred miles +was assembled, but also Jack made up five light field sets of radio, one +for each of their party and for Farnum, which the user could pack in his +clothing and which had a radius up to twenty-five miles. The instrument +was Jack’s now famous ring radio, worn on the finger, with a setting +only one inch by five-eighths of an inch. Formerly an umbrella as aerial +had been employed but Jack had done entirely away with that in his +improved set. + +“Well, fellows,” said Jack, at last, as Nome faded entirely from view, +“I wonder what lies ahead. I wonder whether Thorwaldsson’s expedition +was stricken down by a plague, which seems hardly likely, as in that +case surely somebody would have managed to get word to the outside by +wireless or airplane, or whether it fell victim to a surprise attack by +Indians at night, as I understand from Dad that Farnum believes.” + +“Is that so,” said Frank, in surprise. “That’s the first I heard of +that.” + +“Yes,” said Jack. “Dad told me of it when we were coming aboard this +schooner. He said it was the first intimation Farnum had given him that +such might be the case, and also his first intimation that there were +hostile Indians in this country into which we are going. If it weren’t +too late, he told me, he would have turned back rather than imperil us, +as it is, we shall go pretty warily and try to steer clear of the +hostile Indian country.” + +“Whew,” said Bob, “this sounds interesting, hey, what?” + +His eyes began to shine. + +“Old Bob. Always ready for a fight,” said Frank. “Well, let’s give him +one.” + +And incontinently, he and Jack fell upon the big fellow and a tussle +followed that ended only when they almost fell overboard. + + + + +CHAPTER III.—IN THE WILDERNESS. + + +“Well, boys, tomorrow we leave the schooner.” + +It was Tom Farnum who made the announcement over dinner which was eaten +on deck. The boat was anchored offshore, far up the Hare Indian River, +one of the great tributaries of the MacKenzie. How long it was since +they had left Nome none could tell, for in that land of perpetual +daylight it was hard to keep track of time. + +“Tomorrow,” said big Bob, “when is tomorrow?” + +He looked at the sun which was still high, despite the lateness of the +hour, and would make only an ineffectual attempt to dip below the +horizon at midnight, before resuming its upward climb. + +Everybody laughed. + +“What a topsy turvy land,” said Jack. “Well, I, for one, will be glad to +go ashore and stretch my legs. Wonderful as the trip has been so far, +I’m eager to get started.” + +“Same here,” agreed Frank. + +Little of moment had occurred to interrupt the monotony of the trip up +the coast and along the northern edge of Alaska and the North American +continent to the mouth of the MacKenzie. Of course, occasional ice floes +had been encountered and the little schooner had been compelled to make +wide detours. But that was to be expected in that Far Northern latitude. + +In fact, when they had arrived at the mouth of the MacKenzie, the ice +was only recently dissipated from the great river. There, at a dock +where a little sidewheel steamer that plied on the MacKenzie in Summer +was tied up for repairs, they had replenished their stock of gasoline +and then continued the ascent, passing between willowed banks, where +huddled occasional trading posts surrounded by native villages, with the +snow-capped mountain peaks always in the distance. + +Then they had reached the mouth of the Hare Indian River and soon had +put beyond them all appearance of the presence of man. + +“This is the way Thorwaldsson’s party expected to go,” Farnum had said. +“For it was this route which Farrell and Cameron, the two prospectors, +followed on their way in. They were prospecting for gold, you know, had +no idea of finding oil. It was their original intention to strike +northeast across the numerous streams at the head of the Hare Indian in +search of gold. And Farrell reported, when he reached the outside, that +he had found traces and, in fact, several sizable pockets of gold.” + +Accordingly they pushed on up the Hare Indian a number of days until, in +fact, the extra supplies of gasoline which had been taken aboard on +leaving the MacKenzie dwindled to the point where it became advisable +for the party to go ashore in order that the schooner might turn about +and have sufficient fuel to make its way downstream to the supply depot. + +It was a period of time that, in fact, however, could hardly be +considered in terms of days. So far north had the party come that the +sun shone perpetually. It was only at midnight, for a brief space, that +it dipped to the horizon. + +And what a gorgeous time it had proven to be for all concerned, but +especially for the boys. As the powerful little schooner forged ahead, +there was not a bend the rounding of which did not afford a surprise. +Sometimes it would be caribou or reindeer, probably an escape from some +Eskimo herd, which would be surprised standing in the water, and +breaking for the timber on the bank at their approach. Again brown bear +would be seen on the bank, or beaver swimming strongly across the +stream. As for fishing, it was an Izaak Walton paradise. All Bob, Frank +and Jack did for hours on end was to lean overside with hooks baited +with bacon rind dangling in the water astern, and pull in speckled +beauties. And many a meal was made, too, on wild duck or geese, picked +off with a light rifle. + +Then came the time when Tom Farnum announced that they would stay ashore +on the morrow. And little sleep did the boys have that night, as they +lay awake on deck, whispering to each other, an awning shading them from +the sun. + +Early the next morning they went ashore with their outfit, and then +watched the gasoline schooner throb off downstream, around the last +bend, and out of sight. As it disappeared, for the first time there came +to each of the three boys the feeling of isolation natural to their +situation. The last settlement was two hundred miles behind them. They +were going into the great unknown, into the regions marked “Unexplored” +on the maps of that great northern rim of the North American continent. + +True, the weather was fine now and the country green and pleasant about +them. But how long would that endure? What if they were beset by +oncoming Winter before they could make their way to the outside? What if +they were attacked by hostile Indians? What obscure fate had met the +Thorwaldsson expedition, traces of which they sought? + +Into the mind of each thronged such thoughts, as they stood in unwonted +silence. Then Mr. Hampton called to them. + +“No time for day-dreaming. Each man to his job.” + +With him Tom Farnum had brought two trusted men. They hailed from Nome, +but were old-timers who had been up and down Alaska for many years. Both +were men of forty, sober, steady fellows who would be useful in helping +distribute the burden of packs, and would, moreover, be of inestimable +value in keeping the party supplied with game as well as in almost any +situation that might arise. They were grizzled, weather-beaten men of +medium height, both with stout frames, and because of their long +existence in the lonesome north little given to talking. Their names +were Dick Fairwell and Art Bowman, and they were “Dick” and “Art” to +each other and the other members of the party. The boys had taken a +liking to both. + +Two light canoes had been brought along from Nome, lashed to the deck of +the schooner, and in these the seven set out. The boys with Dick +occupied one canoe, the other three men with a larger portion of the +luggage the other. + +When everything was in readiness, following a light breakfast on the +bank, the two canoes set out, that containing Farnum, Mr. Hampton and +Art taking the lead. About ten miles upstream a rapids was encountered, +and around this the first portage was made. Then once more they took to +the water. + +Day followed day, in this fashion, as they pushed steadily forward, +until almost a week had elapsed. On the fifth day Tom Farnum let out a +whoop of joy and headed his canoe for the right bank of the stream at a +little gravelly beach. His sharp eye had detected a small cairn of +stones on the edge of the brush, and when the others came up with him +and stepped from their craft he was busily demolishing the stones +comprising the mound. + +“A marker,” was the only explanation he vouchsafed. “Must have been left +by Thorwaldsson. Ah.” + +At the exclamation he stood upright, holding a small metal box in his +hand. The lid was rusted on, and in his impatience, Farnum whipped out a +knife and gouged it off while the others crowded around him. Inside was +a fold of oilskin, which he ripped open. A folded paper was revealed, +which he opened. Then he read aloud the message thereon. + +“It’s from Thorwaldsson all right. Listen,” he said, and read: + + “Please notify Mr. Otto Anderson, Ashland Block, Seattle, Wash., that + I passed here July 2. Party intact with exception of crew sent as he + ordered. Farrell says we are on right track. + + “Thorwaldsson.” + +“What does he mean by that reference to the crew?” asked Jack. + +“Well,” said Farnum, glancing at Mr. Hampton, “as your father knows, +that is one of the unexplained and puzzling facts of the situation, that +about the ship. You see, a skeleton crew was to be left aboard the ship +and it was to winter in the MacKenzie. But of ship or crew, we have +found no trace. Search for the ship was prosecuted at the first +opportunity this Spring, but it had disappeared. I made a trip up the +MacKenzie myself, but the only information I could gather was an +occasional rumor at a trading post that a schooner had gone by, on its +way out, at night. A ship that might have been the Viking, +Thorwaldsson’s craft. That was last Fall. Perhaps, the skeleton crew +feared to winter in the MacKenzie and started for the outside, and was +caught in a storm which it was not sufficiently strong to weather. Only +three or four men were to be left aboard. That is the only explanation I +could think of.” + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +“As I said before,” he stated, “that seems a reasonable explanation. +Three or four men, left alone, might have feared to face the Winter iced +in, or might have been stricken ill, and so, for some reason that +appeared good enough to them, might have decided to violate orders and +start out. As to the disappearance of the ship, many an undermanned +vessel has gone down in a storm, without leaving a trace.” + +“But, Dad, you’ve said nothing about this,” protested Jack. + +Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. + +“There are a lot of things which I know I have never told you, Jack,” he +said. “If I really have neglected to speak of this, however, it has been +through an oversight. I’ve had a lot of things on my mind. But, come. We +know this is the way Thorwaldsson passed. We are on the right track. So +let us push on. We have still four hours of travel to do before making +camp.” + + + + +CHAPTER IV.—STRIKING GOLD. + + +Life flowed along very pleasantly indeed, for the boys, during the weeks +that followed. They were so far north that the sun shone constantly, and +never a cloud came to trouble the sky, never a storm to drive them to +take shelter. When they camped it was usually in the dim cool recesses +of a forest of firs, beneath the dense shade of which could be found the +only semblance of night. + +Never before had they known the delights of camp life, as they were now +living it. It was like being on one continuous picnic. For a +considerable period of time they found themselves in a mesh or network +of streams and lakes, through which Tom Farnum guided them steadily +northeastward, with never a sign of doubt as to the course to take. + +They wondered about this, asked why they took certain forks of river or +stream, why avoided others. Tom answered readily enough. From Mr. +Anderson he had received a minute report containing every scrap of data +Farrell had been able to furnish as to the course taken by him and +Cameron on going into the wild country. + +“So you see,” he added, “while I may not be following in the exact +footsteps of Thorwaldsson, yet I am going over the same general route. +Sooner or later we will cover the same ground which he covered again, +and then I expect we shall find some other record which he has left +behind, just as in the case of that note on the Hare Indian.” + +This was enough for the boys. It satisfied their curiosity. They +dismissed, or practically so, from their minds all worry as to the “Lost +Expedition.” They were too busy enjoying life as they found it each +waiting moment. + +Around each bend in a stream that their paddles took them, on the shore +of each deep, silent lake, was some new marvel. Now it would be a bear +grunting on the bank. Again, a deer, probably a runaway from some Eskimo +herd on Summer pasture as Farnum explained, standing in the stream, and +starting with a snort into the timber at their approach. Occasionally a +gray wolf could be seen loping in the distance. Now and again a beaver +cut across stream. + +With their light rifles the boys occasionally were permitted to pick off +some game, usually wild ducks or geese, of which there were numbers +along the watercourses. But nothing was shot wantonly. Many a time, +youthful fingers itched on the trigger, only to be restrained by the +thought of the cruel uselessness of shooting merely for sport. + +Of other inhabitants in this vast northern wilderness, none were +encountered. And at this the boys marvelled. It was as if they had the +world to themselves. They could not understand it. To them it was a +paradise. + +“Wait till you see this in Winter,” said Farnum grimly. “Or rather, pray +that you never do. It is a land of perpetual night, and the temperature +is so low that when you stop moving you must have a fire or you will +freeze to death. And it isn’t every day that you can travel. For this +isn’t a land of tame Winter as you boys know it. Out of the north comes +storms succeeding storm, pitiless in severity. Even the creatures of the +wild cannot stand it, in many cases, and drift to the south.” + +“But how about the Eskimo?” asked Jack. “This is their country, isn’t +it? How do they stand it?” + +“Sometimes they don’t,” said Farnum. “When the hunting is poor and +famine stalks through the Eskimo village, only the hardiest survive.” + +“Where do they live, anyway?” struck in Frank. “Why aren’t they around +here? Why haven’t we seen any?” + +“They may have seen us,” said Farnum, “and are avoiding us. They are a +timorous people, know the white man only by tradition. To the Eskimo, +the white man is a sort of god, at least to the Eskimo of all this +country north of us. Back along the coast of Alaska, of course, some +sort of contact has been made. But these Eskimo never come in touch with +the whites. They are a migratory people. In Summer they range far and +wide on the hunt. In the Winter, they retire to the edge of the Arctic +Ocean.” + +“But why?” asked Bob, in surprise. “I should think that would be the +very place for them to steer away from.” + +“Oh, no,” said Farnum. “You see, all game goes far to the south in +Winter, so the Eskimo goes to the ocean because it is the home of the +only game left—the seal. He builds his snow house or igloo and camps +near the air holes of the seal, spearing them as they come up for air. +Occasionally he slays a polar bear, too.” + +“I confess I know very little about the Eskimo,” said Jack. “What are +his weapons?” + +“Bows and arrows tipped with flint or copper, copper-pointed spears, and +wooden knives edged with copper,” said Farnum. + +“But, a bear,” cried Bob, incredulously. “How could an Eskimo kill a +great polar bear with such weapons?” + +“Single-handed, he couldn’t,” said Farnum. “But when the bear is hunted, +the whole tribe of hunters go together. They attack in a circle. Their +spears or harpoons have lines attached. And as these harpoons sink into +the body of the bear, the lines pull him this way and that as he charges +on his tormenters. Eventually, if the Eskimo are lucky, they have him so +surrounded that he cannot move. Then one dashes in and administers the +death blow.” + +“Then necessity forces them to live in tribal groups?” asked Jack. + +Farnum nodded. + +“In the Summer they often hunt alone, ranging far, for they are great +travelers. But in Winter, the hunters are all back with the tribe.” + +“And the Indians?” asked Frank. + +Farnum’s face darkened. + +“There are not many,” he said. “I wish there were less. You may say all +you please about the ‘noble red man.’ But all I ever heard about the +Indians of the Far North doesn’t predispose me in their favor. They are +cutthroats, thieves and liars. Usually they hunt somewhat to the south +of us, and make their way in towards the northern Canadian settlements +as Winter approaches. Let’s hope we encounter none of them.” + +The boys wondered as they went along whether this were gold-producing +country into which they were pushing. They spoke of the matter to Dick, +their canoe mate, at times. Taciturn though he was usually, at every +mention of gold his eyes brightened, and he became almost voluble. + +“Never been this far north,” he said on one occasion, “no white man ever +has been in here, reckon. But I’d like to stop at the foot o’ some of +these rapids and wash a little gravel for luck. I sure would like to.” + +“Let’s do it the next rapids we come to,” suggested Frank, with eager +interest. “It wouldn’t take long, would it?” + +“Orders is not to waste time.” + +“Well, I’ll speak to father,” said Jack. “I’m sure he’d let us try it +just once.” + +In this surmise he was correct, for the noon halt happened to be at the +foot of a rapids that would necessitate a portage, and Dick and Art +reported the graveled bank showed signs of “color.” Even Farnum, his +mind concentrated on the task of getting his party along and on the job +in hand, showed interest when addressed on the subject. With pick and +pan, therefore, the two men got busy, while the boys watched with +breathless interest the process of rocking the pan and washing out the +gravel. + +“Whoopee,” cried Dick, suddenly. “Thar she is. Color in the pan.” + +“Sure as I’m born,” ejaculated his partner. “Strong, too.” + +All the boys could discern, however, were some dully gleaming particles +at the bottom of the pan, out of which most of the gravel had been +washed with the water. They had half expected to spy nuggets. Farnum and +Mr. Hampton, however, were as eagerly interested as the two old-timers. + +“Try another pan, men,” suggested Mr. Hampton. “Let us go a little +farther upstream.” + +Once more the process was repeated. This time the pan was rich in “pay” +and the excitement of the four older men mounted, hectic spots glowing +dull beneath their tan in the cheeks of the two old-timers especially. + +Then Dick, who was wielding the pick, attacked a clump of rocks in the +edge of the stream at the very foot of the rapids, standing in his boots +almost knee-deep in the water. For several minutes he picked and pried +and finally, with a shout of delight, turned to his audience behind him +on the bank and, having plunged an arm into the water, held it up +dripping. + +“Look,” was all he said. + +They gazed, all eyes. + +“Well! Well!” cried Art. + +A small but sizable nugget lay on Dick’s outstretched palm. + +“What luck,” cried Jack. “You certainly looked in the right place.” + +“Bet there’s more gold around here,” cried Frank. “Maybe a bonanza. Who +knows?” + +“You ought to stake a claim, Dick,” said big Bob. “I don’t know much +about the process. But that’s the thing to do, isn’t it?” + +“Huh,” said Dick, generously. “Belongs to you boys well as me. You +thought of it.” + +“Oughter work it,” spoke up Art. “Might take out a good poke this +Summer.” + +This remark recalled Tom Farnum to the object of his expedition. + +“No, no, men,” he said, sharply. “Don’t get bitten with the gold fever +now. We’ve got work ahead of us, work that we contracted to do.” + +“Right,” said Dick. + +Art’s face fell, but he, too, nodded agreement. + +“Just the same,” said Farnum, softening, “there’s nothing to prevent you +two from staking a claim. Some day you may come back to work it.” + +“Belongs to us no more’n the rest o’ you,” said Dick, sturdily. “The +young fellers wanted us to make a try at it here just for luck, an’ we +did.” + +A warm debate followed, the boys protesting they were not entitled to +any part in the find. Finally Dick capitulated. + +“Tell you what,” he said. “Art an’ me’ll stake this claim an’ file on +it. But if we ever come back to work her an’ she pays, we’ll declare you +in.” + +“Not unless you let us help to finance the expedition,” said Jack, +turning for confirmation to his comrades. “Isn’t that right, fellows.” + +Bob and Frank agreed. Farnum put an end to the discussion. + +“Good enough,” he said. “Let it go at that. Now we must buckle into the +job. Do you realize we’ve spent more than two hours here, when we should +have stopped only a half hour? We’ve got to make this portage and push +on. Come on. Everybody to his task.” + + + + +CHAPTER V.—A SURPRISE THROUGH THE AIR + + +Joyously though time flew by for the boys, with Mr. Hampton and Tom +Farnum it was a different matter. They were worried, that became +increasingly plain. Finally, although Mr. Hampton purposely refrained +from saying anything to disturb the boys, Jack took note of his father’s +perturbation and questioned him about it. + +“Well, Jack,” said his father, “we’ve been weeks on the trail. We can’t +proceed much farther, without being compelled to start out. And yet so +far we have discovered no further trace of Thorwaldsson’s party. When we +entered the MacKenzie, which flows north, we were going to the south. +Going up the Hare Indian we struck east. Since getting into the streams, +rivers and lakes we have been going east. Shortly we shall strike the +Coppermine, Beyond that lies the river of oil, as reported by Farrell. + +“So far we have made good time. With luck, we shall be able to reach +that territory before having to turn back or, rather, for we shall not +retrace our steps, turn south. And we should have struck some other +trace of Thorwaldsson’s party long ere this, if we are on the right +track. However, you boys need not worry about this, so let’s talk of +something else.” + +Seeing that his father had sunk into one of his rare periods when he +wished to be alone with his meditations and did not welcome intrusion +even from Jack, the latter moved away to join his comrades. + +“Dad’s plainly worried,” he said. And he explained the circumstances. +“Wish I could find some way to make him forget his troubles,” he said. + +“I know what,” said Frank. “He loves music. We’re camping for the night. +Although”—with a look at the sun—“there isn’t much night, is there? +Well, anyhow, it’s nighttime in Edmonton, where that new broadcasting +station was set up last Spring. Let’s rig up our radio and see if we +can’t pick up their concert, just for luck. What do you say?” + +“I say, good,” declared Jack. + +“Edmonton’s long way off,” objected Bob. + +“That’s nothing,” said Jack. “I believe we can pick it up all right.” + +“In this northern country we have no static problem, anyway,” said +Frank. “We couldn’t send to Edmonton with our equipment, but I’ll bet we +can catch.” + +While Farnum and Mr. Hampton put their heads together in low-whispered +conversation, poring over a map, and while Art and Dick lay outstretched +under some fir trees, already disposed for sleep, the three boys quietly +got out the necessary equipment from among the luggage and set to work. + +“A short distance up the stream,” said Frank, “I saw two firs taller +than most, standing alone. They’re a pretty good distance apart, too. We +can climb up those trees and string the aerial between them.” + +They made their way to the trees noted by Frank, and found them exactly +suited to the purpose. Jack and Frank, were lighter than Bob, took turns +climbing the trees, and the wires were strung without any great +difficulty. They worked busily, and when everything was all connected +up, Bob looked at his watch. + +“Allowing for the difference in time,” he said, “they’re about ready to +begin their concert. On what meter wave length does the Edmonton station +send, Frank?” + +“I don’t recall. About three hundred and fifty, I suppose. We’ll tune up +and try, anyway.” + +“What dubs we are, fellows, not to have thought of this before,” said +Jack. + +“Oh, well,” said Bob, “broadcast concerts never did interest me much, +anyway. I like to do the sending myself, we’ve always been dog-tired +when we made camp at night, and ready to turn in as quickly as Art and +Dick. If it hadn’t been for your thought of bringing some relaxation and +amusement to your father tonight, Jack, we’d have been asleep already.” + +“I guess that’s right, old thing,” Jack replied. “You would have been +asleep, anyway, even if the rest of us kept tossing. But what does she +say, Frank? Any luck yet?” + +Frank, who had been manipulating the controls, looked up mirthfully. + +“What do you think of your musical program, Jack?” he replied. “Listen +in a minute will you? They’re sending out a crop and weather report.” + +Jack’s face fell, then he, too, laughed. + +“Oh, well,” he said, “that’s just a preliminary. The concert will +follow.” + +“No,” answered Frank, who had resumed his headpiece, “now it’s a +bulletin report on the day’s news events. Listen. Why, great—” + +His voice died. Over his face came an expression of surprise. + +Jack and Bob sprang to take up the other headpieces attached to the box. +Over their features also spread amazement and even consternation. They +listened intently. Then all three simultaneously tore off the receivers +and looked at each other. + +“Whew, what do you know about that?” said Bob, in an awed tone. + +“And on the very night that we decided to set up the radio, too,” said +Frank. + +“It seems like the hand of fate,” declared Jack. “Say, we must get +father and Tom Farnum.” + +“Thorwaldsson’s airship found wrecked on land near the mouth of the +MacKenzie,” said Bob. “And the skeleton of the aviator. Can you beat +it?” he ejaculated again. + +“Hey, Jack, wait a minute,” cried Frank, running after his companion, +who already had started for camp. “Discovered by Indians who were +bringing out furs, did you get that?” + +Jack nodded, but saved his breath as he continued to run. Frank fell in +beside him, Bob pounding at his heels. + +In a few moments they burst excitedly upon the graveled beach by the +river, where camp had been made for the night. Dick and Art lay +outstretched in slumber under the nearest fir trees. Mr. Hampton and +Farnum were still deep in their discussion, and apparently had not even +been aware of the absence of the boys, for they looked up in surprise as +the latter approached. + +“What is it, Jack? What’s the matter?” demanded Mr. Hampton, rising to +his feet in alarm, as he noted his son’s excitement. + +Quickly, Jack related what had occurred, describing their setting up of +the radio, their picking-up of the Edmonton station’s nightly program, +and their discovery that Thorwaldsson’s airship had been found far +behind them near the mouth of the MacKenzie. + +“It was only a bulletin news report, Dad,” Jack explained, “yet I +suppose it contains all the facts. Evidently the discovery of the +airship had been made weeks ago by Indians, going to the mouth of the +MacKenzie with their Winter catch of furs. But, of course, it took a +long time for the news to reach civilization. It was just made public +today. The very day, too, that we decided to rig up the radio. It +certainly seems like the hand of fate, doesn’t it, Dad? If we had waited +until tomorrow, or set up the radio yesterday, probably we would not +have known of this discovery.” + +Mr. Hampton nodded, but absently. Already his mind was busy with the +problem. + +“Did the report state any message or papers of any sort were found on +the body of the aviator?” + +“No. Only that the body had been there a long time, as nothing but the +skeleton remained.” + +“And that was all?” + +“That was all the definite information,” said Frank. “Of course, there +was a word or two of speculation as to what had occurred. The theory was +advanced that the aviator was flying to summon aid for Thorwaldsson, who +was in some predicament, but that some accident occurred to his engine +while flying, and he fell to his death.” + +“A plausible enough theory,” said Farnum. “But, in that case, I can’t +understand why the aviator did not bear some message from Thorwaldsson. +Can you, Mr. Hampton?” + +Mr. Hampton shook his head. + +“That’s not the only puzzling thing,” he said. “The disappearance from +the MacKenzie of Thorwaldsson’s ship, the death of the aviator, the lack +of message on his body, the swallowing up of Thorwaldsson and his party, +Thorwaldsson’s failure to send any radio messages—all these need +explaining. + +“We must face the fact,” he continued, “that some disaster of a totally +unexpected nature has befallen Thorwaldsson’s expedition. And I mean by +that a disaster of man’s agency. They were prepared for practically all +eventualities in their grapple with nature. Although the Winter was +severe, yet they were well provisioned, had Farrell who knew the +country, and were prepared in every way for a lengthy stay. Even if +worst came to worst, and Winter proved too much for them, some would +have survived and brought out word of what had befallen.” + +“Then you think, Dad—” + +Jack regarded his father, wide-eyed. + +“I think, Jack,” said the latter firmly, “that it is time to take you +boys into our complete confidence, Farnum and I have been talking this +matter over. We feel pretty certain that some powerful man or group of +men has knowledge of Farrell’s discovery of the river of oil, and is +working against us. How to explain the obtaining of that knowledge I do +not know, But, perhaps, some traitor in Anderson’s employ, somebody high +in his confidence, got some word of it. Perhaps, Thorwaldsson in an +unguarded moment, let some bit of information fall. Oil, you know, is a +vital necessity of the world. Discovery of a vast new field would make +great fortunes. + +“Whoever heard of it, heard of Farrell’s discovery, would realize that +the only way to come upon it would be to follow the Thorwaldsson +expedition, dog its steps and, at the psychological moment, strike. In +other words, when the field was rediscovered by Farrell, wipe out the +Thorwaldsson expedition, and claim possession. + +“Events, as they have occurred, seem to fit in with this theory. The +disappearance of Thorwaldsson’s ship from the MacKenzie. Apparently it +traveled only at night, thus slipping by the scattered trading posts on +the great river. It has never been heard of since. It might very easily +have been scuttled and sunk, or else materially changed in appearance in +some little bay on that far northern coast of the Arctic. That would +mean that the crew was bought up, but that is not an impossibility, for +men I am sorry to say break faith for gain. As to the airship, the +aviator whom I know of as a man true and tried, may have sought to make +his escape to the outside when Thorwaldsson was captured—as I believe +likely—and may have paid with his life for his devotion, through some +unforeseen accident to his machine.” + +The boys stood stunned. Finally Jack broke silence. + +“But, Dad, how terrible,” he said in a shocked tone. “To think of men +being so unscrupulous.” + +“Not all men, Jack,” said his father. “Remember that.” + +“Mr. Hampton,” said Frank. “What do you intend to do?” + +“Frankly, I don’t know,” said the latter. “Now that we are within +striking distance of our objective—the river of oil—I do not want to +give up. If it lies where we believe it to lie, we can reach it before +necessity compels us to flee south to escape oncoming Winter. That will +mean that we can map the route for future operation. I had at one time, +too, although I did not mention it to you boys, some hope that we would +be able to follow the river out into the Arctic and discover a route of +approach by water. But we may not have time for that. However, once we +do locate the river by land approach, we will have a pretty accurate +idea of whether it can be reached by ship through the Arctic Ocean in +Summer. + +“But whether to push on and imperil you lads, and the rest of us, in the +light of what we suspect lies ahead, I do not know. We shall have to +sleep over it.” + +After some further conversation, all returned to where the boys had +rigged up the radio. Dick and Art were childishly delighted at the +concert, the first in their experience. Farnum was almost equally +stirred. As to Mr. Hampton, for the time he forgot his worries in +enjoyment of the music. As showmen, the boys were in the element. + +More than an hour passed, and the concert was still in progress, when +Frank, who had been absent unnoted suddenly approached from the thick +forest of firs on the bend, below which lay their camp, with a face so +pale that Jack, who first caught sight of him, became alarmed. + +“What is it, Frank?” he asked, seizing his comrade by an arm. + +For a moment Frank was speechless. He swallowed convulsively, but was +unable to make a reply. The others looked at him in astonishment, and +all tore the headpieces off and neglected the closing number of the +concert, as they stared at him. + +With outstretched arm, Frank pointed towards the point of land, making a +bend in the stream, beyond which lay their camp. + + + + +CHAPTER VI.—INDIANS! + + +“Indians.” + +That was all Frank said, but it was sufficient. Over the faces of Mr. +Hampton, Farnum and the two men, Dick and Art, came looks of alarm. + +“In camp,” asked Jack, a sudden thought striking him. “Maybe they’re +just visitors.” + +But Farnum shook his head decisively, before Frank could reply. + +“The only Indians in this country hate the white man,” he said. “They +have had some cause, goodness knows. But the point is, they hate us.” +Turning abruptly to Frank, he said: + +“Do they know where we are? Were you seen?” + +“I was approaching our camp from this side,” said Frank, who had +recovered his speech. “I was in search of a handkerchief, for I’ve got a +little cold, and found I did not have one with me. Anyway, my feet made +no sound on the pine needles, and I was screened from the camp by the +trees. Suddenly, as I neared the last fringe, I saw a dozen Indians or +more steal out of the trees on the other side of the clearing. They fell +upon our belongings and started going through them. I hurried away to +warn you.” + +“Quick,” said Farnum, “there is no time to lose. We are seven and all +armed. They saw us depart and probably thought this was a grand chance +to rifle our camp. Waited a while to see if we were coming back at once. +I imagine they are just thieves. Well, we’ll give them a lesson. Come +on.” + +Mr. Hampton laid a detaining hand on Farnum’s arm. + +“Even if they are thieves,” he said. “We want no bloodshed. Shoot over +their heads, if shooting is necessary.” + +Farnum’s face fell. + +“All right, sir,” he said. “Just as you say. But we’ll have to hurry, or +they’ll get away with everything and escape in our canoes. Then we would +be out of luck, indeed.” + +With beating hearts, the party stole back through the trees, spread out +with intervals of several yards between each. Dick and Art, who never +stirred anywhere without their rifles with them, being old-timers who +knew what it meant to be separated from their weapons in this wild land, +were on the ends of the line. The boys had left their rifles behind, as +had Mr. Hampton. Farnum, however, had brought his, and held the middle +position. The other four were armed with their revolvers. + +As they neared the fringe of trees forming the last rampart between them +and camp, crouching behind tree trunks as they stole forward, they could +see a group of Indians still busy over their disordered luggage, which +had been opened and tossed about near the fire. Another group was at the +water’s edge, loading the canoes which had been drawn up on the sand. + +“Just in time,” thought Jack. + +Then his eye was caught by a picturesque figure of a man emerging from +the little tent which Mr. Hampton employed, because he was a sufferer +from rheumatism and wanted some shelter to keep off night chills in case +they were late in getting out of the country, but which at present +frequently was not set up on their halts. The present occasion, however, +a whim to sleep under canvas rather than the fir trees had possessed +him, and the tent had been set up. + +The man who caught Jack’s attention differed little in dress from Dick +and Art, but about his head was bound a red bandanna handkerchief in +piratical fashion, and this suggestion was increased by his long, +drooping black mustaches. Jack could see him clearly, and thought that +seldom had he looked upon a more villainous countenance. The fellow held +a piece of paper in his hand, and was reading it with evident +satisfaction. + +A low exclamation from Farnum, next in line on his left, drew Jack’s +attention. He looked at the latter, crouching behind a tree. Farnum’s +eyes were ablaze. He had raised his rifle and was pointing it at the man +before the tent. The next moment there was a report, the paper fell from +the fellow’s hand, and he emitted a howl of surprise and pain. + +“Just the hand,” Jack overheard Farnum say in a tone of vexation, as he +prepared to fire again. But the other, seizing his wounded hand in the +unwounded one, did not wait for the attack. Running low and in zigzag +fashion, he darted for the cover of the trees on the other side of the +camp, at the same time shouting an unintelligible warning to his +companions. + +“Fire,” shrieked Farnum, pumping another shot after the fleeing man, +that kicked up the dirt at his heels. “That’s Lupo the Wolf. Shoot to +kill.” + +Jack shot with the rest, but remembering his father’s exhortation fired +high. The volley was general. From the rifles of Art, Dick and Farnum +came deeper notes of heavy weapons, while from the four revolvers of the +others poured a succession of shots. It sounded as if an army were +opening fire from the woods. + +The Indians did not stay upon the order of their going. Those grouped +about the luggage ran after the disappearing man Farnum had called Lupo +the Wolf, while the other group at the canoes dashed away along the +graveled bank of the stream. One, however, sought to launch the canoes +into the swift current before departing, but his first effort was +ineffectual, and any further attempt was stopped by a bullet from Mr. +Hampton’s revolver, which winged him in an arm and sent him scurrying +after his fellows. + +“Dick, Art, here,” cried Farnum, peremptorily. + +The two ran to his side. + +“That was Lupo the Wolf,” Farnum explained rapidly, his voice betraying +his excitement. “You can guess what that means?” + +The others nodded, with compressed lips. + +“I want you to trail them. Don’t run into danger, but see if their camp +is nearby.” + +With nods of understanding, the two frontiersmen were off at the run, +not crossing the open camp, but circling it amongst the trees. Then +Farnum turned to Mr. Hampton, and the boys crowding at his heels. + +“That wasn’t just an attack from Indian thieves,” he said. “Mr. +Hampton”—and his voice took on a solemn tone—“that was a blow from the +enemy.” + +“What do you mean?” + +“They were desperadoes under the personal leadership of Lupo the Wolf.” + +“And he?” + +“He is a cross-breed, half Indian, half white, and the most notorious +bad man in the north. He is known not only throughout the length and +breadth of Alaska, but throughout the Yukon of Canada, too. From +Ketchikan to Arctic City, and from Nome to Dawson, he has gambled, +fought, knifed, murdered, and never been brought to book. Ah, you +consider Alaska is law-abiding these days. To a certain extent, the +towns and mining camps have grown more orderly and there are sheriffs +‘north of 54.’ But might still rules in the camps.” + +Farnum spoke bitterly, and leaned a moment on his rifle. As it was +evident, however, that he had not yet finished, the others did not +interrupt. Presently he resumed. + +“Lupo recruits his men from the fisheries. Men of the lowest type come +there in Summer, in droves, lured by the high wages. They form temporary +alliances with the native women. Then in the Fall, they depart. You can +guess what the children of such lawless unions are like. They are +cross-breeds, inheriting the most vicious and lawless characteristics of +the human race. It is from them Lupo recruits his following.” + +“But why should they be away over here, in this unpeopled wilderness?” +asked Mr. Hampton. “Unless—” He paused and looked questioningly at +Farnum. + +The latter nodded. + +“That’s it,” he said. “Why? Unless, if you will let me finish for you, +Lupo is on our trail. And that I believe to be the case. When Frank here +first came with word of Indians in camp, I considered them merely +raiders from some passing body of hunters. But when I found Lupo at +their head, I knew better. The wonder to me is,” he said, growing +thoughtful, “that he did not send men to trail us and kill us or take us +prisoner.” + +Mr. Hampton shrugged. + +“Even the cunningest slip up now and then,” he said. “Perhaps his men +wanted to loot first. And, anyway, they had only been here a few moments +when, thanks to Frank, we were able to surprise them. Well, thanks to +our good angel, we came off as well as we did. Nothing stolen, our +canoes still here, nobody hurt.” + +“Ah,” said Farnum, darkly, “we’re not out of the woods yet. If Lupo the +Wolf is after us, well—there is trouble ahead.” + + + + +CHAPTER VII.—A MAN OF THE “MOUNTED.” + + +While Mr. Hampton and Farnum turned in to take inventory to discover +what, if anything, had been stolen, the boys went back to take down and +pack their radio outfit. As it lay in the opposite direction from that +taken by the Indians who, moreover, were being tracked by Dick and Art +and could not double back without warning being given, it was considered +safe for the boys. + +When they returned to camp, they found the two frontiersmen ahead of +them. These reported the Indian camp pitched some two miles in their +rear and that, upon arrival, Lupo and his men had packed up and taken +canoe on the back track. + +“Now what does that mean?” asked Farnum, thoughtfully. “It is probable +that Lupo has been behind us all the way, if what I suspect is true, +namely that they have been trailing us. But why should they be fleeing +now?” + +“They can’t have been close to us all the time, Mr. Farnum,” said Bob, +“or why weren’t we attacked before?” + +Farnum nodded. + +“That’s true enough,” he said. “It may be that Lupo started late and has +been all this time catching up with us.” + +Breaking a thoughtful silence, Mr. Hampton said: + +“As a matter of fact, that seems the most probable explanation. The +other side, Farnum, probably has a spy at Nome, of whom you are unaware. +But the spy knows your identity. Your story of taking us into the +wilderness to hunt may have deceived this spy. But then, later, word +would reach him from Seattle of my identity. Not that it is commonly +known. But if some traitor close to Anderson is trading on Farrell’s +secret, my connection with Anderson would be suspected, especially as +several years ago I worked with the Anderson oil crowd in New Mexico. So +words would reach Nome to watch me. Then someone would start out on our +trail.” + +“And that someone was Lupo,” said Farnum. “A fine cutthroat.” + +An earnest discussion followed. What did this turning back of Lupo the +Wolf mean? Did he intend to stick to their trail, but at a greater +distance in the rear? Or did he plan to encircle them and lie in ambush +ahead? That his retreat was other than momentary, and meant he intended +giving up their pursuit, nobody believed. + +“Look here, Dad,” said Jack, during the course of this discussion, +“don’t you consider it quite likely that Lupo intends to take us by +surprise and attack us, rather than to retreat?” + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +“I do, indeed, Jack,” he said. “A cutthroat such as Lupo would have +brought his band of desperadoes here for only one purpose, and that is, +to dispose of us. We were lucky this time by reason of the fact that +they came upon our camp first, and stopped to loot. But from now on we +shall have to be continually on our guard.” + +“It’s a good thing, Mr. Hampton, that this is the long Summer, when +daylight never fails,” said Frank. “That makes it easier to guard +against a surprise attack.” + +“Yes,” Mr. Hampton agreed, “that makes it easier. But from now on, we +shall have to be on the watch continually.” + +He was silent a moment, thinking. Then he turned to the other members of +the party, Farnum, Dick and Art being gathered about him as well as the +boys, preparatory to the launching of the canoes, which were ready +loaded. + +“Are we making a mistake in letting these fellows out of sight?” he +asked. “Would it be better to set Dick and Art to watch them, and +appoint a rendezvous where we can come together later?” + +The two Alaskans were silent. Their faces, however, showed approval of +the plan. Farnum struck his forehead with clenched fist in a +characteristic gesture. + +“Just what I would have proposed myself, if I had been awake,” he +confessed. “Dick, Art, do you think you could pick up their trail?” + +The two nodded. + +“They won’t back track far,” said Dick. “Art an’ me can follow ’em +afoot. That last portage is only four miles back, an’ we can catch up +with ’em there. Now about where to meet up with you again?” + +“None of us know this country,” said Farnum, “and so it will be +difficulty to appoint a rendezvous. But, look here. Lupo undoubtedly +intends to continue our pursuit, and won’t let our trail go cold. +Consequently, you will be near us. I think the best plan will be to +report to us at every camp. One of you can keep watch on Lupo while the +other brings in a report.” + +“Good enough,” said Dick, the more loquacious of the pair. “Look for us +at tomorrow’s camp.” + +Supplied with bacon and a little flour sufficient for a meal or two, +guns at the trail, the pair struck swiftly on the back trail, +disappeared among the trees at the bend and were gone from sight. + +“All right, boys,” said Farnum. “Let’s get going. Can you manage your +canoe all right by yourselves?” + +Mr. Hampton laughed. + +“I think they can scrape along, Farnum,” he said. “Probably we’ll be +asking one of them to help us before long. Well, come on.” + +Paddles dipped into the stream once more, the canoes shot away, and, +with Farnum leading to set the course, the boys fell in behind. In the +leading canoe, as the two men settled down to the stroke a low-voiced +conversation began that lasted a long time. What Mr. Hampton and Farnum +were saying could not be heard, for the gap between the two canoes, +though not great, was considerable. Moreover, they spoke in low tones. +But the boys sensed an undercurrent of anxiety felt by both the older +men. As for themselves, however, they were not worried. On the contrary, +the excitement of finding themselves trailed had brightened them +wonderfully. + +“Old expedition was getting too monotonous, anyway,” said Bob presently. + +“Oh, I suppose you’ll want to challenge the best Indian wrestler now, +won’t you?” said Jack, in a tone of mock seriousness. + +“Yes, Bob, why didn’t you go back with Dick and Art and send in your +challenge?” asked Frank, in the same jollying manner. “You know you +haven’t been in a match with anybody for some time. Here was your +chance, and you went and let it slip away from you. But, don’t worry, +perhaps the Indians will return. Who knows? You may even have a chance +to exchange courtesies with no less a personage than Lupo the Wolf +himself.” + +The big fellow grinned, but made no reply. And so the two canoes swept +on between the low banks of the stream, one weighted with anxiety, the +other filled with light-heartedness. The boys were not simpletons. They +realized, indeed, that they were in a precarious situation. They were +deep in the far northern wilderness. An enemy of superior numbers dogged +their heels. In all that vast country, was none to whom they could look +for help. But, for all that, they saw no occasion to worry. It was not +the first time in which they found themselves in a ticklish situation. +They had come unscathed out of other perils, even winning some honor in +the encounter. They would do the same again. Thus they put the matter to +themselves. + +Hour after hour passed, during which period they twice encountered +slight rapids, up which they waded with the canoes instead of portaging. +All were tiring rapidly, for not only was their number reduced by the +absence of Dick and Art, and the work made correspondingly heavy, but in +addition they were traveling now on reserve strength, as prior to making +the last camp they already had done a big day’s work. + +Farnum, however, pushed ahead until at the end of four hours of travel +they came to the shore of a small lake. Here, in a secluded cove, +convenient to the stream on which they had been traveling, they were +about to make camp, when Frank approached Mr. Hampton and Farnum and +indicated an island a half mile away. + +“Isn’t that smoke over there?” he asked, pointing. + +Farnum stared, and in a moment his keen eyes confirmed Frank’s +observation. Mr. Hampton put up the field glasses which he always +carried strapped to him, and also saw the smoke. But he saw something +more—a skin kayak drawn up on the shore of the island. + +“Hard to tell from that what sort of man is camping out there,” said +Farnum, when informed of the kayak. “Everybody uses ’em in this +country—Indian, Eskimo, and the occasional prospector. That smoke +doesn’t indicate a big fire. Must be only one man, or maybe, two. Let’s +investigate. If we decide to make camp out there, well, that island +would be a good place and it would be hard to surprise us there if we +kept guard.” + +Once more, paddles were plied, and the two canoes cut diagonally across +the waters of the lake towards the island. As they approached, Farnum +raised his voice in a hail. A moment later an answering shout came back. +Then a figure stepped from the trees to the little stretch of sand upon +which the kayak was drawn up and stood, watching their approach, hand +shading eyes against the glare of the sun, head bare. + +“Great Godfrey’s ghost,” exclaimed Farnum in a low voice, turning his +head slightly to address Mr. Hampton, “it’s a policeman.” + +“What?” + +“A member of the Northwest—of the Canadian Mounted Police.” + +“What’s he doing here?” + +“I don’t know. But we’ll soon find out.” + +“Welcome, strangers,” said the other, a tall bronzed man, as they +approached. “Just in time for a snack.” + +He advanced to the water’s edge, and stood ready to help. Farnum’s +appraising eye took in the approach. Shoal water and a sandy beach! He +decided to drive the canoe up on the sands. Shipping his paddle, he +leaped from the bow into the water, as the forefoot of the canoe grated +lightly. Relieved of his weight, the canoe rose at the bow and sank at +the stern under Mr. Hampton. Seizing the bow, Farnum ran it up on the +beach, the uniformed man lending a hand. A moment later, Jack, who was +in the bow of the boy’s canoe, repeated the maneuver. The two craft were +drawn up side by side. + +“MacDonald’s my name,” said the Canadian simply. + +“Know Arkell of Dawson?” asked Farnum. + +“Know him well,” said the other. “One o’ the best on the Force.” + +“Friend of mine,” said Farnum. + +The two clasped hands warmly. Then Farnum introduced Mr. Hampton and the +boys. MacDonald led the way to a sheltered spot among the trees, where a +fire burned. + +“Just about to broil some fish,” he said. “Lucky there’s plenty. I’m +crazy about fishing,” he continued, “and when they bit here I pulled out +mor’n I could use. Was wonderin’ what to do with ’em when I heard your +hail. Guess I don’t need to worry about that any longer.” + +As he spoke he busied himself about preparations for dinner, and soon an +appetizing odor of frying fish rose to assail the twitching nostrils of +the hungry boys. + +“Suppose I get another pan and help, sir,” proffered Bob. + +His comrades laughed, for the big fellow’s appetite was proverbial among +them. MacDonald nodded with a grin of understanding. Bob tore back to +the canoes, and soon returned with a pan in hand. In a short time the +fish were fried, and all hands fell to right heartily. + +“Long way off your beat, aren’t you?” asked Farnum, of MacDonald, as +they ate. + +The other nodded. Then he regarded them sharply. + +“Same to you,” he said. “First white men I’ve seen in many days.” + +Mr. Hampton read a challenge in the straight blue eyes under the +grizzled brows, and met it promptly. + +“Yes, and I’ll tell you why we are here,” he said. “I think our meeting +with you was providential. If you have been in this country long, you +may have heard something that will help us. At any rate, here’s our +story.” + +Whereupon, he proceeded to relate the reason for their presence. He made +a clean breast of it, keeping back nothing, telling MacDonald of the +alleged oil discovery by Farrell and Cameron, Cameron’s death, Farrell’s +return as guide to Thorwaldsson’s expedition, and their presence now in +an attempt to trace the missing men. + +“So that’s that,” said MacDonald. “So that’s the reason for +Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost Expedition.’ And it was into this country he come! +Well, well.” + +In conclusion, Mr. Hampton told of their recent adventure with Lupo the +Wolf. MacDonald manifested keen interest. His hand, as he poured tobacco +into a pipe, shook slightly, and he spilled a little of the precious +tobacco. + +“You ain’t heard of it likely,” he said. “You wouldn’t. But this Lupo +killed my partner on the Force, an’ I asked the Inspector to let me go +after him myself. I followed him in from Dawson an’ lost his trail +several days ago. Now, well—” + +MacDonald averted his face, rose and walked down towards the lake shore, +and the others respected his evident desire to be alone and did not +follow. + +“Out after Lupo single-handed,” whispered Frank. “And the desperado +surrounded by all his men, too.” + +Farnum nodded. + +“That means nothing to the Mounted,” said he. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII.—FIRST BLOOD. + + +So tired were all members of the party after their unexpected exertions +of moving camp and trekking on, coming at the end of a day filled with +fatiguing labor, that now a haven had been reached and they had relaxed +from their tension, they were ready to go to sleep at once. First, +however, preparations had to be made not only to keep guard but to keep +watch also for Dick and Art. Although the latter did not know +definitely, of course, where they were encamped, yet it would not be +difficult for them to follow the trail at least to the shore of the +lake. + +“Look here,” said MacDonald, returning to join the conference, “I’m not +near as tired as the rest of you. I’ll keep watch for your friends for a +couple of hours while the rest of you get some sleep.” + +“All right,” said Farnum, gratefully, “that is, if you promise to wake +me at the end of two hours. I can use a little sleep right now.” + +“Turn in, then,” said MacDonald. “These spruces give you enough shade. +And, anyway, I guess you don’t need much inducement to go to sleep.” + +“I could sleep right out in the open sun with my face turned up to the +sky,” said big Bob, yawning. “Well, nighty night, folks.” + +Nothing occurred during MacDonald’s watch, and at the end of the +two-hour period he awakened Farnum, in keeping with the agreement. + +“Thought some of letting you sleep on,” he said. “But, to tell you the +truth, I been travelin’ hard myself, and need a little sleep, too.” + +“Right,” said Farnum. “I’d have been peeved if you hadn’t waked me.” + +Several hours later, Farnum keeping lonely vigil among the bushes by the +lake shore, descried a canoe shoot out of the mouth of the stream down +which they, too, had come and swing into the lake. At first, as only the +bow of the canoe appeared, he was startled, believing Lupo’s Indians +already were on the trail. But a moment later, with relief and yet +surprise to see them there, he made out the two figures in the boat as +those of Dick and Art. + +The pair rested on their paddles a moment, scanning the shore and also, +Farnum noted, apparently casting anxious glances behind them. He was too +far away, however, to see whether that were really the case. Farnum +realized that, with the skin kayak belonging to MacDonald now drawn +safely out of sight among the bushes, beside their own canoes, Dick and +Art would not have the same indications pointing to the island that had +he on arrival. Therefore, he stepped from the bushes and was just about +to set his cupped hand to his mouth and call when the unexpected +occurred. + +Dick and Art already had dipped their paddles into the water again and +were making a wide swing with the evident intention of bringing the +canoe parallel to the shore but some distance out, when Farnum’s +startled eyes beheld another canoe arrive at the mouth of the stream +behind them. + +Action was as quick as thought. Dick and Art evidently had managed to +obtain one of Lupo’s canoes and were being closely pursued. How closely, +moreover, apparently they did not know. He must warn them, not only of +his presence and of help close at hand, but also of the danger behind +them. The course they were taking would bear them away from the island +and, unless changed at once, would make it possible for Lupo to cut them +off from their friends. + +Although he had left his rifle at camp, as he stumbled out with sleep +filling his eyes and dulling his brain, Farnum had his automatic +swinging in the holster at his belt. Whipping it out, he shot three +times in rapid succession. + +At the sound, Dick and Art stared towards the island where Farnum, +stepping into the open, was vigorously waving his hat to attract their +attention. Lupo’s men also set up a shout, as they churned the water +racing to cut off their quarry. + +“What is it?” cried Frank, first of the aroused camp to gain Farnum’s +side. + +Then his glance took in the situation. + +“Look here, those fellows might pick off Art and Dick before they can +gain safety, even if they don’t succeed in cutting them off,” he said. +“Let’s get our rifles, fellows, and open fire. A long shot, but they’re +coming closer.” + +“Anyway, it will make them draw in their horns,” said Farnum. “Tell you +what, you boys run and get the rifles, and Mr. Hampton and I will launch +one of our canoes. We’ll go out to help Dick and Art, if those fellows +keep closing in on them.” + +The three boys sped away, nothing loath, but when they returned they +found Farnum’s plan unnecessary. As the two canoes had swept along, +Dick, who was in the stern, suddenly had thrown down his paddle, and +taken up his rifle, while Art had swung the canoe about with one +dexterous stroke. Dick immediately had opened fire, and Art had followed +suit. + +The boys heard the shots as they ran down towards the shore. When they +reached the sand they found Lupo’s men already had faced about and were +hurrying towards the mainland. One of their number evidently was hit. + +“Main good shootin’ at long range a’ so quick after paddlin’,” commented +MacDonald appreciatively. + +Content with having beaten off their enemies, the two desisted, resumed +their paddles and soon were within hailing distance. Greetings and +congratulations were exchanged, and Dick and Art ran their canoe on +shore. As soon as the first hubbub of exclamations died away, Mr. +Hampton led the way to the camp. MacDonald put the coffee pot on the +fire and between draughts of the strong, hot liquid Dick told their +story. + +After leaving the previous camp, they had gone back to where they seen +Lupo break camp and start on the back trail. The meaning of this move, +they had discussed. It seemed to them folly to believe Lupo was +relinquishing the chase. They believed he would suspect Mr. Hampton and +Farnum would spy on him, and was merely trying to throw them off guard +by creating the impression that he was abandoning the chase. Therefore, +they had gone warily, convinced that at the end of a short withdrawal +Lupo would call a halt and prepare to ’bout face. + +This suspicion proved correct. Some two miles farther on they discerned +the four canoes of the half-breed halted alongshore while Lupo harangued +their occupants. + +“We wanted to listen powerful bad to what he was a-sayin’,” explained +Dick. “But we couldn’t get close enough. There wasn’t much cover near +’em and we had to lay hid where the trees was thickest, quite a ways +off. Art and I lay there, a-strainin’ our ears but without any luck when +suddenly somethin’ happens. Most of ’em was on shore, listenin’ to Lupo +but in one canoe was one man a-huntin’ around like he’d lost somethin’. + +“What it was we never did know. But suddenly, this fellow shoves off +with a shout to Lupo. Lupo answers like he was agreein’. So then this +fellow comes a-paddlin’ down stream like mad. As he goes by where we’re +a-layin’ low, Art whispers to me: ‘This is where Lupo turns his gang +around. That’s sure. Best thing we can do is to beat it back an’ warn +our crowd. An’ my legs is tired. I’d like to let my arms work for me. +Let’s go.’ + +“I nods, and without any more words we backed out and started down +stream after that canoe. The fellow is goin’ like mad, which means he +ain’t intendin’ to go far. He’s lost somethin’ or other and thinks it +may be floatin’ on the water or, maybe is layin’ on shore where he +touched. Anyway, that’s what we thought. We never did get to know. For +after we’d made a bend in the stream and put some distance between Lupo +and us, we decided it was no use runnin’ any farther. + +“‘Here goes,’ said Art. And he let fly over the Indian’s head. That +fellow didn’t wait for more. He just jumped out of the canoe an’ started +swimmin’ for the other shore. So then Art give me his rifle an’ he swims +out and brings in the canoe. Last we seen of that Indian he was +streaking it back on the other bank. I got in and—well, here we are.” + +MacDonald, who had listened in silence, suddenly interrupted: + +“How many men has Lupo got with him?” + +“A dozen.” + +MacDonald looked at Mr. Hampton. + +“You know why I want him,” he said. “For murder. And then there’s this +raid on you. There are eight of us, includin’ these husky young fellows +of yours. Will you help me capture him an’ his gang?” + +Mr. Hampton looked thoughtful. + +“But, MacDonald, what would you do with them? We can’t turn aside from +our own object long? We couldn’t help you guard them. And you couldn’t +get twelve or thirteen men back to your Post single-handed, especially +if any of them are wounded.” + +MacDonald’s face fell. + +“Guess you’re right,” he said. “But when I think o’ that skunk—murderin’ +the best pal a man ever had—well, I see red, that’s all.” His head sank +to his clenched hands and he sat on a fallen tree, staring moodily at +the ground between his feet. + +“Certainly is a problem, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum, slowly. “If we don’t +do something, Lupo will continue to hang to our trail as we proceed, a +constant danger.” + +“I know,” said Mr. Hampton. “Let me think.” + +He, too, sat silent, staring meditatively at the ground. + +The boys had been listening with interest. Now Frank nudged Jack, with +whom he was standing by the fire, and whispered in his ear. Jack’s face +brightened and he nodded. + +“I’ll bet they have,” he whispered. “Ask MacDonald.” + +Frank turned to the ranger. + +“Mr. MacDonald, how far away is your Post?” he inquired. + +MacDonald looked up puzzled, but answered readily enough. + +“A good four hundred miles to the South.” + +“Why do you ask, Frank?” Mr. Hampton wanted to know. + +“Just a minute, sir, please,” begged Frank, once more turning to +MacDonald. “And how many men are at the Post?” + +“Captain and five men.” + +“Oh, is that all?” + +Frank’s tone was one of disappointment. MacDonald smiled slightly. + +“People think the ‘Mounties’ must be as many as an army,” he said. +“Well, we keep this wilderness clean with a handful. O’ course, when +necessary, too, we can swear in deputies.” + +“Have you got wireless at the Post?” asked Frank. + +MacDonald nodded. + +“Captain equipped us some time back,” he said. “All posts or forts, as +we call them sometimes, have wireless now.” + +“Good for you, Frank. I see what you’re driving at now,” said Mr. +Hampton. “You—” + +Frank nodded. + +“Yes, sir. I thought if we helped Mr. MacDonald capture Lupo and his +gang, we could call his Post by wireless and have them send men to help +him take his prisoners in.” + + + + +CHAPTER IX.—A CALL TO THE FORT. + + +“Now,” said Jack, “is the time that I wish I had my 20-kilowatt radio +tube that I have been working on so long.” + +Mr. Hampton, Bob and Frank nodded sympathetically. An enthusiast on +radio, Jack had developed a number of new appliances. The latest of +these was not yet completed. He had worked on it in the laboratories at +Yale during the Winter and Spring. The lateness of his return to his +classes, however, inasmuch as he did not arrive at college until after +Christmas, due to the delay occasioned by his adventures in South +America in search of “The Enchanted City of the Incas,” compelled him to +devote most his time to catching up in his studies. He did not, +therefore, have as much time to devote to laboratory experiments as he +desired. As a consequence, the 20-kilowatt tube had not yet been +perfected, when time came for him to depart for Alaska with his father. + +Jack’s 20-kilowatt tube, when completed, would be the most powerful in +the world, and he expected, moreover, to construct others of greater +kilo-wattage. A 75-kilowatt tube had been produced in England, it is +true, but it had not been found practicable. Jack’s tube was to be +steel-jacketed and equipped with a water-cooling device, due to the heat +produced when in operation. His big dream was that this tube, when used +as an amplifier in conjunction with an alternator, would make +trans-atlantic telephonic communication as common as cabling or wireless +telegraphing. + +“If I only had one of my 20-kilowatt tubes now,” he mourned, “we would +be able to talk not only with Mr. MacDonald’s Post but with Dawson or +even Nome.” + +“Well, Jack,” said Frank, “it’s too bad. Just the same, let’s get busy. +For, with our 50-watt oscillator tube set we will be able to communicate +by telegraph up to 500 miles. And, as the Post is only 400 miles away, +we can reach it easily.” + +For sending up to 500 miles, the boys knew they could use either three +or four 5-watt oscillator tubes in parallel, or one 50-watt oscillator +tube. They had decided on the latter method, in making their +preparations for departure in faraway Seattle. For one thing, and the +biggest, transportation was the most important item. And the 50-watt +tube set was the more compact. Quickly, then, with Mr. Hampton helping, +they got out the various parts from their baggage and made the +connections. + +Farnum, the Northwest policeman, MacDonald, and Dick and Art, watched +with puzzled interest and even awe as the four, working in unison, put +together the aerial series condenser, the blocking condenser, the grid +condenser, the telegraph key, the chopper, the choke coil in the key +circuit, the filament volt-meter, the protective condenser in the power +circuit, the storage battery and the motor generator. + +Farnum and MacDonald asked questions, although Dick and Art were content +to sit silent and watch, keen-eyed, as the construction work progressed. +Several times, too, Dick arose and went to the water’s edge to keep +watch against surprise. That any would be attempted for the time being, +nobody believed, as they figured the enemy would consider them on guard. + +As they worked, Jack explained for the benefit of the others. His +description of how the low voltage current from the storage battery +flowed into one of the windings of the generator and drives it as a +motor thus generating higher voltage in the other winding both puzzled +and interested them. By the time, the set was ready for use, Farnum, who +was something of a mechanic by inclination, had a fair understanding of +the set, but MacDonald, though interested, was bewildered. + +“I’m fair beat,” he confessed. “Anyhow, just so you boys can make it +work!” + +“Oh, we’ll make it work, all right,” Frank assured him. “Well, now, to +try to call the Post. What’s its call, Mr. MacDonald?” + +“I happen to remember,” said MacDonald. “We were all so interested when +wireless was put in that Captain Jameson gave us a little lecture on it. +He said our call would be JSN, abbreviation for his name. We were to +remember it, in case of need, when we were able to get to a wireless +station. Well, this is a case of need.” + +“I’ll say it is,” said big Bob. “Well, come on, fellows, who’s going to +call?” + +It was an honor or distinction that each was eager to have, yet each +wanted to force it on the others. A friendly argument developed, to +which Mr. Hampton, smiling, put an end. + +“Look here, boys, we are wasting time. Suppose you draw straws for the +privilege. You all know the Morse and Continental codes, so there is no +question of ability involved. Here—” breaking three matchsticks into +varying lengths and offering them—“take your choice. Longest wins.” + +Frank drew the winning stick. The others laughed, clapped him on the +back, and without more ado he began pressing the key and sending out the +signal. + +“Is somebody on duty at the Post wireless station, do you think, +MacDonald?” asked Mr. Hampton. + +“Somebody there all the time,” the latter replied. “Captain Jameson has +found wireless so useful in policing his vast district that he wonders +how he ever got along without it.” + +“Hurray,” shouted Frank, “listen. They’re answering.” + +To those who understood the code, the answer was plain: + +“JSN answering. Who are you?” + +“MacDonald,” tapped off Frank, grinning mischievously. + +The receptor sounded almost angry. + +“Quit your kidding.” + +“No, I mean it,” replied Frank. “This is MacDonald of the Mounted.” + +“Prove it.” + +“That’ll stump old Frank,” chuckled Bob, in an aside. But he was +mistaken. + +“All right,” replied Frank, confidently. “Do you know what my assignment +is?” + +“Yes,” answered JSN, impudently. “Do you?” + +“I’m after Lupo the Wolf,” tapped Frank. “Now call Captain Jameson.” + +“You’re not MacDonald,” replied JSN, “because he doesn’t know the code. +But you must be speaking for him, for that’s right about his assignment. +I’ll call Captain Jameson. You wait.” + +“All right,” tapped Frank. + +Then he turned to the eager MacDonald, who was itching to inquire what +was occurring, but had restrained himself until he should be appealed to +by Frank, in order not to interrupt. Like all men unfamiliar with +telegraphy, whether wireless or by wire, he stood in awe of an operator, +and believed it would be terrible, indeed, to interrupt that superior +being. Frank took pity now on his curiosity, as well as on that of +Farnum, Dick and Art, crowding behind him, and explained what had +happened. + +“And you actually got the Post?” asked MacDonald, doubt in his voice. + +Frank nodded. + +“My God,” said the big policeman. “Think of the weeks I spent toiling up +here, and now you come along and talk across that distance without the +loss of a minute’s time. Wonderful, well I reckon.” + +“When Captain Jameson arrives,” said Frank, smiling, “I want you to +stand close and I’ll translate what he says, and you help me with the +replies, will you?” + +“Won’t I be interrupting you?” + +“Oh, no,” smiled Frank. “You just come close and wait until I speak. +It’ll be all right. Well”—as the receptor began to click—“I guess this +is Captain Jameson now. Yes,” with a nod, “it’s he, all right. He’s +asking where you are, Mr. MacDonald.” + +“Tell him I’m four hundred miles away and close on Lupo. Tell him about +yourselves and the fight, and that we’re going to round up Lupo’s gang +and ask him how soon he can send men to help me out with any prisoners +we take, and if he can send any at all, and—” + +“One minute,” said Frank. “I understand. Just wait a bit now, while I +telegraph.” + +To explain at length the details of that telegraphic conversation is +unnecessary. Suffice it to say, that the situation was fully explained +to Captain Jameson, and that the latter agreed to start a half dozen +deputies under a Sergeant to MacDonald’s aid, as soon as he should hear +again as to the outcome of the expedition against Lupo. + +“It’ll take a while for the men to reach MacDonald,” said Captain +Jameson. “But with game plentiful and the season open, he can camp until +they arrive, and thus keep watch over his prisoners, providing he makes +any. You people go ahead with your rounding up of Lupo’s gang, and then +let me hear from you again.” + +On that agreement, Frank finally closed the conversation, as there was +nothing further to be said. + + + + +CHAPTER X.—THE BOYS LEFT BEHIND. + + +“MacDonald, I’ll agree to help you round up Lupo and his gang,” said Mr. +Hampton. + +They were all sitting in conference, so to speak, about the camp fire, +over which Dick was busy broiling fish which he and Art and the boys had +just pulled out of the lake. The appetizing odor made the nostrils of +the three hungry boys twitch with anticipatory delight. + +“Fine,” said the big ranger, “that’s the way I like to hear you talk.” + +“Yes,” said Mr. Hampton, meditatively, “I’ve got a very good reason why +we should cast in our lot and help you, even supposing Lupo flees and +draws us off our course.” + +“What’s that?” + +“Well, it’s an easy enough one to guess. Lupo evidently is after us. +That means that he is being paid by somebody to do us in, or at least +thwart us in our search. I want to know who that somebody is. And the +only way to find out is to make Lupo prisoner and question him. +Moreover, it is possible we may be able to learn something about the +mysterious fate of Thorwaldsson and his expedition.” + +Farnum had been listening closely. He nodded with satisfaction. + +“Just what I was thinking myself.” + +“You’re right, Mr. Hampton,” said MacDonald. “But such being the case, +we’ll have to be mighty careful that Lupo doesn’t get shot, as then your +prospective source of information would vanish.” + +“True enough, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton. “We’ll all have to be on +guard against that misfortune, for misfortune it would be.” + +He raised his voice, calling the boys and Dick and Art to him. Then he +explained how matters stood. + +“As soon as we finish breakfast,” he said, “we’ll start, and you must +all be very careful not to shoot Lupo, if it comes to a battle.” + +As they ate breakfast, Bob who seldom spoke but always to the point, +raised a question which had been puzzling him. + +“Mr. Hampton, what will we do with all our outfit?” he asked. “And with +our radio transmitter, especially? Shall we dismount it? Must we take +all our outfit along?” + +“It would be too bad to dismount the radio, after our trouble in getting +it erected,” said Mr. Hampton. “And to take all our outfit with us would +be to hamper our movements. On the other hand, we can’t very well leave +everything here, for some of Lupo’s men might slip away from the main +body, in fact, they may already have done so, and they would put us in a +terrible plight if they raided the camp, in our absence.” + +There was silence for a minute or two, then MacDonald spoke. + +“We can certainly travel faster without your outfit to hold us back,” he +said, “especially if Lupo tries to run away. For then we could gain on +him at the portages, by traveling light. Look here, Mr. Hampton, this +island is easily defended. We’ve been going to the shore to keep watch +on the mainland against surprise. But just a little ways through the +trees is a little rise, a knoll, from which you can see the waters all +around the island. One man alone could keep guard here.” + +“But one man couldn’t keep off an attack in numbers,” objected Mr. +Hampton. + +“I don’t know,” said MacDonald. “With them high-powered rifles of yours, +it might be done. They carry far, farther than any guns Lupo’s Indians +and breeds will have. Anyway, two men certainly could manage to hold +this place against all comers.” + +“And three,” added Farnum, with a significant look at Mr. Hampton, +“could do it even better.” + +The boys again were at the fire some distance away, helping Dick broil +more fish. Mr. Hampton looked at them. He understood the significance in +Farnum’s tone. + +“You don’t think they would be in danger here?” + +“Less than they would be in with us, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum, lowering +his voice as the other had done. + +Mr. Hampton considered. The proposal hinted by Farnum, namely, that the +boys should be left at camp, tempted him. It was most assuredly true +that they would be in far less danger than if they accompanied him +against Lupo. And that appealed to him, appealed powerfully. He was +grateful to Farnum in his thoughts for his solicitude for the boys’ +welfare. + +On the other hand, he knew them for resourceful in an emergency, and +good fighters. And since the idea that information might be obtained +from Lupo had come to him it had taken firm possession of his thoughts. +Lupo must be captured. Would it not be folly to weaken their force by +leaving three young huskies, each of whom, moreover, was a fine rifle +shot, behind? + +Besides, what would the boys say? If necessary, he could command and +they would obey. But Mr. Hampton was not one to exercise his authority +dictatorially. + +“I confess I don’t know what to do, Farnum,” he said finally. + +At that moment, a laughing hail from the boys announced the completion +of the second batch of food, and their imminent return. + +“Make it a post of honor and danger,” whispered Farnum, urgently. “Tell +them the radio must be guarded, and the outfit, and that if we take +these things along our movements will be so hampered that Lupo might +escape. Tell them there is a big possibility, too, that some of Lupo’s +gang may attempt to raid the camp while we are absent.” + +The boys were so close at hand that Farnum desisted. Mr. Hampton nodded. +As they ate, he broached the subject of leaving a guard in camp. + +“Three of us ought to stay behind,” he added. “That will give sufficient +protection for each other, and provide a sure safeguard against +surprise. Also, that leaves five of us to go after Lupo. Four of us can +go in that bigger of our canoes easily, without any baggage. It carried +three of us, with baggage, so far, MacDonald can go in his kayak. So we +can hit a fast pace, and make speed at the portages, if any are +necessary.” + +“Who do you intend to leave behind, Dad?” asked Jack quietly. + +Mr. Hampton realized from his son’s tone that Jack understood his +thoughts. + +“Well, you three boys would be the natural ones to be selected,” he +said. + +“Oh, I say,” protested Bob. + +“That’s not fair, Mr. Hampton,” cried Frank. + +Jack was silent. He knew his father. Close association of the motherless +boy with the older man since boyhood had attuned their minds. He +understood how troubled his father was over the possibility of running +them into danger. And he decided he would not add to his difficulties, +but would keep quiet, although inwardly he felt dismayed at the prospect +of “missing the fun.” + +“You see how it is, fellows,” said Mr. Hampton, and he proceeded to +elaborate on the theme furnished him by Farnum. “It’s a post of honor +and danger combined.” + +Bob and Frank, however, were not convinced. They started anew to protest +But Jack silenced them. + +“All right, fellows, let’s be sports,” he said. “If the older heads +decide they don’t need us, we won’t force ourselves on them.” + +“But, Jack,” cried Bob and Frank in chorus. + +“No, I mean it, fellows,” said Jack. “Come over here with me, and I’ll +tell you something.” + +Drawing them out of earshot, he added: + +“Don’t let us make it hard for Dad. He’s got troubles enough. He’ll feel +a lot easier if we aren’t along. I know how you feel. I feel the same +way about it. But let’s make it as easy for Dad as we can. Besides, +there is something in what he said, after all. There is no guarantee +that some of Lupo’s men won’t attempt to raid us. For my part, I believe +some of them must be watching this island right now, and the minute they +see the others safely out of sight, they’ll attack us. For they know our +numbers, and they will realize the three of us are here alone.” + +“All right,” grumbled Bob. “Have it your own way, let’s get some more to +eat. I haven’t filled up yet.” + +“This outdoor life makes me ravenous, too,” agreed Frank. “And I used to +be such a dainty eater. Why, I just pecked at my food.” + +“You mean you ate food by the peck,” said Bob. “For a little guy, you’re +the heftiest eater I ever saw.” + +“Little guy, is it?” cried Frank. “I like that.” + +And without more ado, he made a flying tackle, his arms locking about +Bob’s knees. The big fellow came down in the brush and Frank piled on +top of him with a shout of glee. + +“Come on, Jack. We haven’t had a good rough-house for a long time.” + +Grinning, Jack joined in, and the three went rolling and threshing about +the bushes like a trio of young bears. + +At the fireside, Mr. Hampton’s worried look relaxed, and he grinned with +enjoyment. + +“It’s all right, now,” he said contentedly. “They’ll take their +disappointment out in a grand wrestling jamboree. Well, let’s pack up a +little grub and get ready to go.” + + + + +CHAPTER XI.—BOB FALLS ASLEEP. + + +In no time at all, Mr. Hampton and his party were ready to set out. Of +one thing they were reminded by Jack, the individual radio sets +constructed along his own lines, the instrument of which was so small +and compact it was contained in the panel of a ring. + +“Only trouble with these,” Jack said, “is that you can receive but can’t +transmit. However—” + +“However,” his father interrupted, “that is all that will be necessary.” + +“Why?” asked Farnum. + +“It is hardly likely that the five of us will get into such a +predicament that we shall fail to return,” explained Mr. Hampton. “But +the boys may be attacked when we are gone, and may be placed in a bad +position. Then they can call for us.” + +“At least we could send out a hurry up call over those sets,” said Jack. +“As for your calling us, well, that will be a little more complicated, +Dad, but it can be done, if necessary. I insist on your taking that army +field set. It came in mighty handy in South America. It is no great job +to set it up. And it weighs little. You are taking no other equipment, +and you can afford to take it along. It won’t be in your way. Here it +is, you see, all boxed up complete, handle on the box and everything.” + +“Right, Jack,” said his father. “Now we can communicate with each other +easily enough. Well”—looking about him—“are we ready?” + +The others nodded. + +“Then,” Mr. Hampton said, “I propose that we bring our canoes back +through the trees, cross the island and make for the mainland on the +other side.” + +Farnum and MacDonald nodded agreement. + +“This island is pretty long,” said MacDonald, “and it will screen our +departure on the other side, in all likelihood. It is hardly likely, as +a matter of fact, that we will be seen, for Lupo’s party has not shown +itself since we beat off that canoe, and probably is somewhere back up +that stream out of which your party came.” + +“You think they cannot see the mainland on the other side of this island +from there, Dad?” + +“I don’t believe so,” said Mr. Hampton. + +“Even if they do catch a glimpse of us,” suggested Farnum, “isn’t it +probable they’ll believe we are pushing on? As a matter of fact, +however, we’ll land on the mainland, and carry our canoes inland and +then up along the lake till we are out of sight, when we can cross +again, I suppose that’s your idea, Mr. Hampton?” + +“My idea exactly,” answered the other. “Well, let’s get the canoe and +MacDonald’s kayak. They have been pulled well up into the bushes, and we +can bring them across the island without detection easily enough.” + +“Wait a minute, Dad,” said Jack, laying a detaining hand on his arm. “If +they do see you crossing the channel to the mainland, on the other side +of the island, they’ll know the whole party isn’t along, and will +realize you aren’t leaving, but merely carrying out some maneuver.” + +“Maybe, that’s what they will think, Jack. On the other hand, they might +figure some of the canoes got across beforehand. Anyway, leaving by the +back door, so to speak, is our wisest plan, I am sure. The channel to +the mainland on the other side is only a narrow one, and the +probabilities of our escaping detection are all in our favor.” + +The largest of the canoes, together with MacDonald’s kayak were dragged +back through the underbrush and carried across the island to be launched +on the other side. Nor did Jack neglect to load the compact field +transmitting set in the canoe, as the party pushed off. Then, amid +farewells from both sides, Mr. Hampton and his party set out for the +mainland. + +Jack watched the canoe and the kayak depart, with something of a sinking +of the heart. The same feeling, he suspected, possessed his father. +Neither, however, presented other than a brave and cheerful front. As +for Bob and Frank, they had gotten over their disappointment at not +being permitted to accompany the expedition, to a certain extent, and, +cast for the first time since the start of the trip, on their own +resources were beginning to enjoy the situation. + +“First thing, fellows,” said Frank, as the party reached the mainland, +hauled up canoe and kayak and struck into the trees, “first thing is to +go to this knoll about which MacDonald spoke, and take a view of the +field.” + +“Yes,” said big Bob, “then let’s divide up into watches, so that the +pair of us not drawn for the first watch can get some rest.” + +“You certainly were born in the Land o’ Nod, Bob,” scoffed Frank. + +“Yes,” said Jack, grinning, “if you’re as sleepy as all that, we’ll +count you out right away. Frank and I will draw for the first watch, and +you can hit the hay.” + +“Not so fast,” said Bob. “I’ll take my chance with the rest of you.” + +Meantime, they had been mounting the tree-covered hill to which +MacDonald had referred and now, reaching the top, found that, despite +its low elevation, it was still so much higher than the rest of the +island and than the shores of the lake as well, that they commanded a +sweeping view not only of the nearer shore to which Mr. Hampton had gone +but also of the farther one whence they had come. + +Not a sign of human occupation, however, was anywhere apparent. +Eastward, although they knew Mr. Hampton and his companions could not +have progressed far, yet the trees rimming the lake shore were +sufficiently dense to hide any sign of movement. Westward, toward the +farther shore, was a thick belt of trees about the mouth of the stream, +thinning out farther along the shore in both directions. Neither among +the trees nor on the glades, could they discern anybody although Jack, +who had been thoughtful enough to bring along their field glasses, +scanned the prospect through them a long time before passing them on to +the others, who did likewise. + +“Well, so far so good,” said Jack, with a sigh of relief. “Evidently, or +so far as we can see, anyway, Dad and the rest got across undiscovered +and now stand a fair chance of crossing the lake farther up undetected.” + +“Maybe so,” said Frank. “Maybe, too, Lupo got discouraged and quit.” + +“Retreated you mean?” asked Jack. + +Frank nodded. + +“Oh, you fellows are full of prunes,” said Bob. “Why should he quit now, +just because we have added one more man to our forces? He’s hung to our +trail a long time. That means he’s not going to quit in a hurry. No, +we’ve got to keep our eyes open.” + +“That’s right,” said Jack, thoughtfully, “It won’t do to get +overconfident and relax our guard.” + +“Just the same there’s no sign of trouble now,” said Frank. “And I’ve +got a suggestion.” + +“Don’t lose the idea,” said Bob, anxiously. “Hold on to it. Ideas are +rare.” + +“With some people yes,” said Frank, grinning. “Not with me.” + +“Huh.” + +Bob clutched at Frank, but the other wriggled out of his grasp. + +“My idea,” he said, “is to take a plunge in the channel your father +crossed, Jack. I’m hot and sticky and tired, and a swim would go fine +just before I turn in and leave Bob on watch. What do you say?” + +“So I’m to have the first watch, hey?” said Bob. “It’s been all decided, +has it? Well, well. All right, run along, Frankie, me lad. I’m not so +anxious for a swim. I’ll just start my watch here and now.” + +“Bob, you’re a good sport,” said Frank, throwing an arm over the +shoulders of his big chum, between whom and himself was a depth of +feeling which seldom was expressed in words. + +“Oh, run along and take your swim.” + +Bob playfully shoved the pair of them down the hill. Laughing, they +obeyed. As they disappeared among the trees, Bob selected a spot at the +base of a spruce on the top of the knoll, sat down with the glasses in +his lap and his eyes on the westward shore of the lake, where Lupo’s +half-breeds had last been seen, and prepared to keep watch. His back was +against the trunk of the tree, and he made himself as comfortable as +possible. + +It was a really comfortable position and, when one is tired and sitting +idle, a comfortable position is conducive to drowsiness. It was so with +Bob. He had had but little sleep in the last two days. He had worked +hard. The air was warm and drowsy, as only the air of the short hot +Summer of the north country, when the sun never sets, can be. Presently +his head began to nod, and there was a buzzing in his ears as of the +drowsy hum of bees. He caught himself, and sat bolt upright, rubbing his +eyes vigorously with his fists. Then he leaned back against the tree +trunk again, and again began to nod. This time, the jerk with which he +awakened was longer in coming. + +Bob got up and stretched. + +“Mustn’t go to sleep,” he reflected. “Nothing in sight, though. Not much +use to worry. Ho, hum.” + +He resumed his seat. Imperceptibly, his eyes drifted shut. He sat +through the transition period between sleeping and waking, unaware that +he was yielding to slumber, merely pleasantly conscious of relaxed limbs +and thoughts. Before he was aware his head nodded, his eyes closed, his +chin touched his chest, and he slept. + +Meanwhile Jack and Frank were thoroughly enjoying their plunge. The +water was warm, there was no wind, and they swam, dived, floated to +their heart’s content. Neither realized the passage of time until Frank, +suddenly filled with compunction at their long absence, while Bob kept +watch, scrambled ashore and looked at his watch, laid out on top of his +clothes. + +“Great guns, Jack,” he announced, “we’ve been gone an hour. Good old +Bob. He was mighty nice about sending us off to swim while he kept +watch, but you know he likes to swim, too. He’ll be thinking it’s a low +trick on our part to stay so long. Maybe he’ll want to come and take a +plunge himself, when one of us gets back to relieve him.” + +Jack also had a guilty feeling and, as is the way with most of us, +attempted to make excuses. + +“He might just as well have come along,” he said. “Nothing’s going to +happen.” + +They were pulling on their clothes. + +Suddenly they heard Bob’s voice raised in a distant shout, calling their +names. Then followed a brisk outbreak of rifle shots. + + + + +CHAPTER XII.—THE SURPRISE ATTACK. + + +“An attack,” gasped Jack. + +“And we’re not there to help old Bob,” cried Frank, in an agony of +apprehension. “Come on. Don’t stop to finish dressing.” + +Shirt flapping out over his trousers, shoes unlaced, Frank frantically +buckled on his revolver and cartridge belt, seized his rifle and started +on a dead run through the trees. Jack did likewise. As they ran, they +heard the shots continuing intermittently, and then once more—clearer +and closer at hand, as they neared the knoll—came Bob’s voice: + +“Frank, Jack, they’re rushing me. Look out for yourselves.” + +There was a crashing in the brush ahead. + +“Down, Jack, some of them coming.” + +The two flung themselves prone behind a spruce whose low branches swept +the ground. The sounds were off to their left. A moment later the forms +of four men, hurrying towards the channel whence they had just come, +could be seen eight or ten yards away. + +Jack’s face was pale, his lips set. Frank was trembling with excitement +and fear—not for himself, if the truth must be told, for the plucky lad +was not thinking of himself, but for his chum, who was holding off the +main attack alone. + +“Steady, Frank,” whispered Jack. “Bob’s life depends on us. This is no +time for false compunctions. You’ll have to shoot to kill.” + +“All right, Jack.” + +Then the two rifles spoke as one, and two of the runners stumbled, flung +out their arms to save themselves, and pitched forward. The others spun +about towards the direction whence the boys had fired, but a second time +Frank and Jack fired, and they, too, fell. + +“No time to see how badly they were hit,” said Jack. “Come on. Old Bob’s +still alive and shooting.” + +Forward they dashed once more, not neglecting, however, to keep wary +watch as they ran. No more of the enemy were seen, however. There was a +sudden uproar ahead, the shots ceased. Cries of astonishment, +stupefaction, even a note of fear, went up from several throats. Above +all was a bull-like roar that they readily identified as coming from +Bob’s throat. + +Frank’s heart gave an exultant leap. He knew that yell. It came only +when Bob went berserk, and fought with his hands. He had heard it when +they fought Mexican bandits, Chinese smugglers, rum runners on Long +Island and Incas in the Andes. He knew well what it meant. + +Almost at the same moment, they burst into the glade at the base of the +knoll, and came to a dead halt, eyes popping, standing as if rooted to +the spot. + +But only for a moment. Then they started tearing up the hillside, among +the scattered trees. For at the top was a whirling heap of figures, as +if caught up in a cyclone, and well they knew what it portended. +Somewhere in the center of the group was big Bob, at close grips with +the enemy, and not caring how many they numbered. + +Would they be in time? Could they help Bob before some half-breed +succeeded in sticking a knife into him? + +But Bob proved that he could handle his own affairs, for while they were +still several yards away, first one and then another half-breed was +spewed from the miniature whirlwind, and then Bob could be seen with +several men clinging to his legs and another on his back, attempting +apparently to throttle him. The big fellow’s hands went up and back. +They settled under the other’s armpits. There was a sudden mighty heave +and wrench, and then the man on Bob’s back came flying through the air, +straight for Bob’s two comrades. He had been tossed from Bob’s +shoulders, as a strong man would toss a sack of meal. Frank and Jack +leaped aside, and the man struck the ground, rolled over and over and +then lay still, crumpled up against the trunk of a spruce. + +Recovering from their surprise, Jack and Frank leaped forward. But their +intervention was unnecessary. Standing like a young Colossus, legs +apart, with a man wreathed about each, Bob bent down. One big hand +seized each by the neck. Then the two heads were bumped together once, +twice. The half-breeds collapsed. Their grip on Bob’s legs relaxed, and +he tossed them aside, and they, too, lay still. He had knocked them out. + +Then Bob did a surprising thing. He leaped with a murderous look for the +two boys. + +“More of you, hey?” + +They sprang aside nimbly, eluding his grasp. + +“Bob, Bob, it’s us.” + +“What? What? Oh, you—” + +Bob looked at them, the battle lust dying in his eyes, and recognition +dawning. It was followed by a wide grin. + +“Oh, it’s you.” + +“Bob, old thing, that was the greatest fight in history,” cried Frank, +hysterically, clapping his chum on the back. + +“Never saw the like,” said Jack, doing likewise. “Thank God, Bob, you’re +alive.” + +“Never was more alive in my life,” said Bob. “Hey, they’re running +away.” + +He darted away from his chums and sprang downhill. True enough. The two +whom he had disposed of first, who had dropped out of the fight, had +gained their feet and were running madly through the trees. + +Jack ran after Bob and restrained him. + +“Let them go, Bob. They are alone. There are three others here we must +tie up before they come to.” + +Bob followed him back to where Frank was bending over the man whom the +big fellow had tossed over his head. The half-breed was recovering +consciousness, and beginning to moan. + +“Broken arm, I think,” said Frank. “He’ll not bother us. How about the +two whose heads you bumped together?” + +“They’re recovering consciousness, too,” said Jack. “Nothing much the +matter with them. We had better tie them up, so they can’t cause us any +trouble.” + +“Here, take the other fellow’s belt and tie his hands behind his back +with it,” said Bob. At the same time, he suited action to word in the +case of the nearer of the two, whipped off the fellow’s belt and tied +him with it. + +“Won’t they try to run away, Bob? Ought we to tie their legs, too?” + +“No, we’ll just keep an eye on them. Let’s take a look at the other. If +his arm is broken we’ll have to set it somehow, I guess. Rather pitch +him in the lake, though. He’s a villainous looking rascal. Tried to +choke me, too, and darn near succeeded.” + +While Frank kept an eye on the two other prisoners, who had now +recovered consciousness and were beginning to realize their situation +but lay still under the threat of Frank’s rifle, Bob and Jack examined +the third man. + +His senses were returning, and he moaned a good deal. Examinations +revealed, however, that his arm had not been broken, merely badly +wrenched. + +“I’m mighty glad of that,” said Jack. “We’d have been up against it to +set a broken arm.” + +“Oh, we could do it, all right, if necessary,” said Bob. “But I’m glad, +too, that it isn’t necessary. But, say, Jack”—with sudden recollection, +and an air of anxiety—“there were four more of these scoundrels. We’ll +have to look out for them.” + +Jack’s voice shook a little as he replied. + +“I think not, Bob,” he said. “Frank and I saw them first. We ambushed +them, practically. They didn’t have a chance.” + +“You don’t mean—” + +Jack’s gaze was steady but troubled. + +“We had to do it, old man,” he said. “It was our life or theirs. And +yours, especially. When we heard your shout, and those first shots, +Frank went wild with fear that you had been trapped while we were away +enjoying ourselves. And I guess I felt as bad as he did.” + +“Hey, fellows,” interrupted Frank, hailing them, “the two that got away +must have been all that were left. They’ve jumped in a canoe and are +paddling like mad for the mainland.” + +“Can you see them?” called Jack, starting to the top of the knoll to +join his chum. + +“How would I know what they were doing if I couldn’t?” rejoined Frank. +“Yes, I can see them. Look there.” + +He pointed. + +“Tie up that other fellow, Bob, and make him walk up here to join his +little playmates,” Jack called back. + +Bob complied. The man groaned, but by now he had fully recovered his +senses, and he obeyed Bob’s order to move with an alacrity that showed +he stood in abject fear of the husky young American. + +Frank pointed out the fleeing men, who were nearing the mainland, and +paddling with superhuman energy, as if fleeing from the Old Nick, no +less. + +“That accounts for all of them, I guess,” he said. “So we can sit down +now, Bob, while you tell us how it happened.” + +“Not much to tell,” said Bob, sinking to a seated position against the +tree trunk. “Except I went to sleep and was almost surprised, but not +quite. My first intimation that the enemy was near was when I heard +somebody talking in the trees at the foot of this knoll. Or, did I hear +anybody? Was it just the old sixth sense giving warning of danger? I +don’t rightly know. At any rate, I woke with a start and looking down +through the trees saw a bunch of half-breeds making their way towards +the other side of the island. + +“I tell you I was scared. I felt guilty as sin. Here I had promised to +keep watch, and, instead, had fallen asleep. As a result, the +half-breeds had landed on the island, and were heading for where you +fellows were swimming. I had endangered your lives. What should I do? +That was the question. + +“But I didn’t waste must time, puzzling over it. I knew I had to give +you fellows warning or you would be taken by surprise. So I yelled to +you as loud as I could to look out. I guess they hadn’t seen me up till +then. But when I yelled, they saw me quick enough, and several of them +opened fire, and——” + +“Wait a minute, Bob,” Frank interrupted, his eyes shining. “They hadn’t +seen you, and you could have let them pass without attracting their +attention, but you yelled, just to give us a chance for our white alley. +That’s, that’s—” + +“Oh, forget it,” said Bob, uncomfortably. “You’d have done the same. +Anyway,” he hurried on, “they split up into two groups, and one kept on +going, while the other rushed me before I could do much shooting, +and—well, I guess you know the rest,” he concluded, lamely. + +“I’ll say we do,” said Frank, gripping his big comrade’s shoulder. “Boy, +I’ll never see the like of that fight again.” + +“But, Bob, I wonder why they rushed you instead of trying to shoot you +down,” said Jack. + +“Search me,” said Bob. + +“I’ll bet I know,” said Frank. + +“What?” asked both. + +“They wanted to take you alive, Bob, for some reason of their own. +Probably, would have tried to take us alive, too, if they’d gotten the +chance.” + +“Well, maybe so,” said Bob. “Anyhow, that’s that. Now what shall we do?” + + + + +CHAPTER XIII.—MR. HAMPTON RECALLED. + + +Jack and Frank regarded each other with distaste and even horror in +their eyes. + +“Has to be done, though,” said Jack, as if in answer to a remark of +Frank’s. + +Frank nodded. + +“I know.” + +“What are you two chumps talking about?” asked Bob. + +“Those four men we shot down, you know,” Frank explained. + +“Think you—” + +Bob’s question went uncompleted. + +“I don’t know,” Frank replied. “We shot straight. It was your life and +ours against theirs.” + +“Well, come on. I know how you feel, but I expect that’s the first thing +to be attended to. If any of them is no more than wounded, it will be up +to us to do what we can for him.” + +“Right, Bob,” said Jack. + +“Come on,” Frank said shortly, starting down the hillside, in the +direction of their successful, though impromptu, ambuscade. + +“Go easy,” warned Bob. “If they’re able to shoot, they’ll take a crack +at us.” + +Bob’s advice was followed, and the trio approached the spot warily. But +precaution was needless, or, while still some distance away, they could +see the four bodies outstretched motionless where they had fallen. +Frank’s face went white, and he shuddered. Jack was pale. Big Bob, +although he had had no hand in the affray, had to take a grip on +himself, in order to force his laggard steps to continue. Though many +were the affairs of danger in which they had been, the boys had never +before shot to kill nor had death been brought so close to them. + +Frank stopped. He was trembling violently. + +“I—I can’t look at them,” he gasped. + +Bob threw an arm over his shoulders. + +“You and Jack stay here,” he ordered, gruffly. “I had no hand in this. +I’m the fellow to attend to it. Wait for me.” + +At that Frank protested, and started to proceed. But Bob shoved him +back, kindly but firmly. + +“The pair of you have been through enough,” he said. “Do as I say. Wait +here.” + +And with quick, firm step, keeping himself to the task, he plunged on +through the trees. For a moment or two both Frank and Jack watched him +fascinatedly, then Frank sank down to a sitting position, elbows propped +on his knees, his face in his hands. Jack faced about, and stared +unseeing through the trees. + +Presently, Bob’s solid, crunching footsteps could be heard approaching, +and they looked up. His face was grave, but unflinching. + +“Look here, fellows,” he said, firmly, “may as well face the facts. All +four were killed instantly. Drilled through the—— But why discuss it? +The fact is, they’re dead. They were rascals of the first water, and, as +you say, it was their lives or ours. Self-preservation is the first law +of Nature. Now, what are we going to do about it? We haven’t any tools +to dig with.” + +Frank shook himself into alertness. + +“Let’s get the axes—our outfit has some—and cut off some spruce boughs +and cover them over. Then we can roll some stones on top.” + +As quickly as possible, without speaking during the task, and working +feverishly, the three carried out Frank’s idea. Then, back at camp, they +sat down and brewed a pot of coffee. The hot, scalding liquid steadied +their shaken nerves. + +“Guess we better try to get in touch with your father, Jack,” suggested +Bob, at length. + +“How long have they been gone?” + +Bob looked at his watch. + +“Three hours. Seems like a lifetime.” + +“Things have certainly happened fast,” said Frank. “Thank goodness, that +party missed our radio. If they had destroyed it, we would have been out +of luck.” + +“More luck than I deserve,” said Bob, savagely. “Think of going to sleep +on the job. If I had been awake, they never would have been able to +land.” + +“Forget it, Bob. You certainly have nothing to reproach yourself with.” + +“Oh, that’s nonsense,” said the big fellow. “I’m always getting you into +trouble.” + +Frank smiled. + +“Yes, and then getting us out again,” he said. + +“Well, let’s try the radio, anyway,” suggested Jack. “They’ve been gone +three hours. With the best of luck they can’t have made more than eight +or ten miles, considering the detour they planned to take, and +everything.” + +“Couldn’t have gotten that far away in a straight line,” said Frank. + +“No, I guess not. But what if they aren’t prepared for a call from us?” + +“Oh, with that improved ring set of yours, your father will be +proceeding fully equipped to hear from you,” said Frank. “He need only +wear the headphone, and I seem to remember he said on leaving that he +would keep it on most of the time.” + +Jack nodded. The improvement in the ring set, spoken of by Frank, had +done away with the necessity for the umbrella aerial. + +“All right,” he said. “I’ll call Dad on 200 meters. If he gets the +message we ought to hear from him shortly, for he’ll at once unlimber +the field transmitting set and call us back.” + +While Jack sent out a terse description of the fight and its outcome, +Frank and Bob decided to steady their nerves by fishing and went down to +the lakeside. They had reasonable success and had pulled out a number of +fish when Jack joined them. + +“Send out your message, Jack?” Frank inquired. + +“Yes, and heard from Father in reply, too.” + +“What? Why, great guns, how long have we been here? Surely, you can’t +have had time to hear from your father?” + +“But, I have,” affirmed Jack. “You’ve been here more than an hour.” + +Bob and Frank looked at each other. In all that time, neither had spoken +a word. They had just dozed over their lines, pulling in an occasional +fish. Frank laughed. + +“I guess we went to sleep with our eyes open,” he confessed. “Well, what +did your father say?” + +“They made a long trek up the lake before crossing over, and are not +very far away—somewhere up in that direction—on the other shore, there,” +said Jack, pointing. “Dad was worried as the deuce at my story, and +they’re coming back.” + +“Coming back? Why? It’s all over now.” + +“That’s what I told him, Frank. But he’s coming back, anyway. They’re +going to get back to the lake, and come straight down to the island. +Ought to be here in a couple of hours or less.” + +“May as well wait dinner for them, in that case,” observed Bob. “Or what +meal is it? Breakfast, lunch, or dinner? I’m sure I don’t know. This +perpetual sunshine has me all turned around. I don’t know whether it’s +day or night.” + +“Same here,” confessed Frank. “I do know, though, that I’m beginning to +get up an appetite.” Then a thought, a thought which his somnolent +daydreaming over the fishing lines had driven away for the time, crossed +his mind, and he paled. “I don’t know though”—catching his +breath—“whether I’ll ever want to eat again.” + +Jack looked at him sharply. So did Bob. The big fellows noted with +apprehension the twisted, stricken look on their slighter chum’s face, +and the haunted appearance of his eyes. To Bob’s keen eyes, moreover, +two hectic spots glowing brightly in the dark tan of Frank’s cheeks were +apparent. + +“Look here, old man,” said Bob, anxiously, “you want to quit thinking +about that or you’ll be sick.” + +“Sick?” Frank tried to force a laugh. “I’m the healthiest invalid ever +you saw.” + +“No, Frank, I mean it. Put that thought out of your mind, or you will be +sick. Why—”laying a hand on his brow—“you’ve got a fever right now.” + +Jack was worried, too. + +“Great guns, Frank, you must take Bob’s advice. What if you came down +sick? We’d be in a pretty fix.” + +“Oh, you fellows make me tired,” said Frank, irritatedly. “I’m all +right.” + +But Bob’s worry was not routed. He took his chum by an arm and started +marching him toward camp. + +“I’m going to give you a dose of calomel and make you lie down,” he +said. “Come on.” + +“Calomel? Have a heart.” + +“Yes, calomel,” said Bob, firmly. “That’s what you need, that and a +nap.” + +Picking up the fish, Jack followed. And at the camp, despite Frank’s +vehement protests, he was made to swallow a liberal dose of calomel, and +then to lie down on a couch of spruce boughs, over him the little tent +belonging to Mr. Hampton to provide shade from the northern sun. Jack +and Bob sat down, some distance away, and started cleaning the fish. +They talked together in low tones. Presently, after several glances +toward the motionless figure, Bob arose and tiptoed close to it. On his +return, he nodded, smiling slightly, at Jack. + +“Asleep,” he said. “Didn’t want to do it, but overworked Nature was too +much for him. I’m a little bit worried. His nerves got a severe shock. +But I guess he’ll be all right when he wakes up.” + +Then he glanced more keenly at Jack. + +“Look here, you’ve been through the same experience. I had a nap. Now +you’re going to take one. Sleep will be good medicine for you, too. We +don’t want two sick ones on our hands.” + +Jack didn’t protest, but also turned in beside Frank, and in a few +minutes was sound asleep. As Bob had said, overworked Nature claimed her +dues. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV.—A REVELATION. + + +This time Bob did not go to sleep on the job, but at the first faint +indication that somnolence was stealing upon him, arose and stamped +about vigorously. Once, prompted by a humane inclination, he paused by +the three prisoners who lay in the shade, hands and feet tied, and +proffered them a drink of water. The courtesy and thoughtfulness was +totally unexpected, as Bob could see by the surprise in their eyes, +although no words were exchanged, and they drank eagerly in great gulps. +The half-breed whom Bob had pitched over his head was in considerable +pain because of his wrenched arm, as Bob could see from his occasional +writhings, and Bob decided to chance trouble by loosening his bonds. In +addition, he rummaged their stores and brought out a bottle of liniment +for sprains and bruises, with which he bathed the twisted member. + +“You good man,” whispered the other, gazing at him, as Bob bent to the +task, and speaking in a voice barely audible to Bob’s ears, and +certainly not to the other two men a short distance away. “I tell you +something—not now—bimeby—when they not know.” + +Bob thought quickly. + +“All right,” he responded, in the same low tone. “I’ll fix it.” + +“Yes.” The other nodded. “You fix it.” + +“Now what in the world has he got to tell me?” Bob asked himself, as he +moved away. “Probably, something about Lupo the Wolf. At any rate, I +can’t see what else it can be. Was grateful because I gentled him a +little—after first maltreating him.” He smiled at the irony of this +thought. “Well, Mr. Hampton will soon be here, no doubt. Then there will +be a chance to question him apart from his fellows.” + +And with that, he dismissed the matter from his mind. Jack now rolled +over, sat up and came out from under the tent, yawning. Frank continued +sunk in heavy slumber. + +“By George,” said Bob, looking at his watch, “two hours since you +started to take your nap. Run down to the shore, will you, and take a +look to see if there is any sign of your father. We left these fellows +alone once”—nodding to their prisoners—“but I felt it wasn’t wise to try +it too often. Something might happen. So I’ve been sticking close to +camp.” + +Jack nodded. + +“Yes, that time you were fishing. It was foolish for me to run down +after you, but I just had to tell you about hearing from Father.” + +He set out for the shore. + +A few minutes later, Bob heard his comrade give a joyful shout. It was +answered by a fainter hail from the water. Faint though it was, however, +it was unmistakable. Mr. Hampton was approaching. + +Presently there was a babble of voices approaching, and the returning +party came into view, Jack in the lead flanked by his father and Farnum, +with MacDonald, Dick and Art bringing up the rear. Jack was eagerly +explaining what had occurred at camp since his father’s departure. + +“Hello, Bob,” said Mr. Hampton, coming up, and gripping the big fellow’s +hand hard. “Had some excitement while we were gone?” + +“Yes, we did, Mr. Hampton. Thought this was going to be a loafing +assignment you left us on—nothing to do but hang around camp and swim +and fish—and the minute you turn your backs something happens.” + +“How’s Frank?” + +“Jack told you, did he?” + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +“He’s still asleep,” said Bob. “The necessity of shooting to kill was a +shock to his nerves. Nature took him in hand. See.” He indicated where +Frank lay as in a stupor in the tent, unmoved by the arrival of the +returning party. + +“He’ll sleep for hours yet,” said Mr. Hampton, “if we don’t make too +much noise. I’ll caution the others. Best medicine in the world for him. +He’ll be all right when he wakes, I expect.” + +While Dick put on the fish, for all were hungry, Bob and Jack, in +lowered voices, told the others all that had occurred. Bob repeated his +condemnation of himself for having fallen asleep and permitted the enemy +to land unopposed, but Mr. Hampton rested a hand on his shoulder, and +told him not to be foolish. + +“In the first place,” he said, “there seemed to be no reason why you +should keep strict watch. It hardly seemed likely these fellows would +boldly approach the island.” + +“Expect they saw us set out, after all,” suggested MacDonald, “and +figured the whole party hadn’t gone, and that them left behind would be +on ’tother side of the island, so’s they could land and surprise ’em.” + +Nods of agreement followed this statement. It was, indeed, the most +likely explanation. Over the puzzle as to why Bob had not been slain by +those attacking him, but who, instead, had tried merely to make him +prisoner, nobody had any suggestion to offer other than that earlier +advanced by the boys themselves, that they enemy wished to take them +alive. + +“Reckon Lupo thought he’d get some information from you,” said +MacDonald. + +“But he wasn’t here,” Bob protested. + +“No, but you can bet they were actin’ on his orders.” + +Bob bethought him of the prisoner, who had whispered that he had +something to tell him. He explained to the others. Mr. Hampton thought +for a moment. + +“I have it,” he said. “Art, bring the others here and we’ll question +them. At the same time, Bob, do you slip off and talk to your man. We’ll +keep the pair occupied, so that they won’t be able to see. Tell your man +that presently, then, we’ll call him up to be questioned, too, and that +he’s to pretend sullen obstinacy and refuse—in the presence of his +comrades—to answer any questions.” + +Bob nodded and, as Art went for the pair, he slipped away in an opposite +direction. Executing a flank movement through the trees, he presently +arrived on the opposite side of the camp and got behind the tree, +against which the man with the wrenched shoulder was sitting. In a rapid +whisper he communicated Mr. Hampton’s instructions to the other. The +fellow comprehended, and then in a low tone, scarcely audible to Bob, +who strained to hear, communicated surprising intelligence. + +Bob heard him out, then with a final word of caution, again slipped +away, once more skirted camp through the trees, and approached the group +from the waterside. The two other half-breeds were being grilled, but +without success. At Bob’s approach, Mr. Hampton turned again to Art. + +“Bring that other fellow here,” he commanded. “See if he knows any more +than these men.” + +The man was brought into the council, but, acting on instructions, +maintained an obstinate silence. + +“Oh, take them away, and feed them,” said Mr. Hampton finally, as if +despairing of obtaining any information. “We’ll talk to them later, +after I’ve eaten. Dick’s fish will get cold if we don’t fall to, and I’m +too hungry to delay with these rascals.” + +The men, whose ankle bonds had been removed, were returned to the other +side of the camp and, with their hands untied, were permitted to eat +under the watchful eyes of Dick and Art. Then once more they were tied +up. + +Meantime, Mr. Hampton turned eagerly to Bob, as soon as the trio of +prisoners was out of hearing. + +“Out with it, Bob,” he said. “I can see you’re dying to tell us. Must be +important.” + +“It is,” said Bob, emphatically. + +“What did he say?” + +“Mr. Hampton, you think we’re alone in this wilderness except for Lupo’s +gang?” + +“I don’t know who else would be here. This is country that white men +never get into.” + +“Well, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and three followers of their party of ten +are not more than two hundred miles away; perhaps less than that.” + +“What! Say that again.” + +Mr. Hampton was so excited he almost dropped his portion of fish into +the fire. + +“It’s true,” said Bob. “At least that’s what this fellow, Long Tom, +declares. Long Tom—that’s his name.” + +“How does he know?” + +It was MacDonald who asked the question, and Bob turned to him. + +“That’s what I asked him. He said Thorwaldsson had been attacked before +he reached the oil country, and Thorwaldsson, Farrell and four of his +men cut off from their camp. Those in the camp were killed, and +Thorwaldsson’s supplies looted. He says a big band of Indians committed +the outrage.” + +“At whose orders?” asked Mr. Hampton. + +“Merely operating on their own, says Long Tom. He was with them. They +wanted the loot. What they didn’t understand, they destroyed.” + +“That’s why nothing has been heard of Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton, +“for his radio equipment must have been among ‘the things they didn’t +understand.’ Go on, Bob.” + +“Long Tom thinks Thorwaldsson spent the Winter with the Eskimos up on +the rim of the Arctic Ocean.” + +“Where has he been? What became of the Indians?” + +“They were a hunting party, as far as I could gather, who, after chasing +Thorwaldsson up to the Eskimos, left the country. But Long Tom wintered +with some Eskimos near Union Straits himself, and this Spring started +out. Then he fell in with Lupo, who he knew, and joined him.” + +“And how does he know where Thorwaldsson is now? Why does he say +Thorwaldsson is so close?” + +“Says he ran across an Eskimo hunter on his way out, who told of +Thorwaldsson having wintered with his tribe, and learned Thorwaldsson +was on his way out down the Coppermine—or up it, whichever you choose to +call it. Though that was weeks ago, he believes Thorwaldsson would be +following watercourses that would put him about one hundred and fifty or +two hundred miles to the northeast of us.” + +“Well, Bob, you certainly learned a lot,” said Mr. Hampton. “Was that +everything? Or did Long Tom know or have anything to say about Lupo?” + +“He doesn’t know why Lupo is after us, except that it has something to +do with Thorwaldsson. That’s all I could get out of him. Pretty +indefinite, but it was the best I could do.” + +“Indefinite! Nonsense, Bob. That is something to go on, indeed.” + +“And to think that old Bob got it all just because he was kind to a +fellow with a sore arm and put some liniment on it,” said Jack. + + + + +CHAPTER XV.—MACDONALD TURNS BACK. + + +Taking everything into consideration, Mr. Hampton decided that before +any further steps were taken, the wisest plan would be for all to get a +good rest. Frank still lay as if in a stupor; Jack looked and confessed +to being shaky; even Bob was tired from the strain of the terrific fight +through which he had gone, coming upon the top of many hours of +exhausting travel. As for the rest, they had done practically three +days’ work with little or no rest in the short interval between. + +“Altogether,” said Mr. Hampton, summing up, “we are in no fit condition +to set out in immediate pursuit of Lupo and the remainder of his men, +nor even to decide wisely as to what to do. It may be that the best plan +would be not to pursue Lupo but to set off at once to try and find +Thorwaldsson. I, for one, am too tired even to think straight. So I vote +that we make camp, set watches and turn in for a good rest. I believe I +could sleep the clock around.” + +“If you think you can trust me with the first watch, Mr. Hampton,” +muttered Bob, shamefacedly, “I’d like to have it. I’ll promise you not +to go to sleep on the job again.” + +Mr. Hampton slapped the big fellow on the back in kindly fashion, as Bob +leaned forward, seated on the ground beside him. + +“Forget it, Bob,” he said. “You have nothing with which to reproach +yourself. Certainly you can have the first watch, if you want it. I +expect the rest of us will be only too glad of the opportunity to turn +in at once. As to there being any further danger, however, I very much +doubt it. You boys have given Lupo a terrible blow. With four men killed +and three prisoners, he must be short-handed. If he had only twelve or +fourteen, as we believe, his number now is less than ours. The +consequence is, that I cannot conceive of his attempting again to attack +us here on the island. However, a watch must be kept, so go to it.” + +Everybody agreeing with this program, Bob took the first watch and the +rest scattered around the camp, under the spruces, and soon were +sleeping soundly. When the time to change watches came, with nothing +alarming having broken the calm, Bob waked MacDonald, and himself turned +in. After that, he did not have even a disturbing dream and was +disturbed by nothing until awakened by being shaken. He looked up and +found Frank bending above him, his face alight with merriment. + +“Hey, which of the Seven Sleepers are you?” demanded Frank. + +Bob ignored the query, his mind leaping at once to the picture of Frank +as he had last seen him. In his voice was a note of thankfulness at +finding Frank thus carefree, as he said: + +“How do you feel, old man?” + +“Never better,” confessed Frank. “Sleep is certainly the right medicine, +isn’t it?” + +“Don’t I know it!” + +Bob yawned luxuriously, and rubbed his eyes. + +“Come on, Bob, let’s take a plunge in the channel. Just got up myself. +It’ll wake us up, make us feel good. Everybody’s up now, and Dick fixing +to get breakfast. He and Art and MacDonald are fishing. Mr. Hampton and +Farnum are talking things over. And here comes Jack, just piled out of +the feathers, too. The three of us can have a fine swim.” + +Bob was agreeable to this proposition, and they set out for the place +where Frank and Jack had gone in for a plunge before. Without referring +to the tragic little mound beneath which lay the bodies of the four +half-breeds shot down by Frank and Jack, the boys, as if by common +consent, lay their course through the trees so as to avoid passing near +it. + +The water, as Frank had predicted, was delightfully invigorating, and +refreshed and with the young blood tingling in their veins, after a long +sleep and a good swim, they returned to camp. They brought voracious +appetites with them, but fortunately the fishermen had pulled in a big +haul of beauties, and these, together with flapjacks made by that +skillful chef, Art, and washed down with coffee tasting like none ever +made in city restaurants, the whole having the tang of the outdoors and +woodland smoke for sauce, made a delectable repast. + +“Now,” said Mr. Hampton, at its conclusion, “now for a discussion of +what’s to be done.” + +Thereupon he set forth the facts of the situation. Lupo with five or six +men at most was still at large. He might have turned back. He might be +in hiding nearby. He might have gone on ahead in search of Thorwaldsson. +In any case, Mr. Hampton declared, he felt it would be a waste of time +to search for him in view of the fact that they had learned Thorwaldsson +was somewhere to the north and east and their primary object was to join +forces with that explorer. He wanted to know what the others had to say. + +Farnum, who had been talking matters over with Mr. Hampton, sat silent, +nodding approval. The other was stating his own views. But MacDonald +voiced a protest. + +“From your point of view, sir,” he said, “I reckon you’re right. But am +I to let Lupo escape now that I come so close to gettin’ him? And what +am I to do with three prisoners on my hands?” + +“I’ve been turning that phase of the situation over and over,” said Mr. +Hampton. “I cannot see that we can afford to diverge in pursuit of Lupo, +now that we have pretty definite information through that fellow, Long +Tom, of Thorwaldsson’s presence alive and with some of his men in this +wilderness. I know what a blow it will be to you to give up the chase, +but it can’t be helped. You have three prisoners, and can’t very well +watch them and pursue Lupo, too. They are criminals, and as a member of +the Mounted you must take them in. We can’t leave you to handle them +alone, however, and——” + +He paused. + +“And what, sir,” prompted MacDonald. + +“Well, the least we can do, MacDonald, is to leave one of our number +with you. That will enable you to keep guard against surprise, watch +over your prisoners, and wait for the arrival of aid from your Post. +We’ll wireless your Captain Jameson full details of all that has +occurred, give him your position here, and then you can wait for +relief.” + +MacDonald looked thoughtful. He was silent several minutes, while none +spoke, but all watched him expectantly. + +“If you won’t help me try and round up Lupo, you won’t, and that’s all +there is to it,” he said, finally. “Not as I blame you, neither. You got +your job, to git hold of Thorwaldsson and help him. With only a handful +o’ men he may be in trouble, too. Seems natural-like, if whoever is agin +you fellows sent this cutthroat Lupo to cut you off, he’d likely be +after Thorwaldsson, too.” + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +“That’s what I’m afraid of,” he said, “that Thorwaldsson may need our +aid.” + +“Just so,” continued MacDonald. “Such bein’ the case, your best plan is +to try and find him soon as you can.” + +“Then you agree to my plan?” + +“Not so fast,” said MacDonald. “You’ll give me a man, hey?” + +“Yes.” + +“Who?” + +“Why—I——” + +“Give me this feller,” said MacDonald, laying a hand on Bob who sat +beside him. “He’s a fighter.” + +“I couldn’t do that, MacDonald. The boys must come with me.” + +“All right. Only that fight he put up—that was a good one. Kind o’ +wished I could have him by me. Well, then, let me have this feller. Kin +see he’s used to big woods and river country. He’d make a good Mounty.” + +This time MacDonald pointed the stem of his pipe at Dick. + +“What do you say, Dick?” asked Mr. Hampton. “It’s up to you?” + +“I’d have to go out with the Mounties to their Post, wouldn’t I? +Probably have to winter there.” + +MacDonald nodded. + +“Get you a job on the Force,” he said. + +Dick’s eyes shone. Middle-aged though he was, he was alone in life, +loved the wilderness, and still thrilled to adventure. + +“That so?” he asked. “Need men?” + +“Always room for a good one.” + +“All right. It’s a go,” said Dick. + +MacDonald nodded approval, spat in the fire, then turned again to Mr. +Hampton. + +“Such being the case,” he said, “when you talk to Captain Jameson over +that there contraption, just tell him I’m on my way in.” + +“What?” + +“Sure. Think Dick and me would sit here with three no-account breeds on +our hands and wait for help from four hundred miles away to arrive? No. +We’ll take ’em in.” + +“But two of you, alone, and with three prisoners on your hands!” + +“Nothing to that. Once I brought in four single-handed. Never thought of +calling for help except I had luck enough to capture Lupo and more of +his gang.” + +Mr. Hampton looked astounded. He turned to Dick. + +“But how about you, Dick?” + +“If MacDonald says so, I’m game.” + +“Knew you would be,” said MacDonald. “That’s settled. Now call Captain +Jameson, and let’s get goin’. You want to be on your way, and we may as +well be on ours.” + +“But, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton, trying one last protest, “suppose +Lupo and the remainder of his gang see you start, and follow and attack +you. What then?” + +“Huh.” MacDonald’s eyes snapped. “Couldn’t ask for no better luck. I’d +get a shot at him then.” + +Farnum interrupted at this stage. + +“It’s no use trying to stop him and Dick,” he said. “I know Dick and I +know these men of the Mounted. They’re holy terrors. And the pair of +them will get away with it, too.” + +Mr. Hampton knew when he was beaten, and abandoned his protests. Captain +Jameson once more was called by wireless, and given a full account of +what had occurred. He approved MacDonald’s scheme and promised there +would be a position on the Force for Dick when he arrived. + +“Well, Dick,” said Mr. Hampton, after all arrangements were made for +departure, and he led him aside, “I’ve been pleased, indeed, with your +ready help and cheerfulness on the trip. I hate to part company with +you. Here is a check for the full sum I promised you for this Summer’s +work. And here in addition is something to remember me by.” + +Into Dick’s unwilling hand he pressed a handsome gold watch which he +himself had worn for some years. + +“Oh, Mr. Hampton, this is too good for a rough fellow like me to carry,” +protested Dick. + +“Now, now, nonsense,” said Mr. Hampton. “Nothing is too good for you, +old man. I want you to keep that to remember me by.” + +“I don’t need the watch for that, sir,” said Dick gruffly, sticking it +in his pocket nevertheless. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI.—REINDEER SIGHTED. + + +The big canoe which Dick and Art had captured from the Indians was +turned over to MacDonald. It was easily capable of transporting five—the +three prisoners, MacDonald and Dick. With the two latter in the bow and +stern respectively, and the prisoners unarmed between, there was little +danger so long as MacDonald and Dick maintained reasonable watchfulness. +Two of the half-breeds were cowed and broken in spirit, moreover, while +Long Tom was _hors de combat_ on account of the injury to his arm, and +would be for some time to come. MacDonald’s skin kayak was to be towed +behind, containing his slender outfit, and one of the prisoners could +carry the whole business alone at portages. + +MacDonald had entered the lake by a considerable stream flowing into it +from the southwest, and not the stream down which the Hampton party had +come. He set out for this other stream before the others quit the +island, with the intention of retracing his steps into the wilderness in +large measure. This would facilitate his travel. Farther to the south, +he said, was a large river which could be reached by a ten-mile portage, +and down which they could travel for many miles. + +“If you ever want to join the Mounted,” he said to Bob, to whom he had +taken a great fancy, “let me know. I’ll fix it for you.” + +Bob laughed, but he was young enough to be flattered by the sincere +compliment. + +“I may take you up on that some day,” he said. “Who knows?” + +Then MacDonald stepped into the canoe, goodbyes were said, and the craft +shot away. + +“There go a couple of good men,” commented Farnum, as under the powerful +strokes of the paddles the canoe drew swiftly down the lake. + +“One good man, anyhow,” said Art, who overheard the observation. “Ol’ +Dick an’ me had a li’l talk. I’m going to join up with the Mounted, too, +when we git back. We been pals fifteen year.” + +“Fifteen years,” exclaimed Frank. “In the wilderness all that time?” + +Art nodded absently, his eyes on the retreating canoe. + +“Sure,” said Art. “It’s home to us. Ain’t no wilderness. Cities is the +real wilderness. Dick an’ me’s been separated now and then, like now, +but we always come together agin. I expect when we git to be old men +like some prospectors I seen we’ll be together all the time, fightin’ +and jawin’ each other, but ready to tear the heart out o’ anybody that +jumps one of us.” + +“It’s a wonder Dick went off with MacDonald like he did, in that case,” +said Jack. + +“Huh. Somebody had to go. He knew we’d meet agin.” + +Art said no more, but turned away to busy himself with the outfit. + +Presently everything was in readiness for departure and then the two +remaining canoes, with the outfit distributed between them, the three +boys in one and the three men in the other, started up the lake in the +opposite direction from that taken by MacDonald and Dick. Previously, +when in pursuit of Lupo, Mr. Hampton had discovered the lake was of so +considerable extent that, despite their hours of travel up the side, +they had been unable to discern the farther end. In fact, the lake +broadened out considerably some distance beyond the island. It was his +intention, inasmuch as it followed the general northeastward direction +they would pursue, to stick to it as long as possible. He believed there +would be some stream at the farther end sufficiently large to float +their canoes. + +In this he was not mistaken, for after four hours of steady paddling, +they discerned the outlet of a stream of considerable width, quartered +across the lake and entered it. Almost immediately Jack called to his +father, in surprise: + +“Dad! Oh, Dad! This stream flows out of the lake; not into it. Do you +notice?” + +The leading canoe slowed up while the boys approached. + +“It certainly does, Jack,” said his father. “What do you make of it, +Farnum?” + +The latter shook his head, puzzled. + +“I don’t know,” he said. “You must remember this is unexplored country. +We’re liable to find anything here. But, maybe——” + +“What?” + +“I don’t know. We’re near the Coppermine, aren’t we, Art?” + +“Figure we must be.” + +“Maybe this stream flows into the Coppermine.” + +“I’ll bet that’s it,” Art approved. “The waters of that lake empty into +the Coppermine. Yes, sir; I’ll bet that’s what it is. Well, that makes +travel easy for awhile, anyhow.” + +Two days of travel, unbroken by any but routine incidents such as the +occasional shooting of wild duck Or geese, brought the party at camping +time at the end of the second day to a pleasant, open, grassy prairie +between two low-wooded hills. Here it was decided to make camp. + +After the evening meal was over, and while Mr. Hampton, who was feeling +out of sorts, retired to his little tent to try and sleep without taking +part in the usual desultory conversation about the fire—which was kept +going for the companionship and cheer it imparted and not from any need +of warmth you may be sure—Jack arose and stretched. + +“My legs are stiff from that position in the canoe all day,” he said. “I +want to stretch them a bit. Who’ll come with me to the top of that +nearest hill? The sun is pretty low, but we ought to get a considerable +view.” + +Bob and Frank both volunteered to accompany him. Farnum sat, smoking his +pipe and staring into the fire absently. He didn’t care to go. But Art +arose and joined the party. It was not far to the top of the hill, +although a stiff climb through the trees and brush. The crest, however, +was bare of timber. + +Frank, who lighter than the others, was first to reach the top, stood +struck with amazement. He turned to beckon the others forward with one +hand, while laying the other over his mouth in a gesture enjoining +silence. + +“For the love o’ Pete,” whispered Art, eyes bulging, as he stood beside +Frank and peered down into the grassy vale beyond, half overgrown with +young willows. + +“Are they caribou?” asked Jack, low-voiced. “They don’t look like the +caribou we’ve run across along the streams.” + +“They ain’t, neither,” said Art. “They’re reindeer.” + +“Must be Santy Claus’s,” chuckled Bob. “Always did believe there was +something to that story about the old boy living up here near the North +Pole, even though people insisted on calling it a fairy tale. Now I +know.” + +His joke was ignored, however, as Art continued: + +“Yes, sir, reindeer. Caribou are always brown. Some o’ these are white, +some brown, and some spotted. Then they ain’t the size o’ caribou. +Besides, I know they’re reindeer. I see ’em often enough in Alaska to +know.” + +“Alaska? Do these reindeer come from there?” + +Art nodded. + +“Look at ’em. They’re tame. Must’a winded us, but that don’t scare ’em +none. They’re used to humans. No more scared o’ bein’ hunted than cattle +are back in the States.” + +“Tame?” queried Frank. “What do you mean?” + +“Why, the Eskimos in Alaska, not the wild one, of this Far North, but +the regular ones that come in touch with the white man, they keep herds +o’ reindeer just like a farmer in the States keeps cows. Look at ’em. +Must be two-three hundred there right now. They’re eight-ten hundred +miles from home, too. Must ’a wandered away. Bet you there’s a desprit +Eskimo lookin’ for ’em right now.” + +Jack looked thoughtful. + +“What a shame for a man to lose a big herd like that,” he said. + +“Yes, sir,” affirmed Art emphatically. “Must be six-seven thousand +dollars worth o’ tame reindeer there. Pretty tough.” + +“We can’t do anything about it, though,” said Bob. + +“Seems a pity-like we can’t ride herd on ’em till some Eskimo shows up +to claim ’em,” said Art. “But it can’t be done. Yore father, Jack, is +all for pushin’ on fast as we kin.” + +After some further discussion, the party retraced its steps, with Art +explaining to the boys the big difference existing between the +semi-civilized Eskimos of Alaska and the little that was known of the +wild Eskimos of the Arctic. + +“Folks think Alaska’s right up next to the North Pole,” he said. +“Leastways folks in the States do. People comin’ to Nome from the States +every so often give me that knowledge. But they’re shore mistaken. +Alaska’s great country that’ll be settled up some day. Shore, we got +hard Winters. But boys, in the Summer, with the sun a-shinin’ all the +time, everything grows just three times as fast as in the States. My Pap +was a farmer back in York State, an’ I was raised on a farm. We had hard +scratchin’ an’ our Winters was long an’ hard, too. An’ we didn’t have +Summers like in Alaska to make up for ’em. I’ll bet if my Pap were +livin’ today an’ farmin’ in Alaska he’d find life a lot easier than what +we had it on the old farm.” + +“But why don’t more people live in Alaska, then?” asked Frank. + +“Oh, I don’t know. Hard to get to, for one thing. Ain’t developed up +with railroads, neither. Some day, though, you’ll see ’em forced to come +here, the way they’re a-crowdin’ up down in the States. Why, we got only +60,000 people in all Alaska, yet she’s quarter as big as the States an’ +could darn near feed the whole push herself, if she was put to it and +farmed right.” + +“Art, why don’t you go to farming? I’d think that would be the thing for +you to do.” + +“Mebbe I will some day,” said Art. “But I’m an old batch. Got no wife, +an’ kind o’ like to feel free to knock around instead o’ bein’ tied to +one place.” + +It was a feeling with which the boys could sympathize. They were young, +with life ahead of them, and they wanted to see the world. In fact they +had seen a good deal of it already, as those who have followed them +through their various adventures, know. Of this they spoke as they made +their way back to camp, where they discovered Farnum ready to turn in, +and merely awaiting their return before doing so. Since their first +encounter with Lupo, and their discovery that they were not alone in the +wilderness, a watch was always kept, and Farnum had combatted sleepiness +in order to keep guard until their return. + +“Art, you’ve got the first watch,” he said, when they appeared. “The +rest of you better turn in, and not sit up talking. With luck we ought +to make the Coppermine tomorrow, I figure, and then we’ll do some +traveling. We’ve got to hit a fast pace from now on, for already we are +having real twilight, and pretty soon we’ll be having short nights while +the sun dips entirely below the horizon. That means the season is +growing short, and we have not got much time left before we’ll have to +start for the outside.” + +Jack and Bob heeded the injunction and followed Farnum’s example +shortly, but Frank, who did not feel sleepy and, moreover, loved to +talk, sat up a considerable time gossiping with Art and telling him of +some of their previous adventures. + +Suddenly, as he talked along, low-voiced so as not disturb the nearby +sleepers, Frank noticed Art was not paying attention, and stopped. + +“Oh, well,” he said, half petulantly, “if I’m boring you——” + +Art leaned close, and laid a hand on his arm. + +“Sorry, Frank,” he said, in a whisper, “but I was a-listenin.’ I got a +strange feelin’ like as if somebody had his eyes on the back a’ my head. +I wasn’t payin’ no attention to you but a-listenin’ to see if I could +hear anything.” + +He was so intense that he communicated some of his trepidation to Frank. +Instinctively, the latter reached for his rifle as Art half stood up to +peer at their twilit surroundings. They were camped in a tiny grove of a +half dozen spruces, like an islet in a midst of long, matted grass. + +As Art stood up, a single shot rang out, shattering the stillness. He +threw himself prone, dragging Frank down with him. Then a fusillade was +poured in on them, seemingly from all sides. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII.—SURPRISED. + + +“Watch my back, Frank. Keep low behind that nearest tree and let ’em +have it. They’re in that long grass.” + +As he spoke Art, worming his way rapidly forward to a position behind +the trunk of one of the spruces, began firing rapidly. + +Frank, in the opposite direction, fired several shots into the long +grass. He had an uncanny feeling, for he could see no forms at which to +fire, and the preliminary volley poured into the camp was not repeated, +so he had no index as to the enemy positions. + +Jack, Bob and Farnum, rolled over, awakened by the shots, but Frank +called fiercely: “Keep down.” + +Realizing something of the situation, the three grabbed their rifles, +laying by their sides, and, keeping down, prepared to fire as soon as +they could see something at which to aim. + +Mr. Hampton stirred in his tent a moment later. He had been sleeping +hard, and had not awakened instantly as had the others. Moreover, a dull +ache gripped his head, preventing him from thinking clearly and from +comprehending instantly what was occurring. He lay a moment, wondering +what had awakened him. All was still outside, for Frank and Art had +ceased firing to await some sign from the unseen enemy. Mr. Hampton +decided to peer out and investigate what had disturbed him. He crawled +from his dog tent and stood up. + +At his appearance, a ragged volley burst once more from the long grass +surrounding the tiny grove, for his figure stood forth clearly and made +an excellent target. Spinning about, Mr. Hampton fell heavily to the +ground. + +A wild yell of triumph went up at this indication that the leader had +been hit. Jack leaped up regardless of consequences and ran to his +father, dragging him into the tent, while bullets whipped around him. +Bob ran to his assistance. To the hidden enemy it must have seemed as if +their opponents were demoralized. At any rate, they grew more +courageous, and started a rush. + +From three sides, it came, the figures of the oncoming men only +partially seen as they crouched low and darted through the grass. But +the long stems waving above them marked their paths, and there were +three still on watch who would have to be dealt with. + +Frank, Art and Farnum marked where the waving grass indicated the enemy. +Each guarded a side of the little grove. On the fourth side lay the +stream. + +“Wait’ll they’re close, fellows, then give it to ’em,” cautioned Farnum. +“Ready. Let’s go.” + +The three repeating rifles spoke as one, and from the long grass came +howls and shrieks of pain and terror. What followed was brief but +lively. Each of the three pumped his rifle as fast as possible, and the +bullets poured into the grass almost as fast as if sprayed from the +throat of a machine gun. The return fire was heavy but high, whipping +through the branches of the spruce trees overhead. + +Reinforcements added to the strength of the defenders, for Bob darted +out of the tent, crouched over, and flung himself beside Frank, +beginning to shoot even as he talked. + +“Mr. Hampton escaped by a miracle,” he said. “Bullet creased his head +and stunted him. He’ll be all right.” + +The rush was broken. Whoever was in the grass, feared to advance farther +in the face of that fire. The long grass ceased to wave, indicating the +attackers had come to a halt. But they did not retreat. The menace was +still there. + +“Anybody hit?” Farnum called out. + +“Not me,” said Art. + +“Nor me,” answered Frank. + +“Thank our lucky stars for that,” answered Farnum. + +They all lay in a semi-circle, facing different directions, but close +enough to each other to make communication in ordinary tones possible. +Relieved to discover that all were untouched, despite the bullets that +had rained on the camp, Farnum next inquired anxiously after Mr. +Hampton, and Bob answered he had been only stunned. + +“I reckon these fellows are Lupo and his gang,” Farnum remarked. “But he +must have had more men than we expected, or he wouldn’t be attacking us +like this.” + +“What’ll we do?” growled Art. “Looks like they got us penned in.” + +“Oh, but we stopped their rush,” protested Frank. + +“Yes,” said Art, “but they ain’t beatin’ it as I can see. An’ when we +want to up an’ leave camp, what’s goin’ to happen?” + +Frank was about to reply, when Bob who was beside him, pointed with his +rifle toward the gap between the two hills, from the top of one of which +they earlier had seen the reindeer herd in the next valley. + +“Look there, Frank,” he exclaimed excitedly. “What do you make of that?” + +“Where? I don’t——Oh, yes; now I see. Something moving.” + +“Sure is something moving,” Bob said. + +Already the short twilight was beginning to lighten, as the sun after +its dip to the edge of the northern horizon now swung higher. + +“Bob.” + +“What?” + +“I believe that’s the reindeer herd.” + +“From that valley over the hill? The reindeer we saw when we were up +there on the hill top?” + +“Yes, sir.” + +“But how in the world?” + +“Why, I noticed that the other valley swung around between those two +little hills. The reindeer are just grazing along, hunting new pasture. +And, say, Bob!” + +“Well, what now?” + +“I’ve got a bully idea.” + +Abruptly, Frank wormed his way around to face Art on his right, who was +keeping watch against surprise on his side of the little clump of trees +sheltering them. + +“Art,” said he, “look over there, between those two little hills. Are +those reindeer? The reindeer we saw from the hilltop?” + +“Reckon so,” said Art, after a critical inspection. + +“Well, Art, can reindeer be stampeded? Like cattle, I mean.” + +“Reckon so. Why?” + +“Well, I’m going to try it,” Frank declared in a determined tone. Still +prone, he began to wriggle out of his clothes, and pulling up his legs, +to unlace his boots and kick them off. + +“Are you crazy, Frank?” Bob demanded, puzzled, while Art and Farnum took +their eyes from the coverts ahead to look at Frank in astonishment. + +“Crazy? No more than usual,” Frank replied, as he completed disrobing, +and now lay naked under the spreading branches of the spruce. “But I’m +going to slip into the water and float down to that hill, then get in +behind the reindeer and stampede them. You see what’ll happen then, +don’t you?” + +Bob stared at his companion, wide-eyed. Dawning comprehension crept into +his eyes, and he began to smile. Then he chuckled. + +“You little hound,” he said, employing a pet expression among the boys, +denoting admiration. + +“But, say, what’s the idea?” demanded Art sharply, from his position +several yards away. + +Frank had started wriggling forward, and waited until he was close to +Art and Farnum before replying. Then he repeated his assertion that he +intended floating downstream until behind the slow-moving herd of +reindeer, when he would land and attempt to stampede them. + +“You see how it is,” he said. “You yourselves admit that we’re in a +tight place. Lupo’s forces have cover in that long grass, and can wait +us out. Here among the trees there is no grass to hide us. The minute we +get up and start to move around, we expose ourselves. Therefore, the +best thing to do, is to drive them out of their cover, isn’t it?” + +“Sure,” said Art. “But how you going to do it with——” + +He was about to ask how Frank intended to drive their enemies from cover +by stampeding the reindeer, but Frank grinned at him, and he paused. +Dawning comprehension came into his eyes, too. + +“That’s it,” Frank said. “I see you get my idea.” + +He turned his gaze toward Farnum, farthest from the center, but who had +overheard the conversation. + +“You see, Mr. Farnum,” he said, “when the reindeer come dashing down, +Lupo’s men will have to run for it to get out of the way. A stampeding +herd isn’t anything to monkey with, I expect. Then you’ll have your +chance. But the reindeer won’t dash in among these few close-set trees, +so you’ll be safe. No, sir; as I figure it, they’ll just head right on +past here and try to get through the hills beyond.” + +Farnum’s glance approved. + +“A fine idea,” he said, but then he added in a tone of doubt: “I don’t +know as I ought to let you go, though. Mr. Hampton wouldn’t like it, +maybe, putting yourself into danger like that.” + +“Oh, nonsense,” said Frank. “I can slip unseen into the water. And I can +swim like a seal. Ask Bob.” + +And at once, to prevent any interruption of his plans, he resumed +worming his way to the bank of the river. + +The river ran at this point between six-foot banks, and the clump of +trees in which camp was situated stood so close to the water that the +roots of several projected through the soil of the land. Frank had +little difficulty in getting down to the water, and felt sure that he +accomplished the feat unseen by the enemy. He let himself into the +stream, which was of sufficient depth right up to the bank to enable him +to float downstream under the protection of the high bank, without the +necessity of wading out to get to deeper water. + +“For God’s sake, be careful, boy,” whispered Farnum, as Frank +disappeared. + +Frank was naked, and unarmed except for a long knife. He had not figured +out how he would set about stampeding the reindeer. He was leaving that +to chance. What concerned him now was to get to a position behind the +herd without discovery. He stuck close inshore, floating, his eyes +roving along the edge of the bluff above him for signs of the enemy. + +None was to be seen. After all, he thought, it was hardly likely that +any of the enemy lay in hiding here, as none of the shots fired at them +had come from so close to the river. On the contrary, the enemy lay +inland, showing they had come upon the camp from the landward side. +Becoming bolder, therefore, he turned over and struck out, swimming +strongly, the long knife in a sheath at his belt. He felt for it several +times, to reassure himself it was there and had not fallen out. + +Frank was a strong swimmer. Indeed, this was the one athletic sport at +which he excelled both Bob and Jack, although they, too, were excellent +swimmers. It did not take him long, therefore, aided by the current, to +come abreast of the trees clothing the first of the two hills between +which the reindeer had entered their valley. The hill sloped abruptly +down to the water, and Frank had marked from camp how trees clothed it +entirely, even dipping into the stream. When he had passed, as he +believed, beyond a point at which there was any possibility of his being +seen, he seized a branch of a willow tree and pulled himself ashore. +Then, after climbing a short distance up the hill, he began working his +way around it through the trees. Presently he was on the hillside facing +the valley where were his friends in the distant clump of trees, and the +enemy hidden in the long grass. The reindeer had not moved far. They +were only a short distance from him, and Frank hurried forward at the +best pace he could command. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII.—THE STAMPEDE. + + +For the first time since starting on his wild project, a doubt as to its +success entered Frank’s mind. But he put it resolutely aside as he sped +forward, crouching, sliding under the low branches, determined to make +the best speed possible. His companions were in a ticklish situation. He +wanted to do what he could to relieve them as soon as possible. As to +his own danger, he gave it not a thought. + +What worried Frank was the possibility that he would be unable to +stampede the reindeer herd. This was the thought which he put aside. But +it kept recurring. And when he had come into position behind the herd, +and saw them feeding quietly below him, not a stone’s throw away, at the +foot of the hill, where the trees ended abruptly and the grassy plain +began, he was still without an idea as to what to do. + +Originally, he had thought that stoning the herd might set them into +motion and stampede them forward. But doubt as to the workability of +that method had seized him as he first climbed from the water and, from +among the trees, obtained his first view of the herd. The animals, +grazing quietly, were so well spread out that he feared stoning them +would not alarm them sufficiently to start a stampede. + +“Well, here goes for a try, anyway,” he muttered to himself. + +Fortunately, there were numerous pieces of rock lying about. Collecting +a heap of these, he began pelting away at the nearest reindeer, a brown +and white spotted cow. His aim was good, and the startled animal, struck +on the flank, snorted, tossed her head and gave a little jump. She went +forward only a step or two, however, and then settled down to grazing +again. + +Once more Frank let fly, and this time the stone caught her on the side +of the neck. She tossed her head angrily, and sidled forward again. The +movement brought her sharply into contact with another cow, and for a +moment Frank was filled with hope that the pair would start fighting and +alarm the rest of the herd. He was disappointed. The first cow sheered +away from the other, and both resumed grazing. + +What should he do now? Frank was perplexed. He had already considered +the possibility of startling the reindeer by shouting at them, but had +given up that idea because it would apprise the hidden enemy in the +grass ahead of his presence. He wanted them to know nothing of the +menace in their rear until the stampeded herd should sweep down upon +them. + +“I wonder——” he said, muttering the words for the comfort of hearing his +own voice. + +Then he fell silent, thinking. Art had said they were tame reindeer, +accustomed to the presence of man. Yes, but of man clothed and in his +natural state. And of Eskimos at that—men dressed a good deal +differently from the way in which he ordinarily clothed himself. What +would those reindeer think if they saw a naked, white body dash down +upon them suddenly? + +“I’ll do it,” he said. “That’s the only way. And it will work, too, I’ll +bet.” + +Drawing his long knife from the sheath, he looked around and selected a +tough branch the thickness of his thumb. This he cut off, stripped from +it the projecting twigs, and made of it a long, pliant whip. + +Whip in one hand, knife in the other, eyes gleaming and determined, +Frank made his way to the edge of the trees, and then stole out into the +long grass, crouching low. He did not want the reindeer to see him until +he was upon them, and as they were grazing away from him, this was not +so difficult. In fact, he was within several yards of a clump of cows +before one swung about and looked at him. + +The minute that occurred, Frank realized there was no longer any +possibility of concealment, and that the time had come to strike. And +strike he did. Jumping to his feet, he bounded forward, swinging his +whip so that it sank through the air. + +Bringing the whip down with a cruel lash on the flank of the nearest +reindeer, Frank swung it around on all sides. Every swing landed. The +swish as the pliant green wood struck the animals reminded him oddly of +the sound of a stick beating rugs at home. Many a time he had heard that +same thud-thud from behind his house. + +Not a sound did he make as he lashed about him, for he felt that if no +sound indicating that he was human came from him, the consternation of +the reindeer would be increased. + +And that he had not miscalculated became at once apparent, for the +reindeer near him lifted up their sharp little hooves and sprang to get +out of the vicinity of this strange animal with the lash. Naturally, to +escape him, there was only one way for them to go, and that was forward, +so forward they went. Right into the main body of the herd they dashed, +with Frank prancing and bounding behind them, with each leap bringing +his whip down upon the flank of a laggard. + +Suddenly, one reindeer, nearer than the rest, dashed by so close on his +right as to brush Frank. He was not being charged. The animal was +panicky, and merely seeking to escape. But he had to leap nimbly aside +to avoid being bowled over. And as he leaped, the long knife clutched in +his hand pricked the animal’s flank. + +The reindeer screamed, a shrill, terror-stricken cry, and launched +itself forward like a thunderbolt into the midst of the disturbed herd. +That, apparently, was all that was needed to complete the impending +panic. Frank’s inexperienced eye could not have told the composition of +the herd, but Art, when they had first caught sight of the reindeer from +the hilltop, had pointed out the majority were cows, and the bucks +numbered only a handful. If any buck had a masculine curiosity to +discover what this strange white-skinned animal that looked so like and +yet so unlike a man was, he did not get the chance to gratify it. For +the now thoroughly frightened cows started forward in a rush that would +have overborne any animal foolish enough to try to stem it. + +And then Frank did what might have been considered a foolish thing. +Carried away by the enthusiasm engendered by seeing his plan to stampede +the herd work out successfully, he continued to bound along behind, at +first able to whip the bunched-up stragglers, but soon falling +hopelessly behind as the herd picked up speed and swept forward like the +wind. + +Straight toward the clump of trees sheltering Frank’s friends dashed the +reindeer. And an exultant throb filled his breast. For the hidden enemy +lay in the long grass between the herd and the trees, and inevitably, +therefore, the stampeding animals would drive them out. + +Regardless of the risk to himself, Frank continued on his way, running +as fast as the nature of the ground permitted. The herd beat the long +grass flat in its advance, as flat as if a great board had been pressed +down on all, and the going was easier than he had looked for. + +Suddenly a shot rang out, then another, and a little wisp of smoke +showed the young fellow the discharge came from the trees. His own +friends were shooting. At what? Again an exultant thrill swept over him. +He felt certain his friends were firing at the enemy, and that the +stampeding herd was driving the latter ahead of it, although because of +the presence of the animals between himself and the enemy he could not +see whether such was the case. + +That Frank’s surmise was correct, however, was soon borne out. For the +first shots fired from the trees were succeeded by a rapid rattle that +told him everybody was in action. + +Then followed a confused medley of shots interspersed with shouts and +cries, and Frank, pausing a moment to peer ahead and listen came to the +conclusion that the enemy was desperately shooting at the reindeer in an +effort to turn the herd aside. If that was the case, however, their +efforts were unsuccessful, for the animals filled with the unreasoning +spirit of panic did not swerve from their course. + +“By golly,” Frank exclaimed aloud, “I believe I can reach camp all +right.” + +And once more he began to run forward. For it seemed to him that the +herd, sweeping the enemy before it, would leave the ground free for him +to reach the clump of trees and rejoin his friends. + +On swept the herd, and on ran Frank in the beaten down grass behind it. +His eyes were strained towards the trees. He began to wave and shout, as +he came closer and made out the outline of Mr. Hampton’s tent. He paid +no attention to his surroundings. + +Then a form rose up from the long grass beside the swathe beaten down by +the reindeer, there was a shot, and Frank fell forward on his face, a +buzzing in his ears, and lost consciousness. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX.—LUPO’S END. + + +When next Frank opened his eyes, he lay on a blanket in camp and the +sight of Bob and Jack bending anxiously above him while Mr. Hampton and +Farnum worked at his shoulder greeted him. + +“Hello,” he said, trying to grin, but wincing as a sharp stab of pain +passed through his shoulder. + +“Don’t move, Frank, We’ll have you fixed up right in a minute,” said Mr. +Hampton soothingly. + +“Is it bad, Dad,” Jack anxiously inquired. + +“Just grazed the bone,” said Mr. Hampton, putting the finishing touches +to the bandage, and straightening up. “There, Frank, now you’ll be all +right.” + +“What happened to me?” asked Frank, struggling to a sitting position, +and finding his right arm bound across his chest. + +“Bullet through your shoulder brought you down,” said Mr. Hampton. “And +your head struck a rock hidden in the grass, so you were knocked out.” + +“Good enough,” said Frank, “but who shot me? I was dashing along, +yelling to attract your attention, and never knew what hit me.” + +“I guess you didn’t,” said Jack. “If it hadn’t been for Art, you might +have been finished. But he shot down the fellow that winged you.” + +“Yes, and your two pals ran out as if there wasn’t an enemy in sight and +carried you in,” said Art, as he saw Frank about to thank him. “Give +your gratitude to them.” + +Frank smiled. + +“I guess I owe it to you all,” he said. + +“You were foolish to follow the reindeer herd so closely, Frank,” said +Mr. Hampton, reprovingly. “Unarmed, too.” + +“Well, I was stampeding ’em, Mr. Hampton,” said Frank. “I couldn’t do +that, you know, without being there.” + +The older man shook his head. + +“If I had been myself, Frank, I wouldn’t have let you take that chance,” +he said. “No, Farnum,” he hastened to add, “I’m not criticizing you. +When these boys take it in their heads to do something it’s hard to head +them off. However, it all turned out for the best.” + +“Tell me about it,” Frank said. “How did my scheme work out?” + +“Couldn’t have been better, old thing,” said Bob. “Lupo’s men ran like +rabbits when those reindeer swept down on them. They tried a few shots +in an attempt to head them off, but seeing the uselessness of their +efforts, turned and ran. We gave them a few shots to help them on their +way. We counted nine.” + +“And they got away?” + +“All but the man Art shot,” said Jack. “The fellow who shot at you. And +you haven’t heard who he was.” + +Jack’s eyes were bright. Frank looked at him questioningly. + +“Not——” + +“Yes,” said Jack. “It was Lupo himself. Art wounded him in the chest. He +died before we could do anything for him. But Dad got some information +from him first.” + +He looked at his father. Mr. Hampton’s face was both grim and sad. + +“Yes, Frank,” he said. “We learned who set these men on us, and who +plotted against Thorwaldsson. But let us not discuss it now. It’s bad +business all the way through.” + +Mr. Hampton turned aside, taking Farnum with him, and the two fell into +a low-toned discussion. Bob and Jack, meanwhile, helped Frank to resume +his clothing which still lay where he had discarded it before taking to +the river. Art busied himself at packing up the camp equipment. + +Presently, the two older men called Art to them and, after a few words +of discussion, rejoined the boys. + +“Boys,” said Mr. Hampton, “we want your opinions on this, too.” + +“On what, Dad?” + +“Well, we saw nine men go bounding off away from the reindeer, and we +accounted for Lupo. That makes ten, and it doesn’t seem likely there +were more. Yet there is the bare possibility that out there in the grass +may be one or more badly wounded men, fellows whom we shot at one time +or another, who were too hard hit to escape. If there are any such, we +can’t go off and leave them there to die. I wouldn’t treat a dog like +that.” + +“They’re not dogs,” muttered Farnum, bitterly. “They’re wolves.” + +“Mr. Farnum considers we would be taking too great a risk,” Mr. Hampton +continued. “He says that if we go out to search for wounded, we are +likely to be shot for our pains.” + +“Oh, surely not by a wounded man whom you were going to help,” protested +Jack. + +“You don’t know them,” said Farnum. + +“Well, just the same,” said Jack, “I think Dad is right. It would be +shameful for us to go away without investigating.” + +“I’d feel like a murderer,” said Bob. “Shooting ’em down in a fight is +one thing. It was their lives or ours. But leaving a wounded man to die +in the wilderness is something entirely different.” + +Farnum made a gesture of surrender. + +“I guess I seem hard-hearted,” he said. “But you don’t know what I’ve +been through in the past. All right, we’ll make a search. But I warn you +to be on guard.” + +“Hardly likely after all that there are any wounded out there,” remarked +Frank, taking part in the discussion for the first time. “They must have +been in hiding right in the path of the reindeer, and you can’t see any +forms there now. If there were any too badly wounded to escape, they’d +also have been too badly wounded to drag themselves to the side.” + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +“The grass is so beaten down, too,” he said, “that if there were anybody +out there, we could see him. However, I cannot rest easy without making +a search. Now, you three boys remain in camp and keep watch. The rest of +us will take care of the search.” + +To this the boys made no objection. As a matter of fact, it was one time +that exclusion from activity did not irritate them. They had no stomach +for what they might discover. Frank and Jack, especially, thinking of +the terrible affair on the island in the lake, kept silence. Bob +protested, but more as a matter of form and because he considered +manliness demanded it, than otherwise. + +Mr. Hampton shook his head. + +“None of us want to do this, Bob,” he said. “It has to be done, however. +But I certainly don’t want you boys along.” + +The three men, revolvers clasped in their hands for use in case of +emergency, set out, while the boys watched from the trees. Keeping close +together, they quartered the plain, going far beyond the beaten down +stretch of grass left by the passing of the reindeer herd. Presently, +the boys saw them return, and with a sigh of relief, Jack said: + +“Well, thank goodness, that’s over.” + +Mr. Hampton’s spirits were considerably higher on his return, as the +boys could see by his features. + +“Nobody anywhere,” he reported, “and we made a thorough search, too.” + +“More thorough than there was need for,” said Farnum, grumpily. + +Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. On long trips into the wilderness, where +men are thrown into intimate contact every hour of the day and night, +they get to know each other better than would be the case through a +lifetime of association under ordinary circumstances. It was so here. +Mr. Hampton had come to love the silent, capable Farnum. Behind the +latter’s bitter hatred of Lupo and his like, the easterner knew there +was some good reason. He sensed a tragedy in Farnum’s past, about which, +perhaps, the other would some day speak in a moment of confidence. And +he forgave the man’s seeming brutality accordingly. + +“All right, everybody,” said Mr. Farnum, cheerily. “Let’s pack up and be +on our way.” + +Thanks to Art’s previous preparations, the business of breaking camp was +speedily concluded, and the party embarked in the canoes and once more +got under way. Farnum and Art both considered that, because of Frank’s +wounded shoulder and his inability to paddle, Art should take his place +in the canoe with Bob and Jack while Frank went with Mr. Hampton and +Farnum. But to this arrangement the boys protested vigorously, and Mr. +Hampton settled the matter by supporting them. + +“Bob and Jack are splendid canoeists,” he said. “They have given plenty +of evidence of that on this trip, and at home they are always in the +water when they aren’t flying. No, let Frank stay with them. They don’t +like to be separated.” + + + + +CHAPTER XX.—IN THE FOG. + + +Another period of uneventful canoe travel followed, corresponding in +time to the passage of a day, although there was nothing to mark the +lapse except the slightly-deepened twilight preceding the reascension of +the sun. Camp was pitched on an island in the stream which was small and +compact and could be easily defended in case attack on them was renewed. + +Of the latter contingency, however, Mr. Hampton felt there was little +danger. With Lupo gone, the rascals composing his party would no longer +be held to their purpose, and start to make their way out of the +wilderness and back to their accustomed haunts. + +When travel was resumed after an undisturbed camp, everybody felt rested +and in a more cheerful frame of mind. + +“We ought to be reaching the Coppermine soon,” Farnum exclaimed, as they +set out. + +His words were prophetic, because at the end of two hours, on rounding a +bend, they discerned not far ahead a broad and rapid river, into which +emptied the stream they had been following. + +“The Coppermine beyond a doubt,” said Farnum. + +In this diagnosis, Mr. Hampton and Art agreed. And, before long, all +question of doubt was conclusively settled by the discovery of great +rocks of a dull reddish color lining the banks. These were the copper +deposits from which the river took its name. + +“Sometime, when the transportation problem has been solved, this region +will be supplying copper to the world,” Mr. Hampton observed. + +The canoe containing the boys was close alongside, as the older men had +let their paddles swing idly to enable Bob and Jack to catch up with +them. + +“Why can’t it be taken out now, Dad?” asked Jack. + +“Because,” explained Mr. Hampton, “the only method would be by ship +through the Arctic, and even in the short Summer that is a passage often +blocked by ice. No, development of the copper resources of this +wilderness, as well as of the oil we hope to find, will have to wait on +the building of a railroad.” + +“But ice and snow will block the railroad.” + +“Not nearly to the same extent,” Mr. Hampton said. “Throughout the +Summer, such a road could be in continuous operation. Even in Winter, +with properly designed equipment, the road could be kept open—perhaps. +That, however, is doubtful, for of the continuous severity of Winter +here you boys can have no conception.” + +“Well, if we don’t turn back soon, they’ll get some idea of it, all +right,” said Farnum, grimly. + +“You mean we’ll be caught by Winter before we can get out?” asked Mr. +Hampton. + +“When the old North Pole starts sliding south, she slides fast,” said +Farnum, sententiously. + +As if spurred by the specter of approaching Winter, all dug their +paddles into the stream with renewed vigor, and the two canoes swept on +between the dismal, rocky banks hour after hour. + +That night there was real twilight, and a sharpness in the air to which +the party was not accustomed. Art pointed skyward, as he and the boys +worked at building the campfire. Their gaze followed whither he +indicated. + +“The moon,” he said. “Sure sign the season’s getting late. That’s the +first time you could see it real good.” + +“How late in the Summer is it, anyway?” asked Frank. “I, for one, have +kept no track of time. And I don’t see how anybody else could with the +continuous daylight we have had.” + +“Dad religiously checks off the days every twenty-four hours,” said +Jack. “I’ve seen him do it.” + +Over the evening meal, Mr. Hampton explained that from Long Tom, the +Indian they had taken captive on the island in the lake, he had gotten +directions as to where the latter believed Thorwaldsson and his men to +be. The explorer, according to Long Tom, was making his way along the +Coppermine, in an endeavor to get out to the south before caught by the +Winter. He had started late, and in all likelihood, Mr. Hampton’s party +was still to the south of Thorwaldsson. + +“From now on, however,” said Mr. Hampton, “we must keep our eyes open as +we proceed for any signs along the way which would indicate Thorwaldsson +already had passed, going south. Not that I consider that to be likely, +however,” he added. “On the contrary, if Long Tom wasn’t lying, and I +believe he was telling the truth, Thorwaldsson should be close at hand, +and we ought soon to encounter him.” + +Camp again was uneventful, but when the boys awoke in the morning they +found a thick wet fog over all. Their blankets were wet with it, the +rocks were wet, and the river which had lain spread out before them +under the moonlight when they turned in for the night, now could not be +seen. Only a gray wall of fog greeted them, blurring the outlines even +of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and Art, who stood in anxious conversation. + +When the boys joined their elders, they found the question up for +discussion was the question of whether to proceed or remain where they +were until the fog lifted. + +“We’ve had unexampled good weather so far, Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum. +“But this fog may mark the breaking-up. We may be in for it from now +on.” + +“I realize all that,” Mr. Hampton said, his slight impatience mute +evidence to Jack, at least, that his Father was worried. “What I’d like +to know now, is whether to move on or wait till the fog lifts.” + +“Why not move on, Dad?” asked Jack. + +“Oh, you boys up, hey? Well, for one thing, if we travel in this fog we +run the danger of being caught in rapids and sucked forward before being +able to reach the bank. For another, we might—just might—pass +Thorwaldsson, in the fog, without knowing it. He might be traveling, +too.” + +After some further discussion, it was decided the party should remain +until the fog lifted, and that all should be on guard to catch any sound +of movement out of the fog which would indicate somebody, presumably +Thorwaldsson, was passing. Following breakfast, in fact, all but Mr. +Hampton, who remained in camp, as a guide in case the others blundered +and lost their way in the fog, took up positions along the bank of the +river, some twenty yards apart to maintain “listening posts.” + +An hour passed, and then another, with no indication that the fog was +thinning out, and with no sound coming to straining ears except the lap +of the water along the rocks at their feet. It was nerve-trying work in +a way, to sit there for so long a period, isolated, as if entirely alone +in an unpeopled world. The boys, at their various stations, felt the +strain considerably, more so, indeed, than did Farnum or Art who were +old hands at the wilderness game. + +In assigning all their stations, Mr. Hampton had decided, because of the +greater experience of the two older men, that they should take up their +positions at the south end of the line. If any party south-bound along +the Coppermine escaped the attention of the boys, Farnum and Art would +be pretty likely to remedy the oversight. + +To Bob fell the most northerly position. And, as he sat there, hunched +up on a rock, staring out into that thick greasy wall of mist, he felt, +if anything, more lonely than his companions. Jack and Frank, at least, +had the consolation of knowing there was someone to either side. But, +with none of his friends beyond him on the north, Bob felt very much +alone, indeed. + +All sorts of reflections entered his mind, reflections that had no +bearing whatsoever on the situation in which he found himself. He +thought of sunny days on Long Island, of flights in his airplanes or +zipping trips along the coast in his speed boat. He thought of one thing +and another, classroom, Mexican mountains, that strange city of another +world found immured in the Andes, and—of Marjorie. Ever since his first +meeting with his sister’s friend, Miss Faulkner, she had occupied a +position of growing importance in Bob’s scheme of things. Someday—— + +“Some girl,” Bob said to himself. “I’ll have to see more of her.” + +He leaned forward, elbows planted on his knees, eyes staring into the +fog. In reality, his thoughts, as can be seen, were far, far away. But +presently, a sound, muffled and faint, pierced his consciousness and he +sprang into instant alertness. He listened, holding his breath, +straining to hear. + +It came again. + +Bob started on a stumbling run for Jack, the first man to the south. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI.—A WAILING CRY. + + +“Jack, Jack,” he shouted, as he ran through the fog, blindly, but +remembering to veer away from the river bank a little to avoid the +danger of tumbling in. “Jack, Jack, where are you?” + +A shadow, fog-distorted, loomed before him, big, enormous. A hand +gripped his shoulder and brought him to a halt. + +“Here I am, Bob. What’s the matter?” + +Bob rubbed the back of a big hand across his eyes. + +“I heard something out there,” he said, pointing into the fog upon the +river. “I guess I’d been asleep, or daydreaming, anyway. I couldn’t be +sure I had heard anything. It came twice—that sound. Then there was +silence. So I came down here to ask whether you had heard, too.” + +“But, Bob, what was it? What did you hear? I heard nothing.” + +“Jack, it was the sound of a baby’s cry.” + +Bob’s voice was solemn. A shiver ran through Jack, as if a breath of +cold air had fanned him. In that fog-enwrapped isolation, in that far +northern wilderness, what could a baby be doing? It was preposterous. +More, it was uncanny. + +“Bob, you were asleep. Yes, sir, you certainly were dreaming. A baby. +Huh.” + +“Maybe so,” Bob said, reluctantly. “But, true as I live, Jack——” + +The other’s grip on his shoulder tightened. + +Out of the fog came a wailing sound, distant, thin, but unmistakable. It +was the cry of a baby, if ever there was such a thing. + +But this time it came not from the river, but from inland. The two +listened, straining to hear, but the cry died away without being +repeated. They looked at each other, an unnamable fear gripping them. + +“Jack, I’m afraid,” confessed Bob in a whisper. “I don’t know—there’s +something strikes a chill into me—I—I——” + +He paused. Jack nodded. + +“I feel the same way, Bob,” he said, low-voiced. “What a pair of fools +we are, though,” he added, brightening. “That must be some bird, or +animal, perhaps.” + +Almost unconsciously, they had been making their way southward and now +another figure rose up in the fog before them—that of Frank. He was +about to speak, when once more the wailing cry rose, and this time it +came from two quarters, from the river and from farther inland. The +three stood, silent, speechless, and in that moment, while the echoes of +the cries still rang in their heads, Farnum and Art materialized out of +the fog. + +“Good, there you all are,” said Farnum, in a low, tense voice. “Follow +me to camp.” + +And without a word of explanation he started at right angles away from +the river, for they had taken their stations in such fashion that Frank, +holding the middle position, would be directly opposite the camp. This +was in order to enable them to reach it without losing their way in the +fog. + +“What is it, Art?” asked Jack, his voice matching Farnum’s. + +“Indians,” answered Art, tersely. “Stick close together and don’t make +no noise.” + +It was a situation to tax the nerve of the bravest, and the three boys +hurrying along in the wake of Farnum and Art could not be accused of +cowardice for experiencing a chill premonition of trouble ahead. Often +had Farnum spoken of the cruelty of these far northern Indians. Bitter +had been their experiences with Lupo’s half-breeds, in whose veins +flowed the blood of the Indians of the north. + +As they hurried along, there flashed through their minds some of the +stories Farnum had told. Had they gotten so far, so near the end of +their quest for the “Lost Expedition” only to be wiped out by Indians, +on the very eve of success? Such thoughts raced through the mind of +each. But they were determined fellows, accustomed to confront danger, +used to tight places. The first onrush of panic was swept aside, and, by +the time they tumbled into the little hollow in which camp had been +pitched, and where Mr. Hampton awaited them, each had himself well in +hand. + +Mr. Hampton looked at their determined faces, and a smile of grim +approval was his greeting. + +“Indians, boys,” he said. “Farnum told me. I suspected as much. Now, we +have no trees here for bulwark, but this little hollow is good enough. +Let us lie down and line the edge of the pit. We’ll be pretty close +together, and if any Indians stumble on us they’ll get a warm reception. +Listen.” He spoke in a low voice. “There goes that cry again. Does it +sound closer? Yes,” as the other nodded, “I thought so. Quick. Take your +positions. Jack, my boy, you stay beside me.” + +There was a little tremor in his voice. That was all. But Jack +understood. He clasped his father’s hand strongly, then threw himself +prone beside him, while the others ranged themselves in a circle as +commanded. + +Once more came the wailing cry from the inland. Once more it was +answered in kind from the water. But to all it was apparent that the +sounds were farther removed, and Mr. Hampton broke the painful silence +with a whispered: + +“They’re moving on, moving away.” + +“Look, Dad,” Jack exclaimed excitedly. “I can see those rocks ahead +where a minute ago was only the white fog. Why, the fog’s lifting. It’s +lifting, Dad, sure enough.” + +“You’re right, Jack,” his father replied, low-voiced, but there was +anxiety rather than jubilation in his tone. “That will make it bad for +us. We’ll be exposed to sight.” + +Once again came the wail, faint and far away. As faint came the reply +from the water. Both cries were to the north. Originally they had come +from that direction. Now they were withdrawing whence they had come. +What could it mean? + +The next minute a rattle of rifle fire broke the silence. At the same +time a cold breeze blew across the crouching figures in the shallow pit +and the fog began to shred out fast before it. + +Farnum sprang upright, gazing to the north. The others also gained their +feet. The shooting now was fast and furious. + +“I can’t understand,” said Farnum, in a puzzled tone. + +With an exclamation, Jack seized his father’s arm. + +“Dad,” he cried, “you said Thorwaldsson might be near.” + +“Yes, why—” + +“That’s it,” said Art, in a tone of conviction. Mr. Farnum turned +towards him. + +“You mean?” + +“Jack guessed it. Thorwaldsson’s being attacked.” + +Jack nodded. + +“That’s what I meant, Dad.” + +“You’re right, Jack,” said his father. “Come on. It can’t be anything +else. Nobody but Thorwaldsson is in this wilderness. We must help him. +Stick close together.” + +And scrambling out of their shallow pit, Mr. Hampton started on the dead +run towards the direction of the shooting, with the others at his heels. + +The ground was bare of verdure, and great rocks of the copper ore were +scattered around. On this account their view was restricted, but the +sound of the rifle fire grew momentarily louder, apprising them that +they were nearing the scene of conflict. Suddenly Bob, who was in the +lead, having out-distanced the others several yards, rounded a big rock +and found himself on a bank above a narrow strip of beach. + +Below lay a number of forms, as of men dead or wounded. Two canoes were +drawn up on the beach, and behind one of these, using it as a bulwark, +crouched a man, rifle to shoulder. Farther down the beach were three +other canoes grounded, and beside them several forms of wounded men, and +five or six men, crouching, firing at the lone defender of the attacked +position, creeping up on him. + +Just as Bob reached the edge of the bank, the attackers mustered up +courage for a rush, and with wild shouts swept forward. It looked dark, +indeed, for the lone defender of the upturned canoes. Bob looked back to +see how close were his companions, but they were not yet in sight. His +dash had carried him farther than he had believed to be the case. + +It had taken only a glance to show Bob which way the land lay. The lone +defender was the survivor of Thorwaldsson’s party, if the explorer’s +party it was, of which Bob had little doubt. He was a white man. The +others were half-breeds, and if Bob was not mistaken they were of the +same gang which he had encountered before. + +It was distinctly up to him to lend a hand. Throwing his rifle to his +shoulder, he prepared to open fire on the crushing enemy. But as his +finger pressed the trigger, he groaned. The mechanism of the rifle had +became jammed in some fashion. Desperately he worked to release the +trigger, but to no avail. + +Then the light of battle came into big Bob’s eyes. The half-breeds were +just below him now. Several of their number had fallen in the rush, shot +down by the defender of the canoes. Four were left, and they evidently +were bent on polishing off their lone opponent. So absorbed were all in +their own drama, they had not seen Bob. + +Clubbing his rifle, Bob leaped. He came down on the back of one of the +attackers, and bore him to the ground. With catlike swiftness, Bob, who +himself had fallen on his hands and knees, gathered himself together, +regained his feet, and swinging his clubbed rifle, let out a yell fit to +“frighten a wolf pack,” as Frank later described it. + +The stock of the rifle came down with a thud on the shoulders of another +of the half-breeds, felling him as if he had been struck by lightning. +So tremendous was the blow, that it tore the rifle from Bob’s grasp. But +he leaped for another of the enemy, a fellow whose startled face was +close to his, seized him about the waist and whirled him aloft to be +tossed aside as if he were a sack of meal. The fourth man was dropped by +a shot from the defender of the canoe. + +“Attaboy, Bob,” came Frank’s voice, from the bluff above. + +One after the other, Bob’s friends leaped to the beach. + +As Frank and Jack clapped him on the back, and tried to grasp his hand, +uttering enthusiastic praise the while, Bob looked around. + +“Say, where’s that chap? Why, he’s fainted.” + +Freeing himself from his companions’ clutches, Bob leaped over the +up-ended canoe and bent above the recumbent body of the doughty +defender. + +“Why, he’s badly wounded,” he cried. + +Mr. Hampton pushed him aside. + +“Here, let me look, Bob,” he said. “You fellows help Farnum and Art in +looking after the others. The place is a shambles, with wounded men +everywhere.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXII.—OUTWARD BOUND. + + +It was a week before the wounded could be moved. At close range though +the fight had been, none had been killed. When the boys exclaimed in +amazement at this, Art shrugged his shoulders. + +“More bullets fly in a fight than ever reach their mark,” he said. “I’ve +seen men, tough fellows, regular two-gun men, shoot at each other in +Alaskan saloons in the old days without anybody being killed. When a man +sees red, he don’t take no good aim.” + +The majority of the wounded were not hit in vital spots, but +Thorwaldsson had been shot in so many places that his recovery at first +was a matter of doubt. It was he who had been the last of his party to +keep firing, he whom Bob had rescued in the nick of time. + +From Farrell and others of Thorwaldsson’s five companions, however, the +story of what had occurred had been obtained. They had been on their way +down the Coppermine when they, too, had been overtaken in the fog. They +had landed in the little beach to wait for the fog to lift. There the +half-breeds, survivor’s of Lupo’s gang, who had been dogging the trail +of Mr. Hampton and his party, had come upon them. + +The surprise had been mutual, for the half-breeds had been looking for +the Hampton party and not for Thorwaldsson. However, they had attacked, +the majority from the canoes, and three who had been scouting along +shore, from the land. Surprised thus, Thorwaldsson’s party had put up a +game fight, but one after the other had been shot down until only the +leader was left. He, barricaded behind the canoes, had held off the rest +of the attackers until the final rush and Bob’s timely arrival. + +As the days passed by, with the twilight deepening into short nights, +Art and Farnum both grew increasingly anxious to be on their way for the +outside. They knew their North, and they realized that the time +remaining to them before Winter set in was narrowing down to a +perilously small edge. + +“We’ll have a mighty hard job of it, Mr. Hampton,” Farnum pleaded. “What +with wounded on our hands, and prisoners to guard, it looks almost +hopeless as it is for us to get out. But, anyway, we can’t afford to +waste time. Can’t Thorwaldsson be moved? He’ll be all right in a canoe.” + +“As long as the traveling is easy, yes,” said Mr. Hampton. “He will be +all right. But how about at the portages? He’s lost lot of blood +already. He can’t afford to lose any more. However, I expect that with +care we can prevent his wounds from reopening. We’ll start tomorrow.” + +Accordingly, on the day appointed, camp was broken, and the party got +under way. Frank’s shoulder was healed sufficiently to permit him once +more to wield a paddle, although still a trifle stiff, and he took his +place in the canoe with Bob and Jack. They had another passenger this +time in Farrell, whose right arm had been broken by a shot in the +sanguinary fight on the river beach. Thorwaldsson was taken in the canoe +occupied by Mr. Hampton and Farnum, Art going in one of the other craft +with members of Thorwaldsson’s party. Several of the latter had been +creased by rifle bullets and one shot through a leg, but all could wield +paddles. + +And so the long trip out of the wilderness began, with the half-breeds +in three canoes, deprived of arms and closely watched by their captors +in the four canoes bringing up the rear. With reasonable care, it was +felt, the prisoners could be controlled until they should near +civilization. Without weapons they would be in a hopeless plight in the +wilderness, unable to defend themselves against wild animals, unable to +provide food for themselves. Therefore, no attempt on the part of their +captives to escape was looked for by the others, until they should near +the outlying settlements of the inhabited country. + +“When that time comes,” Mr. Hampton had warned the boys, “we must be on +the lookout, for the half-breeds, unless closely watched, will try to +get back their weapons and make a break for it. And I am determined to +take them into civilization as witnesses to prove my statement of the +murderous conspiracy against us on the part of an eminent gentleman in +faraway New York.” + +Mr. Hampton spoke bitterly, for from all that had occurred and from the +accounts, first of Long Tom and of the dying Lupo, and again of Farrell +and the surviving members of Thorwaldsson’s party, he had pieced +together the story of the conspiracy against them. + +To the boys he confided this tale, the main theme of which was that when +Farrell had told his story to Mr. Otto Anderson concerning the discovery +of the oil-bearing region in the Arctic, Mr. Anderson’s confidential +secretary had gone to a New York financier and sold him the information. +He had not been able to tell definitely, however, the location of the +oil region, for the very good reason, as before related, that Farrell +was not certain of it himself, his vicissitudes in getting out of the +country having unsettled his mind. Therefore, this financier had sent +his agents westward with word that Thorwaldsson be tracked. + +“Perhaps this financier, Old Grimm, ordered the mere tracking of +Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton. “But I doubt it. The attacks on +Thorwaldsson’s expedition, the disappearance of his ship and crew, all +look like parts of a deep-laid plan to attain Grimm’s ends at whatever +cost in human life. And, on top of it all, the attack on us by Lupo, who +was paid a handsome sum down in Dawson by Anderson’s former secretary, +acting as agent for Grimm, show the latter aimed to put us all out of +the way.” + +“And all for money,” said Jack. “It’s hard to believe.” + +“Ah, you don’t know Grimm,” said his father. “The man who develops this +Arctic oil region may become the richest in the world. Grimm is +ambitious for that position. He’s got a lot of money so far, in one +crooked way or another. But he’s not one of the big ones yet, not one of +the richest. And he wants to be supreme. Well, he has overreached +himself this time, for I’ve got the evidence, and I’ll see that we get +more in Dawson and Seattle and New York. Mr. Grimm will no longer have +the power or freedom to toy with men’s lives when I get through with +him.” + +Although Thorwaldsson lay as in a stupor and could not be questioned, +the full account of what had befallen his expedition since it set out +from Seattle was learned from the others. First of all, they had +succeeded in retracing Farrell’s earlier footsteps, and had found the +oil region and the river running through it. A thorough survey of the +country had been made, with maps showing the outlet by water to the +Arctic Ocean. + +In fact, the party had made its way out the river into the Arctic Ocean +and around the coast into the Coppermine. There they had encountered and +made friends with a tribe of Eskimo. They had started down the +Coppermine, or rather up, as it flows north into the Arctic, but had +been attacked, losing half the members of their party and a large part +of their equipment, including the radio. It was after this that the +aviator of the expedition had attempted to fly to the outside with news +of Thorwaldsson’s plight, the latter meanwhile being cared for through +the following Winter by the friendly Eskimo at the mouth of the +Coppermine, to which they had put back. The death of the aviator, near +the MacKenzie, of course, was not known to the Thorwaldsson party until +the news was imparted by the boys. + +The course followed as they struck southward was not that pursued by +Farrell when he had made his way back to civilization. On that occasion +he had frequently been light-headed, and it was felt it would be unwise +to trust now to his guidance. Instead, Mr. Hampton and Farnum decided to +retrace their own trail back to the island in the lake where MacDonald +had been encountered, and thence follow his course to the Fort of the +Northwest Mounted Police. + +Day after day they pushed ahead, the nights ever growing longer and +colder, with frost on the ground in the mornings. The honking of the +wild geese overhead, as they made their way south, also was a warning +that the mantle of Winter soon would settle down. + +“You see,” Art said to the boys one day, “Winter in this country not +only means dreadful cold for which we ain’t prepared in the matter of +clothing or snowshoes or nothing, but also it means there ain’t no food +to be had. Yes, there’s plenty of game now, geese and duck everywhere +along the streams, caribou plentiful. But you notice they’re all going +south. When Winter strikes, there’ll be nothing in this wilderness but +rabbit and beaver. Beaver’s all right—if you can dig ’em out o’ their +huts. But rabbit—huh! Well, you can starve fine on rabbit.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII.—LONG JIM APPEARS. + + +Winter, after all, caught them in its icy grip far north of where they +had planned to be when the cold should really set in. This was due to a +variety of circumstances. The slowness of Thorwaldsson’s recovery was +one of the retarding influences, which prevented them making the desired +speed. After weeks of travel he was still in a comatose condition, and +Mr. Hampton feared his brain had been affected by a bullet that ploughed +along the left side of his head. The other wounded, although quick to +recover, also acted as a hindrance, especially at the first. + +Then, too, the season was unusual. Winter arrived weeks ahead of the +expected time. And daily, as the ice on stream and river thickened, it +became increasingly hard to break a way. Yet the canoes could not be +abandoned, for, once snow began to fly, the travelers would have been +helpless on land, without sleds or snowshoes. Sleds of a sort could be +constructed, of course, and makeshift snowshoes made, too, but neither +would be worth much, and the manufacture of them would take a good deal +of time. + +Two sentries were always posted at night now; one by a fire around which +slumbered the prisoners, the other by a fire in the midst of a circle +composed of the Hampton and Thorwaldsson parties combined. It was Jack’s +turn to keep guard one cold but clear night, after a heavy snowfall, +which had caused a great deal of suffering to all, and had brought them, +indeed, to the verge of despair. For they were insufficiently clad, even +though the skins of many animals slain for food in the past weeks had +been saved and roughly cured for wraps; and, in addition, with the +closing-in of Winter game had become so scarce that the camp was +virtually on the verge of starvation. + +Jack was mounting guard by the fire around which lay his friends. One of +the Thorwaldsson party, Swenson, did sentry duty by the other fire. +Looking across the little space which separated the two parties, Jack +could see the huddled figures of the half-breeds lying so close to the +fire, which Swenson fed constantly with fuel, that they seemed almost to +be in it. Around him the members of his own party were similarly +disposed. + +With a sigh, Jack arose, caught up an armful of wood and tossed it into +the fire. The flames at once shot high and, as if that were a signal, +out of the darkness beyond came a robust hail. + +“Hello, there. Keep ’er goin’, sonny.” + +Into the light of the fire a moment later strode a big fur-clad figure +of a man on snowshoes. On his back was a pack which he dropped to the +ground with a sigh of relief. Then he leaned his rifle in the crook of +an elbow and, pulling off great fur mittens, spread his hands to the +blaze, working his fingers gratefully back and forth. + +“Cold an’ gittin’ colder,” he announced, casually. “Got a nice fire +here.” + +Jack was nonplussed. In the first place, to find another wanderer in +this wilderness which they believed unpeopled was exciting enough. But +to have him walk in casually and without vouchsafing any explanation of +his presence took Jack’s breath away for the moment. Yet Jack knew +enough of the woodland lore to realize that hospitality is the first law +of the wilds, and that questions distinctly would not be in order. He +decided the best thing for him would be to wait for the other to take +the lead in the conversation. + +This the intruder was not slow to do, beginning even as he eased his +stiffened fingers in the warmth of the fire. + +“Didn’t know there was anybody else in this country,” he said. “Been +around here long?” + +A look of clumsy craft from under shaggy brows accompanied the question. +Jack had to smile to himself. + +“No; not long,” he said composedly. “And you?” + +“Oh, I been huntin’ an’ trappin’ ’round here,” the other said. + +To Jack it seemed the man was an honest enough, even a likeable, type, +and yet that he was acting evasively. He decided it would be a good plan +to get a more experienced head to help him deal with the situation. None +of his party apparently was awake, all being worn out with the terrific +strain of the day’s travel. But Art lay near him. In fact, his foot was +not six inches from Jack. + +Unostentatiously, in order not to attract the newcomer’s attention, Jack +moved his foot to a position where with his toe he could tap on Art’s +ankles. It was sufficient for the purpose apparently, for, out of the +tail of his eye Jack saw Art’s body stiffen and his head lift up +slightly from the ground. For what followed, however, he was totally +unprepared. + +Art sprang to his feet, leaped forward and began thumping the newcomer +vigorously on the back. + +“Why, you ol’ son-of-a-gun,” he cried. “You ol’ son-of-a-gun.” + +“Li’l Artie, or I’m goin’ blind,” cried the other, seizing Art by the +hand and pumping up and down. + +Jack turned in amazement to Art. + +“Why—why—you know each other!” he cried. + +“Know each other? Har, har, har,” roared the giant, in a guffaw that +aroused the others about the campfire. “Know each other? That’s a good +one.” + +Mr. Hampton, Farnum, Bob and Frank, Farrell and several of the others +gathered around, looking their questions, and Art turned to satisfy +them. + +“Ever hear o’ Long Jim Golden?” he asked. “Well, this is him—the +daggonedest trapper on the face o’ the earth. Ain’t seen him in years +since he left Circle City in the rush. Where you been, Jim?” + +“Trappin’.” Jim looked around at the interested faces. “You tol’ who I +am,” he said. “Now tell me who’s your friends, Artie.” + +“Sure,” said Art heartily, effecting introductions. “Here we all are,” +he concluded, and then his face fell as he added: “but where we’ll be +soon, I don’t know, nor what’s to become of us.” + +Long Jim looked first at one, then at another, then his eyes roved over +the camp. + +“How come?” he asked. “No sleds nor dogs nor snowshoes nor nothin’. How +come?” + +“Sit here by the fire and I’ll tell you, Jim,” said Art. “The rest o’ +you, we won’t bother you none with loud voices. We’ll jest whisper-like. +You’ll want to turn in and sleep, so go to it.” + +Nothing loath, the others with the exception of Jack, who moved to one +side so as not to intrude on the two old acquaintances thus strangely +reunited, turned in and soon were once more asleep. + +Briefly as possible, Art explained to Long Jim the circumstances leading +up to their present position. From across the fire, Jack watched them. +He saw that Long Jim paid close attention to Art’s narrative and that, +indeed, it seemed to affect him strangely. For over his open, rugged +features, not constructed to conceal their owner’s moods, swept doubt, +uncertainty, indecision, as if within the man was going on a fight +between two contending forces. Jack was puzzled. What could Long Jim be +thinking of? + +Then Long Jim slowly rose to his feet, placing a hand on the shoulder of +his companion who remained seated but looking up at him. Jack +unconsciously moved closer as the big trapper appeared about to speak. +He did not want to eavesdrop, but Long Jim’s expression had puzzled him +greatly. What could it mean? + +“Artie,” said Long Jim in a louder tone than that in which their +whispered conversation had been carried on, and one that reached Jack’s +ears, “Artie, my boy,” he said, “I wish you didn’t have them skunks with +ye.” + +“Them breeds,” said Art, jerking a thumb back over a shoulder to +indicate the prisoners sleeping about the other fire. + +“Them same,” said Long Jim. “Cause why, you asks me? Cause I got a +paradise to take you all to, where you can spend the Winter lapped in +comfort. An’ I don’t want to take no rascals like them half-breeds +there. But——” + +Art was on his feet, excitement struggling with disbelief. + +“What? What you mean, Long Jim?” + +“Jest what I says,” answered the other emphatically. “A paradise, I +calls it. An’ a paradise it is. An’ the quicker we git there the better, +so wake up your friends an’ let me talk to ’em. If we have to take them +skunks, why, we’ll take ’em.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV.—A TALE OF PARADISE. + + +At the insistence of Long Jim, Art and Jack, who had been called to join +the pair, speedily re-aroused their friends. + +“I ain’t no hand for talkin’,” Long Jim declared in answer to Art’s +requests for further information. “I got to tell this. But onct oughter +be enough. No use my tellin’ you an’ then tellin’ the rest o’ them all +over agin.” + +Jack smiled discreetly. Long Jim claimed he was “no hand for talking,” +yet his tongue wagged continually. However, his heart seemed in the +right place, and certainly he spoke emphatically enough of a haven not +too far away to which they could go for refuge. What was it he called +it? “Paradise.” Jack was anxious to hear, and wasted no time on gentle +methods in arousing the sleepers. + +“Lookit here,” said Long Jim, as the circle gathered around him. “Art’s +been tellin’ me the trouble you folks is in. Looks to me like you +moughtn’t be able to make it out o’ this country.” + +Mr. Hampton nodded grave confirmation. + +“Well, I know of a place that’s paradise,” said Long Jim, impressively. +“An’ I’ll take ye all there, an’ ye can spend the Winter—warm, game, +everything there. Only thing, like I tol’ Artie here, is I hate to have +to take them skunks o’ half-breeds in there. They’ll be a-comin’ back +later an’ ruin the country.” + +“But I don’t understand,” said Mr. Hampton. “What is it you are talking +about?” + +“Don’t blame ye,” said Long Jim. “Think maybe the ol’ man’s crazy, don’t +ye? Don’t blame ye for that, neither. But, look here, night’s dyin’ an’ +if ye stand up an’ look where I’m pointin’ ye’ll see somethin’.” + +Mr. Hampton arose wonderingly, and the others also stood up. + +“Thar,” said Long Jim, stretching an arm to the westward. “What d’ye +see?” + +“Why—a great bank of fog,” said Mr. Hampton, after gazing intently. “How +strange. Fog in Winter. I don’t understand.” + +“An’ ye all think that’s fog, hey?” asked Long Jim, turning to the +others. + +Nodding heads answered. + +“Well, it ain’t,” he said. “That’s the vapor from hot springs.” + +“Hot springs?” Mr. Hampton sounded frankly incredulous. + +“Wait’ll you see for yourself,” said Long Jim, tolerantly. “I wouldn’t +believe it, neither, when I first saw it. I thought it was fog, too. But +bein’ as how heavy fog in the Winter were strange, I went to +investigate. An’ I found paradise.” + +Then, under Mr. Hampton’s skillful questioning, Long Jim told his story. +He declared he had lived in this region now these two years, and that +since first arriving he had seen nobody except themselves. Drawn by the +seeming fog to investigate, he had come upon an almost tropical valley +through which ran not only one but several rivers of water forever at +the boiling point. These rivers, moreover, he said, were fed by hundreds +of hot springs, which bubbled out of the ground in all directions. It +was the steam from these which, condensing as it rose above the valley +and struck the cold Winter air, had formed the fog which first attracted +his attention. + +“Once I were in South America,” said Long Jim. “Down clost to the +Equator. Well, I’m tellin’ you, it were that hot all last Summer right +in that valley. As for right now, ye’ll find it mighty pleasant an’ +warm, an’ when snow falls it’s only rain by the time it passes through +the heat hangin’ over that valley all the time.” + +“Hurray,” cried Frank, exuberantly. “Let’s go. No snow fellows. Get +that? I’ve had all the snow I need for one season, anyway, and I guess I +can get along without any more for some time to come.” + +Mr. Hampton smiled, but, disregarding Frank’s jubilation, proceeded with +his questioning. And Long Jim, delighted with an audience to which he +could talk all he pleased, after having been without companions for +several years, continued unfolding new wonders. + +This valley, he declared, was about 200 miles long and 40 miles wide. +They were now near its upper end, to which point Long Jim had made his +way by slow travel and exploration during the two years since his +arrival at the southern end. + +Game? + +At the question, Long Jim grew even more eloquent. + +He declared that, due to the heat generated by the hot springs and the +boiling rivers, the fertility of the soil was amazing. The vegetation, +in fact, achieved a jungle growth. Wild rose bushes grew tall as trees, +with stems as thick as a man’s forearm and so dense that it was +impossible to force a way through them. Willows grew to the size of big +trees, with branches so thick it was possible to walk along them. + +“An’ birches,” added Long Jim, “git to be hunderds o’ feet tall, so +tall, in fact, they can’t hold themselves up but bend over an’ touch the +ground. + +“Likely you think I’m out o’ my head. Oh, I kin see it in your eyes. But +I’m tellin’ you the God’s truth, men.” And Long Jim spoke with such +honest sincerity, they were compelled to believe him. “In sich a place,” +he continued, “it ain’t likely there wouldn’t be no game. Why, the +animals there is thick as flees on a ol’ hound. + +“Mountain sheep, goats, caribou, moose, bear, deer, wolves, foxes, oh, +every wild animal o’ the whole North kin be found there—down in that +valley an’ in the mountains enclosin’ of it. An’ I tell you the truth,” +he concluded, his voice sinking for effect, “the moose git so fat +they’re almost square an’ they’re so darn tame ye can almost touch ’em.” + +As Long Jim’s speech came to a halt, Mr. Hampton turned and stared +across the brightening landscape to the distant bank of vapor. Soon the +short days would end entirely, and the perpetual night of the Arctic +would arrive. Only a miracle could save them from perishing, all +unprepared to face further travel as they were. Could it be possible +that miracle had occurred, and that this trapper was telling the truth? + +Jack looked at his father, and sensed what was passing through the older +man’s mind. Truth to tell, some such thoughts were in his own. He went +up to him and laid a hand across his shoulders. + +“Come on, Dad,” he said. “I believe Long Jim is telling the truth. And +we better make the effort to get to this valley. He may be exaggerating +a little, but certainly it looks like a promised land.” + +“That’s right, Jack,” said his father, shaking off his reverie, and his +alert self once more. “We’ll have a hard enough struggle getting there, +what with having to cross this waste of new-fallen snow without +snowshoes or sleds. Well, let’s see what can be done.” + +Eventually, the party got into motion. The canoes were cached, where +they could be recovered in the Summer. There was little likelihood +anybody else would pass that way, to appropriate them. Equipment was +made into packs shouldered by everybody except Art and Bob. These two +were to carry Thorwaldsson on a stretcher, improvised out of poles cut +on the river bank, and blankets. + +Fortunately, the crest of the valley to which Long Jim was guiding them +was distant not more than five or six miles. Even at that, however, the +going was tremendously difficult because of the mass of new-fallen snow. +Had it not been for Long Jim to break the way on his snowshoes, +moreover, it is doubtful whether they could have made it, heavy laden as +they were. But Long Jim worked patiently backward and forward, breaking +down the snow, and packing it a second and even a third time with his +webs. + +“How come you were out here, ol’ timer?” asked Art once, as Long Jim +paused, and he caught up with him. + +“Well, I git lonesome a leetle,” said Long Jim. “I was prospectin’ +around in the mountains rimmin’ the valley yestiddy, an’ I saw you +across the snow. Jest leetle specks you were, but agin the snow I +thought you were humans. I couldn’t hardly believe my eyes, but I come +along investigatin’. An’ then when night come on, you lit your fires, +an’——” + +“Sure was lucky for us, Long Jim, if you ain’t a-lyin’,” said Art. + +Long Jim stiffened, and for a moment was prepared to stand on his +dignity but then he smiled in a jolly way that sent crinkly wrinkles all +around his blue eyes. + +“Don’t blame ye for that, Artie,” he said. “Sounds like I were crazy, +don’t it? But jest wait till you see.” + + + + +CHAPTER XXV.—VOICES FROM THE WILDERNESS. + + +But Long Jim had not falsified. The valley proved, indeed, to be more +even than he described, for as the world now knows important mineral +deposits were discovered, including gold, silver, copper, coal, iron and +oil. But of the development going on to bring not only this marvelous +region but the vast oil region beyond the Coppermine into the world’s +resources naught need be said now. Suffice it to say that such +development is under way, for Mr. Hampton had the ear of the great +financiers, and was able to bring it about; and also that Farrell and +Long Jim are receiving handsome incomes from their shares in the various +projects. + +Here the party settled down, constructed huts, and prepared to await the +coming of Spring when the snow should disappear from the vast wilderness +separating them from the northern edge of the civilized lands and the +ice in the rivers be unlocked. + +One of the first things done by the boys was to erect their radio plant, +and they succeeded without much difficulty in opening communication with +the little Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police on the farthest rim of +the settled country. MacDonald and Dick, with their prisoners, had +arrived only a day or two before communication was opened, and the two +parties exchanged the stories of their adventures by radio. + +To Long Jim the radio was as great a source of wonder as Long Jim’s +valley was to the boys. He could never get over marveling at it, and +every time that it was brought into use, Long Jim, if he were in the +vicinity, was on hand, sitting in rapt and open-mouthed astonishment +while the boys operated the instruments. + +Much time was spent in exploring this wonderful valley, at the resources +of which Mr. Hampton could never express sufficient astonishment. + +“It is a freak of nature, of course, boys,” he explained on one +occasion. + +“How wonderful that it should have remained undiscovered for so long,” +said Jack. + +“Not so marvelous,” said his father. “Few, indeed, are the people who +ever have penetrated any distance into all this vast wilderness of +northern Canada. It was supposed, and still is generally supposed, to be +bleak and uninhabitable. You know from experience that the contrary is +the case. It is delightful country in Summer, and man is so constituted +that, if properly clothed and housed, he can stand any severity of +Winter. Some day, I predict, all this vast wilderness through which we +have been making our way will be settled. That day is far off, of +course, but it is coming. The growth of world population will force the +conquest of the sub-Arctic.” + +The one thing making their stay in this valley of marvels unpleasant was +the constant rainfall. For in the Arctic storm succeeds storm, sweeping +down from the North Pole in never-ending succession. And these storms +which they knew were burying the land beyond the valley under a pall of +ice and snow poured torrents of water on them. The peaks of the mountain +ranges rimming the valley were buried under snow, gleaming wan in the +occasional moonlight between the storms, for by now the long night had +come. But on them no snow fell, for as Long Jim had foretold the snow as +it passed through the temperate air created by the eternally hot rivers +and springs was transformed into rain. + +Two events of importance marked their stay. One was the escape of their +prisoners, together with some rifles which they succeeded in stealing. +Pursuit in the darkness, and through the jungle-like reaches of the +forest was almost hopeless and was quickly abandoned. Nor, although +vigilant watch was kept to prevent surprise, did they ever see sign of +the half-breeds again. + +“It’s a big valley,” said Mr. Hampton, “and I doubt whether they will +attempt to attack us. Rather, they will keep out of our way. They are +poorly armed and inferior in numbers, since we have all come together. +Their escape, I imagine, was incited by a fear of what awaited them if +we succeeded in getting them back to civilization and the courts. Well,” +he said, with a sigh, “I regret, of course, the loss of witnesses to +substantiate the charges of deviltry which I shall surely bring against +Grimm. Nevertheless, I am glad to be rid of them.” + +It was a sentiment in which all concurred. + +The other event referred to was the opening by means of relayed messages +via the Mounted Post and Edmonton of communication by radio with Mr. +Temple in faraway New York. When word reached Bob’s father that the +Hampton party was safe and sound and wintering in the wilderness, he +quit work for the day, despite the fact that a big business deal was +clamoring for his attention, and sped by motor down to his Long Island +home. + +Bob’s sister, Della, was sitting in the library, staring spiritlessly +out at the Winter landscape. Mr. Temple stole up behind her and, +reaching over her shoulder, thrust the message from the radio +corporation under her eyes. + +Della’s glance fell and she began to read the printed words. Then she +leaped up, whirled around, her eyes like two stars, and threw her arms +around her father’s neck. + +“Oh, Daddy, Dad-dee,” she screamed. + +He held her off at arm’s length and looked at her. Her eyes began to +fill up with happy tears, and once more she threw herself into his arms. + +“Well, kiddy, cry all you want to,” he said, comfortingly, patting her +on the back. “I guess that’s the medicine you needed. You’ll be all +right now.” + +Mr. Temple’s words bore reference to the fact that for months Della’s +health had been failing, and she had shown so little interest in her +studies that it had been considered wiser to take her out of the +boarding school which she attended, and bring her home. + +“Oh, yes, Dad-dee,” she sobbed, her face buried in his coat. “I’ll be +all right now.” + +Then she lifted her tear-stained cheeks and asked anxiously: + +“It says they are all safe—_all_? Doesn’t it?” + +Mr. Temple nodded, a mischievous twinkle in his eyes. + +“Yes, kiddy,” he said. “Frank’s safe, too.” + +“Oh, Dad-dee, I didn’t mean that,” said Della, blushing furiously. + +“No need to fib to me, kiddy,” said her father. “Bob is only a brother; +but Frank——” + +“No, you shan’t say it,” laughed Della, and she placed a hand over his +mouth. + +Nevertheless, it was to be noted that from that time on Della no longer +moped and looked ill, but took an intense interest in all the daily +affairs of life, even wanting to return at once to school. + +“Marjie Faulkner will be dying to talk things over with me,” she +explained to her mother. + +“Why, dear, what do you mean?” + +“Well—you know—she’s sweet on Bob.” + +“Oh, you girls,” said Mrs. Temple, with a sigh. “You’ll be the death of +me. At your age——” + +“At our age you were engaged to Father,” said Della. “Now don’t deny it. +Dad has even told me how you planned to elope, but were overheard by +your mother who persuaded you to be conventional and have a wedding at +home.” + +Mr. Temple looked across the dinner table at his wife and grinned +shamelessly. + +“George, did you tell her that?” + +“Why not? It was the truth.” + +“Oh, George. Aren’t children nowadays hard enough to handle as it is, +without letting them know how silly we older people were once?” + +“Now, Mother,” said Della, rising quickly and going to her mother’s +side, and kissing her. “Don’t scold Father. Can’t you see he’s dreaming +of that day again?” + +And dancing to her father’s side, Della dropped a kiss on the spot where +his hair was thinning out, and then danced gaily from the dining-room. + +Once more Mr. Temple grinned at his wife, as he sipped his coffee. Then +putting down the cup, he leaned forward and said confidentially: + +“You do remember that time, don’t you, dear?” + +Mrs. Temple started to say something sharp by way of reproof for his +silliness, but a softened look came into her eyes as she stared back. +The years that intervened since their youth seemed to slip away. + +“Why, George,” she said. “You look positively handsome.” + +As for Della, a telegram to her friend, Marjorie Faulkner, apprised the +latter of the message from the Far North to the effect that the lost had +been found. And Della soon followed her message in person. Thereafter +the two girls were never tired of talking about the possible adventures +that had befallen the boys, and while Marjorie sang Bob’s praises, Della +sang Frank’s. Poor Jack, it is to be feared, was somewhat slighted in +these discussions. + +“I’ll warrant you that Bob saved the day for them all,” Marjorie said on +one occasion. “He’s so big and strong.” + +“Well,” flashed Della, “Bob’s my brother, and that’s all right. But if +they ever got in a tight pinch, I’m _sure_ it was Frank that got them +out. He’s got more brains than all the rest put together.” + +“Oh, Della, how can you say that?” cried Marjorie. + +“Well, just because Bob is my brother must I be always praising him?” +demanded Della. + +For a moment the two girls positively glared at each other. + +Then the twinkle began to come, and they laughed. + +Then they were hugging each other. + +And then they were at it again. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI.—TREED BY WOLVES. + + +One more adventure, and that a serious one, was to befall the boys as a +final taste of life in the wilderness. One day towards the end of +Winter, when the sky cleared after several days of tremendous rain, the +three boys who had been cooped up in their quarters and had worn out +even the amusement of listening to the Edmonton radio concerts or +communicating with the Post of the Mounted, announced they were going +hunting. + +The supply of fresh meat had fallen pretty low, and additions to their +larder would not be unwelcome. Accordingly, Mr. Hampton made no +objection to their departure, but insisted that Art or Long Jim +accompany them. + +“I’d be no good,” said Long Jim. “Sence I did that fool trick o’ cuttin’ +my hand with the axe a couple-three days ago, I cain’t set finger to +trigger. You better go, Art.” + +“All right, boys,” said Art. “I’d like to stretch a leg, too.” + +The four, accordingly, set out. In the forest surrounding the spot where +they had chosen to erect their huts, there was no longer any game, for +the animals had come to learn that these strange creatures brought +destruction and had decamped elsewhere. Finally, after they had +proceeded some distance without sighting anything, Art suggested they +strike for a higher level on the adjacent mountain side. The huts had +been erected near the foot of one of the ranges rimming the valley. + +“Maybe we’ll run into a mountain sheep or a goat,” he said. “Anyhow, we +can see better from a higher lever, for this forest down here is so +thick you can hardly see a yard away. The moon’s out an’ up there the +trees is thinner.” + +With Art leading the way, the party began its upward climb. For some +time they toiled upward until presently they reached a level unaffected +by the more temperate air of the valley floor, and where, as a +consequence, snow covered the rocks. Across a bare shoulder of rock from +which the wind had swept all but a trace of snow they made their way and +then plunged into a thick woods beyond. + +Frank, who was in the rear, laid down his rifle and bent over to adjust +the clumsy lacing of a thick shoe pack of the kind they had made for +themselves from the skins of slain animals. The others plodding along, +head down, did not notice he had stopped, and kept on going. He spent +more time at the task than he had anticipated, and when finally he +straightened up and picked up his rifle, they were not in sight. + +Frank was not worried, however, for he felt sure he would be able to +trace them in the snow and would soon catch up with them. He set out at +a brisk pace. The snow grew deeper, however, where the wind had not had +a chance to whisk it away, and the going was hard. He had proceeded some +distance before he noticed that he had gotten off the trail left by his +companions. Angry with himself for his carelessness, but still not +worried, he halted to consider what was best for him to do. + +“Shucks,” he said aloud. “Guess I better go back over my steps till I +find where I left their trail.” + +And with this intention, he turned to go back. Even as he did so, he saw +a pack of long gray bodies racing through the trees in his direction. At +the same instant they gave tongue. It was a pack of wolves. They had +scented him and were now lifting the cry which announced their prey was +near. + +Frank started to fling the rifle to his shoulder, but then he lowered +it. The flitting forms were still yards away. And although moonlight +sifted through the bare limbs of the trees, it did not sufficiently +illumine the scene to make the wolves good targets. He decided his best +plan would be to seek refuge in a tree first of all, and then he could +fire at the wolves at his leisure and with a sureness of aim that would +not now be his. These thoughts or reflections flashed through his mind +in an instant. The next moment he was putting his plan into execution, +and climbing into a tall fir. + +He was not a moment too soon, either, for the baying came closer and +closer and even as he struggled frantically to climb higher the leader +of the wolf pack reached the foot of his refuge, and sprang high into +the air. Frank heard the snap of the great jaws, and looked down into a +yawning red cavern of a mouth. + +The next moment his rifle slipped from his grasp, and fell on the snout +of the wolf who leaped aside in temporary panic. Then the rest of the +pack arrived on the scene, jumping and snarling, their heads in the air, +their wicked eyes agleam as they scented the prey they had treed but +which temporarily had escaped them. + +Frank threw an arm around the main trunk of the tree to steady himself, +for he was sick with vexation at his own carelessness in not having +properly, secured his rifle. Meantime the wolves circled close about the +tree, looking up, and one big fellow even put his forefeet against the +trunk and reared high till his head rested on the lowermost branch. Then +he retired to join the others, and all squatted in an expectant ring +close about the foot of the tree. + +When his vexation had passed, Frank set himself to a serious +consideration of his position. And at once he realized that he must try +before it was too late and they got out of earshot to attract the +attention of his comrades. Perhaps already they had gotten beyond reach. +At that he had a moment of panic. Then he grew calmer. If they had moved +away, he told himself, they would discover his absence presently and +retrace their steps in search of him. + +He still had his revolver. At first he did not trust himself to handle +it, because of the trembling of his hands. Then he grew cooler. His hand +steadied. He thought he would shout to attract his companions’ attention +first of all. And raising his voice, he sent call after call ringing +through the forest. + +The wolves gave back yelp for scream, and soon the whole pack was +snarling and yowling and making a terrific, demoniac din. + +The sound steadied him. + +“Good,” he thought, “the boys will know there are wolves, anyway.” + +Their own snarls reacted on the wolves, exciting them. And once more +they came up to the foot of the tree, rearing their forefeet against it +and leaping upward. It was Frank’s chance, and he took it. + +With one arm clasping the trunk of the tree, he leaned forward and took +careful aim at the biggest of the grey shapes below. At that moment, the +wolf opened his mouth in a jaw-clashing howl. It was his last. Frank’s +bullet plunged down his throat, and the wolf rolled over in the snow. + +His mates without a second’s hesitation deserted their attempts to get +at Frank, and began snarling over the dead body. The sight sickened +Frank, and he closed his eyes a moment. Then the thought occurred that, +if he added several more corpses to the ghoulish feast, he might divert +the attention of the rest of the pack to such an extent that he would be +able to slip away unseen, perhaps by making his way through the trees +for a short distance before jumping to the ground. + +There was no need now for care in aiming, as the wolves were in a thick +mass over the body of the fallen, so Frank fired several shots in rapid +succession into the mass. The effect was instantly apparent, for two +more wolves went down, and the tearing and crunching announced a renewal +of the awful feast. + +Now, thought Frank, was his time to escape, if possible. He had heard no +answering replies, and believed his companions must have gotten out of +earshot. If so, he must depend on his own resources to make his escape. +He was about to start swinging to a nearby tree, the branches of which +interlocked with those of the tree in which he had found refuge, when +the thought occurred that, perhaps, he would be able to obtain his rifle +undiscovered by the wolves. + +Cautiously he started to descend, his eyes alternately on the snarling +wolf pack several yards from the tree and on the limbs he must grip in +his descent. He had almost reached the lowermost limb when his grip +slipped and he fell. + +Frank thought his end had come, but as he struck the ground his hands +closed on the coveted rifle, and he scrabbled to regain his feet, +flinging the rifle to his shoulder as he did so. + +His fall had been seen. One of the wolves turned aside from the +outskirts of the pack, where he was not getting his share of the +gruesome feast, and sprang for him. The next moment, as a shot rang out +from behind Frank, the wolf dropped quivering at his feet. + +“Steady, Frank,” cried Art’s voice. “Give ’em all you’ve got.” + +Without looking around, mastering his trembling by a supreme effort, +Frank brought the rifle to his shoulder and began firing into the pack, +even as the three rifles of his companions also opened fire. + +At that close range every shot told and not a wolf escaped. Eleven +bodies, including the mutilated remains of the three which Frank had +slain with revolver shots, were stretched on the snow under the trees. + +When it was all over, his companions gathered about Frank and +explanations followed. Then they made their way back to camp. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII—CONCLUSION. + + +Far to the southward, late in the Summer, the party containing our +friends and the Thorwaldsson party as well as Long Jim Golden, all +bronzed and hardy, and with Thorwaldsson recovered in body and mind, +swung around a bend in a river and came to the landing which marked the +first outpost of civilization—the trading post where was also located +the Fort of the Mounted. + +A little boy playing on the edge of the pier was first to see them, and +whooping and shouting he ran up the bank towards the store. Out of the +door of the trading post came a figure in uniform. + +“Dick.” + +“Art.” + +The two pals were reunited. + +And then followed the biggest surprise of all, for out of the store came +Mr. Temple and Della. For ten minutes the kissing and hugging went on, +while Farnum, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and the rest stood to one side, +their faces set in wide grins. + +“What in the world?” demanded Mr. Hampton, at length, holding his +partner and neighbor at arm’s length. “What in the world brought you +here?” + +“A motor boat,” said Mr. Temple. “That was a surprise for you. When we +received your radio message via the post here, which relayed it to +Edmonton—that first one, you know, announcing you were leaving for the +outside—I decided I would have to be on hand to greet you. So I got into +communication with Captain Jameson, and learned from him that I could +reach one of his posts farther south by motor car, and then come up the +river in a launch. So I decided I would come here to the edge of the +wilderness.” + +He looked at his son, Bob, about whom he still kept an arm, and smiled. + +“Good old Dad,” said Bob, giving him a hug. “But what brought Della?” + +“Oh, the same means,” answered his father. + +“No, Dad. You know what I mean. Was it love for her straying brother?” + +“Well, now, Bob, you’ll have to form your own opinion,” said Mr. Temple, +eyes a-twinkle. + +Della who had been standing close to Frank, her hands clasped in his, +looked calmly at Bob. + +“Marjie wanted to come, too, you know, Bob,” she said. “But her mother +wouldn’t let her. She sent you a message.” + +“Huh.” + +Big Bob blushed, and let the conversation drop. Nevertheless, at the +first opportunity he got his sister to one side, and, snatching the +letter she tendered him, went off by himself to read it. + +There was room for Mr. Hampton and the boys on the launch, and in a +canoe towed behind, and so, after a short rest, a start downstream was +made at once. Thorwaldsson and the others set off with them, but soon +fell behind amid a gay waving of farewells. Mr. Hampton was to make +arrangements for their reception at the next post and at Edmonton. The +launch would be sent back for them when the post was reached. + +At Edmonton, a thriving city which in the comparatively few years of its +existence has grown to the proportions of a metropolis, the boys got +their first taste of the publicity which was to pursue them across the +continent, reaching its height on their arrival in New York. For word of +their coming had gotten out, and hosts of reporters awaited them, +representing the great newspapers and news-gathering syndicates of not +only North America but of Europe, too. + +“You see, boys,” said Mr. Hampton, in their hotel rooms, when they +protested to him at being besieged every minute of the day by reporters, +“you are the center of the romantic interest of the world. You rescued +the Lost Expedition and discovered strange new territory. You have had +the wildest kind of adventures. How do you expect the world to take that +calmly? It can’t be done. No, you may as well submit gracefully, and +talk when questioned.” + +The romance of Frank and Della also was exploited by the newspapermen, +and pictures began to appear throughout the country, showing the daring +young explorer and his sweetheart. When they were taken, neither Frank +nor Della knew, but the truth of the matter was that they were together +so much of the time it was the easiest matter in the world for a +photographer to snap them. + +In New York the same thing was gone through with again, only, if +anything, worse. And this time, the reporters finding that Marjorie +Faulkner appeared to greet the returned heroes, scented a new romance, +and questioned the boys about it. Bob and Frank refused to answer, but +Jack slyly tipped off the newspapermen that between Marjorie and Bob a +real romance was, indeed, budding. + +In reprisal, Bob and Frank put their heads together, and gave the +newspapermen a story to the effect that Jack was champing at the bit to +be off to old Mexico, there to greet a sweetheart who awaited him, none +other, in fact, than the Senorita Rafaela y Calomares, daughter of an +old Don who had a palace in the Sonora mountains. And in support of the +story they told the newspapermen of their adventures several years +before on the Mexican border, when they had rescued Mr. Hampton from +captivity and Jack, they said, had fallen in love with the daughter of +the Mexican leader responsible for Mr. Hampton’s capture. + +It all made good copy for the reporters, who had about exhausted the +possibilities of the northern adventure, and who now plunged head first +into this former adventure, of which nothing had been known at the time. + +Jack was furious, and threatened to wreak dire vengeance on Bob and +Frank. But the latter pointed out that they had but turned the tables on +him. + +“Well, anyway,” he said, finally, beginning to smile, “you haven’t got +the best part of the story yet.” + +Their curiosity aroused, they tried to get him to tell what he meant. +But he refused. Several days later he disappeared. When they asked Mr. +Hampton what had become of him he finally surrendered and gave the +secret away. + +“Well, boys,” he said, “when we returned I found a courteous note from +Don Fernandez y Calomares, saying he was in Washington on business +connected with the government, and asking me to call. I guess Jack has +taken a train for Washington, and gone calling.” + +With which happy forecast of good luck to come to all three of the Radio +Boys, we shall leave them for the present, secure in the belief that if +at any future date they go adventuring they will be well able to take +care of themselves, and also that they will get into adventures well +worth reading about. + + + THE END + + + + +The Radio Boys Series + +BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + +A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER + THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS + THE RADIO BOYS’ SEARCH FOR THE INCA’S TREASURE + THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA + THE RADIO BOYS SEEK THE LOST ATLANTIS + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE BORDER PATROL + THE RADIO BOYS AS SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Golden Boys Series + +BY L. P. WYMAN, PH.D. + +Dean of Pennsylvania Military College. + +A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School +Age. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL + THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS + THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS + THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS + THE GOLDEN BOYS RESCUED BY RADIO + THE GOLDEN BOYS ALONG THE RIVER ALLAGASH + THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE HAUNTED CAMP + THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE + THE GOLDEN BOYS SAVE THE CHAMBERLAIN DAM + THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE TRAIL + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Lakewood Boys Series + +By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D. + +A new series of copyright stories for boys of High School Age by the +Author of “The Golden Boys Series.” + +Cloth Bound with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS ON THE LAZY S + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE LOST MINE + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE FROZEN NORTH + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE POLO PONIES + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN MONTANA + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE AFRICAN JUNGLE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +Boy Scout Series + +By LIEUT. HOWARD PAYSON + +A series of stories in which self-reliance and self-defense through +organized athletics are emphasized, also depicting an accurate +description of Boy Scouts activities. + +ATTRACTIVELY BOUND IN CLOTH + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE BOY SCOUTS OF THE EAGLE PATROL + THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE RANGE + THE BOY SCOUTS AND THE ARMY AIRSHIP + THE BOY SCOUTS’ MOUNTAIN CAMP + THE BOY SCOUTS FOR UNCLE SAM + THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA CANAL + THE BOY SCOUTS UNDER FIRE IN MEXICO + THE BOY SCOUTS ON BELGIAN BATTLEFIELDS + THE BOY SCOUTS WITH THE ALLIES IN FRANCE + THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA-PACIFIC EXPOSITION + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +Border Boys Series + +By Fremont B. Deering + +Mexican and Canadian Frontier Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + +With Individual Jackets in Colors. + +Cloth Bound + + BORDER BOYS ON THE TRAIL + BORDER BOYS ACROSS THE FRONTIER + BORDER BOYS WITH THE MEXICAN RANGERS + BORDER BOYS WITH THE TEXAS RANGERS + BORDER BOYS IN THE CANADIAN ROCKIES + BORDER BOYS ALONG THE ST. LAWRENCE RIVER + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Ranger Boys Series + +BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE + +A new series of copyright titles for Boys 12 to 16 years telling of the +adventures of three boys with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE + THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT + THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS + THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES + THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Boy Troopers Series + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +Author of the Famous “Boy Allies” Series. + +The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police. + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Copyrighted Titles. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL + THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST + THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY + THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +Frank Armstrong Series + +By MATTHEW M. COLTON + +Six Exceptional Stories of College Life, Describing Athletics from Start +to Finish. For Boys 10 to 15 Years. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + +Cloth Bound + +With Attractive Jackets in Colors. + + FRANK ARMSTRONG’S VACATION + FRANK ARMSTRONG AT QUEENS + FRANK ARMSTRONG’S SECOND TERM + FRANK ARMSTRONG, DROP KICKER + FRANK ARMSTRONG, CAPTAIN OF THE NINE + FRANK ARMSTRONG AT COLLEGE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Army + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound + +Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +Postage 10c extra. + +In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to +leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the +Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and +escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every +boy loves. + + THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE; + or, Through Lines of Steel. + + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE; + or, Twelve Days' Battle Along the Marne. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS; + or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians. + + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES; + or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Aisne. + + THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL; + or, With the Italian Army in the Alps. + + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN; + or, The Struggle to Save a Nation. + + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME; + or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded. + + THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN; + or, Saving France from the Enemy. + + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES; + or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS; + or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE; + or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH; + or, The Closing Days of the Great World War. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Navy + +BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound + +Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +Postage 10c Extra + +Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other +in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place +them on board the British cruiser, “The Sylph,” and from there on, they +share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, +the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably +the many exciting adventures of the two boys. + + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL; + or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet. + + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS; + or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON; + or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA; + or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16. + + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA; + or, The Vanishing Submarine. + + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC; + or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar. + + THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND; + or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM’S CRUISERS; + or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32; + or, The Fall of the Russian Empire. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS; + or, The Fall of the German Navy. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Oakdale Academy Series + +BY MORGAN SCOTT + +A series of real boys’ stories at the Oakdale Academy. Ben Stone, the +hero, wins his way under peculiar circumstances and against great odds. + +Clean-cut stories of real experiences in athletics and sports of academy +life, with adventures, mysteries and clever descriptions. + +Just the kind of books a boy 12 to 16 years would like to read. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + +JACKETS IN COLORS + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + +Copyright Titles + + BEN STONE AT OAKDALE + BOYS OF OAKDALE ACADEMY + RIVAL PITCHERS OF OAKDALE + OAKDALE BOYS IN CAMP + THE GREAT OAKDALE MYSTERY + THE NEW BOYS AT OAKDALE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Rex Kingdon Series + +By GORDON BRADDOCK + +A fine series of stories for boys of High School age, written in an +interesting and instructive style. + +Rex Kingdon, the hero, a real, wide-awake boy, interested in outdoor +games, enters into the school sports with enthusiasm. A rattling good +baseball story holds the interest to the very end. Rex and his Ridgewood +friends establish a campfire in the North woods; there, mystery, +jealousy and rivalry enter to menace their safety, fire their interest +and finally cement their friendship. + +Stories boys will want to read. + +CLOTHBOUND. JACKETS IN COLORS. + +Copyright Titles. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + REX KINGDON OF RIDGEWOOD HIGH + REX KINGDON IN THE NORTH WOODS + REX KINGDON AT WALCOTT HALL + REX KINGDON BEHIND THE BAT + REX KINGDON ON STORM ISLAND + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska +Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE *** + +***** This file should be named 36314-0.txt or 36314-0.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/6/3/1/36314/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/36314-0.zip b/36314-0.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..18a2cd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/36314-0.zip diff --git a/36314-h.zip b/36314-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..72387e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/36314-h.zip diff --git a/36314-h/36314-h.htm b/36314-h/36314-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bd1c724 --- /dev/null +++ b/36314-h/36314-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9721 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" > +<head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> + <meta content="The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition" name="DC.Title"/> + <meta content="Gerald Breckenridge" name="DC.Creator"/> + <meta content="en" name="DC.Language"/> + <meta content="1922" name="DC.Created"/> + <meta name="generator" content="ppgen (1.09) generated Jun 03, 2011 04:18 AM" /> + <title>The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition</title> + <style type="text/css"> + body {margin-left:10%; margin-right:10%;} + p {margin-top:1ex; margin-bottom:0; text-align:justify;} + div.center p {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; text-align:center;} + .pagenum {display:inline; font-size:x-small; text-align:right; text-indent:0; + position:absolute; right:2%; padding:1px 3px; font-style:normal; + font-variant:normal; font-weight:normal; text-decoration:none; + background-color:inherit; border:1px solid #eee;} + .pncolor {color:silver;} + h1 {text-align:center; font-weight:normal;} + h2 {text-align:left; font-weight:normal;} + h1 {font-size:1.4em; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:2em;} + h2 {font-size:1.2em; margin-top:4em; margin-bottom:2em;} + hr.pb {margin:30px 0; width:100%; border:none; border-top:thin dashed silver; clear:both;} + .sc {font-variant: small-caps;} + .center {margin-left:auto; margin-right:auto; text-align:center;} + .larger {font-size:larger;} + .smaller {font-size:smaller;} + .sc {font-variant:small-caps} + .caption {font-size: 80%;} + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + div.center p {margin: 0 auto; text-align:center;} + </style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska +Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition + +Author: Gerald Breckenridge + +Release Date: June 4, 2011 [EBook #36314] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +</pre> + +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i001' id='i001'></a> +<img src='images/cover.jpg' alt='' title=''/><br /> +</div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i002' id='i002'></a> +<img src="images/illus-fpc.jpg" alt="“What does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?” Page 40" title=""/><br /> +<span class='caption'>“What does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?” <i>Page 40</i></span> +</div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p><span style='font-size:1.4em;font-weight:bold;'>THE RADIO BOYS</span></p> +<p><span style='font-size:1.4em;font-weight:bold;'>RESCUE THE</span></p> +<p><span style='font-size:1.4em;font-weight:bold;'>LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION</span></p> +<p> </p> +<p><span class='sc'>By</span> GERALD BRECKENRIDGE</p> +</div> +<div class='center'> +<p>AUTHOR OF</p> +<p> </p> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;font-style:italic;'>“The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border,” “The Radio</span></p> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;font-style:italic;'>Boys on Secret Service Duty,” “The Radio Boys</span></p> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;font-style:italic;'>with the Revenue Guards,” “The Radio Boys’</span></p> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;font-style:italic;'>Search for the Inca’s Treasure.”</span></p> +</div> +<div class='figcenter' style='padding-top: 1em; padding-bottom: 1em'> +<a name='i003' id='i003'></a> +<img src='images/illus-emb.png' alt='' title=''/><br /> +</div> +<div class='center'> +<p>A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> +<p>Publishers—New York</p> +</div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p>THE RADIO BOYS SERIES</p> +<p> </p> +<p>A Series of Stories for Boys of All Ages</p> +<p> </p> +<p>By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE</p> +<p> </p> +<p>The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border</p> +<p>The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty</p> +<p>The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards</p> +<p>The Radio Boys’ Search for the Inca’s Treasure</p> +<p>The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition</p> +<p> </p> +<p>Copyright, 1922</p> +<p>By A. L. BURT COMPANY</p> +<p> </p> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION</span></p> +<p> </p> +<p><span style='font-size:smaller;'>Made in “U. S. A.”</span></p> +</div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<h1><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_3'></a>3</span>The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition</h1> +<h2><a name='chI' id='chI'></a>CHAPTER I.—THE LOST EXPEDITION.</h2> +<p> +“Strange that you boys should be talking about +the ‘Lost Expedition.’” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, hello, Dad. Why strange?” +</p> +<p> +“Because I have just come from a conference +with a man who knows all there is to know about +it. And he was telling me——.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton advanced from the doorway into +the sitting room, and looked at the faces of the +three boys in turn. They were his son, Jack, and +the latter’s chums, Bob Temple and Frank Merrick, +who together had gone through many adventures +related in other books of “The Radio Boys” series. +</p> +<p> +It was the sitting room of a suite in a Seattle +hotel. Here the four, arriving from South +America, after finding and losing “The Enchanted +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_4'></a>4</span> +City of the Incas” as told of in “The Radio Boys +Search for the Incas’ Treasure,” were ensconced +on their way to their Long Island homes. +</p> +<p> +“Well, Dad, what was this man telling you?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” added Frank +“We’re curious.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you know about the ‘Lost Expedition?’” +countered Mr. Hampton. “I stood in the +doorway unobserved a moment and heard you discussing +it.” +</p> +<p> +“Nothing but what this article in the Sunday +paper tells,” said big Bob, grumblingly, “And the +fellow that wrote this yarn didn’t know very much. +It’s mostly talk.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded. +</p> +<p> +“Speculation, I suppose,” he said. “Well, that’s +the best the writer could do. The facts aren’t +generally known. However, wait a minute until I +get off this wet coat and get into something comfortable. +It’s raining again.” +</p> +<p> +“Raining again?” said Jack. “Doesn’t it ever +stop here?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, that’s just the Seattle Winter,” said his +father. “The rains are necessary, and, really, they +are so mild one doesn’t mind them after a time.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” grumbled big Bob. “I’d think these +people would grow web feet.” +</p> +<p> +“Look here,” said Mr. Hampton, after getting into +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_5'></a>5</span> +his smoking jacket and slippers. “What I learned +today ought to interest you boys.” +</p> +<p> +“Why, Dad?” Jack leaned forward eagerly. +</p> +<p> +“Well, wait until I tell you a bit about it,” said +his father. “Then you’ll see.” +</p> +<p> +Then, while the three young fellows paid close +attention, Mr. Hampton proceeded to relate the +story of the “Lost Expedition” so-called, the expedition +headed by Thorwald Thorwaldsson, the +Norwegian explorer, which had outfitted at Seattle +the previous Spring, set out for an unnamed destination +in the Far North, and had never been heard +of since. +</p> +<p> +A great deal of secrecy as to its objects had +attended the departure of this expedition in its +sturdy schooner, and many were the wild guesses +and surmises concerning it advanced in the papers +and among the hangers-on along the Seattle waterfront. +Some said confidently that the expedition +was going to attempt to reach the North Pole by +airplane, for an airplane was carried dismantled on +the schooner. Others declared the object sought +was gold. And, in this regard, the vague rumors +of vast gold fields found in the past by this or that +old-time prospector who died without making his +secret public, were brought to light and furbished +up with a wealth of apocryphal detail in order to +bear out the contention. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_6'></a>6</span> +</p> +<p> +“But none of these assumptions,” said Mr. +Hampton, “was correct. The real object of the +expedition never was made public, for the very +good reason that none of those in the know—and +their numbers are few—ever betrayed a word, or +hint, of the secret.” +</p> +<p> +“And you know it?” asked Jack, with quickened +interest. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded, and smiled teasingly. +</p> +<p> +“Come on, Mr. Hampton, tell us,” said Frank. +</p> +<p> +“You better, Mr. Hampton, or he’ll burst with +curiosity,” advised big Bob. “Show that boy a +secret and he’s not content until he takes it apart.” +</p> +<p> +“How about yourself?” said Frank, indignantly. +“I suppose you don’t care to hear, hey? Oh, no.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton interrupted. +</p> +<p> +“Wait a minute, Bob. No need to perjure yourself. +I know all you boys are eager to know the +answer to the mystery of the ‘Lost Expedition.’ +Well, I can tell it to you in one word. It is——” +</p> +<p> +He paused. Then added: +</p> +<p> +“Oil.” +</p> +<p> +“Oil?” +</p> +<p> +All three listeners asked the question as if in one +breath. Big Bob was no less inquisitive than the +others, despite his twigging of Frank for his +curiosity. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_7'></a>7</span> +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” he said. “Oil.” +</p> +<p> +For a moment he was silent, collecting his +thoughts. Then he leaned forward, cleared his +throat and continued: +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps my words are a disappointment to you. +The Northland for you, probably, is invested in a +mysterious glamor. It means either men struggling +through incalculable hardships to win their way to +the North Pole, to the top of the world, or else +fighting against all the mighty forces of Nature in +a grim, ice-locked land to wrest a stream of golden +wealth from the bosom of the Earth. +</p> +<p> +“Ah, yes,” he continued, smiling slightly, “I +know how you feel. Whenever our preconceived +and heroic notions are upset we feel a sense of disappointment. +But, consider for a moment, the +meaning of this matter. Here, far away in the +Northland, in a remote district to which so far as +known only two white men have ever penetrated, +lies a mighty river flowing north into the Arctic +Ocean, along the banks of which are such vast +deposits of oil that it oozes through the soil and into +the river to such an extent that the river in reality +is a river of oil and never freezes.” +</p> +<p> +“A river of oil that never freezes, Dad?” said +Jack. “Do you expect us to believe that?” +</p> +<p> +“And flowing north, too?” said Frank, whose +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_8'></a>8</span> +quick mind had seized upon that point of contrariety +in Nature. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton smiled. +</p> +<p> +“Well, boys, it is hard to believe, I’ll admit,” he +said. “Yet that this river does flow north is undoubted. +That it never freezes, however, is an +exaggeration. The truth is, probably, that at spots +so much oil seeps into the water that soft spots are +formed. +</p> +<p> +“Hitherto,” he continued, “there have been only +two rivers known that flow north into the Arctic +in that region—the MacKenzie and the Coppermine, +along the shores of which are vast deposits +of copper that some day, undoubtedly, will be +opened up to exploitation. However, this other +northward-flowing river in the midst of a vast oil +field must now be added to the list, if the word of +the lone explorer is to believed, of the one man who +has been there and lived to return with the tale.” +</p> +<p> +“But I thought you said this river was known to +two white men, Dad?” objected Jack. +</p> +<p> +“So I did. So I did,” declared his father. “And +two there were—Cameron and Farrell. But +Cameron died on the trip to the outside, and Farrell +alone lived despite incredible hardships, to finally +reach Edmonton with the tale. Now he, too, is +gone—for he was a member of Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost +Expedition.’ +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_9'></a>9</span> +</p> +<p> +“When he reached Edmonton, a thriving +Canadian city, Farrell, an adventurous fellow who +at one time had worked in the Southwestern oil +fields as an employee of the syndicate of independent +operators which once employed me there as +superintendent, realized the value of his discovery +and kept his mouth closed until he got in touch with +Anderson, the big man of the syndicate. Anderson +saw at once the importance of the find. But he +also saw that Farrell’s marvelous oil field would +virtually have to be rediscovered before steps to +develop it could be taken. For, in struggling +through to the outside, Farrell had suffered the loss +of his compass, had been turned about in Winter +fogs, had lain delirious for a long period in the +igloo of friendly Eskimos within the Arctic Circle +and, in general, had suffered so many hardships +that his mind was clouded and he had no clear idea +of where lay this oil field. +</p> +<p> +“Anderson, however, placed such faith in Farrell’s +report that he decided to outfit an expedition +to retrace the footsteps of Farrell and Cameron +into the Arctic in the hope of thus once more coming +upon the oil field. Inasmuch as they had gone +in through Alaska, that was the way which Thorwaldsson’s +expedition took.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton paused. Jack, who had been eyeing +his father closely, now put a hand on his arm. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_10'></a>10</span> +</p> +<p> +“And now what, Dad?” he asked. +</p> +<p> +“Now Anderson wants me to attempt to go after +the ‘Lost Expedition’ and try to relocate the oil +fields as well as find some trace of Thorwaldsson,” +said Mr. Hampton. +</p> +<p> +“I thought so,” said Jack, in a tone of satisfaction. +“When do we start?” +</p> +<p> +“We?” Mr. Hampton chuckled. “I like that. Just +as cool as you please about it, too. We? Well, well.” +</p> +<p> +“Do we leave at once?” asked Jack, imperturbably, +not one whit disturbed by his father’s +pleasantry. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton shook his head. +</p> +<p> +“Whether I take you at all is questionable,” he +said. “Certainly, I have no intention of going at +once. If I go at all, it will not be until the Arctic +Summer begins.” +</p> +<p> +“Meantime, I suppose, I’m to return to Yale.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, you’ve missed a half year, thanks to our +adventures in search of the Incas’ treasure in South +America, but that is no reason why you should miss +the balance of the term. I’ll tell you what,” he +added, taking pity on the three, “if you fellows go +back to college and study hard to make up for lost +time until Summer, and if the ‘Lost Expedition’ is +still lost at that time, why, I’ll see what can be +done.” +</p> +<p> +“Hurray,” cried Jack. “That’s a promise.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_11'></a>11</span><a name='chII' id='chII'></a>CHAPTER II.—SETTING OUT FROM NOME.</h2> +<p> +“Well, boys, where do we go from here?” +</p> +<p> +It was Frank who asked the question, and he sat +on a heap of luggage on the beach at Nome, with +Jack and Bob beside him looking alternately at the +mountain beyond the Alaskan outpost and at Mr. +Hampton deep in conversation with a short sturdy +figure of a man, clad in khaki breeches, high leather +boots and a flannel shirt, a short distance away. +The figure was that of Tom Farnum, scout of the +independent oil interests at Nome. +</p> +<p> +It was Summer, and Summer in Alaska as the +boys were beginning to realize meant hot weather, +indeed. All had their coats off, and were perspiring. +Only an hour before they had been put ashore +by the steamer from Seattle, and Mr. Hampton +had left them on the beach with their luggage while +he went in search of Tom Farnum, who had failed +to meet them at the landing as they had expected. +</p> +<p> +“Where do we go from here?” Jack repeated +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_12'></a>12</span> +Frank’s question. “Well, if you ask me, almost +any place would be better than Nome.” +</p> +<p> +He looked with disfavor at the little town +sprawling at the base of the mountain. +</p> +<p> +“Not just what I expected,” he said. “I’ve heard +of Nome all my life, it seems, and now, just look at +it. Why, it’s hardly a spot on the map.” +</p> +<p> +“But what a history it has had, Jack,” said Frank. +“Don’t judge by appearances too much. Remember +this town has seen the Gold Rush.” +</p> +<p> +“I wonder what Dad is talking about,” said Jack, +ignoring Frank’s remark. +</p> +<p> +“Probably discussing how soon we can get away,” +said big Bob, speaking for the first time. “At any +rate,” he added, “I see your father and his companion +pointing to that gasoline schooner off shore.” +</p> +<p> +At this moment, their doubts were resolved, for +Mr. Hampton and his companion ended their conversation +and approached the boys. +</p> +<p> +“Well, boys, we’ll soon be under way,” said Mr. +Hampton. Whereupon he introduced Farnum all +around. The latter was a prepossessing man with +a weather-beaten face and a grizzled mustache, +above which jutted a promontory of a nose between +deep-set, wide, blue eyes. +</p> +<p> +“That is our schooner out there,” Mr. Hampton +continued, indicating the boat to which Bob earlier +had drawn attention. “Mr. Farnum,” he added, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_13'></a>13</span> +“has stated casually around Nome that he is taking +a party of hunters up the MacKenzie. We’ll get +away at once, as nothing is to be gained by a stay +in Nome and as, furthermore, we wish to avoid +inquiries into our aims. The story Farnum has +told will do well enough.” +</p> +<p> +Farnum nodded. +</p> +<p> +“Just a white lie,” he said, grinning. “No use +letting the curious know all your secrets.” +</p> +<p> +Then followed an hour of brisk work, at the end +of which period the luggage was safely stowed +aboard the gasoline schooner, and its screw began +to turn. As the little vessel began to throb and +draw away from Nome, the boys leaned overside +and watched the prospect dwindle in the distance +until the houses seemed like toys and the mountainside +like a painted backdrop in the theater. +</p> +<p> +“Hurray,” cried Bob, at last, “we’re off for the +Great Unknown.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” agreed Frank, “I really feel that way, too. +All the way up from Seattle, I felt as if I were +nothing more than a tourist, traveling a beaten +route. But this, well, this is different.” +</p> +<p> +After that they were silent a long time, while the +schooner shook and throbbed and steadily pushed +its way up the coast, each boy busy with his thoughts. +Yet those thoughts were much the same. +</p> +<p> +Following that eventful discussion in Seattle, on +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_14'></a>14</span> +their return from South America and their adventures +there in The Enchanted City of the Incas, they +had gone back to Yale and studied hard to make up +for lost time in the first half of the term. All three +were clever and had the knack of concentrating at +their tasks, and all as a consequence had succeeded +in making up back work in classroom and lecture. +As a result they had entered the succeeding term, +or at least were prepared to do so, without conditions. +This was a matter for congratulation, indeed, +and deserving of especial reward. +</p> +<p> +That reward had been theirs. For Mr. Hampton +and Mr. Temple both decided that their respective +sons and Frank, Mr. Temple’s ward, should be +permitted to accompany Mr. Hampton on his trip +to attempt to find some trace of the “Lost Expedition” +and of the reputed oil field in search of which +Thorwaldsson had set out. +</p> +<p> +“Farnum is reputed a wizard in knowledge of +the Northland,” Mr. Hampton had explained to +Mr. Temple, “and, as a consequence, I do not consider +that we will run any danger. Our greatest +danger, of course, would be to become trapped in +the Far North in the Fall and be prevented by the +rigors of Winter from regaining the outside. For +I do not intend to spend the Winter there. Instead, +I hope to be back in civilization by the early Fall. +</p> +<p> +“That,” he added, “will give us plenty of opportunity +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_15'></a>15</span> +to seek traces of the ‘Lost Expedition.’ I +have been in communication with Farnum. His +plan is for us to push up the MacKenzie to one of +its tributaries, and then strike eastward. We will +leave the gasoline schooner to make its way back to +Nome, while we push on overland, lightening our +journey on rivers and lakes, in the hope of finding +the River of Oil flowing north. +</p> +<p> +“If we are unsuccessful, when the seasonal warnings +of approaching Winter come, we will turn to +the southeast and come out in northern Canada. +</p> +<p> +“The boys are hard and fit, and such a trip will +be of inestimable value for them. It will make +them self-reliant and teach them to depend upon +themselves. Not that they are not in a fair way to +be youths of that sort already,” he added, smiling. +“If you could have seen them in South America, +George, it would have done your heart good.” +</p> +<p> +“I know, I know,” said Mr. Temple, shaking his +head slightly, and smiling. “Several years ago, that +time when you were captive in Mexico and they set +out to rescue you—” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and did,” supplied Mr. Hampton. +</p> +<p> +“And did,” agreed Mr. Temple. “Well, they +showed the stuff that was in them then. And the +very same Summer, when I took them to San +Francisco on what I considered was going to be a +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_16'></a>16</span> +little pleasure trip combining a bit of business with +sight-seeing, and—” +</p> +<p> +“And you became involved with the Chinese +smugglers, and imprisoned, and ended up by busting +up their show—” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” resumed Mr. Temple, “and ended up by +bringing the whole outfit into the hands of Uncle +Sam’s men. Well, I can tell you, they certainly +showed their calibre.” +</p> +<p> +“So, I reckon it will be all right to take them +along on this trip,” said Mr. Hampton. +</p> +<p> +“I suppose so,” agreed Mr. Temple. “But innocent +as it looks now, I have my doubts. I have +my doubts. Wherever those three boys are found, +there you can look for things to move fast. Trouble +courts them, it seems to me.” +</p> +<p> +Accordingly, the boys had been told they would +be taken on the trip into the Far North. And wildly +excited they had gone about their preparations. +Jack, the keenest radio enthusiast, was all for packing +up radio field equipment of every sort right at +home. But his father had dissuaded him, pointing +out that Seattle was a large city and there everything +necessary in the way of an outfit could be +purchased, thus saving the trouble and expense of +transporting overland to the Pacific port. +</p> +<p> +“All right, Dad,” Jack had agreed. “But, remember, +the selection of the radio equipment is to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_17'></a>17</span> +be left to the fellows and me. We’ve had a lot of +experience with the value of radio when in a tight +place, especially in South America, and we want to +put that experience to use and be prepared for every +contingency this time.” +</p> +<p> +To this Mr. Hampton readily had agreed, with +the result that in Seattle the three boys had revelled +in the radio equipment stores, which they found +well stocked, as the use of radio had developed +greatly on the Pacific. +</p> +<p> +In consequence, their outfit included radio field +equipment of the most powerful, yet most compact, +designs. For while Mr. Hampton fully realized the +value of having the very best yet he had issued a +solemn warning that bulk must be considered. +</p> +<p> +“We will have to travel as lightly as consistent +with safety and the purpose of our expedition,” he +had said. “So don’t pile up anything too heavy or +bulky, or it will have to be discarded.” +</p> +<p> +Jack knew well that the distance which can be +covered with a radiophone transmitter is only about +one-fourth as great as that of a wireless telegraph +transmitter having the same input of initial current. +Therefore, as a means of sending messages, supposedly +for aid, over long distances, the wireless +telegraph would be the better, inasmuch as equipment +for it would be less bulky to transport than +equipment for transmitting the human voice. Nevertheless, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_18'></a>18</span> +he was reluctant to place their sole dependence +upon the wireless telegraph. +</p> +<p> +“You see, Dad,” he had pointed out to his father, +when the outfit was being assembled, “to reach the +outside we shall have to depend upon wireless telegraph. +But we will also need the radiophone for +this reason: that each one of us ought to have a +means of calling the main party in case we become +separated through going on scouting or hunting +expeditions, or for any reason.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, that sounds sensible,” his father had +agreed. “Go ahead with your plans, but, remember, +hold down the bulk.” +</p> +<p> +The result was that equipment capable of telegraphing +five hundred miles was assembled, but also +Jack made up five light field sets of radio, one for +each of their party and for Farnum, which the user +could pack in his clothing and which had a radius +up to twenty-five miles. The instrument was Jack’s +now famous ring radio, worn on the finger, with a +setting only one inch by five-eighths of an inch. +Formerly an umbrella as aerial had been employed +but Jack had done entirely away with that in his +improved set. +</p> +<p> +“Well, fellows,” said Jack, at last, as Nome faded +entirely from view, “I wonder what lies ahead. I +wonder whether Thorwaldsson’s expedition was +stricken down by a plague, which seems hardly +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_19'></a>19</span> +likely, as in that case surely somebody would have +managed to get word to the outside by wireless or +airplane, or whether it fell victim to a surprise +attack by Indians at night, as I understand from +Dad that Farnum believes.” +</p> +<p> +“Is that so,” said Frank, in surprise. “That’s the +first I heard of that.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said Jack. “Dad told me of it when we +were coming aboard this schooner. He said it was +the first intimation Farnum had given him that such +might be the case, and also his first intimation that +there were hostile Indians in this country into which +we are going. If it weren’t too late, he told me, he +would have turned back rather than imperil us, as +it is, we shall go pretty warily and try to steer clear +of the hostile Indian country.” +</p> +<p> +“Whew,” said Bob, “this sounds interesting, hey, +what?” +</p> +<p> +His eyes began to shine. +</p> +<p> +“Old Bob. Always ready for a fight,” said Frank. +“Well, let’s give him one.” +</p> +<p> +And incontinently, he and Jack fell upon the big +fellow and a tussle followed that ended only when +they almost fell overboard. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_20'></a>20</span><a name='chIII' id='chIII'></a>CHAPTER III.—IN THE WILDERNESS.</h2> +<p> +“Well, boys, tomorrow we leave the schooner.” +</p> +<p> +It was Tom Farnum who made the announcement +over dinner which was eaten on deck. The +boat was anchored offshore, far up the Hare Indian +River, one of the great tributaries of the MacKenzie. +How long it was since they had left Nome none +could tell, for in that land of perpetual daylight it +was hard to keep track of time. +</p> +<p> +“Tomorrow,” said big Bob, “when is tomorrow?” +</p> +<p> +He looked at the sun which was still high, despite +the lateness of the hour, and would make only an +ineffectual attempt to dip below the horizon at midnight, +before resuming its upward climb. +</p> +<p> +Everybody laughed. +</p> +<p> +“What a topsy turvy land,” said Jack. “Well, I, +for one, will be glad to go ashore and stretch my +legs. Wonderful as the trip has been so far, I’m +eager to get started.” +</p> +<p> +“Same here,” agreed Frank. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_21'></a>21</span> +</p> +<p> +Little of moment had occurred to interrupt the +monotony of the trip up the coast and along the +northern edge of Alaska and the North American +continent to the mouth of the MacKenzie. Of +course, occasional ice floes had been encountered and +the little schooner had been compelled to make wide +detours. But that was to be expected in that Far +Northern latitude. +</p> +<p> +In fact, when they had arrived at the mouth of +the MacKenzie, the ice was only recently dissipated +from the great river. There, at a dock where a little +sidewheel steamer that plied on the MacKenzie in +Summer was tied up for repairs, they had replenished +their stock of gasoline and then continued the ascent, +passing between willowed banks, where huddled +occasional trading posts surrounded by native villages, +with the snow-capped mountain peaks always +in the distance. +</p> +<p> +Then they had reached the mouth of the Hare +Indian River and soon had put beyond them all appearance +of the presence of man. +</p> +<p> +“This is the way Thorwaldsson’s party expected +to go,” Farnum had said. “For it was this route +which Farrell and Cameron, the two prospectors, +followed on their way in. They were prospecting +for gold, you know, had no idea of finding oil. It +was their original intention to strike northeast +across the numerous streams at the head of the Hare +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_22'></a>22</span> +Indian in search of gold. And Farrell reported, +when he reached the outside, that he had found +traces and, in fact, several sizable pockets of gold.” +</p> +<p> +Accordingly they pushed on up the Hare Indian +a number of days until, in fact, the extra supplies of +gasoline which had been taken aboard on leaving the +MacKenzie dwindled to the point where it became +advisable for the party to go ashore in order that +the schooner might turn about and have sufficient +fuel to make its way downstream to the supply +depot. +</p> +<p> +It was a period of time that, in fact, however, +could hardly be considered in terms of days. So far +north had the party come that the sun shone perpetually. +It was only at midnight, for a brief space, +that it dipped to the horizon. +</p> +<p> +And what a gorgeous time it had proven to be for +all concerned, but especially for the boys. As the +powerful little schooner forged ahead, there was not +a bend the rounding of which did not afford a surprise. +Sometimes it would be caribou or reindeer, +probably an escape from some Eskimo herd, which +would be surprised standing in the water, and breaking +for the timber on the bank at their approach. +Again brown bear would be seen on the bank, or +beaver swimming strongly across the stream. As +for fishing, it was an Izaak Walton paradise. All +Bob, Frank and Jack did for hours on end was to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_23'></a>23</span> +lean overside with hooks baited with bacon rind +dangling in the water astern, and pull in speckled +beauties. And many a meal was made, too, on +wild duck or geese, picked off with a light rifle. +</p> +<p> +Then came the time when Tom Farnum announced +that they would stay ashore on the morrow. +And little sleep did the boys have that night, as they +lay awake on deck, whispering to each other, an +awning shading them from the sun. +</p> +<p> +Early the next morning they went ashore with their +outfit, and then watched the gasoline schooner throb +off downstream, around the last bend, and out of +sight. As it disappeared, for the first time there came +to each of the three boys the feeling of isolation +natural to their situation. The last settlement was +two hundred miles behind them. They were going +into the great unknown, into the regions marked +“Unexplored” on the maps of that great northern +rim of the North American continent. +</p> +<p> +True, the weather was fine now and the country +green and pleasant about them. But how long would +that endure? What if they were beset by oncoming +Winter before they could make their way to the outside? +What if they were attacked by hostile Indians? +What obscure fate had met the Thorwaldsson expedition, +traces of which they sought? +</p> +<p> +Into the mind of each thronged such thoughts, as +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_24'></a>24</span> +they stood in unwonted silence. Then Mr. Hampton +called to them. +</p> +<p> +“No time for day-dreaming. Each man to his +job.” +</p> +<p> +With him Tom Farnum had brought two trusted +men. They hailed from Nome, but were old-timers +who had been up and down Alaska for many years. +Both were men of forty, sober, steady fellows who +would be useful in helping distribute the burden of +packs, and would, moreover, be of inestimable value +in keeping the party supplied with game as well as +in almost any situation that might arise. They were +grizzled, weather-beaten men of medium height, both +with stout frames, and because of their long +existence in the lonesome north little given to talking. +Their names were Dick Fairwell and Art +Bowman, and they were “Dick” and “Art” to each +other and the other members of the party. The boys +had taken a liking to both. +</p> +<p> +Two light canoes had been brought along from +Nome, lashed to the deck of the schooner, and in +these the seven set out. The boys with Dick occupied +one canoe, the other three men with a larger +portion of the luggage the other. +</p> +<p> +When everything was in readiness, following a +light breakfast on the bank, the two canoes set out, +that containing Farnum, Mr. Hampton and Art +taking the lead. About ten miles upstream a rapids +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_25'></a>25</span> +was encountered, and around this the first portage +was made. Then once more they took to the water. +</p> +<p> +Day followed day, in this fashion, as they pushed +steadily forward, until almost a week had elapsed. +On the fifth day Tom Farnum let out a whoop of +joy and headed his canoe for the right bank of the +stream at a little gravelly beach. His sharp eye had +detected a small cairn of stones on the edge of the +brush, and when the others came up with him and +stepped from their craft he was busily demolishing +the stones comprising the mound. +</p> +<p> +“A marker,” was the only explanation he vouchsafed. +“Must have been left by Thorwaldsson. Ah.” +</p> +<p> +At the exclamation he stood upright, holding a +small metal box in his hand. The lid was rusted on, +and in his impatience, Farnum whipped out a knife +and gouged it off while the others crowded around +him. Inside was a fold of oilskin, which he ripped +open. A folded paper was revealed, which he opened. +Then he read aloud the message thereon. +</p> +<p> +“It’s from Thorwaldsson all right. Listen,” he +said, and read: +</p> +<p style='margin-left: 2em;margin-right: 2em;'> +“Please notify Mr. Otto Anderson, Ashland +Block, Seattle, Wash., that I passed here July 2. +Party intact with exception of crew sent as he ordered. +Farrell says we are on right track. +</p> +<p style='text-align:right; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:0; margin-right:2em;;'>“<span class='sc'>Thorwaldsson.</span>”</p> +<div><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_26'></a>26</span></div> +<p> +“What does he mean by that reference to the +crew?” asked Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Well,” said Farnum, glancing at Mr. Hampton, +“as your father knows, that is one of the unexplained +and puzzling facts of the situation, that about the +ship. You see, a skeleton crew was to be left aboard +the ship and it was to winter in the MacKenzie. But +of ship or crew, we have found no trace. Search for +the ship was prosecuted at the first opportunity this +Spring, but it had disappeared. I made a trip up the +MacKenzie myself, but the only information I could +gather was an occasional rumor at a trading post +that a schooner had gone by, on its way out, at +night. A ship that might have been the Viking, +Thorwaldsson’s craft. That was last Fall. Perhaps, +the skeleton crew feared to winter in the MacKenzie +and started for the outside, and was caught +in a storm which it was not sufficiently strong to +weather. Only three or four men were to be left +aboard. That is the only explanation I could think +of.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded. +</p> +<p> +“As I said before,” he stated, “that seems a reasonable +explanation. Three or four men, left alone, +might have feared to face the Winter iced in, or +might have been stricken ill, and so, for some reason +that appeared good enough to them, might have +decided to violate orders and start out. As to the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_27'></a>27</span> +disappearance of the ship, many an undermanned +vessel has gone down in a storm, without leaving a +trace.” +</p> +<p> +“But, Dad, you’ve said nothing about this,” +protested Jack. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. +</p> +<p> +“There are a lot of things which I know I have +never told you, Jack,” he said. “If I really have +neglected to speak of this, however, it has been +through an oversight. I’ve had a lot of things on +my mind. But, come. We know this is the way +Thorwaldsson passed. We are on the right track. +So let us push on. We have still four hours of +travel to do before making camp.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_28'></a>28</span><a name='chIV' id='chIV'></a>CHAPTER IV.—STRIKING GOLD.</h2> +<p> +Life flowed along very pleasantly indeed, for the +boys, during the weeks that followed. They were +so far north that the sun shone constantly, and never +a cloud came to trouble the sky, never a storm to +drive them to take shelter. When they camped it +was usually in the dim cool recesses of a forest of +firs, beneath the dense shade of which could be found +the only semblance of night. +</p> +<p> +Never before had they known the delights of +camp life, as they were now living it. It was like +being on one continuous picnic. For a considerable +period of time they found themselves in a mesh or +network of streams and lakes, through which Tom +Farnum guided them steadily northeastward, with +never a sign of doubt as to the course to take. +</p> +<p> +They wondered about this, asked why they took +certain forks of river or stream, why avoided others. +Tom answered readily enough. From Mr. Anderson +he had received a minute report containing every +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_29'></a>29</span> +scrap of data Farrell had been able to furnish as to +the course taken by him and Cameron on going into +the wild country. +</p> +<p> +“So you see,” he added, “while I may not be following +in the exact footsteps of Thorwaldsson, yet +I am going over the same general route. Sooner or +later we will cover the same ground which he covered +again, and then I expect we shall find some +other record which he has left behind, just as in the +case of that note on the Hare Indian.” +</p> +<p> +This was enough for the boys. It satisfied their +curiosity. They dismissed, or practically so, from +their minds all worry as to the “Lost Expedition.” +They were too busy enjoying life as they found it +each waiting moment. +</p> +<p> +Around each bend in a stream that their paddles +took them, on the shore of each deep, silent lake, +was some new marvel. Now it would be a bear +grunting on the bank. Again, a deer, probably a +runaway from some Eskimo herd on Summer pasture +as Farnum explained, standing in the stream, +and starting with a snort into the timber at their +approach. Occasionally a gray wolf could be seen +loping in the distance. Now and again a beaver cut +across stream. +</p> +<p> +With their light rifles the boys occasionally were +permitted to pick off some game, usually wild ducks +or geese, of which there were numbers along the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_30'></a>30</span> +watercourses. But nothing was shot wantonly. +Many a time, youthful fingers itched on the trigger, +only to be restrained by the thought of the cruel +uselessness of shooting merely for sport. +</p> +<p> +Of other inhabitants in this vast northern wilderness, +none were encountered. And at this the boys +marvelled. It was as if they had the world to themselves. +They could not understand it. To them it +was a paradise. +</p> +<p> +“Wait till you see this in Winter,” said Farnum +grimly. “Or rather, pray that you never do. It is +a land of perpetual night, and the temperature is so +low that when you stop moving you must have a +fire or you will freeze to death. And it isn’t every +day that you can travel. For this isn’t a land of +tame Winter as you boys know it. Out of the north +comes storms succeeding storm, pitiless in severity. +Even the creatures of the wild cannot stand it, in +many cases, and drift to the south.” +</p> +<p> +“But how about the Eskimo?” asked Jack. “This +is their country, isn’t it? How do they stand it?” +</p> +<p> +“Sometimes they don’t,” said Farnum. “When +the hunting is poor and famine stalks through the +Eskimo village, only the hardiest survive.” +</p> +<p> +“Where do they live, anyway?” struck in Frank. +“Why aren’t they around here? Why haven’t we seen +any?” +</p> +<p> +“They may have seen us,” said Farnum, “and are +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_31'></a>31</span> +avoiding us. They are a timorous people, know the +white man only by tradition. To the Eskimo, the +white man is a sort of god, at least to the Eskimo +of all this country north of us. Back along the coast +of Alaska, of course, some sort of contact has been +made. But these Eskimo never come in touch with +the whites. They are a migratory people. In Summer +they range far and wide on the hunt. In the +Winter, they retire to the edge of the Arctic Ocean.” +</p> +<p> +“But why?” asked Bob, in surprise. “I should +think that would be the very place for them to steer +away from.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, no,” said Farnum. “You see, all game goes +far to the south in Winter, so the Eskimo goes to the +ocean because it is the home of the only game left—the +seal. He builds his snow house or igloo and +camps near the air holes of the seal, spearing them +as they come up for air. Occasionally he slays a +polar bear, too.” +</p> +<p> +“I confess I know very little about the Eskimo,” +said Jack. “What are his weapons?” +</p> +<p> +“Bows and arrows tipped with flint or copper, copper-pointed +spears, and wooden knives edged with +copper,” said Farnum. +</p> +<p> +“But, a bear,” cried Bob, incredulously. “How +could an Eskimo kill a great polar bear with such +weapons?” +</p> +<p> +“Single-handed, he couldn’t,” said Farnum. “But +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_32'></a>32</span> +when the bear is hunted, the whole tribe of hunters +go together. They attack in a circle. Their spears +or harpoons have lines attached. And as these harpoons +sink into the body of the bear, the lines pull +him this way and that as he charges on his tormenters. +Eventually, if the Eskimo are lucky, they +have him so surrounded that he cannot move. Then +one dashes in and administers the death blow.” +</p> +<p> +“Then necessity forces them to live in tribal +groups?” asked Jack. +</p> +<p> +Farnum nodded. +</p> +<p> +“In the Summer they often hunt alone, ranging +far, for they are great travelers. But in Winter, the +hunters are all back with the tribe.” +</p> +<p> +“And the Indians?” asked Frank. +</p> +<p> +Farnum’s face darkened. +</p> +<p> +“There are not many,” he said. “I wish there were +less. You may say all you please about the ‘noble +red man.’ But all I ever heard about the Indians +of the Far North doesn’t predispose me in their +favor. They are cutthroats, thieves and liars. Usually +they hunt somewhat to the south of us, and make +their way in towards the northern Canadian settlements +as Winter approaches. Let’s hope we encounter +none of them.” +</p> +<p> +The boys wondered as they went along whether +this were gold-producing country into which they +were pushing. They spoke of the matter to Dick, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_33'></a>33</span> +their canoe mate, at times. Taciturn though he was +usually, at every mention of gold his eyes brightened, +and he became almost voluble. +</p> +<p> +“Never been this far north,” he said on one occasion, +“no white man ever has been in here, reckon. +But I’d like to stop at the foot o’ some of these rapids +and wash a little gravel for luck. I sure would like +to.” +</p> +<p> +“Let’s do it the next rapids we come to,” suggested +Frank, with eager interest. “It wouldn’t take +long, would it?” +</p> +<p> +“Orders is not to waste time.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’ll speak to father,” said Jack. “I’m sure +he’d let us try it just once.” +</p> +<p> +In this surmise he was correct, for the noon halt +happened to be at the foot of a rapids that would +necessitate a portage, and Dick and Art reported the +graveled bank showed signs of “color.” Even +Farnum, his mind concentrated on the task of +getting his party along and on the job in hand, +showed interest when addressed on the subject. +With pick and pan, therefore, the two men got busy, +while the boys watched with breathless interest the +process of rocking the pan and washing out the +gravel. +</p> +<p> +“Whoopee,” cried Dick, suddenly. “Thar she is. +Color in the pan.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_34'></a>34</span> +</p> +<p> +“Sure as I’m born,” ejaculated his partner. +“Strong, too.” +</p> +<p> +All the boys could discern, however, were some +dully gleaming particles at the bottom of the pan, +out of which most of the gravel had been washed +with the water. They had half expected to spy +nuggets. Farnum and Mr. Hampton, however, were +as eagerly interested as the two old-timers. +</p> +<p> +“Try another pan, men,” suggested Mr. Hampton. +“Let us go a little farther upstream.” +</p> +<p> +Once more the process was repeated. This time +the pan was rich in “pay” and the excitement of the +four older men mounted, hectic spots glowing dull +beneath their tan in the cheeks of the two old-timers +especially. +</p> +<p> +Then Dick, who was wielding the pick, attacked a +clump of rocks in the edge of the stream at the very +foot of the rapids, standing in his boots almost knee-deep +in the water. For several minutes he picked +and pried and finally, with a shout of delight, turned +to his audience behind him on the bank and, having +plunged an arm into the water, held it up dripping. +</p> +<p> +“Look,” was all he said. +</p> +<p> +They gazed, all eyes. +</p> +<p> +“Well! Well!” cried Art. +</p> +<p> +A small but sizable nugget lay on Dick’s outstretched +palm. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_35'></a>35</span> +</p> +<p> +“What luck,” cried Jack. “You certainly looked +in the right place.” +</p> +<p> +“Bet there’s more gold around here,” cried Frank. +“Maybe a bonanza. Who knows?” +</p> +<p> +“You ought to stake a claim, Dick,” said big Bob. +“I don’t know much about the process. But that’s +the thing to do, isn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +“Huh,” said Dick, generously. “Belongs to you +boys well as me. You thought of it.” +</p> +<p> +“Oughter work it,” spoke up Art. “Might take +out a good poke this Summer.” +</p> +<p> +This remark recalled Tom Farnum to the object +of his expedition. +</p> +<p> +“No, no, men,” he said, sharply. “Don’t get +bitten with the gold fever now. We’ve got work +ahead of us, work that we contracted to do.” +</p> +<p> +“Right,” said Dick. +</p> +<p> +Art’s face fell, but he, too, nodded agreement. +</p> +<p> +“Just the same,” said Farnum, softening, “there’s +nothing to prevent you two from staking a claim. +Some day you may come back to work it.” +</p> +<p> +“Belongs to us no more’n the rest o’ you,” said +Dick, sturdily. “The young fellers wanted us to +make a try at it here just for luck, an’ we did.” +</p> +<p> +A warm debate followed, the boys protesting they +were not entitled to any part in the find. Finally +Dick capitulated. +</p> +<p> +“Tell you what,” he said. “Art an’ me’ll stake +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_36'></a>36</span> +this claim an’ file on it. But if we ever come back +to work her an’ she pays, we’ll declare you in.” +</p> +<p> +“Not unless you let us help to finance the expedition,” +said Jack, turning for confirmation to his +comrades. “Isn’t that right, fellows.” +</p> +<p> +Bob and Frank agreed. Farnum put an end to the +discussion. +</p> +<p> +“Good enough,” he said. “Let it go at that. Now +we must buckle into the job. Do you realize we’ve +spent more than two hours here, when we should +have stopped only a half hour? We’ve got to make +this portage and push on. Come on. Everybody +to his task.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_37'></a>37</span><a name='chV' id='chV'></a>CHAPTER V.—A SURPRISE THROUGH THE AIR</h2> +<p> +Joyously though time flew by for the boys, with +Mr. Hampton and Tom Farnum it was a different +matter. They were worried, that became increasingly +plain. Finally, although Mr. Hampton purposely +refrained from saying anything to disturb the +boys, Jack took note of his father’s perturbation and +questioned him about it. +</p> +<p> +“Well, Jack,” said his father, “we’ve been weeks +on the trail. We can’t proceed much farther, without +being compelled to start out. And yet so far we +have discovered no further trace of Thorwaldsson’s +party. When we entered the MacKenzie, which +flows north, we were going to the south. Going up +the Hare Indian we struck east. Since getting into +the streams, rivers and lakes we have been going +east. Shortly we shall strike the Coppermine, +Beyond that lies the river of oil, as reported by +Farrell. +</p> +<p> +“So far we have made good time. With luck, we +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_38'></a>38</span> +shall be able to reach that territory before having to +turn back or, rather, for we shall not retrace our +steps, turn south. And we should have struck some +other trace of Thorwaldsson’s party long ere this, if +we are on the right track. However, you boys need +not worry about this, so let’s talk of something else.” +</p> +<p> +Seeing that his father had sunk into one of his +rare periods when he wished to be alone with his +meditations and did not welcome intrusion even from +Jack, the latter moved away to join his comrades. +</p> +<p> +“Dad’s plainly worried,” he said. And he explained +the circumstances. “Wish I could find +some way to make him forget his troubles,” he said. +</p> +<p> +“I know what,” said Frank. “He loves music. +We’re camping for the night. Although”—with a +look at the sun—“there isn’t much night, is there? +Well, anyhow, it’s nighttime in Edmonton, where +that new broadcasting station was set up last Spring. +Let’s rig up our radio and see if we can’t pick up +their concert, just for luck. What do you say?” +</p> +<p> +“I say, good,” declared Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Edmonton’s long way off,” objected Bob. +</p> +<p> +“That’s nothing,” said Jack. “I believe we can +pick it up all right.” +</p> +<p> +“In this northern country we have no static problem, +anyway,” said Frank. “We couldn’t send to +Edmonton with our equipment, but I’ll bet we can +catch.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_39'></a>39</span> +</p> +<p> +While Farnum and Mr. Hampton put their heads +together in low-whispered conversation, poring over +a map, and while Art and Dick lay outstretched +under some fir trees, already disposed for sleep, the +three boys quietly got out the necessary equipment +from among the luggage and set to work. +</p> +<p> +“A short distance up the stream,” said Frank, “I +saw two firs taller than most, standing alone. +They’re a pretty good distance apart, too. We can +climb up those trees and string the aerial between +them.” +</p> +<p> +They made their way to the trees noted by Frank, +and found them exactly suited to the purpose. Jack +and Frank, were lighter than Bob, took turns climbing +the trees, and the wires were strung without any +great difficulty. They worked busily, and when +everything was all connected up, Bob looked at his +watch. +</p> +<p> +“Allowing for the difference in time,” he said, +“they’re about ready to begin their concert. On +what meter wave length does the Edmonton station +send, Frank?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t recall. About three hundred and fifty, I +suppose. We’ll tune up and try, anyway.” +</p> +<p> +“What dubs we are, fellows, not to have thought +of this before,” said Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, well,” said Bob, “broadcast concerts never +did interest me much, anyway. I like to do the sending +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_40'></a>40</span> +myself, we’ve always been dog-tired when we +made camp at night, and ready to turn in as quickly +as Art and Dick. If it hadn’t been for your thought +of bringing some relaxation and amusement to your +father tonight, Jack, we’d have been asleep already.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess that’s right, old thing,” Jack replied. +“You would have been asleep, anyway, even if the +rest of us kept tossing. But what does she say, +Frank? Any luck yet?” +</p> +<p> +Frank, who had been manipulating the controls, +looked up mirthfully. +</p> +<p> +“What do you think of your musical program, +Jack?” he replied. “Listen in a minute will you? +They’re sending out a crop and weather report.” +</p> +<p> +Jack’s face fell, then he, too, laughed. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, well,” he said, “that’s just a preliminary. +The concert will follow.” +</p> +<p> +“No,” answered Frank, who had resumed his +headpiece, “now it’s a bulletin report on the day’s +news events. Listen. Why, great—” +</p> +<p> +His voice died. Over his face came an expression +of surprise. +</p> +<p> +Jack and Bob sprang to take up the other headpieces +attached to the box. Over their features also +spread amazement and even consternation. They +listened intently. Then all three simultaneously tore +off the receivers and looked at each other. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_41'></a>41</span> +</p> +<p> +“Whew, what do you know about that?” said Bob, +in an awed tone. +</p> +<p> +“And on the very night that we decided to set up +the radio, too,” said Frank. +</p> +<p> +“It seems like the hand of fate,” declared Jack. +“Say, we must get father and Tom Farnum.” +</p> +<p> +“Thorwaldsson’s airship found wrecked on land +near the mouth of the MacKenzie,” said Bob. “And +the skeleton of the aviator. Can you beat it?” he +ejaculated again. +</p> +<p> +“Hey, Jack, wait a minute,” cried Frank, running +after his companion, who already had started for +camp. “Discovered by Indians who were bringing +out furs, did you get that?” +</p> +<p> +Jack nodded, but saved his breath as he continued +to run. Frank fell in beside him, Bob pounding at +his heels. +</p> +<p> +In a few moments they burst excitedly upon the +graveled beach by the river, where camp had been +made for the night. Dick and Art lay outstretched +in slumber under the nearest fir trees. Mr. Hampton +and Farnum were still deep in their discussion, and +apparently had not even been aware of the absence +of the boys, for they looked up in surprise as the +latter approached. +</p> +<p> +“What is it, Jack? What’s the matter?” demanded +Mr. Hampton, rising to his feet in alarm, as he +noted his son’s excitement. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_42'></a>42</span> +</p> +<p> +Quickly, Jack related what had occurred, describing +their setting up of the radio, their picking-up of +the Edmonton station’s nightly program, and their +discovery that Thorwaldsson’s airship had been +found far behind them near the mouth of the MacKenzie. +</p> +<p> +“It was only a bulletin news report, Dad,” Jack +explained, “yet I suppose it contains all the facts. +Evidently the discovery of the airship had been made +weeks ago by Indians, going to the mouth of the +MacKenzie with their Winter catch of furs. But, +of course, it took a long time for the news to reach +civilization. It was just made public today. The +very day, too, that we decided to rig up the radio. +It certainly seems like the hand of fate, doesn’t it, +Dad? If we had waited until tomorrow, or set up +the radio yesterday, probably we would not have +known of this discovery.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded, but absently. Already his +mind was busy with the problem. +</p> +<p> +“Did the report state any message or papers of +any sort were found on the body of the aviator?” +</p> +<p> +“No. Only that the body had been there a long +time, as nothing but the skeleton remained.” +</p> +<p> +“And that was all?” +</p> +<p> +“That was all the definite information,” said +Frank. “Of course, there was a word or two of +speculation as to what had occurred. The theory +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_43'></a>43</span> +was advanced that the aviator was flying to summon +aid for Thorwaldsson, who was in some predicament, +but that some accident occurred to his engine while +flying, and he fell to his death.” +</p> +<p> +“A plausible enough theory,” said Farnum. “But, +in that case, I can’t understand why the aviator did +not bear some message from Thorwaldsson. Can +you, Mr. Hampton?” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton shook his head. +</p> +<p> +“That’s not the only puzzling thing,” he said. +“The disappearance from the MacKenzie of Thorwaldsson’s +ship, the death of the aviator, the lack of +message on his body, the swallowing up of Thorwaldsson +and his party, Thorwaldsson’s failure to +send any radio messages—all these need explaining. +</p> +<p> +“We must face the fact,” he continued, “that some +disaster of a totally unexpected nature has befallen +Thorwaldsson’s expedition. And I mean by that a +disaster of man’s agency. They were prepared for +practically all eventualities in their grapple with +nature. Although the Winter was severe, yet they +were well provisioned, had Farrell who knew the +country, and were prepared in every way for a +lengthy stay. Even if worst came to worst, and +Winter proved too much for them, some would have +survived and brought out word of what had befallen.” +</p> +<p> +“Then you think, Dad—” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_44'></a>44</span> +</p> +<p> +Jack regarded his father, wide-eyed. +</p> +<p> +“I think, Jack,” said the latter firmly, “that it is +time to take you boys into our complete confidence, +Farnum and I have been talking this matter over. +We feel pretty certain that some powerful man or +group of men has knowledge of Farrell’s discovery +of the river of oil, and is working against us. How +to explain the obtaining of that knowledge I do not +know, But, perhaps, some traitor in Anderson’s +employ, somebody high in his confidence, got some +word of it. Perhaps, Thorwaldsson in an unguarded +moment, let some bit of information fall. Oil, you +know, is a vital necessity of the world. Discovery +of a vast new field would make great fortunes. +</p> +<p> +“Whoever heard of it, heard of Farrell’s discovery, +would realize that the only way to come upon +it would be to follow the Thorwaldsson expedition, +dog its steps and, at the psychological moment, +strike. In other words, when the field was rediscovered +by Farrell, wipe out the Thorwaldsson expedition, +and claim possession. +</p> +<p> +“Events, as they have occurred, seem to fit in with +this theory. The disappearance of Thorwaldsson’s +ship from the MacKenzie. Apparently it traveled +only at night, thus slipping by the scattered trading +posts on the great river. It has never been heard of +since. It might very easily have been scuttled and +sunk, or else materially changed in appearance in +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_45'></a>45</span> +some little bay on that far northern coast of the +Arctic. That would mean that the crew was bought +up, but that is not an impossibility, for men I am +sorry to say break faith for gain. As to the airship, +the aviator whom I know of as a man true and tried, +may have sought to make his escape to the outside +when Thorwaldsson was captured—as I believe +likely—and may have paid with his life for his +devotion, through some unforeseen accident to his +machine.” +</p> +<p> +The boys stood stunned. Finally Jack broke +silence. +</p> +<p> +“But, Dad, how terrible,” he said in a shocked +tone. “To think of men being so unscrupulous.” +</p> +<p> +“Not all men, Jack,” said his father. “Remember +that.” +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Hampton,” said Frank. “What do you intend +to do?” +</p> +<p> +“Frankly, I don’t know,” said the latter. “Now +that we are within striking distance of our objective—the +river of oil—I do not want to give up. +If it lies where we believe it to lie, we can reach it +before necessity compels us to flee south to escape +oncoming Winter. That will mean that we can map +the route for future operation. I had at one time, +too, although I did not mention it to you boys, some +hope that we would be able to follow the river out +into the Arctic and discover a route of approach by +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_46'></a>46</span> +water. But we may not have time for that. However, +once we do locate the river by land approach, +we will have a pretty accurate idea of whether it can +be reached by ship through the Arctic Ocean in +Summer. +</p> +<p> +“But whether to push on and imperil you lads, and +the rest of us, in the light of what we suspect lies +ahead, I do not know. We shall have to sleep over +it.” +</p> +<p> +After some further conversation, all returned to +where the boys had rigged up the radio. Dick and +Art were childishly delighted at the concert, the first +in their experience. Farnum was almost equally +stirred. As to Mr. Hampton, for the time he forgot +his worries in enjoyment of the music. As showmen, +the boys were in the element. +</p> +<p> +More than an hour passed, and the concert was +still in progress, when Frank, who had been absent +unnoted suddenly approached from the thick forest +of firs on the bend, below which lay their camp, with +a face so pale that Jack, who first caught sight of +him, became alarmed. +</p> +<p> +“What is it, Frank?” he asked, seizing his comrade +by an arm. +</p> +<p> +For a moment Frank was speechless. He +swallowed convulsively, but was unable to make a +reply. The others looked at him in astonishment, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_47'></a>47</span> +and all tore the headpieces off and neglected the closing +number of the concert, as they stared at him. +</p> +<p> +With outstretched arm, Frank pointed towards +the point of land, making a bend in the stream, +beyond which lay their camp. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_48'></a>48</span><a name='chVI' id='chVI'></a>CHAPTER VI.—INDIANS!</h2> +<p> +“Indians.” +</p> +<p> +That was all Frank said, but it was sufficient. Over +the faces of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and the two men, +Dick and Art, came looks of alarm. +</p> +<p> +“In camp,” asked Jack, a sudden thought striking +him. “Maybe they’re just visitors.” +</p> +<p> +But Farnum shook his head decisively, before +Frank could reply. +</p> +<p> +“The only Indians in this country hate the white +man,” he said. “They have had some cause, goodness +knows. But the point is, they hate us.” Turning +abruptly to Frank, he said: +</p> +<p> +“Do they know where we are? Were you seen?” +</p> +<p> +“I was approaching our camp from this side,” +said Frank, who had recovered his speech. “I was +in search of a handkerchief, for I’ve got a little cold, +and found I did not have one with me. Anyway, +my feet made no sound on the pine needles, and I +was screened from the camp by the trees. Suddenly, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_49'></a>49</span> +as I neared the last fringe, I saw a dozen Indians +or more steal out of the trees on the other side of +the clearing. They fell upon our belongings and +started going through them. I hurried away to +warn you.” +</p> +<p> +“Quick,” said Farnum, “there is no time to lose. +We are seven and all armed. They saw us depart +and probably thought this was a grand chance to +rifle our camp. Waited a while to see if we were +coming back at once. I imagine they are just +thieves. Well, we’ll give them a lesson. Come on.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton laid a detaining hand on Farnum’s +arm. +</p> +<p> +“Even if they are thieves,” he said. “We want +no bloodshed. Shoot over their heads, if shooting +is necessary.” +</p> +<p> +Farnum’s face fell. +</p> +<p> +“All right, sir,” he said. “Just as you say. But +we’ll have to hurry, or they’ll get away with everything +and escape in our canoes. Then we would be +out of luck, indeed.” +</p> +<p> +With beating hearts, the party stole back through +the trees, spread out with intervals of several yards +between each. Dick and Art, who never stirred +anywhere without their rifles with them, being old-timers +who knew what it meant to be separated +from their weapons in this wild land, were on the +ends of the line. The boys had left their rifles behind, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_50'></a>50</span> +as had Mr. Hampton. Farnum, however, had +brought his, and held the middle position. The +other four were armed with their revolvers. +</p> +<p> +As they neared the fringe of trees forming the +last rampart between them and camp, crouching +behind tree trunks as they stole forward, they could +see a group of Indians still busy over their disordered +luggage, which had been opened and tossed +about near the fire. Another group was at the +water’s edge, loading the canoes which had been +drawn up on the sand. +</p> +<p> +“Just in time,” thought Jack. +</p> +<p> +Then his eye was caught by a picturesque figure +of a man emerging from the little tent which Mr. +Hampton employed, because he was a sufferer from +rheumatism and wanted some shelter to keep off +night chills in case they were late in getting out of +the country, but which at present frequently was +not set up on their halts. The present occasion, +however, a whim to sleep under canvas rather than +the fir trees had possessed him, and the tent had +been set up. +</p> +<p> +The man who caught Jack’s attention differed +little in dress from Dick and Art, but about his +head was bound a red bandanna handkerchief in +piratical fashion, and this suggestion was increased +by his long, drooping black mustaches. Jack could +see him clearly, and thought that seldom had he +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_51'></a>51</span> +looked upon a more villainous countenance. The +fellow held a piece of paper in his hand, and was +reading it with evident satisfaction. +</p> +<p> +A low exclamation from Farnum, next in line on +his left, drew Jack’s attention. He looked at the +latter, crouching behind a tree. Farnum’s eyes were +ablaze. He had raised his rifle and was pointing it +at the man before the tent. The next moment there +was a report, the paper fell from the fellow’s hand, +and he emitted a howl of surprise and pain. +</p> +<p> +“Just the hand,” Jack overheard Farnum say in +a tone of vexation, as he prepared to fire again. But +the other, seizing his wounded hand in the unwounded +one, did not wait for the attack. Running +low and in zigzag fashion, he darted for the cover +of the trees on the other side of the camp, at the +same time shouting an unintelligible warning to his +companions. +</p> +<p> +“Fire,” shrieked Farnum, pumping another shot +after the fleeing man, that kicked up the dirt at his +heels. “That’s Lupo the Wolf. Shoot to kill.” +</p> +<p> +Jack shot with the rest, but remembering his +father’s exhortation fired high. The volley was +general. From the rifles of Art, Dick and Farnum +came deeper notes of heavy weapons, while from +the four revolvers of the others poured a succession +of shots. It sounded as if an army were opening +fire from the woods. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_52'></a>52</span> +</p> +<p> +The Indians did not stay upon the order of their +going. Those grouped about the luggage ran after +the disappearing man Farnum had called Lupo the +Wolf, while the other group at the canoes dashed +away along the graveled bank of the stream. One, +however, sought to launch the canoes into the swift +current before departing, but his first effort was ineffectual, +and any further attempt was stopped by +a bullet from Mr. Hampton’s revolver, which +winged him in an arm and sent him scurrying after +his fellows. +</p> +<p> +“Dick, Art, here,” cried Farnum, peremptorily. +</p> +<p> +The two ran to his side. +</p> +<p> +“That was Lupo the Wolf,” Farnum explained +rapidly, his voice betraying his excitement. “You +can guess what that means?” +</p> +<p> +The others nodded, with compressed lips. +</p> +<p> +“I want you to trail them. Don’t run into danger, +but see if their camp is nearby.” +</p> +<p> +With nods of understanding, the two frontiersmen +were off at the run, not crossing the open camp, +but circling it amongst the trees. Then Farnum +turned to Mr. Hampton, and the boys crowding at +his heels. +</p> +<p> +“That wasn’t just an attack from Indian thieves,” +he said. “Mr. Hampton”—and his voice took on +a solemn tone—“that was a blow from the enemy.” +</p> +<p> +“What do you mean?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_53'></a>53</span> +</p> +<p> +“They were desperadoes under the personal leadership +of Lupo the Wolf.” +</p> +<p> +“And he?” +</p> +<p> +“He is a cross-breed, half Indian, half white, and +the most notorious bad man in the north. He is +known not only throughout the length and breadth +of Alaska, but throughout the Yukon of Canada, +too. From Ketchikan to Arctic City, and from +Nome to Dawson, he has gambled, fought, knifed, +murdered, and never been brought to book. Ah, +you consider Alaska is law-abiding these days. To +a certain extent, the towns and mining camps have +grown more orderly and there are sheriffs ‘north of +54.’ But might still rules in the camps.” +</p> +<p> +Farnum spoke bitterly, and leaned a moment on +his rifle. As it was evident, however, that he had +not yet finished, the others did not interrupt. +Presently he resumed. +</p> +<p> +“Lupo recruits his men from the fisheries. Men +of the lowest type come there in Summer, in droves, +lured by the high wages. They form temporary +alliances with the native women. Then in the Fall, +they depart. You can guess what the children of +such lawless unions are like. They are cross-breeds, +inheriting the most vicious and lawless characteristics +of the human race. It is from them Lupo +recruits his following.” +</p> +<p> +“But why should they be away over here, in this +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_54'></a>54</span> +unpeopled wilderness?” asked Mr. Hampton. “Unless—” +He paused and looked questioningly at +Farnum. +</p> +<p> +The latter nodded. +</p> +<p> +“That’s it,” he said. “Why? Unless, if you will +let me finish for you, Lupo is on our trail. And +that I believe to be the case. When Frank here first +came with word of Indians in camp, I considered +them merely raiders from some passing body of +hunters. But when I found Lupo at their head, I +knew better. The wonder to me is,” he said, growing +thoughtful, “that he did not send men to trail +us and kill us or take us prisoner.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton shrugged. +</p> +<p> +“Even the cunningest slip up now and then,” he +said. “Perhaps his men wanted to loot first. And, +anyway, they had only been here a few moments +when, thanks to Frank, we were able to surprise +them. Well, thanks to our good angel, we came +off as well as we did. Nothing stolen, our canoes +still here, nobody hurt.” +</p> +<p> +“Ah,” said Farnum, darkly, “we’re not out of the +woods yet. If Lupo the Wolf is after us, well—there +is trouble ahead.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_55'></a>55</span><a name='chVII' id='chVII'></a>CHAPTER VII.—A MAN OF THE “MOUNTED.”</h2> +<p> +While Mr. Hampton and Farnum turned in to +take inventory to discover what, if anything, had +been stolen, the boys went back to take down and +pack their radio outfit. As it lay in the opposite +direction from that taken by the Indians who, moreover, +were being tracked by Dick and Art and could +not double back without warning being given, it was +considered safe for the boys. +</p> +<p> +When they returned to camp, they found the two +frontiersmen ahead of them. These reported the +Indian camp pitched some two miles in their rear +and that, upon arrival, Lupo and his men had +packed up and taken canoe on the back track. +</p> +<p> +“Now what does that mean?” asked Farnum, +thoughtfully. “It is probable that Lupo has been +behind us all the way, if what I suspect is true, +namely that they have been trailing us. But why +should they be fleeing now?” +</p> +<p> +“They can’t have been close to us all the time, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_56'></a>56</span> +Mr. Farnum,” said Bob, “or why weren’t we attacked +before?” +</p> +<p> +Farnum nodded. +</p> +<p> +“That’s true enough,” he said. “It may be that +Lupo started late and has been all this time catching +up with us.” +</p> +<p> +Breaking a thoughtful silence, Mr. Hampton +said: +</p> +<p> +“As a matter of fact, that seems the most probable +explanation. The other side, Farnum, probably has +a spy at Nome, of whom you are unaware. But the +spy knows your identity. Your story of taking us +into the wilderness to hunt may have deceived this +spy. But then, later, word would reach him from +Seattle of my identity. Not that it is commonly +known. But if some traitor close to Anderson is +trading on Farrell’s secret, my connection with +Anderson would be suspected, especially as several +years ago I worked with the Anderson oil crowd in +New Mexico. So words would reach Nome to +watch me. Then someone would start out on our +trail.” +</p> +<p> +“And that someone was Lupo,” said Farnum. +“A fine cutthroat.” +</p> +<p> +An earnest discussion followed. What did this +turning back of Lupo the Wolf mean? Did he intend +to stick to their trail, but at a greater distance +in the rear? Or did he plan to encircle them and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_57'></a>57</span> +lie in ambush ahead? That his retreat was other +than momentary, and meant he intended giving up +their pursuit, nobody believed. +</p> +<p> +“Look here, Dad,” said Jack, during the course +of this discussion, “don’t you consider it quite likely +that Lupo intends to take us by surprise and attack +us, rather than to retreat?” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded. +</p> +<p> +“I do, indeed, Jack,” he said. “A cutthroat such +as Lupo would have brought his band of desperadoes +here for only one purpose, and that is, to +dispose of us. We were lucky this time by reason +of the fact that they came upon our camp first, and +stopped to loot. But from now on we shall have to +be continually on our guard.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s a good thing, Mr. Hampton, that this is the +long Summer, when daylight never fails,” said +Frank. “That makes it easier to guard against a +surprise attack.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” Mr. Hampton agreed, “that makes it +easier. But from now on, we shall have to be on +the watch continually.” +</p> +<p> +He was silent a moment, thinking. Then he +turned to the other members of the party, Farnum, +Dick and Art being gathered about him as well as +the boys, preparatory to the launching of the +canoes, which were ready loaded. +</p> +<p> +“Are we making a mistake in letting these fellows +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_58'></a>58</span> +out of sight?” he asked. “Would it be better to set +Dick and Art to watch them, and appoint a rendezvous +where we can come together later?” +</p> +<p> +The two Alaskans were silent. Their faces, however, +showed approval of the plan. Farnum struck +his forehead with clenched fist in a characteristic +gesture. +</p> +<p> +“Just what I would have proposed myself, if I +had been awake,” he confessed. “Dick, Art, do you +think you could pick up their trail?” +</p> +<p> +The two nodded. +</p> +<p> +“They won’t back track far,” said Dick. “Art +an’ me can follow ’em afoot. That last portage is +only four miles back, an’ we can catch up with ’em +there. Now about where to meet up with you +again?” +</p> +<p> +“None of us know this country,” said Farnum, +“and so it will be difficulty to appoint a rendezvous. +But, look here. Lupo undoubtedly intends to continue +our pursuit, and won’t let our trail go cold. +Consequently, you will be near us. I think the best +plan will be to report to us at every camp. One of +you can keep watch on Lupo while the other brings +in a report.” +</p> +<p> +“Good enough,” said Dick, the more loquacious +of the pair. “Look for us at tomorrow’s camp.” +</p> +<p> +Supplied with bacon and a little flour sufficient +for a meal or two, guns at the trail, the pair struck +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_59'></a>59</span> +swiftly on the back trail, disappeared among the +trees at the bend and were gone from sight. +</p> +<p> +“All right, boys,” said Farnum. “Let’s get going. +Can you manage your canoe all right by yourselves?” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton laughed. +</p> +<p> +“I think they can scrape along, Farnum,” he said. +“Probably we’ll be asking one of them to help us +before long. Well, come on.” +</p> +<p> +Paddles dipped into the stream once more, the +canoes shot away, and, with Farnum leading to set +the course, the boys fell in behind. In the leading +canoe, as the two men settled down to the stroke a +low-voiced conversation began that lasted a long +time. What Mr. Hampton and Farnum were saying +could not be heard, for the gap between the two +canoes, though not great, was considerable. Moreover, +they spoke in low tones. But the boys sensed +an undercurrent of anxiety felt by both the older +men. As for themselves, however, they were not +worried. On the contrary, the excitement of finding +themselves trailed had brightened them wonderfully. +</p> +<p> +“Old expedition was getting too monotonous, +anyway,” said Bob presently. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I suppose you’ll want to challenge the best +Indian wrestler now, won’t you?” said Jack, in a +tone of mock seriousness. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_60'></a>60</span> +</p> +<p> +“Yes, Bob, why didn’t you go back with Dick and +Art and send in your challenge?” asked Frank, in +the same jollying manner. “You know you haven’t +been in a match with anybody for some time. Here +was your chance, and you went and let it slip away +from you. But, don’t worry, perhaps the Indians +will return. Who knows? You may even have a +chance to exchange courtesies with no less a personage +than Lupo the Wolf himself.” +</p> +<p> +The big fellow grinned, but made no reply. And +so the two canoes swept on between the low banks +of the stream, one weighted with anxiety, the other +filled with light-heartedness. The boys were not +simpletons. They realized, indeed, that they were +in a precarious situation. They were deep in the far +northern wilderness. An enemy of superior numbers +dogged their heels. In all that vast country, +was none to whom they could look for help. But, +for all that, they saw no occasion to worry. It +was not the first time in which they found themselves +in a ticklish situation. They had come unscathed +out of other perils, even winning some +honor in the encounter. They would do the same +again. Thus they put the matter to themselves. +</p> +<p> +Hour after hour passed, during which period +they twice encountered slight rapids, up which they +waded with the canoes instead of portaging. All +were tiring rapidly, for not only was their number +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_61'></a>61</span> +reduced by the absence of Dick and Art, and the +work made correspondingly heavy, but in addition +they were traveling now on reserve strength, as +prior to making the last camp they already had +done a big day’s work. +</p> +<p> +Farnum, however, pushed ahead until at the end +of four hours of travel they came to the shore of a +small lake. Here, in a secluded cove, convenient to +the stream on which they had been traveling, they +were about to make camp, when Frank approached +Mr. Hampton and Farnum and indicated an island +a half mile away. +</p> +<p> +“Isn’t that smoke over there?” he asked, pointing. +</p> +<p> +Farnum stared, and in a moment his keen eyes +confirmed Frank’s observation. Mr. Hampton put +up the field glasses which he always carried strapped +to him, and also saw the smoke. But he saw something +more—a skin kayak drawn up on the shore of +the island. +</p> +<p> +“Hard to tell from that what sort of man is +camping out there,” said Farnum, when informed +of the kayak. “Everybody uses ’em in this country—Indian, +Eskimo, and the occasional prospector. That +smoke doesn’t indicate a big fire. Must be only one +man, or maybe, two. Let’s investigate. If we decide +to make camp out there, well, that island would be +a good place and it would be hard to surprise us +there if we kept guard.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_62'></a>62</span> +</p> +<p> +Once more, paddles were plied, and the two +canoes cut diagonally across the waters of the lake +towards the island. As they approached, Farnum +raised his voice in a hail. A moment later an +answering shout came back. Then a figure stepped +from the trees to the little stretch of sand upon which +the kayak was drawn up and stood, watching their +approach, hand shading eyes against the glare of +the sun, head bare. +</p> +<p> +“Great Godfrey’s ghost,” exclaimed Farnum in +a low voice, turning his head slightly to address +Mr. Hampton, “it’s a policeman.” +</p> +<p> +“What?” +</p> +<p> +“A member of the Northwest—of the Canadian +Mounted Police.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s he doing here?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. But we’ll soon find out.” +</p> +<p> +“Welcome, strangers,” said the other, a tall +bronzed man, as they approached. “Just in time for +a snack.” +</p> +<p> +He advanced to the water’s edge, and stood ready +to help. Farnum’s appraising eye took in the approach. +Shoal water and a sandy beach! He decided +to drive the canoe up on the sands. Shipping +his paddle, he leaped from the bow into the water, +as the forefoot of the canoe grated lightly. Relieved +of his weight, the canoe rose at the bow and sank at +the stern under Mr. Hampton. Seizing the bow, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_63'></a>63</span> +Farnum ran it up on the beach, the uniformed man +lending a hand. A moment later, Jack, who was in +the bow of the boy’s canoe, repeated the maneuver. +The two craft were drawn up side by side. +</p> +<p> +“MacDonald’s my name,” said the Canadian +simply. +</p> +<p> +“Know Arkell of Dawson?” asked Farnum. +</p> +<p> +“Know him well,” said the other. “One o’ the +best on the Force.” +</p> +<p> +“Friend of mine,” said Farnum. +</p> +<p> +The two clasped hands warmly. Then Farnum +introduced Mr. Hampton and the boys. MacDonald +led the way to a sheltered spot among the +trees, where a fire burned. +</p> +<p> +“Just about to broil some fish,” he said. “Lucky +there’s plenty. I’m crazy about fishing,” he continued, +“and when they bit here I pulled out mor’n +I could use. Was wonderin’ what to do with ’em +when I heard your hail. Guess I don’t need to +worry about that any longer.” +</p> +<p> +As he spoke he busied himself about preparations +for dinner, and soon an appetizing odor of frying +fish rose to assail the twitching nostrils of the hungry +boys. +</p> +<p> +“Suppose I get another pan and help, sir,” +proffered Bob. +</p> +<p> +His comrades laughed, for the big fellow’s appetite +was proverbial among them. MacDonald nodded with a +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_64'></a>64</span> +grin of understanding. Bob tore back to +the canoes, and soon returned with a pan in hand. +In a short time the fish were fried, and all hands fell +to right heartily. +</p> +<p> +“Long way off your beat, aren’t you?” asked +Farnum, of MacDonald, as they ate. +</p> +<p> +The other nodded. Then he regarded them +sharply. +</p> +<p> +“Same to you,” he said. “First white men I’ve +seen in many days.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton read a challenge in the straight +blue eyes under the grizzled brows, and met it +promptly. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and I’ll tell you why we are here,” he said. +“I think our meeting with you was providential. If +you have been in this country long, you may have +heard something that will help us. At any rate, +here’s our story.” +</p> +<p> +Whereupon, he proceeded to relate the reason for +their presence. He made a clean breast of it, keeping +back nothing, telling MacDonald of the alleged +oil discovery by Farrell and Cameron, Cameron’s +death, Farrell’s return as guide to Thorwaldsson’s +expedition, and their presence now in an attempt to +trace the missing men. +</p> +<p> +“So that’s that,” said MacDonald. “So that’s the +reason for Thorwaldsson’s ‘Lost Expedition.’ And +it was into this country he come! Well, well.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_65'></a>65</span> +</p> +<p> +In conclusion, Mr. Hampton told of their recent +adventure with Lupo the Wolf. MacDonald manifested +keen interest. His hand, as he poured +tobacco into a pipe, shook slightly, and he spilled a +little of the precious tobacco. +</p> +<p> +“You ain’t heard of it likely,” he said. “You +wouldn’t. But this Lupo killed my partner on the +Force, an’ I asked the Inspector to let me go after +him myself. I followed him in from Dawson an’ +lost his trail several days ago. Now, well—” +</p> +<p> +MacDonald averted his face, rose and walked +down towards the lake shore, and the others +respected his evident desire to be alone and did not +follow. +</p> +<p> +“Out after Lupo single-handed,” whispered +Frank. “And the desperado surrounded by all his +men, too.” +</p> +<p> +Farnum nodded. +</p> +<p> +“That means nothing to the Mounted,” said he. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_66'></a>66</span><a name='chVIII' id='chVIII'></a>CHAPTER VIII.—FIRST BLOOD.</h2> +<p> +So tired were all members of the party after their +unexpected exertions of moving camp and trekking +on, coming at the end of a day filled with fatiguing +labor, that now a haven had been reached and they +had relaxed from their tension, they were ready to +go to sleep at once. First, however, preparations +had to be made not only to keep guard but to keep +watch also for Dick and Art. Although the latter +did not know definitely, of course, where they were +encamped, yet it would not be difficult for them to +follow the trail at least to the shore of the lake. +</p> +<p> +“Look here,” said MacDonald, returning to join +the conference, “I’m not near as tired as the rest of +you. I’ll keep watch for your friends for a couple +of hours while the rest of you get some sleep.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” said Farnum, gratefully, “that is, if +you promise to wake me at the end of two hours. +I can use a little sleep right now.” +</p> +<p> +“Turn in, then,” said MacDonald. “These +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_67'></a>67</span> +spruces give you enough shade. And, anyway, I +guess you don’t need much inducement to go to +sleep.” +</p> +<p> +“I could sleep right out in the open sun with my +face turned up to the sky,” said big Bob, yawning. +“Well, nighty night, folks.” +</p> +<p> +Nothing occurred during MacDonald’s watch, +and at the end of the two-hour period he awakened +Farnum, in keeping with the agreement. +</p> +<p> +“Thought some of letting you sleep on,” he said. +“But, to tell you the truth, I been travelin’ hard myself, +and need a little sleep, too.” +</p> +<p> +“Right,” said Farnum. “I’d have been peeved if +you hadn’t waked me.” +</p> +<p> +Several hours later, Farnum keeping lonely vigil +among the bushes by the lake shore, descried a +canoe shoot out of the mouth of the stream down +which they, too, had come and swing into the lake. +At first, as only the bow of the canoe appeared, he +was startled, believing Lupo’s Indians already were +on the trail. But a moment later, with relief and +yet surprise to see them there, he made out the two +figures in the boat as those of Dick and Art. +</p> +<p> +The pair rested on their paddles a moment, +scanning the shore and also, Farnum noted, apparently +casting anxious glances behind them. He +was too far away, however, to see whether that +were really the case. Farnum realized that, with +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_68'></a>68</span> +the skin kayak belonging to MacDonald now drawn +safely out of sight among the bushes, beside their +own canoes, Dick and Art would not have the same +indications pointing to the island that had he on +arrival. Therefore, he stepped from the bushes and +was just about to set his cupped hand to his mouth +and call when the unexpected occurred. +</p> +<p> +Dick and Art already had dipped their paddles +into the water again and were making a wide swing +with the evident intention of bringing the canoe +parallel to the shore but some distance out, when +Farnum’s startled eyes beheld another canoe arrive +at the mouth of the stream behind them. +</p> +<p> +Action was as quick as thought. Dick and Art +evidently had managed to obtain one of Lupo’s +canoes and were being closely pursued. How closely, +moreover, apparently they did not know. He must +warn them, not only of his presence and of help +close at hand, but also of the danger behind them. +The course they were taking would bear them away +from the island and, unless changed at once, would +make it possible for Lupo to cut them off from their +friends. +</p> +<p> +Although he had left his rifle at camp, as he +stumbled out with sleep filling his eyes and dulling +his brain, Farnum had his automatic swinging in +the holster at his belt. Whipping it out, he shot +three times in rapid succession. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_69'></a>69</span> +</p> +<p> +At the sound, Dick and Art stared towards the +island where Farnum, stepping into the open, was +vigorously waving his hat to attract their attention. +Lupo’s men also set up a shout, as they churned the +water racing to cut off their quarry. +</p> +<p> +“What is it?” cried Frank, first of the aroused +camp to gain Farnum’s side. +</p> +<p> +Then his glance took in the situation. +</p> +<p> +“Look here, those fellows might pick off Art +and Dick before they can gain safety, even if they +don’t succeed in cutting them off,” he said. “Let’s +get our rifles, fellows, and open fire. A long shot, +but they’re coming closer.” +</p> +<p> +“Anyway, it will make them draw in their horns,” +said Farnum. “Tell you what, you boys run and +get the rifles, and Mr. Hampton and I will launch +one of our canoes. We’ll go out to help Dick and +Art, if those fellows keep closing in on them.” +</p> +<p> +The three boys sped away, nothing loath, but +when they returned they found Farnum’s plan unnecessary. +As the two canoes had swept along, +Dick, who was in the stern, suddenly had thrown +down his paddle, and taken up his rifle, while Art +had swung the canoe about with one dexterous +stroke. Dick immediately had opened fire, and Art +had followed suit. +</p> +<p> +The boys heard the shots as they ran down towards +the shore. When they reached the sand +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_70'></a>70</span> +they found Lupo’s men already had faced about and +were hurrying towards the mainland. One of their +number evidently was hit. +</p> +<p> +“Main good shootin’ at long range a’ so quick +after paddlin’,” commented MacDonald appreciatively. +</p> +<p> +Content with having beaten off their enemies, the +two desisted, resumed their paddles and soon were +within hailing distance. Greetings and congratulations +were exchanged, and Dick and Art ran their +canoe on shore. As soon as the first hubbub of +exclamations died away, Mr. Hampton led the way +to the camp. MacDonald put the coffee pot on the +fire and between draughts of the strong, hot liquid +Dick told their story. +</p> +<p> +After leaving the previous camp, they had gone +back to where they seen Lupo break camp and start +on the back trail. The meaning of this move, they +had discussed. It seemed to them folly to believe +Lupo was relinquishing the chase. They believed +he would suspect Mr. Hampton and Farnum would +spy on him, and was merely trying to throw them +off guard by creating the impression that he was +abandoning the chase. Therefore, they had gone +warily, convinced that at the end of a short withdrawal +Lupo would call a halt and prepare to ’bout +face. +</p> +<p> +This suspicion proved correct. Some two miles +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_71'></a>71</span> +farther on they discerned the four canoes of the +half-breed halted alongshore while Lupo harangued +their occupants. +</p> +<p> +“We wanted to listen powerful bad to what he +was a-sayin’,” explained Dick. “But we couldn’t +get close enough. There wasn’t much cover near +’em and we had to lay hid where the trees was thickest, +quite a ways off. Art and I lay there, a-strainin’ +our ears but without any luck when suddenly somethin’ +happens. Most of ’em was on shore, listenin’ +to Lupo but in one canoe was one man a-huntin’ +around like he’d lost somethin’. +</p> +<p> +“What it was we never did know. But suddenly, +this fellow shoves off with a shout to Lupo. Lupo +answers like he was agreein’. So then this fellow +comes a-paddlin’ down stream like mad. As he +goes by where we’re a-layin’ low, Art whispers to +me: ‘This is where Lupo turns his gang around. +That’s sure. Best thing we can do is to beat it +back an’ warn our crowd. An’ my legs is tired. +I’d like to let my arms work for me. Let’s go.’ +</p> +<p> +“I nods, and without any more words we backed +out and started down stream after that canoe. The +fellow is goin’ like mad, which means he ain’t intendin’ +to go far. He’s lost somethin’ or other and +thinks it may be floatin’ on the water or, maybe is +layin’ on shore where he touched. Anyway, that’s +what we thought. We never did get to know. For +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_72'></a>72</span> +after we’d made a bend in the stream and put some +distance between Lupo and us, we decided it was +no use runnin’ any farther. +</p> +<p> +“‘Here goes,’ said Art. And he let fly over the +Indian’s head. That fellow didn’t wait for more. +He just jumped out of the canoe an’ started +swimmin’ for the other shore. So then Art give me +his rifle an’ he swims out and brings in the canoe. +Last we seen of that Indian he was streaking it back +on the other bank. I got in and—well, here we are.” +</p> +<p> +MacDonald, who had listened in silence, suddenly +interrupted: +</p> +<p> +“How many men has Lupo got with him?” +</p> +<p> +“A dozen.” +</p> +<p> +MacDonald looked at Mr. Hampton. +</p> +<p> +“You know why I want him,” he said. “For +murder. And then there’s this raid on you. There +are eight of us, includin’ these husky young fellows +of yours. Will you help me capture him an’ his +gang?” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton looked thoughtful. +</p> +<p> +“But, MacDonald, what would you do with them? +We can’t turn aside from our own object long? We +couldn’t help you guard them. And you couldn’t +get twelve or thirteen men back to your Post single-handed, +especially if any of them are wounded.” +</p> +<p> +MacDonald’s face fell. +</p> +<p> +“Guess you’re right,” he said. “But when I think +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_73'></a>73</span> +o’ that skunk—murderin’ the best pal a man ever +had—well, I see red, that’s all.” His head sank to +his clenched hands and he sat on a fallen tree, staring +moodily at the ground between his feet. +</p> +<p> +“Certainly is a problem, Mr. Hampton,” said +Farnum, slowly. “If we don’t do something, Lupo +will continue to hang to our trail as we proceed, a +constant danger.” +</p> +<p> +“I know,” said Mr. Hampton. “Let me think.” +</p> +<p> +He, too, sat silent, staring meditatively at the +ground. +</p> +<p> +The boys had been listening with interest. Now +Frank nudged Jack, with whom he was standing by +the fire, and whispered in his ear. Jack’s face +brightened and he nodded. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll bet they have,” he whispered. “Ask MacDonald.” +</p> +<p> +Frank turned to the ranger. +</p> +<p> +“Mr. MacDonald, how far away is your Post?” +he inquired. +</p> +<p> +MacDonald looked up puzzled, but answered +readily enough. +</p> +<p> +“A good four hundred miles to the South.” +</p> +<p> +“Why do you ask, Frank?” Mr. Hampton wanted +to know. +</p> +<p> +“Just a minute, sir, please,” begged Frank, once +more turning to MacDonald. “And how many men +are at the Post?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_74'></a>74</span> +</p> +<p> +“Captain and five men.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, is that all?” +</p> +<p> +Frank’s tone was one of disappointment. MacDonald +smiled slightly. +</p> +<p> +“People think the ‘Mounties’ must be as many as +an army,” he said. “Well, we keep this wilderness +clean with a handful. O’ course, when necessary, +too, we can swear in deputies.” +</p> +<p> +“Have you got wireless at the Post?” asked +Frank. +</p> +<p> +MacDonald nodded. +</p> +<p> +“Captain equipped us some time back,” he said. +“All posts or forts, as we call them sometimes, have +wireless now.” +</p> +<p> +“Good for you, Frank. I see what you’re driving +at now,” said Mr. Hampton. “You—” +</p> +<p> +Frank nodded. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir. I thought if we helped Mr. MacDonald +capture Lupo and his gang, we could call +his Post by wireless and have them send men to help +him take his prisoners in.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_75'></a>75</span><a name='chIX' id='chIX'></a>CHAPTER IX.—A CALL TO THE FORT.</h2> +<p> +“Now,” said Jack, “is the time that I wish I had +my 20-kilowatt radio tube that I have been working +on so long.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton, Bob and Frank nodded sympathetically. +An enthusiast on radio, Jack had +developed a number of new appliances. The latest +of these was not yet completed. He had worked on +it in the laboratories at Yale during the Winter and +Spring. The lateness of his return to his classes, +however, inasmuch as he did not arrive at college +until after Christmas, due to the delay occasioned +by his adventures in South America in search of +“The Enchanted City of the Incas,” compelled him +to devote most his time to catching up in his studies. +He did not, therefore, have as much time to devote +to laboratory experiments as he desired. As a consequence, +the 20-kilowatt tube had not yet been perfected, +when time came for him to depart for +Alaska with his father. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_76'></a>76</span> +</p> +<p> +Jack’s 20-kilowatt tube, when completed, would +be the most powerful in the world, and he expected, +moreover, to construct others of greater kilo-wattage. +A 75-kilowatt tube had been produced in England, +it is true, but it had not been found practicable. +Jack’s tube was to be steel-jacketed and equipped +with a water-cooling device, due to the heat produced +when in operation. His big dream was that +this tube, when used as an amplifier in conjunction +with an alternator, would make trans-atlantic telephonic +communication as common as cabling or +wireless telegraphing. +</p> +<p> +“If I only had one of my 20-kilowatt tubes now,” +he mourned, “we would be able to talk not only with +Mr. MacDonald’s Post but with Dawson or even +Nome.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, Jack,” said Frank, “it’s too bad. Just the +same, let’s get busy. For, with our 50-watt oscillator +tube set we will be able to communicate by +telegraph up to 500 miles. And, as the Post is only +400 miles away, we can reach it easily.” +</p> +<p> +For sending up to 500 miles, the boys knew they +could use either three or four 5-watt oscillator tubes +in parallel, or one 50-watt oscillator tube. They had +decided on the latter method, in making their preparations +for departure in faraway Seattle. For one +thing, and the biggest, transportation was the most +important item. And the 50-watt tube set was the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_77'></a>77</span> +more compact. Quickly, then, with Mr. Hampton +helping, they got out the various parts from their +baggage and made the connections. +</p> +<p> +Farnum, the Northwest policeman, MacDonald, +and Dick and Art, watched with puzzled interest +and even awe as the four, working in unison, put +together the aerial series condenser, the blocking +condenser, the grid condenser, the telegraph key, +the chopper, the choke coil in the key circuit, the +filament volt-meter, the protective condenser in the +power circuit, the storage battery and the motor +generator. +</p> +<p> +Farnum and MacDonald asked questions, although +Dick and Art were content to sit silent +and watch, keen-eyed, as the construction work +progressed. Several times, too, Dick arose and +went to the water’s edge to keep watch against surprise. +That any would be attempted for the time +being, nobody believed, as they figured the enemy +would consider them on guard. +</p> +<p> +As they worked, Jack explained for the benefit of +the others. His description of how the low voltage +current from the storage battery flowed into one of +the windings of the generator and drives it as a +motor thus generating higher voltage in the other +winding both puzzled and interested them. By the +time, the set was ready for use, Farnum, who was +something of a mechanic by inclination, had a fair +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_78'></a>78</span> +understanding of the set, but MacDonald, though +interested, was bewildered. +</p> +<p> +“I’m fair beat,” he confessed. “Anyhow, just so +you boys can make it work!” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, we’ll make it work, all right,” Frank assured +him. “Well, now, to try to call the Post. What’s its +call, Mr. MacDonald?” +</p> +<p> +“I happen to remember,” said MacDonald. “We +were all so interested when wireless was put in that +Captain Jameson gave us a little lecture on it. He +said our call would be JSN, abbreviation for his +name. We were to remember it, in case of need, +when we were able to get to a wireless station. +Well, this is a case of need.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll say it is,” said big Bob. “Well, come on, +fellows, who’s going to call?” +</p> +<p> +It was an honor or distinction that each was eager +to have, yet each wanted to force it on the others. +A friendly argument developed, to which Mr. +Hampton, smiling, put an end. +</p> +<p> +“Look here, boys, we are wasting time. Suppose +you draw straws for the privilege. You all know +the Morse and Continental codes, so there is no +question of ability involved. Here—” breaking +three matchsticks into varying lengths and offering +them—“take your choice. Longest wins.” +</p> +<p> +Frank drew the winning stick. The others +laughed, clapped him on the back, and without +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_79'></a>79</span> +more ado he began pressing the key and sending +out the signal. +</p> +<p> +“Is somebody on duty at the Post wireless +station, do you think, MacDonald?” asked Mr. +Hampton. +</p> +<p> +“Somebody there all the time,” the latter replied. +“Captain Jameson has found wireless so useful in +policing his vast district that he wonders how he +ever got along without it.” +</p> +<p> +“Hurray,” shouted Frank, “listen. They’re +answering.” +</p> +<p> +To those who understood the code, the answer +was plain: +</p> +<p> +“JSN answering. Who are you?” +</p> +<p> +“MacDonald,” tapped off Frank, grinning mischievously. +</p> +<p> +The receptor sounded almost angry. +</p> +<p> +“Quit your kidding.” +</p> +<p> +“No, I mean it,” replied Frank. “This is MacDonald +of the Mounted.” +</p> +<p> +“Prove it.” +</p> +<p> +“That’ll stump old Frank,” chuckled Bob, in an +aside. But he was mistaken. +</p> +<p> +“All right,” replied Frank, confidently. “Do you +know what my assignment is?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” answered JSN, impudently. “Do you?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_80'></a>80</span> +</p> +<p> +“I’m after Lupo the Wolf,” tapped Frank. “Now +call Captain Jameson.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re not MacDonald,” replied JSN, “because +he doesn’t know the code. But you must be speaking +for him, for that’s right about his assignment. +I’ll call Captain Jameson. You wait.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” tapped Frank. +</p> +<p> +Then he turned to the eager MacDonald, who +was itching to inquire what was occurring, but had +restrained himself until he should be appealed to by +Frank, in order not to interrupt. Like all men +unfamiliar with telegraphy, whether wireless or by +wire, he stood in awe of an operator, and believed +it would be terrible, indeed, to interrupt that superior +being. Frank took pity now on his curiosity, as +well as on that of Farnum, Dick and Art, crowding +behind him, and explained what had happened. +</p> +<p> +“And you actually got the Post?” asked MacDonald, +doubt in his voice. +</p> +<p> +Frank nodded. +</p> +<p> +“My God,” said the big policeman. “Think of +the weeks I spent toiling up here, and now you +come along and talk across that distance without +the loss of a minute’s time. Wonderful, well I +reckon.” +</p> +<p> +“When Captain Jameson arrives,” said Frank, +smiling, “I want you to stand close and I’ll translate +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_81'></a>81</span> +what he says, and you help me with the replies, +will you?” +</p> +<p> +“Won’t I be interrupting you?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, no,” smiled Frank. “You just come close +and wait until I speak. It’ll be all right. Well”—as +the receptor began to click—“I guess this is +Captain Jameson now. Yes,” with a nod, “it’s he, +all right. He’s asking where you are, Mr. MacDonald.” +</p> +<p> +“Tell him I’m four hundred miles away and +close on Lupo. Tell him about yourselves and the +fight, and that we’re going to round up Lupo’s +gang and ask him how soon he can send men to +help me out with any prisoners we take, and if he +can send any at all, and—” +</p> +<p> +“One minute,” said Frank. “I understand. Just +wait a bit now, while I telegraph.” +</p> +<p> +To explain at length the details of that telegraphic +conversation is unnecessary. Suffice it to say, that +the situation was fully explained to Captain Jameson, +and that the latter agreed to start a half dozen +deputies under a Sergeant to MacDonald’s aid, as +soon as he should hear again as to the outcome of +the expedition against Lupo. +</p> +<p> +“It’ll take a while for the men to reach MacDonald,” +said Captain Jameson. “But with game +plentiful and the season open, he can camp until +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_82'></a>82</span> +they arrive, and thus keep watch over his prisoners, +providing he makes any. You people go ahead with +your rounding up of Lupo’s gang, and then let me +hear from you again.” +</p> +<p> +On that agreement, Frank finally closed the conversation, +as there was nothing further to be said. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_83'></a>83</span><a name='chX' id='chX'></a>CHAPTER X.—THE BOYS LEFT BEHIND.</h2> +<p> +“MacDonald, I’ll agree to help you round up +Lupo and his gang,” said Mr. Hampton. +</p> +<p> +They were all sitting in conference, so to speak, +about the camp fire, over which Dick was busy +broiling fish which he and Art and the boys had +just pulled out of the lake. The appetizing odor +made the nostrils of the three hungry boys twitch +with anticipatory delight. +</p> +<p> +“Fine,” said the big ranger, “that’s the way I +like to hear you talk.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said Mr. Hampton, meditatively, “I’ve got +a very good reason why we should cast in our lot +and help you, even supposing Lupo flees and draws +us off our course.” +</p> +<p> +“What’s that?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, it’s an easy enough one to guess. Lupo +evidently is after us. That means that he is being +paid by somebody to do us in, or at least thwart us +in our search. I want to know who that somebody +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_84'></a>84</span> +is. And the only way to find out is to make Lupo +prisoner and question him. Moreover, it is possible +we may be able to learn something about the mysterious +fate of Thorwaldsson and his expedition.” +</p> +<p> +Farnum had been listening closely. He nodded +with satisfaction. +</p> +<p> +“Just what I was thinking myself.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re right, Mr. Hampton,” said MacDonald. +“But such being the case, we’ll have to be mighty +careful that Lupo doesn’t get shot, as then your +prospective source of information would vanish.” +</p> +<p> +“True enough, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton. +“We’ll all have to be on guard against that misfortune, +for misfortune it would be.” +</p> +<p> +He raised his voice, calling the boys and Dick +and Art to him. Then he explained how matters +stood. +</p> +<p> +“As soon as we finish breakfast,” he said, “we’ll +start, and you must all be very careful not to shoot +Lupo, if it comes to a battle.” +</p> +<p> +As they ate breakfast, Bob who seldom spoke +but always to the point, raised a question which had +been puzzling him. +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Hampton, what will we do with all our outfit?” +he asked. “And with our radio transmitter, +especially? Shall we dismount it? Must we take all +our outfit along?” +</p> +<p> +“It would be too bad to dismount the radio, after +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_85'></a>85</span> +our trouble in getting it erected,” said Mr. Hampton. +“And to take all our outfit with us would be +to hamper our movements. On the other hand, we +can’t very well leave everything here, for some of +Lupo’s men might slip away from the main body, +in fact, they may already have done so, and they +would put us in a terrible plight if they raided the +camp, in our absence.” +</p> +<p> +There was silence for a minute or two, then MacDonald +spoke. +</p> +<p> +“We can certainly travel faster without your outfit +to hold us back,” he said, “especially if Lupo +tries to run away. For then we could gain on him +at the portages, by traveling light. Look here, Mr. +Hampton, this island is easily defended. We’ve +been going to the shore to keep watch on the mainland +against surprise. But just a little ways +through the trees is a little rise, a knoll, from which +you can see the waters all around the island. One +man alone could keep guard here.” +</p> +<p> +“But one man couldn’t keep off an attack in +numbers,” objected Mr. Hampton. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” said MacDonald. “With them +high-powered rifles of yours, it might be done. +They carry far, farther than any guns Lupo’s +Indians and breeds will have. Anyway, two men +certainly could manage to hold this place against all +comers.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_86'></a>86</span> +</p> +<p> +“And three,” added Farnum, with a significant +look at Mr. Hampton, “could do it even better.” +</p> +<p> +The boys again were at the fire some distance +away, helping Dick broil more fish. Mr. Hampton +looked at them. He understood the significance in +Farnum’s tone. +</p> +<p> +“You don’t think they would be in danger here?” +</p> +<p> +“Less than they would be in with us, Mr. Hampton,” +said Farnum, lowering his voice as the other +had done. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton considered. The proposal hinted +by Farnum, namely, that the boys should be left at +camp, tempted him. It was most assuredly true +that they would be in far less danger than if they +accompanied him against Lupo. And that appealed +to him, appealed powerfully. He was grateful to +Farnum in his thoughts for his solicitude for the +boys’ welfare. +</p> +<p> +On the other hand, he knew them for resourceful +in an emergency, and good fighters. And since the +idea that information might be obtained from +Lupo had come to him it had taken firm possession +of his thoughts. Lupo must be captured. Would +it not be folly to weaken their force by leaving +three young huskies, each of whom, moreover, was +a fine rifle shot, behind? +</p> +<p> +Besides, what would the boys say? If necessary, +he could command and they would obey. But Mr. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_87'></a>87</span> +Hampton was not one to exercise his authority +dictatorially. +</p> +<p> +“I confess I don’t know what to do, Farnum,” he +said finally. +</p> +<p> +At that moment, a laughing hail from the boys +announced the completion of the second batch of +food, and their imminent return. +</p> +<p> +“Make it a post of honor and danger,” whispered +Farnum, urgently. “Tell them the radio must be +guarded, and the outfit, and that if we take these +things along our movements will be so hampered +that Lupo might escape. Tell them there is a big +possibility, too, that some of Lupo’s gang may attempt +to raid the camp while we are absent.” +</p> +<p> +The boys were so close at hand that Farnum +desisted. Mr. Hampton nodded. As they ate, he +broached the subject of leaving a guard in camp. +</p> +<p> +“Three of us ought to stay behind,” he added. +“That will give sufficient protection for each other, +and provide a sure safeguard against surprise. Also, +that leaves five of us to go after Lupo. Four of +us can go in that bigger of our canoes easily, without +any baggage. It carried three of us, with baggage, +so far, MacDonald can go in his kayak. So +we can hit a fast pace, and make speed at the +portages, if any are necessary.” +</p> +<p> +“Who do you intend to leave behind, Dad?” +asked Jack quietly. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_88'></a>88</span> +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton realized from his son’s tone that +Jack understood his thoughts. +</p> +<p> +“Well, you three boys would be the natural ones +to be selected,” he said. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I say,” protested Bob. +</p> +<p> +“That’s not fair, Mr. Hampton,” cried Frank. +</p> +<p> +Jack was silent. He knew his father. Close +association of the motherless boy with the older +man since boyhood had attuned their minds. He +understood how troubled his father was over the +possibility of running them into danger. And he +decided he would not add to his difficulties, but +would keep quiet, although inwardly he felt dismayed +at the prospect of “missing the fun.” +</p> +<p> +“You see how it is, fellows,” said Mr. Hampton, +and he proceeded to elaborate on the theme furnished +him by Farnum. “It’s a post of honor and danger +combined.” +</p> +<p> +Bob and Frank, however, were not convinced. +They started anew to protest But Jack silenced +them. +</p> +<p> +“All right, fellows, let’s be sports,” he said. “If +the older heads decide they don’t need us, we won’t +force ourselves on them.” +</p> +<p> +“But, Jack,” cried Bob and Frank in chorus. +</p> +<p> +“No, I mean it, fellows,” said Jack. “Come over +here with me, and I’ll tell you something.” +</p> +<p> +Drawing them out of earshot, he added: +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_89'></a>89</span> +</p> +<p> +“Don’t let us make it hard for Dad. He’s got +troubles enough. He’ll feel a lot easier if we aren’t +along. I know how you feel. I feel the same way +about it. But let’s make it as easy for Dad as we +can. Besides, there is something in what he said, +after all. There is no guarantee that some of Lupo’s +men won’t attempt to raid us. For my part, I believe +some of them must be watching this island +right now, and the minute they see the others safely +out of sight, they’ll attack us. For they know our +numbers, and they will realize the three of us are +here alone.” +</p> +<p> +“All right,” grumbled Bob. “Have it your own +way, let’s get some more to eat. I haven’t filled up +yet.” +</p> +<p> +“This outdoor life makes me ravenous, too,” +agreed Frank. “And I used to be such a dainty +eater. Why, I just pecked at my food.” +</p> +<p> +“You mean you ate food by the peck,” said Bob. +“For a little guy, you’re the heftiest eater I ever +saw.” +</p> +<p> +“Little guy, is it?” cried Frank. “I like that.” +</p> +<p> +And without more ado, he made a flying tackle, +his arms locking about Bob’s knees. The big fellow +came down in the brush and Frank piled on top +of him with a shout of glee. +</p> +<p> +“Come on, Jack. We haven’t had a good rough-house +for a long time.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_90'></a>90</span> +</p> +<p> +Grinning, Jack joined in, and the three went +rolling and threshing about the bushes like a trio +of young bears. +</p> +<p> +At the fireside, Mr. Hampton’s worried look relaxed, +and he grinned with enjoyment. +</p> +<p> +“It’s all right, now,” he said contentedly. “They’ll +take their disappointment out in a grand wrestling +jamboree. Well, let’s pack up a little grub and get +ready to go.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_91'></a>91</span><a name='chXI' id='chXI'></a>CHAPTER XI.—BOB FALLS ASLEEP.</h2> +<p> +In no time at all, Mr. Hampton and his party +were ready to set out. Of one thing they were +reminded by Jack, the individual radio sets constructed +along his own lines, the instrument of which +was so small and compact it was contained in the +panel of a ring. +</p> +<p> +“Only trouble with these,” Jack said, “is that you +can receive but can’t transmit. However—” +</p> +<p> +“However,” his father interrupted, “that is all +that will be necessary.” +</p> +<p> +“Why?” asked Farnum. +</p> +<p> +“It is hardly likely that the five of us will get into +such a predicament that we shall fail to return,” +explained Mr. Hampton. “But the boys may be +attacked when we are gone, and may be placed in a +bad position. Then they can call for us.” +</p> +<p> +“At least we could send out a hurry up call over +those sets,” said Jack. “As for your calling us, well, +that will be a little more complicated, Dad, but it +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_92'></a>92</span> +can be done, if necessary. I insist on your taking +that army field set. It came in mighty handy in +South America. It is no great job to set it up. +And it weighs little. You are taking no other equipment, +and you can afford to take it along. It won’t +be in your way. Here it is, you see, all boxed up +complete, handle on the box and everything.” +</p> +<p> +“Right, Jack,” said his father. “Now we can +communicate with each other easily enough. +Well”—looking about him—“are we ready?” +</p> +<p> +The others nodded. +</p> +<p> +“Then,” Mr. Hampton said, “I propose that we +bring our canoes back through the trees, cross the +island and make for the mainland on the other side.” +</p> +<p> +Farnum and MacDonald nodded agreement. +</p> +<p> +“This island is pretty long,” said MacDonald, +“and it will screen our departure on the other side, +in all likelihood. It is hardly likely, as a matter of +fact, that we will be seen, for Lupo’s party has not +shown itself since we beat off that canoe, and +probably is somewhere back up that stream out of +which your party came.” +</p> +<p> +“You think they cannot see the mainland on the +other side of this island from there, Dad?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t believe so,” said Mr. Hampton. +</p> +<p> +“Even if they do catch a glimpse of us,” suggested +Farnum, “isn’t it probable they’ll believe we +are pushing on? As a matter of fact, however, we’ll +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_93'></a>93</span> +land on the mainland, and carry our canoes inland +and then up along the lake till we are out of sight, +when we can cross again, I suppose that’s your idea, +Mr. Hampton?” +</p> +<p> +“My idea exactly,” answered the other. “Well, +let’s get the canoe and MacDonald’s kayak. They +have been pulled well up into the bushes, and we +can bring them across the island without detection +easily enough.” +</p> +<p> +“Wait a minute, Dad,” said Jack, laying a detaining +hand on his arm. “If they do see you crossing +the channel to the mainland, on the other side of +the island, they’ll know the whole party isn’t along, +and will realize you aren’t leaving, but merely carrying +out some maneuver.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe, that’s what they will think, Jack. On +the other hand, they might figure some of the canoes +got across beforehand. Anyway, leaving by the +back door, so to speak, is our wisest plan, I am sure. +The channel to the mainland on the other side is only +a narrow one, and the probabilities of our escaping +detection are all in our favor.” +</p> +<p> +The largest of the canoes, together with MacDonald’s +kayak were dragged back through the underbrush +and carried across the island to be launched +on the other side. Nor did Jack neglect to load the +compact field transmitting set in the canoe, as the +party pushed off. Then, amid farewells from both +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_94'></a>94</span> +sides, Mr. Hampton and his party set out for the +mainland. +</p> +<p> +Jack watched the canoe and the kayak depart, with +something of a sinking of the heart. The same +feeling, he suspected, possessed his father. Neither, +however, presented other than a brave and cheerful +front. As for Bob and Frank, they had gotten over +their disappointment at not being permitted to accompany +the expedition, to a certain extent, and, +cast for the first time since the start of the trip, on +their own resources were beginning to enjoy the +situation. +</p> +<p> +“First thing, fellows,” said Frank, as the party +reached the mainland, hauled up canoe and kayak +and struck into the trees, “first thing is to go to this +knoll about which MacDonald spoke, and take a +view of the field.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said big Bob, “then let’s divide up into +watches, so that the pair of us not drawn for the first +watch can get some rest.” +</p> +<p> +“You certainly were born in the Land o’ Nod, +Bob,” scoffed Frank. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said Jack, grinning, “if you’re as sleepy as +all that, we’ll count you out right away. Frank and +I will draw for the first watch, and you can hit the +hay.” +</p> +<p> +“Not so fast,” said Bob. “I’ll take my chance +with the rest of you.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_95'></a>95</span> +</p> +<p> +Meantime, they had been mounting the tree-covered +hill to which MacDonald had referred and +now, reaching the top, found that, despite its low +elevation, it was still so much higher than the rest +of the island and than the shores of the lake as well, +that they commanded a sweeping view not only of +the nearer shore to which Mr. Hampton had gone +but also of the farther one whence they had come. +</p> +<p> +Not a sign of human occupation, however, was +anywhere apparent. Eastward, although they +knew Mr. Hampton and his companions could not +have progressed far, yet the trees rimming the lake +shore were sufficiently dense to hide any sign of +movement. Westward, toward the farther shore, +was a thick belt of trees about the mouth of the +stream, thinning out farther along the shore in both +directions. Neither among the trees nor on the +glades, could they discern anybody although Jack, +who had been thoughtful enough to bring along +their field glasses, scanned the prospect through +them a long time before passing them on to the +others, who did likewise. +</p> +<p> +“Well, so far so good,” said Jack, with a sigh +of relief. “Evidently, or so far as we can see, anyway, +Dad and the rest got across undiscovered and +now stand a fair chance of crossing the lake farther +up undetected.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_96'></a>96</span> +</p> +<p> +“Maybe so,” said Frank. “Maybe, too, Lupo got +discouraged and quit.” +</p> +<p> +“Retreated you mean?” asked Jack. +</p> +<p> +Frank nodded. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, you fellows are full of prunes,” said Bob. +“Why should he quit now, just because we have +added one more man to our forces? He’s hung to +our trail a long time. That means he’s not going +to quit in a hurry. No, we’ve got to keep our eyes +open.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right,” said Jack, thoughtfully, “It won’t +do to get overconfident and relax our guard.” +</p> +<p> +“Just the same there’s no sign of trouble now,” +said Frank. “And I’ve got a suggestion.” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t lose the idea,” said Bob, anxiously. “Hold +on to it. Ideas are rare.” +</p> +<p> +“With some people yes,” said Frank, grinning. +“Not with me.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh.” +</p> +<p> +Bob clutched at Frank, but the other wriggled out +of his grasp. +</p> +<p> +“My idea,” he said, “is to take a plunge in the +channel your father crossed, Jack. I’m hot and +sticky and tired, and a swim would go fine just +before I turn in and leave Bob on watch. What do +you say?” +</p> +<p> +“So I’m to have the first watch, hey?” said Bob. +“It’s been all decided, has it? Well, well. All right, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_97'></a>97</span> +run along, Frankie, me lad. I’m not so anxious for +a swim. I’ll just start my watch here and now.” +</p> +<p> +“Bob, you’re a good sport,” said Frank, throwing +an arm over the shoulders of his big chum, between +whom and himself was a depth of feeling which +seldom was expressed in words. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, run along and take your swim.” +</p> +<p> +Bob playfully shoved the pair of them down the +hill. Laughing, they obeyed. As they disappeared +among the trees, Bob selected a spot at the base of +a spruce on the top of the knoll, sat down with the +glasses in his lap and his eyes on the westward shore +of the lake, where Lupo’s half-breeds had last been +seen, and prepared to keep watch. His back was +against the trunk of the tree, and he made himself as +comfortable as possible. +</p> +<p> +It was a really comfortable position and, when +one is tired and sitting idle, a comfortable position +is conducive to drowsiness. It was so with Bob. +He had had but little sleep in the last two days. He +had worked hard. The air was warm and drowsy, +as only the air of the short hot Summer of the north +country, when the sun never sets, can be. Presently +his head began to nod, and there was a buzzing in +his ears as of the drowsy hum of bees. He caught +himself, and sat bolt upright, rubbing his eyes +vigorously with his fists. Then he leaned back +against the tree trunk again, and again began to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_98'></a>98</span> +nod. This time, the jerk with which he awakened +was longer in coming. +</p> +<p> +Bob got up and stretched. +</p> +<p> +“Mustn’t go to sleep,” he reflected. “Nothing in +sight, though. Not much use to worry. Ho, hum.” +</p> +<p> +He resumed his seat. Imperceptibly, his eyes +drifted shut. He sat through the transition period +between sleeping and waking, unaware that he was +yielding to slumber, merely pleasantly conscious of +relaxed limbs and thoughts. Before he was aware +his head nodded, his eyes closed, his chin touched +his chest, and he slept. +</p> +<p> +Meanwhile Jack and Frank were thoroughly enjoying +their plunge. The water was warm, there +was no wind, and they swam, dived, floated to their +heart’s content. Neither realized the passage of +time until Frank, suddenly filled with compunction +at their long absence, while Bob kept watch, +scrambled ashore and looked at his watch, laid out +on top of his clothes. +</p> +<p> +“Great guns, Jack,” he announced, “we’ve been +gone an hour. Good old Bob. He was mighty nice +about sending us off to swim while he kept watch, +but you know he likes to swim, too. He’ll be thinking +it’s a low trick on our part to stay so long. +Maybe he’ll want to come and take a plunge himself, +when one of us gets back to relieve him.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_99'></a>99</span> +</p> +<p> +Jack also had a guilty feeling and, as is the way +with most of us, attempted to make excuses. +</p> +<p> +“He might just as well have come along,” he +said. “Nothing’s going to happen.” +</p> +<p> +They were pulling on their clothes. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly they heard Bob’s voice raised in a distant +shout, calling their names. Then followed a +brisk outbreak of rifle shots. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_100'></a>100</span><a name='chXII' id='chXII'></a>CHAPTER XII.—THE SURPRISE ATTACK.</h2> +<p> +“An attack,” gasped Jack. +</p> +<p> +“And we’re not there to help old Bob,” cried +Frank, in an agony of apprehension. “Come on. +Don’t stop to finish dressing.” +</p> +<p> +Shirt flapping out over his trousers, shoes unlaced, +Frank frantically buckled on his revolver and +cartridge belt, seized his rifle and started on a dead +run through the trees. Jack did likewise. As they +ran, they heard the shots continuing intermittently, +and then once more—clearer and closer at hand, as +they neared the knoll—came Bob’s voice: +</p> +<p> +“Frank, Jack, they’re rushing me. Look out for +yourselves.” +</p> +<p> +There was a crashing in the brush ahead. +</p> +<p> +“Down, Jack, some of them coming.” +</p> +<p> +The two flung themselves prone behind a spruce +whose low branches swept the ground. The sounds +were off to their left. A moment later the forms of +four men, hurrying towards the channel whence +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_101'></a>101</span> +they had just come, could be seen eight or ten yards +away. +</p> +<p> +Jack’s face was pale, his lips set. Frank was +trembling with excitement and fear—not for himself, +if the truth must be told, for the plucky lad was +not thinking of himself, but for his chum, who was +holding off the main attack alone. +</p> +<p> +“Steady, Frank,” whispered Jack. “Bob’s life +depends on us. This is no time for false compunctions. +You’ll have to shoot to kill.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, Jack.” +</p> +<p> +Then the two rifles spoke as one, and two of the +runners stumbled, flung out their arms to save themselves, +and pitched forward. The others spun about +towards the direction whence the boys had fired, but +a second time Frank and Jack fired, and they, too, +fell. +</p> +<p> +“No time to see how badly they were hit,” said +Jack. “Come on. Old Bob’s still alive and +shooting.” +</p> +<p> +Forward they dashed once more, not neglecting, +however, to keep wary watch as they ran. No more +of the enemy were seen, however. There was a +sudden uproar ahead, the shots ceased. Cries of +astonishment, stupefaction, even a note of fear, went +up from several throats. Above all was a bull-like +roar that they readily identified as coming from +Bob’s throat. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_102'></a>102</span> +</p> +<p> +Frank’s heart gave an exultant leap. He knew +that yell. It came only when Bob went berserk, and +fought with his hands. He had heard it when they +fought Mexican bandits, Chinese smugglers, rum +runners on Long Island and Incas in the Andes. +He knew well what it meant. +</p> +<p> +Almost at the same moment, they burst into the +glade at the base of the knoll, and came to a dead +halt, eyes popping, standing as if rooted to the spot. +</p> +<p> +But only for a moment. Then they started tearing +up the hillside, among the scattered trees. For +at the top was a whirling heap of figures, as if +caught up in a cyclone, and well they knew what it +portended. Somewhere in the center of the group +was big Bob, at close grips with the enemy, and +not caring how many they numbered. +</p> +<p> +Would they be in time? Could they help Bob +before some half-breed succeeded in sticking a knife +into him? +</p> +<p> +But Bob proved that he could handle his own +affairs, for while they were still several yards away, +first one and then another half-breed was spewed +from the miniature whirlwind, and then Bob could +be seen with several men clinging to his legs and +another on his back, attempting apparently to +throttle him. The big fellow’s hands went up and +back. They settled under the other’s armpits. +There was a sudden mighty heave and wrench, and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_103'></a>103</span> +then the man on Bob’s back came flying through the +air, straight for Bob’s two comrades. He had been +tossed from Bob’s shoulders, as a strong man would +toss a sack of meal. Frank and Jack leaped aside, +and the man struck the ground, rolled over and +over and then lay still, crumpled up against the +trunk of a spruce. +</p> +<p> +Recovering from their surprise, Jack and Frank +leaped forward. But their intervention was unnecessary. +Standing like a young Colossus, legs +apart, with a man wreathed about each, Bob bent +down. One big hand seized each by the neck. +Then the two heads were bumped together once, +twice. The half-breeds collapsed. Their grip on +Bob’s legs relaxed, and he tossed them aside, and +they, too, lay still. He had knocked them out. +</p> +<p> +Then Bob did a surprising thing. He leaped with +a murderous look for the two boys. +</p> +<p> +“More of you, hey?” +</p> +<p> +They sprang aside nimbly, eluding his grasp. +</p> +<p> +“Bob, Bob, it’s us.” +</p> +<p> +“What? What? Oh, you—” +</p> +<p> +Bob looked at them, the battle lust dying in his +eyes, and recognition dawning. It was followed +by a wide grin. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, it’s you.” +</p> +<p> +“Bob, old thing, that was the greatest fight in +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_104'></a>104</span> +history,” cried Frank, hysterically, clapping his +chum on the back. +</p> +<p> +“Never saw the like,” said Jack, doing likewise. +“Thank God, Bob, you’re alive.” +</p> +<p> +“Never was more alive in my life,” said Bob. +“Hey, they’re running away.” +</p> +<p> +He darted away from his chums and sprang +downhill. True enough. The two whom he had +disposed of first, who had dropped out of the fight, +had gained their feet and were running madly +through the trees. +</p> +<p> +Jack ran after Bob and restrained him. +</p> +<p> +“Let them go, Bob. They are alone. There are +three others here we must tie up before they come +to.” +</p> +<p> +Bob followed him back to where Frank was bending +over the man whom the big fellow had tossed +over his head. The half-breed was recovering consciousness, +and beginning to moan. +</p> +<p> +“Broken arm, I think,” said Frank. “He’ll not +bother us. How about the two whose heads you +bumped together?” +</p> +<p> +“They’re recovering consciousness, too,” said +Jack. “Nothing much the matter with them. We +had better tie them up, so they can’t cause us any +trouble.” +</p> +<p> +“Here, take the other fellow’s belt and tie his +hands behind his back with it,” said Bob. At the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_105'></a>105</span> +same time, he suited action to word in the case of +the nearer of the two, whipped off the fellow’s belt +and tied him with it. +</p> +<p> +“Won’t they try to run away, Bob? Ought we to +tie their legs, too?” +</p> +<p> +“No, we’ll just keep an eye on them. Let’s take +a look at the other. If his arm is broken we’ll have +to set it somehow, I guess. Rather pitch him in the +lake, though. He’s a villainous looking rascal. Tried +to choke me, too, and darn near succeeded.” +</p> +<p> +While Frank kept an eye on the two other +prisoners, who had now recovered consciousness and +were beginning to realize their situation but lay still +under the threat of Frank’s rifle, Bob and Jack +examined the third man. +</p> +<p> +His senses were returning, and he moaned a good +deal. Examinations revealed, however, that his +arm had not been broken, merely badly wrenched. +</p> +<p> +“I’m mighty glad of that,” said Jack. “We’d +have been up against it to set a broken arm.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, we could do it, all right, if necessary,” said +Bob. “But I’m glad, too, that it isn’t necessary. +But, say, Jack”—with sudden recollection, and an +air of anxiety—“there were four more of these +scoundrels. We’ll have to look out for them.” +</p> +<p> +Jack’s voice shook a little as he replied. +</p> +<p> +“I think not, Bob,” he said. “Frank and I saw +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_106'></a>106</span> +them first. We ambushed them, practically. They +didn’t have a chance.” +</p> +<p> +“You don’t mean—” +</p> +<p> +Jack’s gaze was steady but troubled. +</p> +<p> +“We had to do it, old man,” he said. “It was +our life or theirs. And yours, especially. When we +heard your shout, and those first shots, Frank went +wild with fear that you had been trapped while we +were away enjoying ourselves. And I guess I felt +as bad as he did.” +</p> +<p> +“Hey, fellows,” interrupted Frank, hailing them, +“the two that got away must have been all that were +left. They’ve jumped in a canoe and are paddling +like mad for the mainland.” +</p> +<p> +“Can you see them?” called Jack, starting to the +top of the knoll to join his chum. +</p> +<p> +“How would I know what they were doing if I +couldn’t?” rejoined Frank. “Yes, I can see them. +Look there.” +</p> +<p> +He pointed. +</p> +<p> +“Tie up that other fellow, Bob, and make him +walk up here to join his little playmates,” Jack called +back. +</p> +<p> +Bob complied. The man groaned, but by now he +had fully recovered his senses, and he obeyed Bob’s +order to move with an alacrity that showed he stood +in abject fear of the husky young American. +</p> +<p> +Frank pointed out the fleeing men, who were +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_107'></a>107</span> +nearing the mainland, and paddling with superhuman +energy, as if fleeing from the Old Nick, no +less. +</p> +<p> +“That accounts for all of them, I guess,” he said. +“So we can sit down now, Bob, while you tell us +how it happened.” +</p> +<p> +“Not much to tell,” said Bob, sinking to a seated +position against the tree trunk. “Except I went +to sleep and was almost surprised, but not quite. +My first intimation that the enemy was near was +when I heard somebody talking in the trees at the +foot of this knoll. Or, did I hear anybody? Was +it just the old sixth sense giving warning of danger? +I don’t rightly know. At any rate, I woke with a +start and looking down through the trees saw a +bunch of half-breeds making their way towards the +other side of the island. +</p> +<p> +“I tell you I was scared. I felt guilty as sin. +Here I had promised to keep watch, and, instead, +had fallen asleep. As a result, the half-breeds had +landed on the island, and were heading for where +you fellows were swimming. I had endangered +your lives. What should I do? That was the +question. +</p> +<p> +“But I didn’t waste must time, puzzling over it. +I knew I had to give you fellows warning or you +would be taken by surprise. So I yelled to you as +loud as I could to look out. I guess they hadn’t seen +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_108'></a>108</span> +me up till then. But when I yelled, they saw me +quick enough, and several of them opened fire, and——” +</p> +<p> +“Wait a minute, Bob,” Frank interrupted, his eyes +shining. “They hadn’t seen you, and you could +have let them pass without attracting their attention, +but you yelled, just to give us a chance for our white +alley. That’s, that’s—” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, forget it,” said Bob, uncomfortably. “You’d +have done the same. Anyway,” he hurried on, “they +split up into two groups, and one kept on going, +while the other rushed me before I could do much +shooting, and—well, I guess you know the rest,” he +concluded, lamely. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll say we do,” said Frank, gripping his big +comrade’s shoulder. “Boy, I’ll never see the like +of that fight again.” +</p> +<p> +“But, Bob, I wonder why they rushed you instead +of trying to shoot you down,” said Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Search me,” said Bob. +</p> +<p> +“I’ll bet I know,” said Frank. +</p> +<p> +“What?” asked both. +</p> +<p> +“They wanted to take you alive, Bob, for some +reason of their own. Probably, would have tried to +take us alive, too, if they’d gotten the chance.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, maybe so,” said Bob. “Anyhow, that’s +that. Now what shall we do?” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_109'></a>109</span><a name='chXIII' id='chXIII'></a>CHAPTER XIII.—MR. HAMPTON RECALLED.</h2> +<p> +Jack and Frank regarded each other with distaste +and even horror in their eyes. +</p> +<p> +“Has to be done, though,” said Jack, as if in +answer to a remark of Frank’s. +</p> +<p> +Frank nodded. +</p> +<p> +“I know.” +</p> +<p> +“What are you two chumps talking about?” asked +Bob. +</p> +<p> +“Those four men we shot down, you know,” +Frank explained. +</p> +<p> +“Think you—” +</p> +<p> +Bob’s question went uncompleted. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” Frank replied. “We shot +straight. It was your life and ours against theirs.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, come on. I know how you feel, but I expect +that’s the first thing to be attended to. If any +of them is no more than wounded, it will be up to us +to do what we can for him.” +</p> +<p> +“Right, Bob,” said Jack. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_110'></a>110</span> +</p> +<p> +“Come on,” Frank said shortly, starting down +the hillside, in the direction of their successful, +though impromptu, ambuscade. +</p> +<p> +“Go easy,” warned Bob. “If they’re able to shoot, +they’ll take a crack at us.” +</p> +<p> +Bob’s advice was followed, and the trio approached +the spot warily. But precaution was needless, +or, while still some distance away, they could +see the four bodies outstretched motionless where +they had fallen. Frank’s face went white, and he +shuddered. Jack was pale. Big Bob, although +he had had no hand in the affray, had to take a grip +on himself, in order to force his laggard steps to +continue. Though many were the affairs of danger +in which they had been, the boys had never before +shot to kill nor had death been brought so close to +them. +</p> +<p> +Frank stopped. He was trembling violently. +</p> +<p> +“I—I can’t look at them,” he gasped. +</p> +<p> +Bob threw an arm over his shoulders. +</p> +<p> +“You and Jack stay here,” he ordered, gruffly. “I +had no hand in this. I’m the fellow to attend to it. +Wait for me.” +</p> +<p> +At that Frank protested, and started to proceed. +But Bob shoved him back, kindly but firmly. +</p> +<p> +“The pair of you have been through enough,” he +said. “Do as I say. Wait here.” +</p> +<p> +And with quick, firm step, keeping himself to the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_111'></a>111</span> +task, he plunged on through the trees. For a moment +or two both Frank and Jack watched him fascinatedly, +then Frank sank down to a sitting position, +elbows propped on his knees, his face in his hands. +Jack faced about, and stared unseeing through the +trees. +</p> +<p> +Presently, Bob’s solid, crunching footsteps could +be heard approaching, and they looked up. His face +was grave, but unflinching. +</p> +<p> +“Look here, fellows,” he said, firmly, “may as +well face the facts. All four were killed instantly. +Drilled through the—— But why discuss it? The +fact is, they’re dead. They were rascals of the first +water, and, as you say, it was their lives or ours. +Self-preservation is the first law of Nature. Now, +what are we going to do about it? We haven’t any +tools to dig with.” +</p> +<p> +Frank shook himself into alertness. +</p> +<p> +“Let’s get the axes—our outfit has some—and cut +off some spruce boughs and cover them over. Then +we can roll some stones on top.” +</p> +<p> +As quickly as possible, without speaking during +the task, and working feverishly, the three carried +out Frank’s idea. Then, back at camp, they sat +down and brewed a pot of coffee. The hot, scalding +liquid steadied their shaken nerves. +</p> +<p> +“Guess we better try to get in touch with your +father, Jack,” suggested Bob, at length. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_112'></a>112</span> +</p> +<p> +“How long have they been gone?” +</p> +<p> +Bob looked at his watch. +</p> +<p> +“Three hours. Seems like a lifetime.” +</p> +<p> +“Things have certainly happened fast,” said +Frank. “Thank goodness, that party missed our +radio. If they had destroyed it, we would have +been out of luck.” +</p> +<p> +“More luck than I deserve,” said Bob, savagely. +“Think of going to sleep on the job. If I had been +awake, they never would have been able to land.” +</p> +<p> +“Forget it, Bob. You certainly have nothing to +reproach yourself with.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, that’s nonsense,” said the big fellow. “I’m +always getting you into trouble.” +</p> +<p> +Frank smiled. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and then getting us out again,” he said. +</p> +<p> +“Well, let’s try the radio, anyway,” suggested +Jack. “They’ve been gone three hours. With the +best of luck they can’t have made more than eight or +ten miles, considering the detour they planned to +take, and everything.” +</p> +<p> +“Couldn’t have gotten that far away in a straight +line,” said Frank. +</p> +<p> +“No, I guess not. But what if they aren’t +prepared for a call from us?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, with that improved ring set of yours, your +father will be proceeding fully equipped to hear +from you,” said Frank. “He need only wear the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_113'></a>113</span> +headphone, and I seem to remember he said on leaving +that he would keep it on most of the time.” +</p> +<p> +Jack nodded. The improvement in the ring set, +spoken of by Frank, had done away with the necessity +for the umbrella aerial. +</p> +<p> +“All right,” he said. “I’ll call Dad on 200 meters. +If he gets the message we ought to hear from him +shortly, for he’ll at once unlimber the field transmitting +set and call us back.” +</p> +<p> +While Jack sent out a terse description of the fight +and its outcome, Frank and Bob decided to steady +their nerves by fishing and went down to the lakeside. +They had reasonable success and had pulled +out a number of fish when Jack joined them. +</p> +<p> +“Send out your message, Jack?” Frank inquired. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and heard from Father in reply, too.” +</p> +<p> +“What? Why, great guns, how long have we +been here? Surely, you can’t have had time to hear +from your father?” +</p> +<p> +“But, I have,” affirmed Jack. “You’ve been here +more than an hour.” +</p> +<p> +Bob and Frank looked at each other. In all that +time, neither had spoken a word. They had just +dozed over their lines, pulling in an occasional fish. +Frank laughed. +</p> +<p> +“I guess we went to sleep with our eyes open,” +he confessed. “Well, what did your father say?” +</p> +<p> +“They made a long trek up the lake before crossing +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_114'></a>114</span> +over, and are not very far away—somewhere up +in that direction—on the other shore, there,” said +Jack, pointing. “Dad was worried as the deuce at +my story, and they’re coming back.” +</p> +<p> +“Coming back? Why? It’s all over now.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s what I told him, Frank. But he’s coming +back, anyway. They’re going to get back to the +lake, and come straight down to the island. Ought +to be here in a couple of hours or less.” +</p> +<p> +“May as well wait dinner for them, in that case,” +observed Bob. “Or what meal is it? Breakfast, +lunch, or dinner? I’m sure I don’t know. This perpetual +sunshine has me all turned around. I don’t +know whether it’s day or night.” +</p> +<p> +“Same here,” confessed Frank. “I do know, +though, that I’m beginning to get up an appetite.” +Then a thought, a thought which his somnolent daydreaming +over the fishing lines had driven away for +the time, crossed his mind, and he paled. “I don’t +know though”—catching his breath—“whether I’ll +ever want to eat again.” +</p> +<p> +Jack looked at him sharply. So did Bob. The +big fellows noted with apprehension the twisted, +stricken look on their slighter chum’s face, and the +haunted appearance of his eyes. To Bob’s keen +eyes, moreover, two hectic spots glowing brightly +in the dark tan of Frank’s cheeks were apparent. +</p> +<p> +“Look here, old man,” said Bob, anxiously, “you +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_115'></a>115</span> +want to quit thinking about that or you’ll be sick.” +</p> +<p> +“Sick?” Frank tried to force a laugh. “I’m the +healthiest invalid ever you saw.” +</p> +<p> +“No, Frank, I mean it. Put that thought out of +your mind, or you will be sick. Why—”laying a +hand on his brow—“you’ve got a fever right now.” +</p> +<p> +Jack was worried, too. +</p> +<p> +“Great guns, Frank, you must take Bob’s advice. +What if you came down sick? We’d be in a pretty +fix.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, you fellows make me tired,” said Frank, irritatedly. +“I’m all right.” +</p> +<p> +But Bob’s worry was not routed. He took his +chum by an arm and started marching him toward +camp. +</p> +<p> +“I’m going to give you a dose of calomel and +make you lie down,” he said. “Come on.” +</p> +<p> +“Calomel? Have a heart.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, calomel,” said Bob, firmly. “That’s what +you need, that and a nap.” +</p> +<p> +Picking up the fish, Jack followed. And at the +camp, despite Frank’s vehement protests, he was +made to swallow a liberal dose of calomel, and then +to lie down on a couch of spruce boughs, over him +the little tent belonging to Mr. Hampton to provide +shade from the northern sun. Jack and Bob sat +down, some distance away, and started cleaning +the fish. They talked together in low tones. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_116'></a>116</span> +Presently, after several glances toward the motionless +figure, Bob arose and tiptoed close to it. On +his return, he nodded, smiling slightly, at Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Asleep,” he said. “Didn’t want to do it, but +overworked Nature was too much for him. I’m a +little bit worried. His nerves got a severe shock. +But I guess he’ll be all right when he wakes up.” +</p> +<p> +Then he glanced more keenly at Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Look here, you’ve been through the same experience. +I had a nap. Now you’re going to take +one. Sleep will be good medicine for you, too. We +don’t want two sick ones on our hands.” +</p> +<p> +Jack didn’t protest, but also turned in beside +Frank, and in a few minutes was sound asleep. As +Bob had said, overworked Nature claimed her dues. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_117'></a>117</span><a name='chXIV' id='chXIV'></a>CHAPTER XIV.—A REVELATION.</h2> +<p> +This time Bob did not go to sleep on the job, +but at the first faint indication that somnolence was +stealing upon him, arose and stamped about vigorously. +Once, prompted by a humane inclination, +he paused by the three prisoners who lay in the +shade, hands and feet tied, and proffered them a +drink of water. The courtesy and thoughtfulness +was totally unexpected, as Bob could see by the +surprise in their eyes, although no words were exchanged, +and they drank eagerly in great gulps. +The half-breed whom Bob had pitched over his +head was in considerable pain because of his +wrenched arm, as Bob could see from his occasional +writhings, and Bob decided to chance trouble by +loosening his bonds. In addition, he rummaged +their stores and brought out a bottle of liniment for +sprains and bruises, with which he bathed the +twisted member. +</p> +<p> +“You good man,” whispered the other, gazing at +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_118'></a>118</span> +him, as Bob bent to the task, and speaking in a +voice barely audible to Bob’s ears, and certainly not +to the other two men a short distance away. “I tell +you something—not now—bimeby—when they not +know.” +</p> +<p> +Bob thought quickly. +</p> +<p> +“All right,” he responded, in the same low tone. +“I’ll fix it.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” The other nodded. “You fix it.” +</p> +<p> +“Now what in the world has he got to tell me?” +Bob asked himself, as he moved away. “Probably, +something about Lupo the Wolf. At any rate, I +can’t see what else it can be. Was grateful because +I gentled him a little—after first maltreating him.” +He smiled at the irony of this thought. “Well, Mr. +Hampton will soon be here, no doubt. Then there +will be a chance to question him apart from his +fellows.” +</p> +<p> +And with that, he dismissed the matter from his +mind. Jack now rolled over, sat up and came out +from under the tent, yawning. Frank continued +sunk in heavy slumber. +</p> +<p> +“By George,” said Bob, looking at his watch, +“two hours since you started to take your nap. +Run down to the shore, will you, and take a look +to see if there is any sign of your father. We +left these fellows alone once”—nodding to their +prisoners—“but I felt it wasn’t wise to try it too +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_119'></a>119</span> +often. Something might happen. So I’ve been +sticking close to camp.” +</p> +<p> +Jack nodded. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, that time you were fishing. It was foolish +for me to run down after you, but I just had to tell +you about hearing from Father.” +</p> +<p> +He set out for the shore. +</p> +<p> +A few minutes later, Bob heard his comrade give +a joyful shout. It was answered by a fainter hail +from the water. Faint though it was, however, it +was unmistakable. Mr. Hampton was approaching. +</p> +<p> +Presently there was a babble of voices approaching, +and the returning party came into view, Jack +in the lead flanked by his father and Farnum, with +MacDonald, Dick and Art bringing up the rear. +Jack was eagerly explaining what had occurred at +camp since his father’s departure. +</p> +<p> +“Hello, Bob,” said Mr. Hampton, coming up, +and gripping the big fellow’s hand hard. “Had +some excitement while we were gone?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, we did, Mr. Hampton. Thought this was +going to be a loafing assignment you left us on—nothing +to do but hang around camp and swim and +fish—and the minute you turn your backs something +happens.” +</p> +<p> +“How’s Frank?” +</p> +<p> +“Jack told you, did he?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_120'></a>120</span> +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded. +</p> +<p> +“He’s still asleep,” said Bob. “The necessity of +shooting to kill was a shock to his nerves. Nature +took him in hand. See.” He indicated where Frank +lay as in a stupor in the tent, unmoved by the arrival +of the returning party. +</p> +<p> +“He’ll sleep for hours yet,” said Mr. Hampton, +“if we don’t make too much noise. I’ll caution the +others. Best medicine in the world for him. He’ll +be all right when he wakes, I expect.” +</p> +<p> +While Dick put on the fish, for all were hungry, +Bob and Jack, in lowered voices, told the others all +that had occurred. Bob repeated his condemnation +of himself for having fallen asleep and permitted +the enemy to land unopposed, but Mr. Hampton +rested a hand on his shoulder, and told him not to +be foolish. +</p> +<p> +“In the first place,” he said, “there seemed to be +no reason why you should keep strict watch. It +hardly seemed likely these fellows would boldly approach +the island.” +</p> +<p> +“Expect they saw us set out, after all,” suggested +MacDonald, “and figured the whole party hadn’t +gone, and that them left behind would be on ’tother +side of the island, so’s they could land and surprise +’em.” +</p> +<p> +Nods of agreement followed this statement. It +was, indeed, the most likely explanation. Over the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_121'></a>121</span> +puzzle as to why Bob had not been slain by those +attacking him, but who, instead, had tried merely +to make him prisoner, nobody had any suggestion +to offer other than that earlier advanced by the +boys themselves, that they enemy wished to take +them alive. +</p> +<p> +“Reckon Lupo thought he’d get some information +from you,” said MacDonald. +</p> +<p> +“But he wasn’t here,” Bob protested. +</p> +<p> +“No, but you can bet they were actin’ on his +orders.” +</p> +<p> +Bob bethought him of the prisoner, who had +whispered that he had something to tell him. He +explained to the others. Mr. Hampton thought for +a moment. +</p> +<p> +“I have it,” he said. “Art, bring the others here +and we’ll question them. At the same time, Bob, +do you slip off and talk to your man. We’ll keep +the pair occupied, so that they won’t be able to see. +Tell your man that presently, then, we’ll call him +up to be questioned, too, and that he’s to pretend +sullen obstinacy and refuse—in the presence of +his comrades—to answer any questions.” +</p> +<p> +Bob nodded and, as Art went for the pair, he +slipped away in an opposite direction. Executing +a flank movement through the trees, he presently +arrived on the opposite side of the camp and got +behind the tree, against which the man with the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_122'></a>122</span> +wrenched shoulder was sitting. In a rapid whisper +he communicated Mr. Hampton’s instructions to the +other. The fellow comprehended, and then in a low +tone, scarcely audible to Bob, who strained to hear, +communicated surprising intelligence. +</p> +<p> +Bob heard him out, then with a final word of +caution, again slipped away, once more skirted camp +through the trees, and approached the group from +the waterside. The two other half-breeds were being +grilled, but without success. At Bob’s approach, +Mr. Hampton turned again to Art. +</p> +<p> +“Bring that other fellow here,” he commanded. +“See if he knows any more than these men.” +</p> +<p> +The man was brought into the council, but, acting +on instructions, maintained an obstinate silence. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, take them away, and feed them,” said Mr. +Hampton finally, as if despairing of obtaining any +information. “We’ll talk to them later, after I’ve +eaten. Dick’s fish will get cold if we don’t fall to, +and I’m too hungry to delay with these rascals.” +</p> +<p> +The men, whose ankle bonds had been removed, +were returned to the other side of the camp and, +with their hands untied, were permitted to eat under +the watchful eyes of Dick and Art. Then once +more they were tied up. +</p> +<p> +Meantime, Mr. Hampton turned eagerly to Bob, +as soon as the trio of prisoners was out of hearing. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_123'></a>123</span> +</p> +<p> +“Out with it, Bob,” he said. “I can see you’re +dying to tell us. Must be important.” +</p> +<p> +“It is,” said Bob, emphatically. +</p> +<p> +“What did he say?” +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Hampton, you think we’re alone in this wilderness +except for Lupo’s gang?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know who else would be here. This is +country that white men never get into.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and three followers +of their party of ten are not more than two hundred +miles away; perhaps less than that.” +</p> +<p> +“What! Say that again.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton was so excited he almost dropped +his portion of fish into the fire. +</p> +<p> +“It’s true,” said Bob. “At least that’s what this +fellow, Long Tom, declares. Long Tom—that’s his +name.” +</p> +<p> +“How does he know?” +</p> +<p> +It was MacDonald who asked the question, and +Bob turned to him. +</p> +<p> +“That’s what I asked him. He said Thorwaldsson +had been attacked before he reached the oil +country, and Thorwaldsson, Farrell and four of his +men cut off from their camp. Those in the camp +were killed, and Thorwaldsson’s supplies looted. +He says a big band of Indians committed the outrage.” +</p> +<p> +“At whose orders?” asked Mr. Hampton. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_124'></a>124</span> +</p> +<p> +“Merely operating on their own, says Long Tom. +He was with them. They wanted the loot. What +they didn’t understand, they destroyed.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s why nothing has been heard of Thorwaldsson,” +said Mr. Hampton, “for his radio equipment +must have been among ‘the things they didn’t +understand.’ Go on, Bob.” +</p> +<p> +“Long Tom thinks Thorwaldsson spent the Winter +with the Eskimos up on the rim of the Arctic +Ocean.” +</p> +<p> +“Where has he been? What became of the Indians?” +</p> +<p> +“They were a hunting party, as far as I could +gather, who, after chasing Thorwaldsson up to the +Eskimos, left the country. But Long Tom wintered +with some Eskimos near Union Straits himself, +and this Spring started out. Then he fell in +with Lupo, who he knew, and joined him.” +</p> +<p> +“And how does he know where Thorwaldsson is +now? Why does he say Thorwaldsson is so close?” +</p> +<p> +“Says he ran across an Eskimo hunter on his way +out, who told of Thorwaldsson having wintered +with his tribe, and learned Thorwaldsson was on his +way out down the Coppermine—or up it, whichever +you choose to call it. Though that was weeks +ago, he believes Thorwaldsson would be following +watercourses that would put him about one hundred and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_125'></a>125</span> +fifty or two hundred miles to the northeast +of us.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, Bob, you certainly learned a lot,” said Mr. +Hampton. “Was that everything? Or did Long +Tom know or have anything to say about Lupo?” +</p> +<p> +“He doesn’t know why Lupo is after us, except +that it has something to do with Thorwaldsson. +That’s all I could get out of him. Pretty indefinite, +but it was the best I could do.” +</p> +<p> +“Indefinite! Nonsense, Bob. That is something +to go on, indeed.” +</p> +<p> +“And to think that old Bob got it all just because +he was kind to a fellow with a sore arm and put +some liniment on it,” said Jack. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_126'></a>126</span><a name='chXV' id='chXV'></a>CHAPTER XV.—MACDONALD TURNS BACK.</h2> +<p> +Taking everything into consideration, Mr. +Hampton decided that before any further steps were +taken, the wisest plan would be for all to get a good +rest. Frank still lay as if in a stupor; Jack looked +and confessed to being shaky; even Bob was tired +from the strain of the terrific fight through which +he had gone, coming upon the top of many hours +of exhausting travel. As for the rest, they had done +practically three days’ work with little or no rest +in the short interval between. +</p> +<p> +“Altogether,” said Mr. Hampton, summing up, +“we are in no fit condition to set out in immediate +pursuit of Lupo and the remainder of his men, nor +even to decide wisely as to what to do. It may be +that the best plan would be not to pursue Lupo but +to set off at once to try and find Thorwaldsson. I, +for one, am too tired even to think straight. So +I vote that we make camp, set watches and turn in +for a good rest. I believe I could sleep the clock +around.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_127'></a>127</span> +</p> +<p> +“If you think you can trust me with the first +watch, Mr. Hampton,” muttered Bob, shamefacedly, +“I’d like to have it. I’ll promise you not to go +to sleep on the job again.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton slapped the big fellow on the back +in kindly fashion, as Bob leaned forward, seated on +the ground beside him. +</p> +<p> +“Forget it, Bob,” he said. “You have nothing +with which to reproach yourself. Certainly you can +have the first watch, if you want it. I expect the +rest of us will be only too glad of the opportunity +to turn in at once. As to there being any further +danger, however, I very much doubt it. You boys +have given Lupo a terrible blow. With four men +killed and three prisoners, he must be short-handed. +If he had only twelve or fourteen, as we believe, +his number now is less than ours. The consequence +is, that I cannot conceive of his attempting again to +attack us here on the island. However, a watch +must be kept, so go to it.” +</p> +<p> +Everybody agreeing with this program, Bob took +the first watch and the rest scattered around the +camp, under the spruces, and soon were sleeping +soundly. When the time to change watches came, +with nothing alarming having broken the calm, Bob +waked MacDonald, and himself turned in. After +that, he did not have even a disturbing dream and +was disturbed by nothing until awakened by being +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_128'></a>128</span> +shaken. He looked up and found Frank bending +above him, his face alight with merriment. +</p> +<p> +“Hey, which of the Seven Sleepers are you?” demanded +Frank. +</p> +<p> +Bob ignored the query, his mind leaping at once +to the picture of Frank as he had last seen him. +In his voice was a note of thankfulness at finding +Frank thus carefree, as he said: +</p> +<p> +“How do you feel, old man?” +</p> +<p> +“Never better,” confessed Frank. “Sleep is certainly +the right medicine, isn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t I know it!” +</p> +<p> +Bob yawned luxuriously, and rubbed his eyes. +</p> +<p> +“Come on, Bob, let’s take a plunge in the channel. +Just got up myself. It’ll wake us up, make +us feel good. Everybody’s up now, and Dick fixing +to get breakfast. He and Art and MacDonald are +fishing. Mr. Hampton and Farnum are talking +things over. And here comes Jack, just piled out +of the feathers, too. The three of us can have a +fine swim.” +</p> +<p> +Bob was agreeable to this proposition, and they +set out for the place where Frank and Jack had gone +in for a plunge before. Without referring to the +tragic little mound beneath which lay the bodies of +the four half-breeds shot down by Frank and Jack, +the boys, as if by common consent, lay their course +through the trees so as to avoid passing near it. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_129'></a>129</span> +</p> +<p> +The water, as Frank had predicted, was delightfully +invigorating, and refreshed and with the young +blood tingling in their veins, after a long sleep and +a good swim, they returned to camp. They brought +voracious appetites with them, but fortunately the +fishermen had pulled in a big haul of beauties, and +these, together with flapjacks made by that skillful +chef, Art, and washed down with coffee tasting like +none ever made in city restaurants, the whole having +the tang of the outdoors and woodland smoke for +sauce, made a delectable repast. +</p> +<p> +“Now,” said Mr. Hampton, at its conclusion, +“now for a discussion of what’s to be done.” +</p> +<p> +Thereupon he set forth the facts of the situation. +Lupo with five or six men at most was still at large. +He might have turned back. He might be in hiding +nearby. He might have gone on ahead in +search of Thorwaldsson. In any case, Mr. Hampton +declared, he felt it would be a waste of time to +search for him in view of the fact that they had +learned Thorwaldsson was somewhere to the north +and east and their primary object was to join forces +with that explorer. He wanted to know what the +others had to say. +</p> +<p> +Farnum, who had been talking matters over with +Mr. Hampton, sat silent, nodding approval. The +other was stating his own views. But MacDonald +voiced a protest. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_130'></a>130</span> +</p> +<p> +“From your point of view, sir,” he said, “I reckon +you’re right. But am I to let Lupo escape now that +I come so close to gettin’ him? And what am I to +do with three prisoners on my hands?” +</p> +<p> +“I’ve been turning that phase of the situation over +and over,” said Mr. Hampton. “I cannot see that +we can afford to diverge in pursuit of Lupo, now +that we have pretty definite information through that +fellow, Long Tom, of Thorwaldsson’s presence +alive and with some of his men in this wilderness. +I know what a blow it will be to you to give up the +chase, but it can’t be helped. You have three prisoners, +and can’t very well watch them and pursue +Lupo, too. They are criminals, and as a member +of the Mounted you must take them in. We can’t +leave you to handle them alone, however, and——” +</p> +<p> +He paused. +</p> +<p> +“And what, sir,” prompted MacDonald. +</p> +<p> +“Well, the least we can do, MacDonald, is to +leave one of our number with you. That will enable +you to keep guard against surprise, watch over +your prisoners, and wait for the arrival of aid from +your Post. We’ll wireless your Captain Jameson +full details of all that has occurred, give him your +position here, and then you can wait for relief.” +</p> +<p> +MacDonald looked thoughtful. He was silent +several minutes, while none spoke, but all watched +him expectantly. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_131'></a>131</span> +</p> +<p> +“If you won’t help me try and round up Lupo, +you won’t, and that’s all there is to it,” he said, finally. +“Not as I blame you, neither. You got your +job, to git hold of Thorwaldsson and help him. With +only a handful o’ men he may be in trouble, too. +Seems natural-like, if whoever is agin you fellows +sent this cutthroat Lupo to cut you off, he’d likely +be after Thorwaldsson, too.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded. +</p> +<p> +“That’s what I’m afraid of,” he said, “that Thorwaldsson +may need our aid.” +</p> +<p> +“Just so,” continued MacDonald. “Such bein’ +the case, your best plan is to try and find him soon +as you can.” +</p> +<p> +“Then you agree to my plan?” +</p> +<p> +“Not so fast,” said MacDonald. “You’ll give me +a man, hey?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes.” +</p> +<p> +“Who?” +</p> +<p> +“Why—I——” +</p> +<p> +“Give me this feller,” said MacDonald, laying a +hand on Bob who sat beside him. “He’s a fighter.” +</p> +<p> +“I couldn’t do that, MacDonald. The boys must +come with me.” +</p> +<p> +“All right. Only that fight he put up—that was +a good one. Kind o’ wished I could have him by +me. Well, then, let me have this feller. Kin see +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_132'></a>132</span> +he’s used to big woods and river country. He’d +make a good Mounty.” +</p> +<p> +This time MacDonald pointed the stem of his +pipe at Dick. +</p> +<p> +“What do you say, Dick?” asked Mr. Hampton. +“It’s up to you?” +</p> +<p> +“I’d have to go out with the Mounties to their +Post, wouldn’t I? Probably have to winter there.” +</p> +<p> +MacDonald nodded. +</p> +<p> +“Get you a job on the Force,” he said. +</p> +<p> +Dick’s eyes shone. Middle-aged though he was, +he was alone in life, loved the wilderness, and still +thrilled to adventure. +</p> +<p> +“That so?” he asked. “Need men?” +</p> +<p> +“Always room for a good one.” +</p> +<p> +“All right. It’s a go,” said Dick. +</p> +<p> +MacDonald nodded approval, spat in the fire, then +turned again to Mr. Hampton. +</p> +<p> +“Such being the case,” he said, “when you talk +to Captain Jameson over that there contraption, just +tell him I’m on my way in.” +</p> +<p> +“What?” +</p> +<p> +“Sure. Think Dick and me would sit here with +three no-account breeds on our hands and wait for +help from four hundred miles away to arrive? No. +We’ll take ’em in.” +</p> +<p> +“But two of you, alone, and with three prisoners +on your hands!” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_133'></a>133</span> +</p> +<p> +“Nothing to that. Once I brought in four single-handed. +Never thought of calling for help except +I had luck enough to capture Lupo and more of his +gang.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton looked astounded. He turned to +Dick. +</p> +<p> +“But how about you, Dick?” +</p> +<p> +“If MacDonald says so, I’m game.” +</p> +<p> +“Knew you would be,” said MacDonald. “That’s +settled. Now call Captain Jameson, and let’s get +goin’. You want to be on your way, and we may +as well be on ours.” +</p> +<p> +“But, MacDonald,” said Mr. Hampton, trying one +last protest, “suppose Lupo and the remainder of +his gang see you start, and follow and attack you. +What then?” +</p> +<p> +“Huh.” MacDonald’s eyes snapped. “Couldn’t +ask for no better luck. I’d get a shot at him then.” +</p> +<p> +Farnum interrupted at this stage. +</p> +<p> +“It’s no use trying to stop him and Dick,” he +said. “I know Dick and I know these men of the +Mounted. They’re holy terrors. And the pair of +them will get away with it, too.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton knew when he was beaten, and +abandoned his protests. Captain Jameson once more +was called by wireless, and given a full account of +what had occurred. He approved MacDonald’s +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_134'></a>134</span> +scheme and promised there would be a position on +the Force for Dick when he arrived. +</p> +<p> +“Well, Dick,” said Mr. Hampton, after all arrangements +were made for departure, and he led +him aside, “I’ve been pleased, indeed, with your +ready help and cheerfulness on the trip. I hate to +part company with you. Here is a check for the +full sum I promised you for this Summer’s work. +And here in addition is something to remember +me by.” +</p> +<p> +Into Dick’s unwilling hand he pressed a handsome +gold watch which he himself had worn for +some years. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Mr. Hampton, this is too good for a rough +fellow like me to carry,” protested Dick. +</p> +<p> +“Now, now, nonsense,” said Mr. Hampton. +“Nothing is too good for you, old man. I want you +to keep that to remember me by.” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t need the watch for that, sir,” said Dick +gruffly, sticking it in his pocket nevertheless. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_135'></a>135</span><a name='chXVI' id='chXVI'></a>CHAPTER XVI.—REINDEER SIGHTED.</h2> +<p> +The big canoe which Dick and Art had captured +from the Indians was turned over to MacDonald. +It was easily capable of transporting five—the three +prisoners, MacDonald and Dick. With the two latter +in the bow and stern respectively, and the prisoners +unarmed between, there was little danger so +long as MacDonald and Dick maintained reasonable +watchfulness. Two of the half-breeds were cowed +and broken in spirit, moreover, while Long Tom +was <em>hors de combat</em> on account of the injury to his +arm, and would be for some time to come. MacDonald’s +skin kayak was to be towed behind, containing +his slender outfit, and one of the prisoners +could carry the whole business alone at portages. +</p> +<p> +MacDonald had entered the lake by a considerable +stream flowing into it from the southwest, and +not the stream down which the Hampton party had +come. He set out for this other stream before the +others quit the island, with the intention of retracing +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_136'></a>136</span> +his steps into the wilderness in large measure. +This would facilitate his travel. Farther to the +south, he said, was a large river which could be +reached by a ten-mile portage, and down which +they could travel for many miles. +</p> +<p> +“If you ever want to join the Mounted,” he said +to Bob, to whom he had taken a great fancy, “let +me know. I’ll fix it for you.” +</p> +<p> +Bob laughed, but he was young enough to be flattered +by the sincere compliment. +</p> +<p> +“I may take you up on that some day,” he said. +“Who knows?” +</p> +<p> +Then MacDonald stepped into the canoe, goodbyes +were said, and the craft shot away. +</p> +<p> +“There go a couple of good men,” commented +Farnum, as under the powerful strokes of the paddles +the canoe drew swiftly down the lake. +</p> +<p> +“One good man, anyhow,” said Art, who overheard +the observation. “Ol’ Dick an’ me had a li’l +talk. I’m going to join up with the Mounted, too, +when we git back. We been pals fifteen year.” +</p> +<p> +“Fifteen years,” exclaimed Frank. “In the wilderness +all that time?” +</p> +<p> +Art nodded absently, his eyes on the retreating +canoe. +</p> +<p> +“Sure,” said Art. “It’s home to us. Ain’t no +wilderness. Cities is the real wilderness. Dick an’ +me’s been separated now and then, like now, but we +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_137'></a>137</span> +always come together agin. I expect when we git +to be old men like some prospectors I seen we’ll be +together all the time, fightin’ and jawin’ each other, +but ready to tear the heart out o’ anybody that +jumps one of us.” +</p> +<p> +“It’s a wonder Dick went off with MacDonald +like he did, in that case,” said Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Huh. Somebody had to go. He knew we’d +meet agin.” +</p> +<p> +Art said no more, but turned away to busy himself +with the outfit. +</p> +<p> +Presently everything was in readiness for departure +and then the two remaining canoes, with the +outfit distributed between them, the three boys in +one and the three men in the other, started up the +lake in the opposite direction from that taken by +MacDonald and Dick. Previously, when in pursuit +of Lupo, Mr. Hampton had discovered the lake was +of so considerable extent that, despite their hours +of travel up the side, they had been unable to discern +the farther end. In fact, the lake broadened +out considerably some distance beyond the island. +It was his intention, inasmuch as it followed the +general northeastward direction they would pursue, +to stick to it as long as possible. He believed there +would be some stream at the farther end sufficiently +large to float their canoes. +</p> +<p> +In this he was not mistaken, for after four hours +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_138'></a>138</span> +of steady paddling, they discerned the outlet of a +stream of considerable width, quartered across the +lake and entered it. Almost immediately Jack called +to his father, in surprise: +</p> +<p> +“Dad! Oh, Dad! This stream flows out of the +lake; not into it. Do you notice?” +</p> +<p> +The leading canoe slowed up while the boys approached. +</p> +<p> +“It certainly does, Jack,” said his father. “What +do you make of it, Farnum?” +</p> +<p> +The latter shook his head, puzzled. +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know,” he said. “You must remember +this is unexplored country. We’re liable to find +anything here. But, maybe——” +</p> +<p> +“What?” +</p> +<p> +“I don’t know. We’re near the Coppermine, +aren’t we, Art?” +</p> +<p> +“Figure we must be.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe this stream flows into the Coppermine.” +</p> +<p> +“I’ll bet that’s it,” Art approved. “The waters +of that lake empty into the Coppermine. Yes, sir; +I’ll bet that’s what it is. Well, that makes travel +easy for awhile, anyhow.” +</p> +<p> +Two days of travel, unbroken by any but routine +incidents such as the occasional shooting of wild duck +Or geese, brought the party at camping time at the +end of the second day to a pleasant, open, grassy +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_139'></a>139</span> +prairie between two low-wooded hills. Here it was +decided to make camp. +</p> +<p> +After the evening meal was over, and while Mr. +Hampton, who was feeling out of sorts, retired to +his little tent to try and sleep without taking part +in the usual desultory conversation about the fire—which +was kept going for the companionship and +cheer it imparted and not from any need of warmth +you may be sure—Jack arose and stretched. +</p> +<p> +“My legs are stiff from that position in the canoe +all day,” he said. “I want to stretch them a bit. +Who’ll come with me to the top of that nearest hill? +The sun is pretty low, but we ought to get a considerable +view.” +</p> +<p> +Bob and Frank both volunteered to accompany +him. Farnum sat, smoking his pipe and staring into +the fire absently. He didn’t care to go. But Art +arose and joined the party. It was not far to the +top of the hill, although a stiff climb through the +trees and brush. The crest, however, was bare of +timber. +</p> +<p> +Frank, who lighter than the others, was first to +reach the top, stood struck with amazement. He +turned to beckon the others forward with one hand, +while laying the other over his mouth in a gesture +enjoining silence. +</p> +<p> +“For the love o’ Pete,” whispered Art, eyes bulging, +as he stood beside Frank and peered down into +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_140'></a>140</span> +the grassy vale beyond, half overgrown with young +willows. +</p> +<p> +“Are they caribou?” asked Jack, low-voiced. +“They don’t look like the caribou we’ve run across +along the streams.” +</p> +<p> +“They ain’t, neither,” said Art. “They’re reindeer.” +</p> +<p> +“Must be Santy Claus’s,” chuckled Bob. “Always +did believe there was something to that story about +the old boy living up here near the North Pole, even +though people insisted on calling it a fairy tale. Now +I know.” +</p> +<p> +His joke was ignored, however, as Art continued: +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir, reindeer. Caribou are always brown. +Some o’ these are white, some brown, and some +spotted. Then they ain’t the size o’ caribou. Besides, +I know they’re reindeer. I see ’em often +enough in Alaska to know.” +</p> +<p> +“Alaska? Do these reindeer come from there?” +</p> +<p> +Art nodded. +</p> +<p> +“Look at ’em. They’re tame. Must’a winded us, +but that don’t scare ’em none. They’re used to +humans. No more scared o’ bein’ hunted than cattle +are back in the States.” +</p> +<p> +“Tame?” queried Frank. “What do you mean?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, the Eskimos in Alaska, not the wild one, +of this Far North, but the regular ones that come +in touch with the white man, they keep herds o’ reindeer +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_141'></a>141</span> +just like a farmer in the States keeps cows. +Look at ’em. Must be two-three hundred there +right now. They’re eight-ten hundred miles from +home, too. Must ’a wandered away. Bet you there’s +a desprit Eskimo lookin’ for ’em right now.” +</p> +<p> +Jack looked thoughtful. +</p> +<p> +“What a shame for a man to lose a big herd like +that,” he said. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir,” affirmed Art emphatically. “Must be +six-seven thousand dollars worth o’ tame reindeer +there. Pretty tough.” +</p> +<p> +“We can’t do anything about it, though,” said +Bob. +</p> +<p> +“Seems a pity-like we can’t ride herd on ’em till +some Eskimo shows up to claim ’em,” said Art. “But +it can’t be done. Yore father, Jack, is all for pushin’ +on fast as we kin.” +</p> +<p> +After some further discussion, the party retraced +its steps, with Art explaining to the boys the big +difference existing between the semi-civilized +Eskimos of Alaska and the little that was known of +the wild Eskimos of the Arctic. +</p> +<p> +“Folks think Alaska’s right up next to the North +Pole,” he said. “Leastways folks in the States do. +People comin’ to Nome from the States every so +often give me that knowledge. But they’re shore +mistaken. Alaska’s great country that’ll be settled +up some day. Shore, we got hard Winters. But +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_142'></a>142</span> +boys, in the Summer, with the sun a-shinin’ all the +time, everything grows just three times as fast as +in the States. My Pap was a farmer back in York +State, an’ I was raised on a farm. We had hard +scratchin’ an’ our Winters was long an’ hard, too. +An’ we didn’t have Summers like in Alaska to +make up for ’em. I’ll bet if my Pap were livin’ +today an’ farmin’ in Alaska he’d find life a lot easier +than what we had it on the old farm.” +</p> +<p> +“But why don’t more people live in Alaska, then?” +asked Frank. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I don’t know. Hard to get to, for one thing. +Ain’t developed up with railroads, neither. Some +day, though, you’ll see ’em forced to come here, the +way they’re a-crowdin’ up down in the States. Why, +we got only 60,000 people in all Alaska, yet she’s +quarter as big as the States an’ could darn near +feed the whole push herself, if she was put to it and +farmed right.” +</p> +<p> +“Art, why don’t you go to farming? I’d think +that would be the thing for you to do.” +</p> +<p> +“Mebbe I will some day,” said Art. “But I’m +an old batch. Got no wife, an’ kind o’ like to feel +free to knock around instead o’ bein’ tied to one +place.” +</p> +<p> +It was a feeling with which the boys could sympathize. +They were young, with life ahead of them, +and they wanted to see the world. In fact they +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_143'></a>143</span> +had seen a good deal of it already, as those who have +followed them through their various adventures, +know. Of this they spoke as they made their way +back to camp, where they discovered Farnum ready +to turn in, and merely awaiting their return before +doing so. Since their first encounter with Lupo, +and their discovery that they were not alone in the +wilderness, a watch was always kept, and Farnum +had combatted sleepiness in order to keep guard +until their return. +</p> +<p> +“Art, you’ve got the first watch,” he said, when +they appeared. “The rest of you better turn in, +and not sit up talking. With luck we ought to +make the Coppermine tomorrow, I figure, and then +we’ll do some traveling. We’ve got to hit a fast +pace from now on, for already we are having real +twilight, and pretty soon we’ll be having short +nights while the sun dips entirely below the horizon. +That means the season is growing short, and we +have not got much time left before we’ll have to +start for the outside.” +</p> +<p> +Jack and Bob heeded the injunction and followed +Farnum’s example shortly, but Frank, who +did not feel sleepy and, moreover, loved to talk, sat +up a considerable time gossiping with Art and telling +him of some of their previous adventures. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly, as he talked along, low-voiced so as +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_144'></a>144</span> +not disturb the nearby sleepers, Frank noticed Art +was not paying attention, and stopped. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, well,” he said, half petulantly, “if I’m boring +you——” +</p> +<p> +Art leaned close, and laid a hand on his arm. +</p> +<p> +“Sorry, Frank,” he said, in a whisper, “but I was +a-listenin.’ I got a strange feelin’ like as if somebody +had his eyes on the back a’ my head. I +wasn’t payin’ no attention to you but a-listenin’ to +see if I could hear anything.” +</p> +<p> +He was so intense that he communicated some +of his trepidation to Frank. Instinctively, the +latter reached for his rifle as Art half stood up +to peer at their twilit surroundings. They were +camped in a tiny grove of a half dozen spruces, like +an islet in a midst of long, matted grass. +</p> +<p> +As Art stood up, a single shot rang out, shattering +the stillness. He threw himself prone, dragging +Frank down with him. Then a fusillade was +poured in on them, seemingly from all sides. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_145'></a>145</span><a name='chXVII' id='chXVII'></a>CHAPTER XVII.—SURPRISED.</h2> +<p> +“Watch my back, Frank. Keep low behind +that nearest tree and let ’em have it. They’re in +that long grass.” +</p> +<p> +As he spoke Art, worming his way rapidly forward +to a position behind the trunk of one of the +spruces, began firing rapidly. +</p> +<p> +Frank, in the opposite direction, fired several shots +into the long grass. He had an uncanny feeling, +for he could see no forms at which to fire, and the +preliminary volley poured into the camp was not +repeated, so he had no index as to the enemy +positions. +</p> +<p> +Jack, Bob and Farnum, rolled over, awakened +by the shots, but Frank called fiercely: “Keep +down.” +</p> +<p> +Realizing something of the situation, the three +grabbed their rifles, laying by their sides, and, +keeping down, prepared to fire as soon as they could +see something at which to aim. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_146'></a>146</span> +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton stirred in his tent a moment later. +He had been sleeping hard, and had not awakened +instantly as had the others. Moreover, a dull ache +gripped his head, preventing him from thinking +clearly and from comprehending instantly what was +occurring. He lay a moment, wondering what had +awakened him. All was still outside, for Frank and +Art had ceased firing to await some sign from the +unseen enemy. Mr. Hampton decided to peer out +and investigate what had disturbed him. He +crawled from his dog tent and stood up. +</p> +<p> +At his appearance, a ragged volley burst once +more from the long grass surrounding the tiny +grove, for his figure stood forth clearly and made +an excellent target. Spinning about, Mr. Hampton +fell heavily to the ground. +</p> +<p> +A wild yell of triumph went up at this indication +that the leader had been hit. Jack leaped up regardless +of consequences and ran to his father, +dragging him into the tent, while bullets whipped +around him. Bob ran to his assistance. To the +hidden enemy it must have seemed as if their opponents +were demoralized. At any rate, they grew +more courageous, and started a rush. +</p> +<p> +From three sides, it came, the figures of the oncoming +men only partially seen as they crouched +low and darted through the grass. But the long +stems waving above them marked their paths, and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_147'></a>147</span> +there were three still on watch who would have to +be dealt with. +</p> +<p> +Frank, Art and Farnum marked where the waving +grass indicated the enemy. Each guarded a +side of the little grove. On the fourth side lay the +stream. +</p> +<p> +“Wait’ll they’re close, fellows, then give it to ’em,” +cautioned Farnum. “Ready. Let’s go.” +</p> +<p> +The three repeating rifles spoke as one, and from +the long grass came howls and shrieks of pain and +terror. What followed was brief but lively. Each +of the three pumped his rifle as fast as possible, and +the bullets poured into the grass almost as fast as +if sprayed from the throat of a machine gun. The +return fire was heavy but high, whipping through +the branches of the spruce trees overhead. +</p> +<p> +Reinforcements added to the strength of the +defenders, for Bob darted out of the tent, crouched +over, and flung himself beside Frank, beginning to +shoot even as he talked. +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Hampton escaped by a miracle,” he said. +“Bullet creased his head and stunted him. He’ll be +all right.” +</p> +<p> +The rush was broken. Whoever was in the grass, +feared to advance farther in the face of that fire. +The long grass ceased to wave, indicating the attackers +had come to a halt. But they did not retreat. +The menace was still there. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_148'></a>148</span> +</p> +<p> +“Anybody hit?” Farnum called out. +</p> +<p> +“Not me,” said Art. +</p> +<p> +“Nor me,” answered Frank. +</p> +<p> +“Thank our lucky stars for that,” answered +Farnum. +</p> +<p> +They all lay in a semi-circle, facing different directions, +but close enough to each other to make communication +in ordinary tones possible. Relieved to +discover that all were untouched, despite the bullets +that had rained on the camp, Farnum next inquired +anxiously after Mr. Hampton, and Bob answered he +had been only stunned. +</p> +<p> +“I reckon these fellows are Lupo and his gang,” +Farnum remarked. “But he must have had more +men than we expected, or he wouldn’t be attacking +us like this.” +</p> +<p> +“What’ll we do?” growled Art. “Looks like they +got us penned in.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, but we stopped their rush,” protested Frank. +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said Art, “but they ain’t beatin’ it as I +can see. An’ when we want to up an’ leave camp, +what’s goin’ to happen?” +</p> +<p> +Frank was about to reply, when Bob who was +beside him, pointed with his rifle toward the gap +between the two hills, from the top of one of which +they earlier had seen the reindeer herd in the next +valley. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_149'></a>149</span> +</p> +<p> +“Look there, Frank,” he exclaimed excitedly. +“What do you make of that?” +</p> +<p> +“Where? I don’t——Oh, yes; now I see. Something +moving.” +</p> +<p> +“Sure is something moving,” Bob said. +</p> +<p> +Already the short twilight was beginning to +lighten, as the sun after its dip to the edge of the +northern horizon now swung higher. +</p> +<p> +“Bob.” +</p> +<p> +“What?” +</p> +<p> +“I believe that’s the reindeer herd.” +</p> +<p> +“From that valley over the hill? The reindeer we +saw when we were up there on the hill top?” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, sir.” +</p> +<p> +“But how in the world?” +</p> +<p> +“Why, I noticed that the other valley swung +around between those two little hills. The reindeer +are just grazing along, hunting new pasture. And, +say, Bob!” +</p> +<p> +“Well, what now?” +</p> +<p> +“I’ve got a bully idea.” +</p> +<p> +Abruptly, Frank wormed his way around to face +Art on his right, who was keeping watch against +surprise on his side of the little clump of trees +sheltering them. +</p> +<p> +“Art,” said he, “look over there, between those +two little hills. Are those reindeer? The reindeer +we saw from the hilltop?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_150'></a>150</span> +</p> +<p> +“Reckon so,” said Art, after a critical inspection. +</p> +<p> +“Well, Art, can reindeer be stampeded? Like +cattle, I mean.” +</p> +<p> +“Reckon so. Why?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I’m going to try it,” Frank declared in a +determined tone. Still prone, he began to wriggle +out of his clothes, and pulling up his legs, to unlace +his boots and kick them off. +</p> +<p> +“Are you crazy, Frank?” Bob demanded, puzzled, +while Art and Farnum took their eyes from the +coverts ahead to look at Frank in astonishment. +</p> +<p> +“Crazy? No more than usual,” Frank replied, as +he completed disrobing, and now lay naked under +the spreading branches of the spruce. “But I’m +going to slip into the water and float down to that +hill, then get in behind the reindeer and stampede +them. You see what’ll happen then, don’t you?” +</p> +<p> +Bob stared at his companion, wide-eyed. Dawning +comprehension crept into his eyes, and he began +to smile. Then he chuckled. +</p> +<p> +“You little hound,” he said, employing a pet expression +among the boys, denoting admiration. +</p> +<p> +“But, say, what’s the idea?” demanded Art +sharply, from his position several yards away. +</p> +<p> +Frank had started wriggling forward, and +waited until he was close to Art and Farnum before +replying. Then he repeated his assertion that he +intended floating downstream until behind the slow-moving +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_151'></a>151</span> +herd of reindeer, when he would land and +attempt to stampede them. +</p> +<p> +“You see how it is,” he said. “You yourselves +admit that we’re in a tight place. Lupo’s forces +have cover in that long grass, and can wait us out. +Here among the trees there is no grass to hide us. +The minute we get up and start to move around, +we expose ourselves. Therefore, the best thing to +do, is to drive them out of their cover, isn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +“Sure,” said Art. “But how you going to do it +with——” +</p> +<p> +He was about to ask how Frank intended to drive +their enemies from cover by stampeding the reindeer, +but Frank grinned at him, and he paused. Dawning +comprehension came into his eyes, too. +</p> +<p> +“That’s it,” Frank said. “I see you get my idea.” +</p> +<p> +He turned his gaze toward Farnum, farthest from +the center, but who had overheard the conversation. +</p> +<p> +“You see, Mr. Farnum,” he said, “when the reindeer +come dashing down, Lupo’s men will have to +run for it to get out of the way. A stampeding +herd isn’t anything to monkey with, I expect. Then +you’ll have your chance. But the reindeer won’t +dash in among these few close-set trees, so you’ll +be safe. No, sir; as I figure it, they’ll just head +right on past here and try to get through the hills +beyond.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_152'></a>152</span> +</p> +<p> +Farnum’s glance approved. +</p> +<p> +“A fine idea,” he said, but then he added in a +tone of doubt: “I don’t know as I ought to let you +go, though. Mr. Hampton wouldn’t like it, maybe, +putting yourself into danger like that.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, nonsense,” said Frank. “I can slip unseen +into the water. And I can swim like a seal. Ask +Bob.” +</p> +<p> +And at once, to prevent any interruption of his +plans, he resumed worming his way to the bank +of the river. +</p> +<p> +The river ran at this point between six-foot banks, +and the clump of trees in which camp was situated +stood so close to the water that the roots of several +projected through the soil of the land. Frank had +little difficulty in getting down to the water, and felt +sure that he accomplished the feat unseen by the +enemy. He let himself into the stream, which was +of sufficient depth right up to the bank to enable him +to float downstream under the protection of the high +bank, without the necessity of wading out to get to +deeper water. +</p> +<p> +“For God’s sake, be careful, boy,” whispered Farnum, +as Frank disappeared. +</p> +<p> +Frank was naked, and unarmed except for a long +knife. He had not figured out how he would set +about stampeding the reindeer. He was leaving that +to chance. What concerned him now was to get to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_153'></a>153</span> +a position behind the herd without discovery. He +stuck close inshore, floating, his eyes roving along +the edge of the bluff above him for signs of the +enemy. +</p> +<p> +None was to be seen. After all, he thought, it +was hardly likely that any of the enemy lay in hiding +here, as none of the shots fired at them had come +from so close to the river. On the contrary, the +enemy lay inland, showing they had come upon the +camp from the landward side. Becoming bolder, +therefore, he turned over and struck out, swimming +strongly, the long knife in a sheath at his belt. He +felt for it several times, to reassure himself it was +there and had not fallen out. +</p> +<p> +Frank was a strong swimmer. Indeed, this was +the one athletic sport at which he excelled both Bob +and Jack, although they, too, were excellent swimmers. +It did not take him long, therefore, aided by +the current, to come abreast of the trees clothing the +first of the two hills between which the reindeer had +entered their valley. The hill sloped abruptly down +to the water, and Frank had marked from camp how +trees clothed it entirely, even dipping into the stream. +When he had passed, as he believed, beyond a point +at which there was any possibility of his being seen, +he seized a branch of a willow tree and pulled himself +ashore. Then, after climbing a short distance +up the hill, he began working his way around it +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_154'></a>154</span> +through the trees. Presently he was on the hillside +facing the valley where were his friends in the +distant clump of trees, and the enemy hidden in the +long grass. The reindeer had not moved far. They +were only a short distance from him, and Frank +hurried forward at the best pace he could command. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_155'></a>155</span><a name='chXVIII' id='chXVIII'></a>CHAPTER XVIII.—THE STAMPEDE.</h2> +<p> +For the first time since starting on his wild project, +a doubt as to its success entered Frank’s mind. But +he put it resolutely aside as he sped forward, +crouching, sliding under the low branches, determined +to make the best speed possible. His companions +were in a ticklish situation. He wanted to +do what he could to relieve them as soon as possible. +As to his own danger, he gave it not a thought. +</p> +<p> +What worried Frank was the possibility that he +would be unable to stampede the reindeer herd. +This was the thought which he put aside. But it +kept recurring. And when he had come into position +behind the herd, and saw them feeding quietly +below him, not a stone’s throw away, at the foot of +the hill, where the trees ended abruptly and the grassy +plain began, he was still without an idea as to +what to do. +</p> +<p> +Originally, he had thought that stoning the herd +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_156'></a>156</span> +might set them into motion and stampede them forward. +But doubt as to the workability of that method +had seized him as he first climbed from the water +and, from among the trees, obtained his first view +of the herd. The animals, grazing quietly, were +so well spread out that he feared stoning them would +not alarm them sufficiently to start a stampede. +</p> +<p> +“Well, here goes for a try, anyway,” he muttered +to himself. +</p> +<p> +Fortunately, there were numerous pieces of rock +lying about. Collecting a heap of these, he began +pelting away at the nearest reindeer, a brown and +white spotted cow. His aim was good, and the +startled animal, struck on the flank, snorted, tossed +her head and gave a little jump. She went forward +only a step or two, however, and then settled down +to grazing again. +</p> +<p> +Once more Frank let fly, and this time the stone +caught her on the side of the neck. She tossed her +head angrily, and sidled forward again. The movement +brought her sharply into contact with another +cow, and for a moment Frank was filled with hope +that the pair would start fighting and alarm the rest +of the herd. He was disappointed. The first cow +sheered away from the other, and both resumed +grazing. +</p> +<p> +What should he do now? Frank was perplexed. +He had already considered the possibility of startling +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_157'></a>157</span> +the reindeer by shouting at them, but had given up +that idea because it would apprise the hidden enemy +in the grass ahead of his presence. He wanted them +to know nothing of the menace in their rear until +the stampeded herd should sweep down upon them. +</p> +<p> +“I wonder——” he said, muttering the words for +the comfort of hearing his own voice. +</p> +<p> +Then he fell silent, thinking. Art had said they +were tame reindeer, accustomed to the presence of +man. Yes, but of man clothed and in his natural +state. And of Eskimos at that—men dressed a +good deal differently from the way in which he ordinarily +clothed himself. What would those reindeer +think if they saw a naked, white body dash down +upon them suddenly? +</p> +<p> +“I’ll do it,” he said. “That’s the only way. And +it will work, too, I’ll bet.” +</p> +<p> +Drawing his long knife from the sheath, he looked +around and selected a tough branch the thickness +of his thumb. This he cut off, stripped from it the +projecting twigs, and made of it a long, pliant whip. +</p> +<p> +Whip in one hand, knife in the other, eyes gleaming +and determined, Frank made his way to the edge +of the trees, and then stole out into the long grass, +crouching low. He did not want the reindeer to +see him until he was upon them, and as they were +grazing away from him, this was not so difficult. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_158'></a>158</span> +In fact, he was within several yards of a clump of +cows before one swung about and looked at him. +</p> +<p> +The minute that occurred, Frank realized there +was no longer any possibility of concealment, and +that the time had come to strike. And strike he did. +Jumping to his feet, he bounded forward, swinging +his whip so that it sank through the air. +</p> +<p> +Bringing the whip down with a cruel lash on the +flank of the nearest reindeer, Frank swung it around +on all sides. Every swing landed. The swish as +the pliant green wood struck the animals reminded +him oddly of the sound of a stick beating rugs at +home. Many a time he had heard that same thud-thud +from behind his house. +</p> +<p> +Not a sound did he make as he lashed about him, +for he felt that if no sound indicating that he was +human came from him, the consternation of the reindeer +would be increased. +</p> +<p> +And that he had not miscalculated became at once +apparent, for the reindeer near him lifted up their +sharp little hooves and sprang to get out of the vicinity +of this strange animal with the lash. Naturally, +to escape him, there was only one way for them to +go, and that was forward, so forward they went. +Right into the main body of the herd they dashed, +with Frank prancing and bounding behind them, +with each leap bringing his whip down upon the +flank of a laggard. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_159'></a>159</span> +</p> +<p> +Suddenly, one reindeer, nearer than the rest, +dashed by so close on his right as to brush Frank. +He was not being charged. The animal was panicky, +and merely seeking to escape. But he had to +leap nimbly aside to avoid being bowled over. And +as he leaped, the long knife clutched in his hand +pricked the animal’s flank. +</p> +<p> +The reindeer screamed, a shrill, terror-stricken +cry, and launched itself forward like a thunderbolt +into the midst of the disturbed herd. That, apparently, +was all that was needed to complete the +impending panic. Frank’s inexperienced eye could +not have told the composition of the herd, but Art, +when they had first caught sight of the reindeer +from the hilltop, had pointed out the majority were +cows, and the bucks numbered only a handful. If +any buck had a masculine curiosity to discover what +this strange white-skinned animal that looked so like +and yet so unlike a man was, he did not get the +chance to gratify it. For the now thoroughly +frightened cows started forward in a rush that +would have overborne any animal foolish enough to +try to stem it. +</p> +<p> +And then Frank did what might have been considered +a foolish thing. Carried away by the enthusiasm +engendered by seeing his plan to stampede +the herd work out successfully, he continued to +bound along behind, at first able to whip the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_160'></a>160</span> +bunched-up stragglers, but soon falling hopelessly +behind as the herd picked up speed and swept forward +like the wind. +</p> +<p> +Straight toward the clump of trees sheltering +Frank’s friends dashed the reindeer. And an exultant +throb filled his breast. For the hidden enemy +lay in the long grass between the herd and the +trees, and inevitably, therefore, the stampeding animals +would drive them out. +</p> +<p> +Regardless of the risk to himself, Frank continued +on his way, running as fast as the nature of the +ground permitted. The herd beat the long grass +flat in its advance, as flat as if a great board had +been pressed down on all, and the going was easier +than he had looked for. +</p> +<p> +Suddenly a shot rang out, then another, and a +little wisp of smoke showed the young fellow the +discharge came from the trees. His own friends +were shooting. At what? Again an exultant thrill +swept over him. He felt certain his friends were +firing at the enemy, and that the stampeding herd +was driving the latter ahead of it, although because +of the presence of the animals between himself and +the enemy he could not see whether such was the +case. +</p> +<p> +That Frank’s surmise was correct, however, was +soon borne out. For the first shots fired from the +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_161'></a>161</span> +trees were succeeded by a rapid rattle that told him +everybody was in action. +</p> +<p> +Then followed a confused medley of shots interspersed +with shouts and cries, and Frank, pausing a +moment to peer ahead and listen came to the conclusion +that the enemy was desperately shooting at +the reindeer in an effort to turn the herd aside. If +that was the case, however, their efforts were unsuccessful, +for the animals filled with the unreasoning +spirit of panic did not swerve from their course. +</p> +<p> +“By golly,” Frank exclaimed aloud, “I believe +I can reach camp all right.” +</p> +<p> +And once more he began to run forward. For it +seemed to him that the herd, sweeping the enemy +before it, would leave the ground free for him to +reach the clump of trees and rejoin his friends. +</p> +<p> +On swept the herd, and on ran Frank in the +beaten down grass behind it. His eyes were strained +towards the trees. He began to wave and shout, as +he came closer and made out the outline of Mr. +Hampton’s tent. He paid no attention to his surroundings. +</p> +<p> +Then a form rose up from the long grass beside +the swathe beaten down by the reindeer, there was +a shot, and Frank fell forward on his face, a buzzing +in his ears, and lost consciousness. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_162'></a>162</span><a name='chXIX' id='chXIX'></a>CHAPTER XIX.—LUPO’S END.</h2> +<p> +When next Frank opened his eyes, he lay on a +blanket in camp and the sight of Bob and Jack bending +anxiously above him while Mr. Hampton and +Farnum worked at his shoulder greeted him. +</p> +<p> +“Hello,” he said, trying to grin, but wincing as a +sharp stab of pain passed through his shoulder. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t move, Frank, We’ll have you fixed up +right in a minute,” said Mr. Hampton soothingly. +</p> +<p> +“Is it bad, Dad,” Jack anxiously inquired. +</p> +<p> +“Just grazed the bone,” said Mr. Hampton, putting +the finishing touches to the bandage, and +straightening up. “There, Frank, now you’ll be all +right.” +</p> +<p> +“What happened to me?” asked Frank, struggling +to a sitting position, and finding his right arm +bound across his chest. +</p> +<p> +“Bullet through your shoulder brought you +down,” said Mr. Hampton. “And your head struck +a rock hidden in the grass, so you were knocked +out.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_163'></a>163</span> +</p> +<p> +“Good enough,” said Frank, “but who shot me? +I was dashing along, yelling to attract your attention, +and never knew what hit me.” +</p> +<p> +“I guess you didn’t,” said Jack. “If it hadn’t +been for Art, you might have been finished. But +he shot down the fellow that winged you.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, and your two pals ran out as if there wasn’t +an enemy in sight and carried you in,” said Art, as +he saw Frank about to thank him. “Give your +gratitude to them.” +</p> +<p> +Frank smiled. +</p> +<p> +“I guess I owe it to you all,” he said. +</p> +<p> +“You were foolish to follow the reindeer herd +so closely, Frank,” said Mr. Hampton, reprovingly. +“Unarmed, too.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, I was stampeding ’em, Mr. Hampton,” +said Frank. “I couldn’t do that, you know, without +being there.” +</p> +<p> +The older man shook his head. +</p> +<p> +“If I had been myself, Frank, I wouldn’t have +let you take that chance,” he said. “No, Farnum,” +he hastened to add, “I’m not criticizing you. When +these boys take it in their heads to do something it’s +hard to head them off. However, it all turned out +for the best.” +</p> +<p> +“Tell me about it,” Frank said. “How did my +scheme work out?” +</p> +<p> +“Couldn’t have been better, old thing,” said Bob. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_164'></a>164</span> +“Lupo’s men ran like rabbits when those reindeer +swept down on them. They tried a few shots in +an attempt to head them off, but seeing the uselessness +of their efforts, turned and ran. We gave them +a few shots to help them on their way. We counted +nine.” +</p> +<p> +“And they got away?” +</p> +<p> +“All but the man Art shot,” said Jack. “The fellow +who shot at you. And you haven’t heard who +he was.” +</p> +<p> +Jack’s eyes were bright. Frank looked at him +questioningly. +</p> +<p> +“Not——” +</p> +<p> +“Yes,” said Jack. “It was Lupo himself. Art +wounded him in the chest. He died before we +could do anything for him. But Dad got some information +from him first.” +</p> +<p> +He looked at his father. Mr. Hampton’s face +was both grim and sad. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, Frank,” he said. “We learned who set these +men on us, and who plotted against Thorwaldsson. +But let us not discuss it now. It’s bad business all +the way through.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton turned aside, taking Farnum with +him, and the two fell into a low-toned discussion. +Bob and Jack, meanwhile, helped Frank to resume +his clothing which still lay where he had discarded +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_165'></a>165</span> +it before taking to the river. Art busied himself at +packing up the camp equipment. +</p> +<p> +Presently, the two older men called Art to them +and, after a few words of discussion, rejoined the +boys. +</p> +<p> +“Boys,” said Mr. Hampton, “we want your +opinions on this, too.” +</p> +<p> +“On what, Dad?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, we saw nine men go bounding off away +from the reindeer, and we accounted for Lupo. That +makes ten, and it doesn’t seem likely there were +more. Yet there is the bare possibility that out +there in the grass may be one or more badly +wounded men, fellows whom we shot at one time or +another, who were too hard hit to escape. If there +are any such, we can’t go off and leave them there +to die. I wouldn’t treat a dog like that.” +</p> +<p> +“They’re not dogs,” muttered Farnum, bitterly. +“They’re wolves.” +</p> +<p> +“Mr. Farnum considers we would be taking too +great a risk,” Mr. Hampton continued. “He says +that if we go out to search for wounded, we are +likely to be shot for our pains.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, surely not by a wounded man whom you +were going to help,” protested Jack. +</p> +<p> +“You don’t know them,” said Farnum. +</p> +<p> +“Well, just the same,” said Jack, “I think Dad is +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_166'></a>166</span> +right. It would be shameful for us to go away without +investigating.” +</p> +<p> +“I’d feel like a murderer,” said Bob. “Shooting +’em down in a fight is one thing. It was their lives +or ours. But leaving a wounded man to die in the +wilderness is something entirely different.” +</p> +<p> +Farnum made a gesture of surrender. +</p> +<p> +“I guess I seem hard-hearted,” he said. “But you +don’t know what I’ve been through in the past. All +right, we’ll make a search. But I warn you to be +on guard.” +</p> +<p> +“Hardly likely after all that there are any +wounded out there,” remarked Frank, taking part +in the discussion for the first time. “They must +have been in hiding right in the path of the +reindeer, and you can’t see any forms there now. If +there were any too badly wounded to escape, they’d +also have been too badly wounded to drag themselves +to the side.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded. +</p> +<p> +“The grass is so beaten down, too,” he said, “that +if there were anybody out there, we could see him. +However, I cannot rest easy without making a +search. Now, you three boys remain in camp and +keep watch. The rest of us will take care of the +search.” +</p> +<p> +To this the boys made no objection. As a matter +of fact, it was one time that exclusion from activity +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_167'></a>167</span> +did not irritate them. They had no stomach for +what they might discover. Frank and Jack, especially, +thinking of the terrible affair on the island in the +lake, kept silence. Bob protested, but more as a +matter of form and because he considered manliness +demanded it, than otherwise. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton shook his head. +</p> +<p> +“None of us want to do this, Bob,” he said. “It +has to be done, however. But I certainly don’t want +you boys along.” +</p> +<p> +The three men, revolvers clasped in their hands +for use in case of emergency, set out, while the boys +watched from the trees. Keeping close together, +they quartered the plain, going far beyond the +beaten down stretch of grass left by the passing of +the reindeer herd. Presently, the boys saw them +return, and with a sigh of relief, Jack said: +</p> +<p> +“Well, thank goodness, that’s over.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton’s spirits were considerably higher +on his return, as the boys could see by his features. +</p> +<p> +“Nobody anywhere,” he reported, “and we made +a thorough search, too.” +</p> +<p> +“More thorough than there was need for,” said +Farnum, grumpily. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. On long trips into +the wilderness, where men are thrown into intimate +contact every hour of the day and night, they get to +know each other better than would be the case +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_168'></a>168</span> +through a lifetime of association under ordinary +circumstances. It was so here. Mr. Hampton had +come to love the silent, capable Farnum. Behind the +latter’s bitter hatred of Lupo and his like, the +easterner knew there was some good reason. He +sensed a tragedy in Farnum’s past, about which, perhaps, +the other would some day speak in a moment +of confidence. And he forgave the man’s seeming +brutality accordingly. +</p> +<p> +“All right, everybody,” said Mr. Farnum, cheerily. +“Let’s pack up and be on our way.” +</p> +<p> +Thanks to Art’s previous preparations, the business +of breaking camp was speedily concluded, and +the party embarked in the canoes and once more got +under way. Farnum and Art both considered that, +because of Frank’s wounded shoulder and his inability +to paddle, Art should take his place in the +canoe with Bob and Jack while Frank went with Mr. +Hampton and Farnum. But to this arrangement the +boys protested vigorously, and Mr. Hampton settled +the matter by supporting them. +</p> +<p> +“Bob and Jack are splendid canoeists,” he said. +“They have given plenty of evidence of that on this +trip, and at home they are always in the water when +they aren’t flying. No, let Frank stay with them. +They don’t like to be separated.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_169'></a>169</span><a name='chXX' id='chXX'></a>CHAPTER XX.—IN THE FOG.</h2> +<p> +Another period of uneventful canoe travel followed, +corresponding in time to the passage of a day, +although there was nothing to mark the lapse except +the slightly-deepened twilight preceding the reascension +of the sun. Camp was pitched on an +island in the stream which was small and compact +and could be easily defended in case attack on them +was renewed. +</p> +<p> +Of the latter contingency, however, Mr. Hampton +felt there was little danger. With Lupo gone, the +rascals composing his party would no longer be held +to their purpose, and start to make their way out of +the wilderness and back to their accustomed haunts. +</p> +<p> +When travel was resumed after an undisturbed +camp, everybody felt rested and in a more cheerful +frame of mind. +</p> +<p> +“We ought to be reaching the Coppermine soon,” +Farnum exclaimed, as they set out. +</p> +<p> +His words were prophetic, because at the end of +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_170'></a>170</span> +two hours, on rounding a bend, they discerned not +far ahead a broad and rapid river, into which +emptied the stream they had been following. +</p> +<p> +“The Coppermine beyond a doubt,” said Farnum. +</p> +<p> +In this diagnosis, Mr. Hampton and Art agreed. +And, before long, all question of doubt was conclusively +settled by the discovery of great rocks of +a dull reddish color lining the banks. These were +the copper deposits from which the river took its +name. +</p> +<p> +“Sometime, when the transportation problem has +been solved, this region will be supplying copper to +the world,” Mr. Hampton observed. +</p> +<p> +The canoe containing the boys was close alongside, +as the older men had let their paddles swing +idly to enable Bob and Jack to catch up with them. +</p> +<p> +“Why can’t it be taken out now, Dad?” asked +Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Because,” explained Mr. Hampton, “the only +method would be by ship through the Arctic, and +even in the short Summer that is a passage often +blocked by ice. No, development of the copper +resources of this wilderness, as well as of the oil we +hope to find, will have to wait on the building of a +railroad.” +</p> +<p> +“But ice and snow will block the railroad.” +</p> +<p> +“Not nearly to the same extent,” Mr. Hampton +said. “Throughout the Summer, such a road could +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_171'></a>171</span> +be in continuous operation. Even in Winter, with +properly designed equipment, the road could be kept +open—perhaps. That, however, is doubtful, for of +the continuous severity of Winter here you boys +can have no conception.” +</p> +<p> +“Well, if we don’t turn back soon, they’ll get some +idea of it, all right,” said Farnum, grimly. +</p> +<p> +“You mean we’ll be caught by Winter before we +can get out?” asked Mr. Hampton. +</p> +<p> +“When the old North Pole starts sliding south, +she slides fast,” said Farnum, sententiously. +</p> +<p> +As if spurred by the specter of approaching Winter, +all dug their paddles into the stream with renewed +vigor, and the two canoes swept on between +the dismal, rocky banks hour after hour. +</p> +<p> +That night there was real twilight, and a sharpness +in the air to which the party was not accustomed. +Art pointed skyward, as he and the boys worked at +building the campfire. Their gaze followed whither +he indicated. +</p> +<p> +“The moon,” he said. “Sure sign the season’s +getting late. That’s the first time you could see it +real good.” +</p> +<p> +“How late in the Summer is it, anyway?” asked +Frank. “I, for one, have kept no track of time. And +I don’t see how anybody else could with the continuous +daylight we have had.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_172'></a>172</span> +</p> +<p> +“Dad religiously checks off the days every twenty-four +hours,” said Jack. “I’ve seen him do it.” +</p> +<p> +Over the evening meal, Mr. Hampton explained +that from Long Tom, the Indian they had taken +captive on the island in the lake, he had gotten directions +as to where the latter believed Thorwaldsson +and his men to be. The explorer, according to Long +Tom, was making his way along the Coppermine, in +an endeavor to get out to the south before caught by +the Winter. He had started late, and in all likelihood, +Mr. Hampton’s party was still to the south of +Thorwaldsson. +</p> +<p> +“From now on, however,” said Mr. Hampton, +“we must keep our eyes open as we proceed for any +signs along the way which would indicate Thorwaldsson +already had passed, going south. Not that +I consider that to be likely, however,” he added. +“On the contrary, if Long Tom wasn’t lying, and I +believe he was telling the truth, Thorwaldsson +should be close at hand, and we ought soon to encounter +him.” +</p> +<p> +Camp again was uneventful, but when the boys +awoke in the morning they found a thick wet fog +over all. Their blankets were wet with it, the rocks +were wet, and the river which had lain spread out +before them under the moonlight when they turned +in for the night, now could not be seen. Only a +gray wall of fog greeted them, blurring the outlines +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_173'></a>173</span> +even of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and Art, who stood +in anxious conversation. +</p> +<p> +When the boys joined their elders, they found the +question up for discussion was the question of +whether to proceed or remain where they were until +the fog lifted. +</p> +<p> +“We’ve had unexampled good weather so far, +Mr. Hampton,” said Farnum. “But this fog may +mark the breaking-up. We may be in for it from +now on.” +</p> +<p> +“I realize all that,” Mr. Hampton said, his slight +impatience mute evidence to Jack, at least, that his +Father was worried. “What I’d like to know now, +is whether to move on or wait till the fog lifts.” +</p> +<p> +“Why not move on, Dad?” asked Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, you boys up, hey? Well, for one thing, if +we travel in this fog we run the danger of being +caught in rapids and sucked forward before being +able to reach the bank. For another, we might—just +might—pass Thorwaldsson, in the fog, without +knowing it. He might be traveling, too.” +</p> +<p> +After some further discussion, it was decided the +party should remain until the fog lifted, and that +all should be on guard to catch any sound of movement +out of the fog which would indicate somebody, +presumably Thorwaldsson, was passing. Following +breakfast, in fact, all but Mr. Hampton, who remained +in camp, as a guide in case the others blundered and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_174'></a>174</span> +lost their way in the fog, took up positions +along the bank of the river, some twenty yards apart +to maintain “listening posts.” +</p> +<p> +An hour passed, and then another, with no indication +that the fog was thinning out, and with no +sound coming to straining ears except the lap of the +water along the rocks at their feet. It was nerve-trying +work in a way, to sit there for so long a +period, isolated, as if entirely alone in an unpeopled +world. The boys, at their various stations, felt the +strain considerably, more so, indeed, than did +Farnum or Art who were old hands at the wilderness +game. +</p> +<p> +In assigning all their stations, Mr. Hampton had +decided, because of the greater experience of the two +older men, that they should take up their positions +at the south end of the line. If any party south-bound +along the Coppermine escaped the attention of +the boys, Farnum and Art would be pretty likely to +remedy the oversight. +</p> +<p> +To Bob fell the most northerly position. And, as +he sat there, hunched up on a rock, staring out into +that thick greasy wall of mist, he felt, if anything, +more lonely than his companions. Jack and Frank, +at least, had the consolation of knowing there was +someone to either side. But, with none of his +friends beyond him on the north, Bob felt very much +alone, indeed. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_175'></a>175</span> +</p> +<p> +All sorts of reflections entered his mind, reflections +that had no bearing whatsoever on the situation +in which he found himself. He thought of sunny +days on Long Island, of flights in his airplanes or +zipping trips along the coast in his speed boat. He +thought of one thing and another, classroom, Mexican +mountains, that strange city of another world +found immured in the Andes, and—of Marjorie. +Ever since his first meeting with his sister’s friend, +Miss Faulkner, she had occupied a position of growing +importance in Bob’s scheme of things. Someday—— +</p> +<p> +“Some girl,” Bob said to himself. “I’ll have to +see more of her.” +</p> +<p> +He leaned forward, elbows planted on his knees, +eyes staring into the fog. In reality, his thoughts, +as can be seen, were far, far away. But presently, +a sound, muffled and faint, pierced his consciousness +and he sprang into instant alertness. He listened, +holding his breath, straining to hear. +</p> +<p> +It came again. +</p> +<p> +Bob started on a stumbling run for Jack, the first +man to the south. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_176'></a>176</span><a name='chXXI' id='chXXI'></a>CHAPTER XXI.—A WAILING CRY.</h2> +<p> +“Jack, Jack,” he shouted, as he ran through the +fog, blindly, but remembering to veer away from the +river bank a little to avoid the danger of tumbling +in. “Jack, Jack, where are you?” +</p> +<p> +A shadow, fog-distorted, loomed before him, big, +enormous. A hand gripped his shoulder and +brought him to a halt. +</p> +<p> +“Here I am, Bob. What’s the matter?” +</p> +<p> +Bob rubbed the back of a big hand across his eyes. +</p> +<p> +“I heard something out there,” he said, pointing +into the fog upon the river. “I guess I’d been asleep, +or daydreaming, anyway. I couldn’t be sure I had +heard anything. It came twice—that sound. Then +there was silence. So I came down here to ask +whether you had heard, too.” +</p> +<p> +“But, Bob, what was it? What did you hear? I +heard nothing.” +</p> +<p> +“Jack, it was the sound of a baby’s cry.” +</p> +<p> +Bob’s voice was solemn. A shiver ran through +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_177'></a>177</span> +Jack, as if a breath of cold air had fanned him. In +that fog-enwrapped isolation, in that far northern +wilderness, what could a baby be doing? It was +preposterous. More, it was uncanny. +</p> +<p> +“Bob, you were asleep. Yes, sir, you certainly +were dreaming. A baby. Huh.” +</p> +<p> +“Maybe so,” Bob said, reluctantly. “But, true +as I live, Jack——” +</p> +<p> +The other’s grip on his shoulder tightened. +</p> +<p> +Out of the fog came a wailing sound, distant, thin, +but unmistakable. It was the cry of a baby, if ever +there was such a thing. +</p> +<p> +But this time it came not from the river, but from +inland. The two listened, straining to hear, but the +cry died away without being repeated. They looked +at each other, an unnamable fear gripping them. +</p> +<p> +“Jack, I’m afraid,” confessed Bob in a whisper. +“I don’t know—there’s something strikes a chill into +me—I—I——” +</p> +<p> +He paused. Jack nodded. +</p> +<p> +“I feel the same way, Bob,” he said, low-voiced. +“What a pair of fools we are, though,” he added, +brightening. “That must be some bird, or animal, +perhaps.” +</p> +<p> +Almost unconsciously, they had been making their +way southward and now another figure rose up in +the fog before them—that of Frank. He was about +to speak, when once more the wailing cry rose, and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_178'></a>178</span> +this time it came from two quarters, from the river +and from farther inland. The three stood, silent, +speechless, and in that moment, while the echoes of +the cries still rang in their heads, Farnum and Art +materialized out of the fog. +</p> +<p> +“Good, there you all are,” said Farnum, in a low, +tense voice. “Follow me to camp.” +</p> +<p> +And without a word of explanation he started +at right angles away from the river, for they had +taken their stations in such fashion that Frank, holding +the middle position, would be directly opposite +the camp. This was in order to enable them to reach +it without losing their way in the fog. +</p> +<p> +“What is it, Art?” asked Jack, his voice matching +Farnum’s. +</p> +<p> +“Indians,” answered Art, tersely. “Stick close +together and don’t make no noise.” +</p> +<p> +It was a situation to tax the nerve of the bravest, +and the three boys hurrying along in the wake of +Farnum and Art could not be accused of cowardice +for experiencing a chill premonition of trouble ahead. +Often had Farnum spoken of the cruelty of these far +northern Indians. Bitter had been their experiences +with Lupo’s half-breeds, in whose veins flowed the +blood of the Indians of the north. +</p> +<p> +As they hurried along, there flashed through their +minds some of the stories Farnum had told. Had +they gotten so far, so near the end of their quest for +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_179'></a>179</span> +the “Lost Expedition” only to be wiped out by +Indians, on the very eve of success? Such thoughts +raced through the mind of each. But they were +determined fellows, accustomed to confront danger, +used to tight places. The first onrush of panic was +swept aside, and, by the time they tumbled into the +little hollow in which camp had been pitched, and +where Mr. Hampton awaited them, each had himself +well in hand. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton looked at their determined faces, +and a smile of grim approval was his greeting. +</p> +<p> +“Indians, boys,” he said. “Farnum told me. I +suspected as much. Now, we have no trees here for +bulwark, but this little hollow is good enough. Let +us lie down and line the edge of the pit. We’ll be +pretty close together, and if any Indians stumble on +us they’ll get a warm reception. Listen.” He spoke +in a low voice. “There goes that cry again. Does +it sound closer? Yes,” as the other nodded, “I +thought so. Quick. Take your positions. Jack, +my boy, you stay beside me.” +</p> +<p> +There was a little tremor in his voice. That was +all. But Jack understood. He clasped his father’s +hand strongly, then threw himself prone beside him, +while the others ranged themselves in a circle as +commanded. +</p> +<p> +Once more came the wailing cry from the inland. +Once more it was answered in kind from the water. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_180'></a>180</span> +But to all it was apparent that the sounds were +farther removed, and Mr. Hampton broke the painful +silence with a whispered: +</p> +<p> +“They’re moving on, moving away.” +</p> +<p> +“Look, Dad,” Jack exclaimed excitedly. “I can +see those rocks ahead where a minute ago was only +the white fog. Why, the fog’s lifting. It’s lifting, +Dad, sure enough.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re right, Jack,” his father replied, low-voiced, +but there was anxiety rather than jubilation +in his tone. “That will make it bad for us. We’ll +be exposed to sight.” +</p> +<p> +Once again came the wail, faint and far away. As +faint came the reply from the water. Both cries +were to the north. Originally they had come from +that direction. Now they were withdrawing whence +they had come. What could it mean? +</p> +<p> +The next minute a rattle of rifle fire broke the +silence. At the same time a cold breeze blew across +the crouching figures in the shallow pit and the fog +began to shred out fast before it. +</p> +<p> +Farnum sprang upright, gazing to the north. The +others also gained their feet. The shooting now +was fast and furious. +</p> +<p> +“I can’t understand,” said Farnum, in a puzzled +tone. +</p> +<p> +With an exclamation, Jack seized his father’s +arm. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_181'></a>181</span> +</p> +<p> +“Dad,” he cried, “you said Thorwaldsson might +be near.” +</p> +<p> +“Yes, why—” +</p> +<p> +“That’s it,” said Art, in a tone of conviction. +Mr. Farnum turned towards him. +</p> +<p> +“You mean?” +</p> +<p> +“Jack guessed it. Thorwaldsson’s being attacked.” +</p> +<p> +Jack nodded. +</p> +<p> +“That’s what I meant, Dad.” +</p> +<p> +“You’re right, Jack,” said his father. “Come on. +It can’t be anything else. Nobody but Thorwaldsson +is in this wilderness. We must help him. Stick +close together.” +</p> +<p> +And scrambling out of their shallow pit, Mr. +Hampton started on the dead run towards the direction +of the shooting, with the others at his heels. +</p> +<p> +The ground was bare of verdure, and great rocks +of the copper ore were scattered around. On this +account their view was restricted, but the sound of +the rifle fire grew momentarily louder, apprising +them that they were nearing the scene of conflict. +Suddenly Bob, who was in the lead, having out-distanced +the others several yards, rounded a big +rock and found himself on a bank above a narrow +strip of beach. +</p> +<p> +Below lay a number of forms, as of men dead +or wounded. Two canoes were drawn up on the +beach, and behind one of these, using it as a bulwark, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_182'></a>182</span> +crouched a man, rifle to shoulder. Farther +down the beach were three other canoes grounded, +and beside them several forms of wounded men, and +five or six men, crouching, firing at the lone defender +of the attacked position, creeping up on him. +</p> +<p> +Just as Bob reached the edge of the bank, the +attackers mustered up courage for a rush, and with +wild shouts swept forward. It looked dark, indeed, +for the lone defender of the upturned canoes. +Bob looked back to see how close were his companions, +but they were not yet in sight. His dash +had carried him farther than he had believed to be +the case. +</p> +<p> +It had taken only a glance to show Bob which way +the land lay. The lone defender was the survivor of +Thorwaldsson’s party, if the explorer’s party it was, +of which Bob had little doubt. He was a white +man. The others were half-breeds, and if Bob was +not mistaken they were of the same gang which he +had encountered before. +</p> +<p> +It was distinctly up to him to lend a hand. Throwing +his rifle to his shoulder, he prepared to open fire +on the crushing enemy. But as his finger pressed +the trigger, he groaned. The mechanism of the rifle +had became jammed in some fashion. Desperately +he worked to release the trigger, but to no avail. +</p> +<p> +Then the light of battle came into big Bob’s eyes. +The half-breeds were just below him now. Several +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_183'></a>183</span> +of their number had fallen in the rush, shot down +by the defender of the canoes. Four were left, and +they evidently were bent on polishing off their lone +opponent. So absorbed were all in their own drama, +they had not seen Bob. +</p> +<p> +Clubbing his rifle, Bob leaped. He came down on +the back of one of the attackers, and bore him to the +ground. With catlike swiftness, Bob, who himself +had fallen on his hands and knees, gathered himself +together, regained his feet, and swinging his clubbed +rifle, let out a yell fit to “frighten a wolf pack,” as +Frank later described it. +</p> +<p> +The stock of the rifle came down with a thud on +the shoulders of another of the half-breeds, felling +him as if he had been struck by lightning. So +tremendous was the blow, that it tore the rifle from +Bob’s grasp. But he leaped for another of the +enemy, a fellow whose startled face was close to his, +seized him about the waist and whirled him aloft to +be tossed aside as if he were a sack of meal. The +fourth man was dropped by a shot from the defender +of the canoe. +</p> +<p> +“Attaboy, Bob,” came Frank’s voice, from the +bluff above. +</p> +<p> +One after the other, Bob’s friends leaped to the +beach. +</p> +<p> +As Frank and Jack clapped him on the back, and +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_184'></a>184</span> +tried to grasp his hand, uttering enthusiastic praise +the while, Bob looked around. +</p> +<p> +“Say, where’s that chap? Why, he’s fainted.” +</p> +<p> +Freeing himself from his companions’ clutches, +Bob leaped over the up-ended canoe and bent above +the recumbent body of the doughty defender. +</p> +<p> +“Why, he’s badly wounded,” he cried. +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton pushed him aside. +</p> +<p> +“Here, let me look, Bob,” he said. “You fellows +help Farnum and Art in looking after the others. +The place is a shambles, with wounded men everywhere.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_185'></a>185</span><a name='chXXII' id='chXXII'></a>CHAPTER XXII.—OUTWARD BOUND.</h2> +<p> +It was a week before the wounded could be +moved. At close range though the fight had been, +none had been killed. When the boys exclaimed in +amazement at this, Art shrugged his shoulders. +</p> +<p> +“More bullets fly in a fight than ever reach their +mark,” he said. “I’ve seen men, tough fellows, +regular two-gun men, shoot at each other in Alaskan +saloons in the old days without anybody being +killed. When a man sees red, he don’t take no good +aim.” +</p> +<p> +The majority of the wounded were not hit in vital +spots, but Thorwaldsson had been shot in so many +places that his recovery at first was a matter of +doubt. It was he who had been the last of his party +to keep firing, he whom Bob had rescued in the nick +of time. +</p> +<p> +From Farrell and others of Thorwaldsson’s five +companions, however, the story of what had occurred +had been obtained. They had been on their way +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_186'></a>186</span> +down the Coppermine when they, too, had been overtaken +in the fog. They had landed in the little beach +to wait for the fog to lift. There the half-breeds, +survivor’s of Lupo’s gang, who had been dogging +the trail of Mr. Hampton and his party, had come +upon them. +</p> +<p> +The surprise had been mutual, for the half-breeds +had been looking for the Hampton party and not for +Thorwaldsson. However, they had attacked, the +majority from the canoes, and three who had been +scouting along shore, from the land. Surprised thus, +Thorwaldsson’s party had put up a game fight, but +one after the other had been shot down until only +the leader was left. He, barricaded behind the +canoes, had held off the rest of the attackers until +the final rush and Bob’s timely arrival. +</p> +<p> +As the days passed by, with the twilight deepening +into short nights, Art and Farnum both grew +increasingly anxious to be on their way for the outside. +They knew their North, and they realized +that the time remaining to them before Winter set +in was narrowing down to a perilously small edge. +</p> +<p> +“We’ll have a mighty hard job of it, Mr. Hampton,” +Farnum pleaded. “What with wounded on +our hands, and prisoners to guard, it looks almost +hopeless as it is for us to get out. But, anyway, we +can’t afford to waste time. Can’t Thorwaldsson be +moved? He’ll be all right in a canoe.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_187'></a>187</span> +</p> +<p> +“As long as the traveling is easy, yes,” said Mr. +Hampton. “He will be all right. But how about +at the portages? He’s lost lot of blood already. He +can’t afford to lose any more. However, I expect +that with care we can prevent his wounds from reopening. +We’ll start tomorrow.” +</p> +<p> +Accordingly, on the day appointed, camp was +broken, and the party got under way. Frank’s +shoulder was healed sufficiently to permit him once +more to wield a paddle, although still a trifle stiff, +and he took his place in the canoe with Bob and +Jack. They had another passenger this time in Farrell, +whose right arm had been broken by a shot in +the sanguinary fight on the river beach. Thorwaldsson +was taken in the canoe occupied by Mr. Hampton +and Farnum, Art going in one of the other craft +with members of Thorwaldsson’s party. Several +of the latter had been creased by rifle bullets and +one shot through a leg, but all could wield paddles. +</p> +<p> +And so the long trip out of the wilderness began, +with the half-breeds in three canoes, deprived of +arms and closely watched by their captors in the four +canoes bringing up the rear. With reasonable care, +it was felt, the prisoners could be controlled until +they should near civilization. Without weapons they +would be in a hopeless plight in the wilderness, unable +to defend themselves against wild animals, unable +to provide food for themselves. Therefore, no +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_188'></a>188</span> +attempt on the part of their captives to escape was +looked for by the others, until they should near the +outlying settlements of the inhabited country. +</p> +<p> +“When that time comes,” Mr. Hampton had +warned the boys, “we must be on the lookout, for +the half-breeds, unless closely watched, will try to +get back their weapons and make a break for it. And +I am determined to take them into civilization as +witnesses to prove my statement of the murderous +conspiracy against us on the part of an eminent gentleman +in faraway New York.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton spoke bitterly, for from all that had +occurred and from the accounts, first of Long Tom +and of the dying Lupo, and again of Farrell and the +surviving members of Thorwaldsson’s party, he had +pieced together the story of the conspiracy against +them. +</p> +<p> +To the boys he confided this tale, the main theme +of which was that when Farrell had told his story to +Mr. Otto Anderson concerning the discovery of the +oil-bearing region in the Arctic, Mr. Anderson’s +confidential secretary had gone to a New York financier +and sold him the information. He had not been +able to tell definitely, however, the location of the +oil region, for the very good reason, as before related, +that Farrell was not certain of it himself, his +vicissitudes in getting out of the country having unsettled +his mind. Therefore, this financier had sent +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_189'></a>189</span> +his agents westward with word that Thorwaldsson +be tracked. +</p> +<p> +“Perhaps this financier, Old Grimm, ordered the +mere tracking of Thorwaldsson,” said Mr. Hampton. +“But I doubt it. The attacks on Thorwaldsson’s +expedition, the disappearance of his ship and +crew, all look like parts of a deep-laid plan to attain +Grimm’s ends at whatever cost in human life. And, +on top of it all, the attack on us by Lupo, who was +paid a handsome sum down in Dawson by Anderson’s +former secretary, acting as agent for Grimm, +show the latter aimed to put us all out of the way.” +</p> +<p> +“And all for money,” said Jack. “It’s hard to +believe.” +</p> +<p> +“Ah, you don’t know Grimm,” said his father. +“The man who develops this Arctic oil region may +become the richest in the world. Grimm is ambitious +for that position. He’s got a lot of money so +far, in one crooked way or another. But he’s not +one of the big ones yet, not one of the richest. And +he wants to be supreme. Well, he has overreached +himself this time, for I’ve got the evidence, +and I’ll see that we get more in Dawson and Seattle +and New York. Mr. Grimm will no longer have +the power or freedom to toy with men’s lives when +I get through with him.” +</p> +<p> +Although Thorwaldsson lay as in a stupor and +could not be questioned, the full account of what had +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_190'></a>190</span> +befallen his expedition since it set out from Seattle +was learned from the others. First of all, they had +succeeded in retracing Farrell’s earlier footsteps, +and had found the oil region and the river running +through it. A thorough survey of the country had +been made, with maps showing the outlet by water +to the Arctic Ocean. +</p> +<p> +In fact, the party had made its way out the river +into the Arctic Ocean and around the coast into the +Coppermine. There they had encountered and made +friends with a tribe of Eskimo. They had started +down the Coppermine, or rather up, as it flows north +into the Arctic, but had been attacked, losing half +the members of their party and a large part of their +equipment, including the radio. It was after this +that the aviator of the expedition had attempted to +fly to the outside with news of Thorwaldsson’s +plight, the latter meanwhile being cared for through +the following Winter by the friendly Eskimo at the +mouth of the Coppermine, to which they had put +back. The death of the aviator, near the MacKenzie, +of course, was not known to the Thorwaldsson +party until the news was imparted by the boys. +</p> +<p> +The course followed as they struck southward was +not that pursued by Farrell when he had made his +way back to civilization. On that occasion he had +frequently been light-headed, and it was felt it +would be unwise to trust now to his guidance. Instead, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_191'></a>191</span> +Mr. Hampton and Farnum decided to retrace +their own trail back to the island in the lake where +MacDonald had been encountered, and thence follow +his course to the Fort of the Northwest Mounted +Police. +</p> +<p> +Day after day they pushed ahead, the nights ever +growing longer and colder, with frost on the ground +in the mornings. The honking of the wild geese +overhead, as they made their way south, also was a +warning that the mantle of Winter soon would settle +down. +</p> +<p> +“You see,” Art said to the boys one day, “Winter +in this country not only means dreadful cold for +which we ain’t prepared in the matter of clothing +or snowshoes or nothing, but also it means there +ain’t no food to be had. Yes, there’s plenty of game +now, geese and duck everywhere along the streams, +caribou plentiful. But you notice they’re all going +south. When Winter strikes, there’ll be nothing in +this wilderness but rabbit and beaver. Beaver’s all +right—if you can dig ’em out o’ their huts. But +rabbit—huh! Well, you can starve fine on rabbit.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_192'></a>192</span><a name='chXXIII' id='chXXIII'></a>CHAPTER XXIII.—LONG JIM APPEARS.</h2> +<p> +Winter, after all, caught them in its icy grip far +north of where they had planned to be when the cold +should really set in. This was due to a variety of +circumstances. The slowness of Thorwaldsson’s recovery +was one of the retarding influences, which +prevented them making the desired speed. After +weeks of travel he was still in a comatose condition, +and Mr. Hampton feared his brain had been affected +by a bullet that ploughed along the left side of his +head. The other wounded, although quick to recover, +also acted as a hindrance, especially at the +first. +</p> +<p> +Then, too, the season was unusual. Winter arrived +weeks ahead of the expected time. And daily, +as the ice on stream and river thickened, it became +increasingly hard to break a way. Yet the canoes +could not be abandoned, for, once snow began to +fly, the travelers would have been helpless on land, +without sleds or snowshoes. Sleds of a sort could +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_193'></a>193</span> +be constructed, of course, and makeshift snowshoes +made, too, but neither would be worth much, and +the manufacture of them would take a good deal of +time. +</p> +<p> +Two sentries were always posted at night now; +one by a fire around which slumbered the prisoners, +the other by a fire in the midst of a circle composed +of the Hampton and Thorwaldsson parties combined. +It was Jack’s turn to keep guard one cold +but clear night, after a heavy snowfall, which had +caused a great deal of suffering to all, and had +brought them, indeed, to the verge of despair. For +they were insufficiently clad, even though the skins +of many animals slain for food in the past weeks +had been saved and roughly cured for wraps; and, +in addition, with the closing-in of Winter game had +become so scarce that the camp was virtually on the +verge of starvation. +</p> +<p> +Jack was mounting guard by the fire around which +lay his friends. One of the Thorwaldsson party, +Swenson, did sentry duty by the other fire. Looking +across the little space which separated the two +parties, Jack could see the huddled figures of the +half-breeds lying so close to the fire, which Swenson +fed constantly with fuel, that they seemed almost +to be in it. Around him the members of his +own party were similarly disposed. +</p> +<p> +With a sigh, Jack arose, caught up an armful of +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_194'></a>194</span> +wood and tossed it into the fire. The flames at once +shot high and, as if that were a signal, out of the +darkness beyond came a robust hail. +</p> +<p> +“Hello, there. Keep ’er goin’, sonny.” +</p> +<p> +Into the light of the fire a moment later strode a +big fur-clad figure of a man on snowshoes. On his +back was a pack which he dropped to the ground +with a sigh of relief. Then he leaned his rifle in +the crook of an elbow and, pulling off great fur mittens, +spread his hands to the blaze, working his fingers +gratefully back and forth. +</p> +<p> +“Cold an’ gittin’ colder,” he announced, casually. +“Got a nice fire here.” +</p> +<p> +Jack was nonplussed. In the first place, to find +another wanderer in this wilderness which they believed +unpeopled was exciting enough. But to +have him walk in casually and without vouchsafing +any explanation of his presence took Jack’s +breath away for the moment. Yet Jack knew enough +of the woodland lore to realize that hospitality is +the first law of the wilds, and that questions distinctly +would not be in order. He decided the best +thing for him would be to wait for the other to take +the lead in the conversation. +</p> +<p> +This the intruder was not slow to do, beginning +even as he eased his stiffened fingers in the warmth +of the fire. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_195'></a>195</span> +</p> +<p> +“Didn’t know there was anybody else in this +country,” he said. “Been around here long?” +</p> +<p> +A look of clumsy craft from under shaggy brows +accompanied the question. Jack had to smile to himself. +</p> +<p> +“No; not long,” he said composedly. “And you?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, I been huntin’ an’ trappin’ ’round here,” the +other said. +</p> +<p> +To Jack it seemed the man was an honest enough, +even a likeable, type, and yet that he was acting +evasively. He decided it would be a good plan to +get a more experienced head to help him deal with +the situation. None of his party apparently was +awake, all being worn out with the terrific strain +of the day’s travel. But Art lay near him. In fact, +his foot was not six inches from Jack. +</p> +<p> +Unostentatiously, in order not to attract the newcomer’s +attention, Jack moved his foot to a position +where with his toe he could tap on Art’s ankles. It +was sufficient for the purpose apparently, for, out +of the tail of his eye Jack saw Art’s body stiffen +and his head lift up slightly from the ground. For +what followed, however, he was totally unprepared. +</p> +<p> +Art sprang to his feet, leaped forward and began +thumping the newcomer vigorously on the back. +</p> +<p> +“Why, you ol’ son-of-a-gun,” he cried. “You ol’ +son-of-a-gun.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_196'></a>196</span> +</p> +<p> +“Li’l Artie, or I’m goin’ blind,” cried the other, +seizing Art by the hand and pumping up and down. +</p> +<p> +Jack turned in amazement to Art. +</p> +<p> +“Why—why—you know each other!” he cried. +</p> +<p> +“Know each other? Har, har, har,” roared the +giant, in a guffaw that aroused the others about the +campfire. “Know each other? That’s a good one.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton, Farnum, Bob and Frank, Farrell +and several of the others gathered around, looking +their questions, and Art turned to satisfy them. +</p> +<p> +“Ever hear o’ Long Jim Golden?” he asked. +“Well, this is him—the daggonedest trapper on the +face o’ the earth. Ain’t seen him in years since he +left Circle City in the rush. Where you been, Jim?” +</p> +<p> +“Trappin’.” Jim looked around at the interested +faces. “You tol’ who I am,” he said. “Now +tell me who’s your friends, Artie.” +</p> +<p> +“Sure,” said Art heartily, effecting introductions. +“Here we all are,” he concluded, and then his face +fell as he added: “but where we’ll be soon, I don’t +know, nor what’s to become of us.” +</p> +<p> +Long Jim looked first at one, then at another, +then his eyes roved over the camp. +</p> +<p> +“How come?” he asked. “No sleds nor dogs nor +snowshoes nor nothin’. How come?” +</p> +<p> +“Sit here by the fire and I’ll tell you, Jim,” said +Art. “The rest o’ you, we won’t bother you none +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_197'></a>197</span> +with loud voices. We’ll jest whisper-like. You’ll +want to turn in and sleep, so go to it.” +</p> +<p> +Nothing loath, the others with the exception of +Jack, who moved to one side so as not to intrude +on the two old acquaintances thus strangely reunited, +turned in and soon were once more asleep. +</p> +<p> +Briefly as possible, Art explained to Long Jim +the circumstances leading up to their present position. +From across the fire, Jack watched them. He +saw that Long Jim paid close attention to Art’s narrative +and that, indeed, it seemed to affect him +strangely. For over his open, rugged features, not +constructed to conceal their owner’s moods, swept +doubt, uncertainty, indecision, as if within the man +was going on a fight between two contending forces. +Jack was puzzled. What could Long Jim be thinking +of? +</p> +<p> +Then Long Jim slowly rose to his feet, placing a +hand on the shoulder of his companion who remained +seated but looking up at him. Jack unconsciously +moved closer as the big trapper appeared about to +speak. He did not want to eavesdrop, but Long +Jim’s expression had puzzled him greatly. What +could it mean? +</p> +<p> +“Artie,” said Long Jim in a louder tone than that +in which their whispered conversation had been carried +on, and one that reached Jack’s ears, “Artie, my +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_198'></a>198</span> +boy,” he said, “I wish you didn’t have them skunks +with ye.” +</p> +<p> +“Them breeds,” said Art, jerking a thumb back +over a shoulder to indicate the prisoners sleeping +about the other fire. +</p> +<p> +“Them same,” said Long Jim. “Cause why, you +asks me? Cause I got a paradise to take you all to, +where you can spend the Winter lapped in comfort. +An’ I don’t want to take no rascals like them half-breeds +there. But——” +</p> +<p> +Art was on his feet, excitement struggling with +disbelief. +</p> +<p> +“What? What you mean, Long Jim?” +</p> +<p> +“Jest what I says,” answered the other emphatically. +“A paradise, I calls it. An’ a paradise it +is. An’ the quicker we git there the better, so wake +up your friends an’ let me talk to ’em. If we have +to take them skunks, why, we’ll take ’em.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_199'></a>199</span><a name='chXXIV' id='chXXIV'></a>CHAPTER XXIV.—A TALE OF PARADISE.</h2> +<p> +At the insistence of Long Jim, Art and Jack, who +had been called to join the pair, speedily re-aroused +their friends. +</p> +<p> +“I ain’t no hand for talkin’,” Long Jim declared +in answer to Art’s requests for further information. +“I got to tell this. But onct oughter be enough. +No use my tellin’ you an’ then tellin’ the rest o’ +them all over agin.” +</p> +<p> +Jack smiled discreetly. Long Jim claimed he was +“no hand for talking,” yet his tongue wagged continually. +However, his heart seemed in the right +place, and certainly he spoke emphatically enough +of a haven not too far away to which they could +go for refuge. What was it he called it? “Paradise.” +Jack was anxious to hear, and wasted no time on +gentle methods in arousing the sleepers. +</p> +<p> +“Lookit here,” said Long Jim, as the circle gathered +around him. “Art’s been tellin’ me the trouble +you folks is in. Looks to me like you moughtn’t +be able to make it out o’ this country.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_200'></a>200</span> +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton nodded grave confirmation. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I know of a place that’s paradise,” said +Long Jim, impressively. “An’ I’ll take ye all there, +an’ ye can spend the Winter—warm, game, everything +there. Only thing, like I tol’ Artie here, is I +hate to have to take them skunks o’ half-breeds in +there. They’ll be a-comin’ back later an’ ruin the +country.” +</p> +<p> +“But I don’t understand,” said Mr. Hampton. +“What is it you are talking about?” +</p> +<p> +“Don’t blame ye,” said Long Jim. “Think maybe +the ol’ man’s crazy, don’t ye? Don’t blame ye for +that, neither. But, look here, night’s dyin’ an’ if +ye stand up an’ look where I’m pointin’ ye’ll see +somethin’.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton arose wonderingly, and the others +also stood up. +</p> +<p> +“Thar,” said Long Jim, stretching an arm to the +westward. “What d’ye see?” +</p> +<p> +“Why—a great bank of fog,” said Mr. Hampton, +after gazing intently. “How strange. Fog in +Winter. I don’t understand.” +</p> +<p> +“An’ ye all think that’s fog, hey?” asked Long +Jim, turning to the others. +</p> +<p> +Nodding heads answered. +</p> +<p> +“Well, it ain’t,” he said. “That’s the vapor from +hot springs.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_201'></a>201</span> +</p> +<p> +“Hot springs?” Mr. Hampton sounded frankly +incredulous. +</p> +<p> +“Wait’ll you see for yourself,” said Long Jim, +tolerantly. “I wouldn’t believe it, neither, when I +first saw it. I thought it was fog, too. But bein’ +as how heavy fog in the Winter were strange, I +went to investigate. An’ I found paradise.” +</p> +<p> +Then, under Mr. Hampton’s skillful questioning, +Long Jim told his story. He declared he had lived +in this region now these two years, and that since +first arriving he had seen nobody except themselves. +Drawn by the seeming fog to investigate, he had +come upon an almost tropical valley through which +ran not only one but several rivers of water forever +at the boiling point. These rivers, moreover, he said, +were fed by hundreds of hot springs, which bubbled +out of the ground in all directions. It was the steam +from these which, condensing as it rose above the +valley and struck the cold Winter air, had formed +the fog which first attracted his attention. +</p> +<p> +“Once I were in South America,” said Long Jim. +“Down clost to the Equator. Well, I’m tellin’ you, +it were that hot all last Summer right in that valley. +As for right now, ye’ll find it mighty pleasant an’ +warm, an’ when snow falls it’s only rain by the +time it passes through the heat hangin’ over that +valley all the time.” +</p> +<p> +“Hurray,” cried Frank, exuberantly. “Let’s go. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_202'></a>202</span> +No snow fellows. Get that? I’ve had all the snow +I need for one season, anyway, and I guess I can get +along without any more for some time to come.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Hampton smiled, but, disregarding Frank’s +jubilation, proceeded with his questioning. And +Long Jim, delighted with an audience to which he +could talk all he pleased, after having been without +companions for several years, continued unfolding +new wonders. +</p> +<p> +This valley, he declared, was about 200 miles +long and 40 miles wide. They were now near its +upper end, to which point Long Jim had made his +way by slow travel and exploration during the two +years since his arrival at the southern end. +</p> +<p> +Game? +</p> +<p> +At the question, Long Jim grew even more +eloquent. +</p> +<p> +He declared that, due to the heat generated by +the hot springs and the boiling rivers, the fertility +of the soil was amazing. The vegetation, in fact, +achieved a jungle growth. Wild rose bushes grew +tall as trees, with stems as thick as a man’s forearm +and so dense that it was impossible to force a way +through them. Willows grew to the size of big +trees, with branches so thick it was possible to walk +along them. +</p> +<p> +“An’ birches,” added Long Jim, “git to be hunderds +o’ feet tall, so tall, in fact, they can’t hold +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_203'></a>203</span> +themselves up but bend over an’ touch the ground. +</p> +<p> +“Likely you think I’m out o’ my head. Oh, I kin +see it in your eyes. But I’m tellin’ you the God’s +truth, men.” And Long Jim spoke with such honest +sincerity, they were compelled to believe him. “In +sich a place,” he continued, “it ain’t likely there +wouldn’t be no game. Why, the animals there is +thick as flees on a ol’ hound. +</p> +<p> +“Mountain sheep, goats, caribou, moose, bear, +deer, wolves, foxes, oh, every wild animal o’ the +whole North kin be found there—down in that +valley an’ in the mountains enclosin’ of it. An’ I tell +you the truth,” he concluded, his voice sinking for +effect, “the moose git so fat they’re almost square +an’ they’re so darn tame ye can almost touch ’em.” +</p> +<p> +As Long Jim’s speech came to a halt, Mr. Hampton +turned and stared across the brightening landscape +to the distant bank of vapor. Soon the short +days would end entirely, and the perpetual night of +the Arctic would arrive. Only a miracle could save +them from perishing, all unprepared to face further +travel as they were. Could it be possible that miracle +had occurred, and that this trapper was telling the +truth? +</p> +<p> +Jack looked at his father, and sensed what was +passing through the older man’s mind. Truth to +tell, some such thoughts were in his own. He went +up to him and laid a hand across his shoulders. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_204'></a>204</span> +</p> +<p> +“Come on, Dad,” he said. “I believe Long Jim +is telling the truth. And we better make the effort +to get to this valley. He may be exaggerating a +little, but certainly it looks like a promised land.” +</p> +<p> +“That’s right, Jack,” said his father, shaking off +his reverie, and his alert self once more. “We’ll +have a hard enough struggle getting there, what +with having to cross this waste of new-fallen snow +without snowshoes or sleds. Well, let’s see what +can be done.” +</p> +<p> +Eventually, the party got into motion. The +canoes were cached, where they could be recovered +in the Summer. There was little likelihood anybody +else would pass that way, to appropriate them. +Equipment was made into packs shouldered by +everybody except Art and Bob. These two were +to carry Thorwaldsson on a stretcher, improvised +out of poles cut on the river bank, and blankets. +</p> +<p> +Fortunately, the crest of the valley to which +Long Jim was guiding them was distant not more +than five or six miles. Even at that, however, the +going was tremendously difficult because of the mass +of new-fallen snow. Had it not been for Long Jim +to break the way on his snowshoes, moreover, it is +doubtful whether they could have made it, heavy +laden as they were. But Long Jim worked patiently +backward and forward, breaking down the snow, +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_205'></a>205</span> +and packing it a second and even a third time with +his webs. +</p> +<p> +“How come you were out here, ol’ timer?” asked +Art once, as Long Jim paused, and he caught up +with him. +</p> +<p> +“Well, I git lonesome a leetle,” said Long Jim. +“I was prospectin’ around in the mountains rimmin’ +the valley yestiddy, an’ I saw you across the snow. +Jest leetle specks you were, but agin the snow I +thought you were humans. I couldn’t hardly believe +my eyes, but I come along investigatin’. An’ then +when night come on, you lit your fires, an’——” +</p> +<p> +“Sure was lucky for us, Long Jim, if you ain’t +a-lyin’,” said Art. +</p> +<p> +Long Jim stiffened, and for a moment was +prepared to stand on his dignity but then he smiled +in a jolly way that sent crinkly wrinkles all around +his blue eyes. +</p> +<p> +“Don’t blame ye for that, Artie,” he said. “Sounds +like I were crazy, don’t it? But jest wait till you +see.” +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_206'></a>206</span><a name='chXXV' id='chXXV'></a>CHAPTER XXV.—VOICES FROM THE WILDERNESS.</h2> +<p> +But Long Jim had not falsified. The valley +proved, indeed, to be more even than he described, +for as the world now knows important mineral deposits +were discovered, including gold, silver, copper, +coal, iron and oil. But of the development +going on to bring not only this marvelous region +but the vast oil region beyond the Coppermine into +the world’s resources naught need be said now. +Suffice it to say that such development is under way, +for Mr. Hampton had the ear of the great financiers, +and was able to bring it about; and also that Farrell +and Long Jim are receiving handsome incomes from +their shares in the various projects. +</p> +<p> +Here the party settled down, constructed huts, +and prepared to await the coming of Spring when the +snow should disappear from the vast wilderness +separating them from the northern edge of the +civilized lands and the ice in the rivers be unlocked. +</p> +<p> +One of the first things done by the boys was to +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_207'></a>207</span> +erect their radio plant, and they succeeded without +much difficulty in opening communication with the +little Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police on the +farthest rim of the settled country. MacDonald and +Dick, with their prisoners, had arrived only a day or +two before communication was opened, and the two +parties exchanged the stories of their adventures +by radio. +</p> +<p> +To Long Jim the radio was as great a source of +wonder as Long Jim’s valley was to the boys. He +could never get over marveling at it, and every time +that it was brought into use, Long Jim, if he were +in the vicinity, was on hand, sitting in rapt and +open-mouthed astonishment while the boys operated +the instruments. +</p> +<p> +Much time was spent in exploring this wonderful +valley, at the resources of which Mr. Hampton +could never express sufficient astonishment. +</p> +<p> +“It is a freak of nature, of course, boys,” he explained +on one occasion. +</p> +<p> +“How wonderful that it should have remained +undiscovered for so long,” said Jack. +</p> +<p> +“Not so marvelous,” said his father. “Few, indeed, +are the people who ever have penetrated any +distance into all this vast wilderness of northern +Canada. It was supposed, and still is generally supposed, +to be bleak and uninhabitable. You know +from experience that the contrary is the case. It +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_208'></a>208</span> +is delightful country in Summer, and man is so constituted +that, if properly clothed and housed, he can +stand any severity of Winter. Some day, I predict, +all this vast wilderness through which we have been +making our way will be settled. That day is far off, +of course, but it is coming. The growth of world +population will force the conquest of the sub-Arctic.” +</p> +<p> +The one thing making their stay in this valley of +marvels unpleasant was the constant rainfall. For +in the Arctic storm succeeds storm, sweeping down +from the North Pole in never-ending succession. +And these storms which they knew were burying the +land beyond the valley under a pall of ice and snow +poured torrents of water on them. The peaks of +the mountain ranges rimming the valley were buried +under snow, gleaming wan in the occasional moonlight +between the storms, for by now the long night +had come. But on them no snow fell, for as Long +Jim had foretold the snow as it passed through the +temperate air created by the eternally hot rivers and +springs was transformed into rain. +</p> +<p> +Two events of importance marked their stay. +One was the escape of their prisoners, together with +some rifles which they succeeded in stealing. Pursuit +in the darkness, and through the jungle-like +reaches of the forest was almost hopeless and was +quickly abandoned. Nor, although vigilant watch +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_209'></a>209</span> +was kept to prevent surprise, did they ever see sign +of the half-breeds again. +</p> +<p> +“It’s a big valley,” said Mr. Hampton, “and I +doubt whether they will attempt to attack us. Rather, +they will keep out of our way. They are poorly +armed and inferior in numbers, since we have all +come together. Their escape, I imagine, was incited +by a fear of what awaited them if we succeeded +in getting them back to civilization and the +courts. Well,” he said, with a sigh, “I regret, of +course, the loss of witnesses to substantiate the +charges of deviltry which I shall surely bring +against Grimm. Nevertheless, I am glad to be rid +of them.” +</p> +<p> +It was a sentiment in which all concurred. +</p> +<p> +The other event referred to was the opening by +means of relayed messages via the Mounted Post +and Edmonton of communication by radio with Mr. +Temple in faraway New York. When word +reached Bob’s father that the Hampton party was +safe and sound and wintering in the wilderness, he +quit work for the day, despite the fact that a big +business deal was clamoring for his attention, and +sped by motor down to his Long Island home. +</p> +<p> +Bob’s sister, Della, was sitting in the library, +staring spiritlessly out at the Winter landscape. Mr. +Temple stole up behind her and, reaching over her +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_210'></a>210</span> +shoulder, thrust the message from the radio corporation +under her eyes. +</p> +<p> +Della’s glance fell and she began to read the +printed words. Then she leaped up, whirled around, +her eyes like two stars, and threw her arms around +her father’s neck. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Daddy, Dad-dee,” she screamed. +</p> +<p> +He held her off at arm’s length and looked at her. +Her eyes began to fill up with happy tears, and once +more she threw herself into his arms. +</p> +<p> +“Well, kiddy, cry all you want to,” he said, comfortingly, +patting her on the back. “I guess that’s +the medicine you needed. You’ll be all right now.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Temple’s words bore reference to the fact +that for months Della’s health had been failing, and +she had shown so little interest in her studies that +it had been considered wiser to take her out of the +boarding school which she attended, and bring her +home. +</p> +<p> +“Oh, yes, Dad-dee,” she sobbed, her face +buried in his coat. “I’ll be all right now.” +</p> +<p> +Then she lifted her tear-stained cheeks and asked +anxiously: +</p> +<p> +“It says they are all safe—<em>all</em>? Doesn’t it?” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Temple nodded, a mischievous twinkle in his +eyes. +</p> +<p> +“Yes, kiddy,” he said. “Frank’s safe, too.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_211'></a>211</span> +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Dad-dee, I didn’t mean that,” said Della, +blushing furiously. +</p> +<p> +“No need to fib to me, kiddy,” said her father. +“Bob is only a brother; but Frank——” +</p> +<p> +“No, you shan’t say it,” laughed Della, and she +placed a hand over his mouth. +</p> +<p> +Nevertheless, it was to be noted that from that +time on Della no longer moped and looked ill, but +took an intense interest in all the daily affairs of +life, even wanting to return at once to school. +</p> +<p> +“Marjie Faulkner will be dying to talk things +over with me,” she explained to her mother. +</p> +<p> +“Why, dear, what do you mean?” +</p> +<p> +“Well—you know—she’s sweet on Bob.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, you girls,” said Mrs. Temple, with a sigh. +“You’ll be the death of me. At your age——” +</p> +<p> +“At our age you were engaged to Father,” said +Della. “Now don’t deny it. Dad has even told +me how you planned to elope, but were overheard +by your mother who persuaded you to be conventional +and have a wedding at home.” +</p> +<p> +Mr. Temple looked across the dinner table at his +wife and grinned shamelessly. +</p> +<p> +“George, did you tell her that?” +</p> +<p> +“Why not? It was the truth.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, George. Aren’t children nowadays hard +enough to handle as it is, without letting them know +how silly we older people were once?” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_212'></a>212</span> +</p> +<p> +“Now, Mother,” said Della, rising quickly and +going to her mother’s side, and kissing her. “Don’t +scold Father. Can’t you see he’s dreaming of that +day again?” +</p> +<p> +And dancing to her father’s side, Della dropped +a kiss on the spot where his hair was thinning out, +and then danced gaily from the dining-room. +</p> +<p> +Once more Mr. Temple grinned at his wife, as he +sipped his coffee. Then putting down the cup, he +leaned forward and said confidentially: +</p> +<p> +“You do remember that time, don’t you, dear?” +</p> +<p> +Mrs. Temple started to say something sharp by +way of reproof for his silliness, but a softened look +came into her eyes as she stared back. The years +that intervened since their youth seemed to slip +away. +</p> +<p> +“Why, George,” she said. “You look positively +handsome.” +</p> +<p> +As for Della, a telegram to her friend, Marjorie +Faulkner, apprised the latter of the message from +the Far North to the effect that the lost had been +found. And Della soon followed her message in +person. Thereafter the two girls were never tired +of talking about the possible adventures that had +befallen the boys, and while Marjorie sang Bob’s +praises, Della sang Frank’s. Poor Jack, it is to be +feared, was somewhat slighted in these discussions. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_213'></a>213</span> +</p> +<p> +“I’ll warrant you that Bob saved the day for +them all,” Marjorie said on one occasion. “He’s +so big and strong.” +</p> +<p> +“Well,” flashed Della, “Bob’s my brother, and +that’s all right. But if they ever got in a tight +pinch, I’m <em>sure</em> it was Frank that got them out. +He’s got more brains than all the rest put together.” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, Della, how can you say that?” cried Marjorie. +</p> +<p> +“Well, just because Bob is my brother must I be +always praising him?” demanded Della. +</p> +<p> +For a moment the two girls positively glared at +each other. +</p> +<p> +Then the twinkle began to come, and they +laughed. +</p> +<p> +Then they were hugging each other. +</p> +<p> +And then they were at it again. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_214'></a>214</span><a name='chXXVI' id='chXXVI'></a>CHAPTER XXVI.—TREED BY WOLVES.</h2> +<p> +One more adventure, and that a serious one, was +to befall the boys as a final taste of life in the wilderness. +One day towards the end of Winter, when +the sky cleared after several days of tremendous rain, +the three boys who had been cooped up in their quarters +and had worn out even the amusement of listening +to the Edmonton radio concerts or communicating +with the Post of the Mounted, announced +they were going hunting. +</p> +<p> +The supply of fresh meat had fallen pretty low, +and additions to their larder would not be unwelcome. +Accordingly, Mr. Hampton made no objection +to their departure, but insisted that Art or Long +Jim accompany them. +</p> +<p> +“I’d be no good,” said Long Jim. “Sence I did +that fool trick o’ cuttin’ my hand with the axe a +couple-three days ago, I cain’t set finger to trigger. +You better go, Art.” +</p> +<p> +“All right, boys,” said Art. “I’d like to stretch +a leg, too.” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_215'></a>215</span> +</p> +<p> +The four, accordingly, set out. In the forest surrounding +the spot where they had chosen to erect +their huts, there was no longer any game, for the +animals had come to learn that these strange creatures +brought destruction and had decamped elsewhere. +Finally, after they had proceeded some distance +without sighting anything, Art suggested they +strike for a higher level on the adjacent mountain +side. The huts had been erected near the foot of +one of the ranges rimming the valley. +</p> +<p> +“Maybe we’ll run into a mountain sheep or a +goat,” he said. “Anyhow, we can see better from a +higher lever, for this forest down here is so thick +you can hardly see a yard away. The moon’s out +an’ up there the trees is thinner.” +</p> +<p> +With Art leading the way, the party began its +upward climb. For some time they toiled upward +until presently they reached a level unaffected by +the more temperate air of the valley floor, and where, +as a consequence, snow covered the rocks. Across +a bare shoulder of rock from which the wind had +swept all but a trace of snow they made their way +and then plunged into a thick woods beyond. +</p> +<p> +Frank, who was in the rear, laid down his rifle +and bent over to adjust the clumsy lacing of a thick +shoe pack of the kind they had made for themselves +from the skins of slain animals. The others plodding +along, head down, did not notice he had +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_216'></a>216</span> +stopped, and kept on going. He spent more time +at the task than he had anticipated, and when finally +he straightened up and picked up his rifle, they were +not in sight. +</p> +<p> +Frank was not worried, however, for he felt sure +he would be able to trace them in the snow and +would soon catch up with them. He set out at a +brisk pace. The snow grew deeper, however, where +the wind had not had a chance to whisk it away, and +the going was hard. He had proceeded some distance +before he noticed that he had gotten off the +trail left by his companions. Angry with himself +for his carelessness, but still not worried, he halted +to consider what was best for him to do. +</p> +<p> +“Shucks,” he said aloud. “Guess I better go back +over my steps till I find where I left their trail.” +</p> +<p> +And with this intention, he turned to go back. +Even as he did so, he saw a pack of long gray bodies +racing through the trees in his direction. At the +same instant they gave tongue. It was a pack of +wolves. They had scented him and were now lifting +the cry which announced their prey was near. +</p> +<p> +Frank started to fling the rifle to his shoulder, +but then he lowered it. The flitting forms were still +yards away. And although moonlight sifted through +the bare limbs of the trees, it did not sufficiently +illumine the scene to make the wolves good targets. +He decided his best plan would be to seek refuge +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_217'></a>217</span> +in a tree first of all, and then he could fire at the +wolves at his leisure and with a sureness of aim +that would not now be his. These thoughts or reflections +flashed through his mind in an instant. The +next moment he was putting his plan into execution, +and climbing into a tall fir. +</p> +<p> +He was not a moment too soon, either, for the +baying came closer and closer and even as he struggled +frantically to climb higher the leader of the wolf +pack reached the foot of his refuge, and sprang high +into the air. Frank heard the snap of the great jaws, +and looked down into a yawning red cavern of a +mouth. +</p> +<p> +The next moment his rifle slipped from his grasp, +and fell on the snout of the wolf who leaped aside +in temporary panic. Then the rest of the pack arrived +on the scene, jumping and snarling, their +heads in the air, their wicked eyes agleam as they +scented the prey they had treed but which temporarily +had escaped them. +</p> +<p> +Frank threw an arm around the main trunk of +the tree to steady himself, for he was sick with vexation +at his own carelessness in not having properly, +secured his rifle. Meantime the wolves circled close +about the tree, looking up, and one big fellow even +put his forefeet against the trunk and reared high +till his head rested on the lowermost branch. Then +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_218'></a>218</span> +he retired to join the others, and all squatted in an +expectant ring close about the foot of the tree. +</p> +<p> +When his vexation had passed, Frank set himself +to a serious consideration of his position. And at +once he realized that he must try before it was too +late and they got out of earshot to attract the attention +of his comrades. Perhaps already they had +gotten beyond reach. At that he had a moment of +panic. Then he grew calmer. If they had moved +away, he told himself, they would discover his absence +presently and retrace their steps in search of +him. +</p> +<p> +He still had his revolver. At first he did not +trust himself to handle it, because of the trembling +of his hands. Then he grew cooler. His hand +steadied. He thought he would shout to attract his +companions’ attention first of all. And raising his +voice, he sent call after call ringing through the +forest. +</p> +<p> +The wolves gave back yelp for scream, and soon +the whole pack was snarling and yowling and making +a terrific, demoniac din. +</p> +<p> +The sound steadied him. +</p> +<p> +“Good,” he thought, “the boys will know there +are wolves, anyway.” +</p> +<p> +Their own snarls reacted on the wolves, exciting +them. And once more they came up to the foot of +the tree, rearing their forefeet against it and leaping +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_219'></a>219</span> +upward. It was Frank’s chance, and he took +it. +</p> +<p> +With one arm clasping the trunk of the tree, he +leaned forward and took careful aim at the biggest +of the grey shapes below. At that moment, the +wolf opened his mouth in a jaw-clashing howl. It +was his last. Frank’s bullet plunged down his +throat, and the wolf rolled over in the snow. +</p> +<p> +His mates without a second’s hesitation deserted +their attempts to get at Frank, and began snarling +over the dead body. The sight sickened Frank, and +he closed his eyes a moment. Then the thought occurred +that, if he added several more corpses to the +ghoulish feast, he might divert the attention of the +rest of the pack to such an extent that he would be +able to slip away unseen, perhaps by making his +way through the trees for a short distance before +jumping to the ground. +</p> +<p> +There was no need now for care in aiming, as +the wolves were in a thick mass over the body of +the fallen, so Frank fired several shots in rapid succession +into the mass. The effect was instantly apparent, +for two more wolves went down, and the +tearing and crunching announced a renewal of the +awful feast. +</p> +<p> +Now, thought Frank, was his time to escape, if +possible. He had heard no answering replies, and +believed his companions must have gotten out of +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_220'></a>220</span> +earshot. If so, he must depend on his own resources +to make his escape. He was about to start +swinging to a nearby tree, the branches of which +interlocked with those of the tree in which he had +found refuge, when the thought occurred that, perhaps, +he would be able to obtain his rifle undiscovered +by the wolves. +</p> +<p> +Cautiously he started to descend, his eyes alternately +on the snarling wolf pack several yards from +the tree and on the limbs he must grip in his descent. +He had almost reached the lowermost limb +when his grip slipped and he fell. +</p> +<p> +Frank thought his end had come, but as he struck +the ground his hands closed on the coveted rifle, and +he scrabbled to regain his feet, flinging the rifle to +his shoulder as he did so. +</p> +<p> +His fall had been seen. One of the wolves turned +aside from the outskirts of the pack, where he was +not getting his share of the gruesome feast, and +sprang for him. The next moment, as a shot rang +out from behind Frank, the wolf dropped quivering +at his feet. +</p> +<p> +“Steady, Frank,” cried Art’s voice. “Give ’em +all you’ve got.” +</p> +<p> +Without looking around, mastering his trembling +by a supreme effort, Frank brought the rifle to his +shoulder and began firing into the pack, even as the +three rifles of his companions also opened fire. +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_221'></a>221</span> +</p> +<p> +At that close range every shot told and not a wolf +escaped. Eleven bodies, including the mutilated remains +of the three which Frank had slain with revolver +shots, were stretched on the snow under the +trees. +</p> +<p> +When it was all over, his companions gathered +about Frank and explanations followed. Then they +made their way back to camp. +</p> +<h2><span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_222'></a>222</span><a name='chXXVII' id='chXXVII'></a>CHAPTER XXVII—CONCLUSION.</h2> +<p> +Far to the southward, late in the Summer, the +party containing our friends and the Thorwaldsson +party as well as Long Jim Golden, all bronzed and +hardy, and with Thorwaldsson recovered in body +and mind, swung around a bend in a river and came +to the landing which marked the first outpost of +civilization—the trading post where was also located +the Fort of the Mounted. +</p> +<p> +A little boy playing on the edge of the pier was +first to see them, and whooping and shouting he ran +up the bank towards the store. Out of the door +of the trading post came a figure in uniform. +</p> +<p> +“Dick.” +</p> +<p> +“Art.” +</p> +<p> +The two pals were reunited. +</p> +<p> +And then followed the biggest surprise of all, for +out of the store came Mr. Temple and Della. For +ten minutes the kissing and hugging went on, while +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_223'></a>223</span> +Farnum, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and the rest stood +to one side, their faces set in wide grins. +</p> +<p> +“What in the world?” demanded Mr. Hampton, +at length, holding his partner and neighbor at arm’s +length. “What in the world brought you here?” +</p> +<p> +“A motor boat,” said Mr. Temple. “That was +a surprise for you. When we received your radio +message via the post here, which relayed it to Edmonton—that +first one, you know, announcing you +were leaving for the outside—I decided I would have +to be on hand to greet you. So I got into communication +with Captain Jameson, and learned +from him that I could reach one of his posts farther +south by motor car, and then come up the river in a +launch. So I decided I would come here to the edge +of the wilderness.” +</p> +<p> +He looked at his son, Bob, about whom he still +kept an arm, and smiled. +</p> +<p> +“Good old Dad,” said Bob, giving him a hug. +“But what brought Della?” +</p> +<p> +“Oh, the same means,” answered his father. +</p> +<p> +“No, Dad. You know what I mean. Was it +love for her straying brother?” +</p> +<p> +“Well, now, Bob, you’ll have to form your own +opinion,” said Mr. Temple, eyes a-twinkle. +</p> +<p> +Della who had been standing close to Frank, her +hands clasped in his, looked calmly at Bob. +</p> +<p> +“Marjie wanted to come, too, you know, Bob,” +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_224'></a>224</span> +she said. “But her mother wouldn’t let her. She +sent you a message.” +</p> +<p> +“Huh.” +</p> +<p> +Big Bob blushed, and let the conversation drop. +Nevertheless, at the first opportunity he got his sister +to one side, and, snatching the letter she tendered +him, went off by himself to read it. +</p> +<p> +There was room for Mr. Hampton and the boys +on the launch, and in a canoe towed behind, and so, +after a short rest, a start downstream was made at +once. Thorwaldsson and the others set off with +them, but soon fell behind amid a gay waving of +farewells. Mr. Hampton was to make arrangements +for their reception at the next post and at +Edmonton. The launch would be sent back for +them when the post was reached. +</p> +<p> +At Edmonton, a thriving city which in the comparatively +few years of its existence has grown to +the proportions of a metropolis, the boys got their +first taste of the publicity which was to pursue them +across the continent, reaching its height on their +arrival in New York. For word of their coming +had gotten out, and hosts of reporters awaited them, +representing the great newspapers and news-gathering +syndicates of not only North America but of +Europe, too. +</p> +<p> +“You see, boys,” said Mr. Hampton, in their hotel +rooms, when they protested to him at being besieged +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_225'></a>225</span> +every minute of the day by reporters, “you +are the center of the romantic interest of the world. +You rescued the Lost Expedition and discovered +strange new territory. You have had the wildest +kind of adventures. How do you expect the world +to take that calmly? It can’t be done. No, you +may as well submit gracefully, and talk when questioned.” +</p> +<p> +The romance of Frank and Della also was exploited +by the newspapermen, and pictures began +to appear throughout the country, showing the daring +young explorer and his sweetheart. When they +were taken, neither Frank nor Della knew, but the +truth of the matter was that they were together so +much of the time it was the easiest matter in the +world for a photographer to snap them. +</p> +<p> +In New York the same thing was gone through +with again, only, if anything, worse. And this time, +the reporters finding that Marjorie Faulkner appeared +to greet the returned heroes, scented a new +romance, and questioned the boys about it. Bob +and Frank refused to answer, but Jack slyly tipped +off the newspapermen that between Marjorie and +Bob a real romance was, indeed, budding. +</p> +<p> +In reprisal, Bob and Frank put their heads together, +and gave the newspapermen a story to the +effect that Jack was champing at the bit to be off +to old Mexico, there to greet a sweetheart who +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_226'></a>226</span> +awaited him, none other, in fact, than the Senorita +Rafaela y Calomares, daughter of an old Don who +had a palace in the Sonora mountains. And in support +of the story they told the newspapermen of +their adventures several years before on the Mexican +border, when they had rescued Mr. Hampton +from captivity and Jack, they said, had fallen in love +with the daughter of the Mexican leader responsible +for Mr. Hampton’s capture. +</p> +<p> +It all made good copy for the reporters, who had +about exhausted the possibilities of the northern adventure, +and who now plunged head first into this +former adventure, of which nothing had been known +at the time. +</p> +<p> +Jack was furious, and threatened to wreak dire +vengeance on Bob and Frank. But the latter pointed +out that they had but turned the tables on him. +</p> +<p> +“Well, anyway,” he said, finally, beginning to +smile, “you haven’t got the best part of the story +yet.” +</p> +<p> +Their curiosity aroused, they tried to get him to +tell what he meant. But he refused. Several days +later he disappeared. When they asked Mr. Hampton +what had become of him he finally surrendered +and gave the secret away. +</p> +<p> +“Well, boys,” he said, “when we returned I +found a courteous note from Don Fernandez y +Calomares, saying he was in Washington on business +<span class='pagenum pncolor'><a id='page_227'></a>227</span> +connected with the government, and asking me +to call. I guess Jack has taken a train for Washington, +and gone calling.” +</p> +<p> +With which happy forecast of good luck to come +to all three of the Radio Boys, we shall leave them +for the present, secure in the belief that if at any +future date they go adventuring they will be well +able to take care of themselves, and also that they +will get into adventures well worth reading about. +</p> +<div class='center'> +<p> </p> +<p>THE END</p> +</div> +<p> + <br /> + <br /> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Radio Boys Series</span> +</p> +<p> +BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE +</p> +<p> +A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages. +</p> +<p> +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> + THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER<br /> + THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY<br /> + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS<br /> + THE RADIO BOYS’ SEARCH FOR THE INCA’S TREASURE<br /> + THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION<br /> + THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA<br /> + THE RADIO BOYS SEEK THE LOST ATLANTIS<br /> + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE BORDER PATROL<br /> + THE RADIO BOYS AS SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Golden Boys Series</span> +</p> +<p> +BY L. P. WYMAN, PH.D. +</p> +<p> +Dean of Pennsylvania Military College. +</p> +<p> +A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School Age. +</p> +<p> +Handsome Cloth Binding. +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> + THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL<br /> + THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS<br /> + THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS<br /> + THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS<br /> + THE GOLDEN BOYS RESCUED BY RADIO<br /> + THE GOLDEN BOYS ALONG THE RIVER ALLAGASH<br /> + THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE HAUNTED CAMP<br /> + THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE<br /> + THE GOLDEN BOYS SAVE THE CHAMBERLAIN DAM<br /> + THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE TRAIL<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Lakewood Boys Series</span> +</p> +<p> +By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D. +</p> +<p> +A new series of copyright stories for boys of +High School Age by the Author of “The Golden +Boys Series.” +</p> +<p> +Cloth Bound with Attractive Cover Designs. +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS ON THE LAZY S<br /> + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE LOST MINE<br /> + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE FROZEN NORTH<br /> + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE POLO PONIES<br /> + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS<br /> + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN MONTANA<br /> + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE AFRICAN JUNGLE<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>Boy Scout Series</span> +</p> +<p> +By LIEUT. HOWARD PAYSON +</p> +<p> +A series of stories in which self-reliance and self-defense +through organized athletics are emphasized, also depicting +an accurate description of Boy Scouts activities. +</p> +<p> +ATTRACTIVELY BOUND IN CLOTH +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> + THE BOY SCOUTS OF THE EAGLE PATROL<br /> + THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE RANGE<br /> + THE BOY SCOUTS AND THE ARMY AIRSHIP<br /> + THE BOY SCOUTS’ MOUNTAIN CAMP<br /> + THE BOY SCOUTS FOR UNCLE SAM<br /> + THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA CANAL<br /> + THE BOY SCOUTS UNDER FIRE IN MEXICO<br /> + THE BOY SCOUTS ON BELGIAN BATTLEFIELDS<br /> + THE BOY SCOUTS WITH THE ALLIES IN FRANCE<br /> + THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA-PACIFIC EXPOSITION<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>Border Boys Series</span> +</p> +<p> +By Fremont B. Deering +</p> +<p> +Mexican and Canadian Frontier Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years. +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> +With Individual Jackets in Colors. +</p> +<p> +Cloth Bound +</p> +<p> + BORDER BOYS ON THE TRAIL<br /> + BORDER BOYS ACROSS THE FRONTIER<br /> + BORDER BOYS WITH THE MEXICAN RANGERS<br /> + BORDER BOYS WITH THE TEXAS RANGERS<br /> + BORDER BOYS IN THE CANADIAN ROCKIES<br /> + BORDER BOYS ALONG THE ST. LAWRENCE RIVER<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Ranger Boys Series</span> +</p> +<p> +BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE +</p> +<p> +A new series of copyright titles for Boys 12 to 16 +years telling of the adventures of three boys with +the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine. +</p> +<p> +Handsome Cloth Binding. +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> + THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE<br /> + THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT<br /> + THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS<br /> + THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES<br /> + THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Boy Troopers Series</span> +</p> +<p> +BY CLAIR W. HAYES +</p> +<p> +Author of the Famous “Boy Allies” Series. +</p> +<p> +The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police. +</p> +<p> +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. +</p> +<p> +All Copyrighted Titles. +</p> +<p> +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> + THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL<br /> + THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST<br /> + THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY<br /> + THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>Frank Armstrong Series</span> +</p> +<p> +By MATTHEW M. COLTON +</p> +<p> +Six Exceptional Stories of College Life, Describing +Athletics from Start to Finish. For Boys 10 to +15 Years. +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> +Cloth Bound +</p> +<p> +With Attractive Jackets in Colors. +</p> +<p> + FRANK ARMSTRONG’S VACATION<br /> + FRANK ARMSTRONG AT QUEENS<br /> + FRANK ARMSTRONG’S SECOND TERM<br /> + FRANK ARMSTRONG, DROP KICKER<br /> + FRANK ARMSTRONG, CAPTAIN OF THE NINE<br /> + FRANK ARMSTRONG AT COLLEGE<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Boy Allies</span> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:smaller;'>(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</span> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>With the Army</span> +</p> +<p> +BY CLAIR W. HAYES +</p> +<p> +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. +</p> +<p> +All Cloth Bound +</p> +<p> +Copyright Titles +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +Postage 10c extra. +</p> +<p> +In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads +unable to leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the +soldiers of the Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. +Their experiences and escapes are many, and furnish plenty +of good, healthy action that every boy loves. +</p> +<p> + THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE;<br /> + or, Through Lines of Steel.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE;<br /> + or, Twelve Days' Battle Along the Marne.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS;<br /> + or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES;<br /> + or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Aisne.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL;<br /> + or, With the Italian Army in the Alps.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN;<br /> + or, The Struggle to Save a Nation.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME;<br /> + or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN;<br /> + or, Saving France from the Enemy.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES;<br /> + or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS;<br /> + or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE;<br /> + or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH;<br /> + or, The Closing Days of the Great World War.<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Boy Allies</span> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:smaller;'>(Registered in the United States Patent Office)</span> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>With the Navy</span> +</p> +<p> +BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE +</p> +<p> +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. +</p> +<p> +All Cloth Bound +</p> +<p> +Copyright Titles +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +Postage 10c Extra +</p> +<p> +Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, +meet each other in an unusual way soon after the declaration +of war. Circumstances place them on board the British cruiser, +“The Sylph,” and from there on, they share adventures with +the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, the author, +is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably the +many exciting adventures of the two boys. +</p> +<p> + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL;<br /> + or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS;<br /> + or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON;<br /> + or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA;<br /> + or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA;<br /> + or, The Vanishing Submarine.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC;<br /> + or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND;<br /> + or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM’S CRUISERS;<br /> + or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32;<br /> + or, The Fall of the Russian Empire.<br /> + <br/> + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS;<br /> + or, The Fall of the German Navy.<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Oakdale Academy Series</span> +</p> +<p> +BY MORGAN SCOTT +</p> +<p> +A series of real boys’ stories at the Oakdale Academy. +Ben Stone, the hero, wins his way under peculiar circumstances +and against great odds. +</p> +<p> +Clean-cut stories of real experiences in athletics and +sports of academy life, with adventures, mysteries and +clever descriptions. +</p> +<p> +Just the kind of books a boy 12 to 16 years would +like to read. +</p> +<p> +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. +</p> +<p> +JACKETS IN COLORS +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> +Copyright Titles +</p> +<p> + BEN STONE AT OAKDALE<br /> + BOYS OF OAKDALE ACADEMY<br /> + RIVAL PITCHERS OF OAKDALE<br /> + OAKDALE BOYS IN CAMP<br /> + THE GREAT OAKDALE MYSTERY<br /> + THE NEW BOYS AT OAKDALE<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> +<p> + <br /> +</p> +<p> +<span style='font-size:larger;font-weight:bold;'>The Rex Kingdon Series</span> +</p> +<p> +By GORDON BRADDOCK +</p> +<p> +A fine series of stories for boys of High School age, +written in an interesting and instructive style. +</p> +<p> +Rex Kingdon, the hero, a real, wide-awake boy, interested +in outdoor games, enters into the school sports with +enthusiasm. A rattling good baseball story holds the +interest to the very end. Rex and his Ridgewood friends +establish a campfire in the North woods; there, mystery, +jealousy and rivalry enter to menace their safety, fire their +interest and finally cement their friendship. +</p> +<p> +Stories boys will want to read. +</p> +<p> +CLOTHBOUND. JACKETS IN COLORS. +</p> +<p> +Copyright Titles. +</p> +<p> +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH +</p> +<p> +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA +</p> +<p> + REX KINGDON OF RIDGEWOOD HIGH<br /> + REX KINGDON IN THE NORTH WOODS<br /> + REX KINGDON AT WALCOTT HALL<br /> + REX KINGDON BEHIND THE BAT<br /> + REX KINGDON ON STORM ISLAND<br /> +</p> +<p> +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the Publishers +</p> +<p> +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK +</p> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska +Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE *** + +***** This file should be named 36314-h.htm or 36314-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/6/3/1/36314/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/36314-h/images/cover.jpg b/36314-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ead531 --- /dev/null +++ b/36314-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/36314-h/images/illus-emb.png b/36314-h/images/illus-emb.png Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..9344809 --- /dev/null +++ b/36314-h/images/illus-emb.png diff --git a/36314-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg b/36314-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..09b6c76 --- /dev/null +++ b/36314-h/images/illus-fpc.jpg diff --git a/36314.txt b/36314.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f4a7cca --- /dev/null +++ b/36314.txt @@ -0,0 +1,6610 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska +Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition + +Author: Gerald Breckenridge + +Release Date: June 4, 2011 [EBook #36314] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE *** + + + + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + +[Illustration: "What does she say, Frank? Any luck yet?" Page 40] + + + + + THE RADIO BOYS + RESCUE THE + LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + + By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + + AUTHOR OF + + "The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border," "The Radio + Boys on Secret Service Duty," "The Radio Boys + with the Revenue Guards," "The Radio Boys' + Search for the Inca's Treasure." + + + A. L. BURT COMPANY + Publishers--New York + + + + + THE RADIO BOYS SERIES + + A Series of Stories for Boys of All Ages + + By GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + + The Radio Boys on the Mexican Border + The Radio Boys on Secret Service Duty + The Radio Boys with the Revenue Guards + The Radio Boys' Search for the Inca's Treasure + The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition + + Copyright, 1922 + By A. L. BURT COMPANY + + THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + + Made in "U. S. A." + + + + +The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska Expedition + + + + +CHAPTER I.--THE LOST EXPEDITION. + + +"Strange that you boys should be talking about the 'Lost Expedition.'" + +"Oh, hello, Dad. Why strange?" + +"Because I have just come from a conference with a man who knows all +there is to know about it. And he was telling me----." + +Mr. Hampton advanced from the doorway into the sitting room, and looked +at the faces of the three boys in turn. They were his son, Jack, and the +latter's chums, Bob Temple and Frank Merrick, who together had gone +through many adventures related in other books of "The Radio Boys" +series. + +It was the sitting room of a suite in a Seattle hotel. Here the four, +arriving from South America, after finding and losing "The Enchanted +City of the Incas" as told of in "The Radio Boys Search for the Incas' +Treasure," were ensconced on their way to their Long Island homes. + +"Well, Dad, what was this man telling you?" + +"Yes, Mr. Hampton, tell us," added Frank "We're curious." + +"What do you know about the 'Lost Expedition?'" countered Mr. Hampton. +"I stood in the doorway unobserved a moment and heard you discussing +it." + +"Nothing but what this article in the Sunday paper tells," said big Bob, +grumblingly, "And the fellow that wrote this yarn didn't know very much. +It's mostly talk." + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +"Speculation, I suppose," he said. "Well, that's the best the writer +could do. The facts aren't generally known. However, wait a minute until +I get off this wet coat and get into something comfortable. It's raining +again." + +"Raining again?" said Jack. "Doesn't it ever stop here?" + +"Oh, that's just the Seattle Winter," said his father. "The rains are +necessary, and, really, they are so mild one doesn't mind them after a +time." + +"Huh," grumbled big Bob. "I'd think these people would grow web feet." + +"Look here," said Mr. Hampton, after getting into his smoking jacket and +slippers. "What I learned today ought to interest you boys." + +"Why, Dad?" Jack leaned forward eagerly. + +"Well, wait until I tell you a bit about it," said his father. "Then +you'll see." + +Then, while the three young fellows paid close attention, Mr. Hampton +proceeded to relate the story of the "Lost Expedition" so-called, the +expedition headed by Thorwald Thorwaldsson, the Norwegian explorer, +which had outfitted at Seattle the previous Spring, set out for an +unnamed destination in the Far North, and had never been heard of since. + +A great deal of secrecy as to its objects had attended the departure of +this expedition in its sturdy schooner, and many were the wild guesses +and surmises concerning it advanced in the papers and among the +hangers-on along the Seattle waterfront. Some said confidently that the +expedition was going to attempt to reach the North Pole by airplane, for +an airplane was carried dismantled on the schooner. Others declared the +object sought was gold. And, in this regard, the vague rumors of vast +gold fields found in the past by this or that old-time prospector who +died without making his secret public, were brought to light and +furbished up with a wealth of apocryphal detail in order to bear out the +contention. + +"But none of these assumptions," said Mr. Hampton, "was correct. The +real object of the expedition never was made public, for the very good +reason that none of those in the know--and their numbers are few--ever +betrayed a word, or hint, of the secret." + +"And you know it?" asked Jack, with quickened interest. + +Mr. Hampton nodded, and smiled teasingly. + +"Come on, Mr. Hampton, tell us," said Frank. + +"You better, Mr. Hampton, or he'll burst with curiosity," advised big +Bob. "Show that boy a secret and he's not content until he takes it +apart." + +"How about yourself?" said Frank, indignantly. "I suppose you don't care +to hear, hey? Oh, no." + +Mr. Hampton interrupted. + +"Wait a minute, Bob. No need to perjure yourself. I know all you boys +are eager to know the answer to the mystery of the 'Lost Expedition.' +Well, I can tell it to you in one word. It is----" + +He paused. Then added: + +"Oil." + +"Oil?" + +All three listeners asked the question as if in one breath. Big Bob was +no less inquisitive than the others, despite his twigging of Frank for +his curiosity. + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +"Yes," he said. "Oil." + +For a moment he was silent, collecting his thoughts. Then he leaned +forward, cleared his throat and continued: + +"Perhaps my words are a disappointment to you. The Northland for you, +probably, is invested in a mysterious glamor. It means either men +struggling through incalculable hardships to win their way to the North +Pole, to the top of the world, or else fighting against all the mighty +forces of Nature in a grim, ice-locked land to wrest a stream of golden +wealth from the bosom of the Earth. + +"Ah, yes," he continued, smiling slightly, "I know how you feel. +Whenever our preconceived and heroic notions are upset we feel a sense +of disappointment. But, consider for a moment, the meaning of this +matter. Here, far away in the Northland, in a remote district to which +so far as known only two white men have ever penetrated, lies a mighty +river flowing north into the Arctic Ocean, along the banks of which are +such vast deposits of oil that it oozes through the soil and into the +river to such an extent that the river in reality is a river of oil and +never freezes." + +"A river of oil that never freezes, Dad?" said Jack. "Do you expect us +to believe that?" + +"And flowing north, too?" said Frank, whose quick mind had seized upon +that point of contrariety in Nature. + +Mr. Hampton smiled. + +"Well, boys, it is hard to believe, I'll admit," he said. "Yet that this +river does flow north is undoubted. That it never freezes, however, is +an exaggeration. The truth is, probably, that at spots so much oil seeps +into the water that soft spots are formed. + +"Hitherto," he continued, "there have been only two rivers known that +flow north into the Arctic in that region--the MacKenzie and the +Coppermine, along the shores of which are vast deposits of copper that +some day, undoubtedly, will be opened up to exploitation. However, this +other northward-flowing river in the midst of a vast oil field must now +be added to the list, if the word of the lone explorer is to believed, +of the one man who has been there and lived to return with the tale." + +"But I thought you said this river was known to two white men, Dad?" +objected Jack. + +"So I did. So I did," declared his father. "And two there were--Cameron +and Farrell. But Cameron died on the trip to the outside, and Farrell +alone lived despite incredible hardships, to finally reach Edmonton with +the tale. Now he, too, is gone--for he was a member of Thorwaldsson's +'Lost Expedition.' + +"When he reached Edmonton, a thriving Canadian city, Farrell, an +adventurous fellow who at one time had worked in the Southwestern oil +fields as an employee of the syndicate of independent operators which +once employed me there as superintendent, realized the value of his +discovery and kept his mouth closed until he got in touch with Anderson, +the big man of the syndicate. Anderson saw at once the importance of the +find. But he also saw that Farrell's marvelous oil field would virtually +have to be rediscovered before steps to develop it could be taken. For, +in struggling through to the outside, Farrell had suffered the loss of +his compass, had been turned about in Winter fogs, had lain delirious +for a long period in the igloo of friendly Eskimos within the Arctic +Circle and, in general, had suffered so many hardships that his mind was +clouded and he had no clear idea of where lay this oil field. + +"Anderson, however, placed such faith in Farrell's report that he +decided to outfit an expedition to retrace the footsteps of Farrell and +Cameron into the Arctic in the hope of thus once more coming upon the +oil field. Inasmuch as they had gone in through Alaska, that was the way +which Thorwaldsson's expedition took." + +Mr. Hampton paused. Jack, who had been eyeing his father closely, now +put a hand on his arm. + +"And now what, Dad?" he asked. + +"Now Anderson wants me to attempt to go after the 'Lost Expedition' and +try to relocate the oil fields as well as find some trace of +Thorwaldsson," said Mr. Hampton. + +"I thought so," said Jack, in a tone of satisfaction. "When do we +start?" + +"We?" Mr. Hampton chuckled. "I like that. Just as cool as you please +about it, too. We? Well, well." + +"Do we leave at once?" asked Jack, imperturbably, not one whit disturbed +by his father's pleasantry. + +Mr. Hampton shook his head. + +"Whether I take you at all is questionable," he said. "Certainly, I have +no intention of going at once. If I go at all, it will not be until the +Arctic Summer begins." + +"Meantime, I suppose, I'm to return to Yale." + +"Yes, you've missed a half year, thanks to our adventures in search of +the Incas' treasure in South America, but that is no reason why you +should miss the balance of the term. I'll tell you what," he added, +taking pity on the three, "if you fellows go back to college and study +hard to make up for lost time until Summer, and if the 'Lost Expedition' +is still lost at that time, why, I'll see what can be done." + +"Hurray," cried Jack. "That's a promise." + + + + +CHAPTER II.--SETTING OUT FROM NOME. + + +"Well, boys, where do we go from here?" + +It was Frank who asked the question, and he sat on a heap of luggage on +the beach at Nome, with Jack and Bob beside him looking alternately at +the mountain beyond the Alaskan outpost and at Mr. Hampton deep in +conversation with a short sturdy figure of a man, clad in khaki +breeches, high leather boots and a flannel shirt, a short distance away. +The figure was that of Tom Farnum, scout of the independent oil +interests at Nome. + +It was Summer, and Summer in Alaska as the boys were beginning to +realize meant hot weather, indeed. All had their coats off, and were +perspiring. Only an hour before they had been put ashore by the steamer +from Seattle, and Mr. Hampton had left them on the beach with their +luggage while he went in search of Tom Farnum, who had failed to meet +them at the landing as they had expected. + +"Where do we go from here?" Jack repeated Frank's question. "Well, if +you ask me, almost any place would be better than Nome." + +He looked with disfavor at the little town sprawling at the base of the +mountain. + +"Not just what I expected," he said. "I've heard of Nome all my life, it +seems, and now, just look at it. Why, it's hardly a spot on the map." + +"But what a history it has had, Jack," said Frank. "Don't judge by +appearances too much. Remember this town has seen the Gold Rush." + +"I wonder what Dad is talking about," said Jack, ignoring Frank's +remark. + +"Probably discussing how soon we can get away," said big Bob, speaking +for the first time. "At any rate," he added, "I see your father and his +companion pointing to that gasoline schooner off shore." + +At this moment, their doubts were resolved, for Mr. Hampton and his +companion ended their conversation and approached the boys. + +"Well, boys, we'll soon be under way," said Mr. Hampton. Whereupon he +introduced Farnum all around. The latter was a prepossessing man with a +weather-beaten face and a grizzled mustache, above which jutted a +promontory of a nose between deep-set, wide, blue eyes. + +"That is our schooner out there," Mr. Hampton continued, indicating the +boat to which Bob earlier had drawn attention. "Mr. Farnum," he added, +"has stated casually around Nome that he is taking a party of hunters up +the MacKenzie. We'll get away at once, as nothing is to be gained by a +stay in Nome and as, furthermore, we wish to avoid inquiries into our +aims. The story Farnum has told will do well enough." + +Farnum nodded. + +"Just a white lie," he said, grinning. "No use letting the curious know +all your secrets." + +Then followed an hour of brisk work, at the end of which period the +luggage was safely stowed aboard the gasoline schooner, and its screw +began to turn. As the little vessel began to throb and draw away from +Nome, the boys leaned overside and watched the prospect dwindle in the +distance until the houses seemed like toys and the mountainside like a +painted backdrop in the theater. + +"Hurray," cried Bob, at last, "we're off for the Great Unknown." + +"Yes," agreed Frank, "I really feel that way, too. All the way up from +Seattle, I felt as if I were nothing more than a tourist, traveling a +beaten route. But this, well, this is different." + +After that they were silent a long time, while the schooner shook and +throbbed and steadily pushed its way up the coast, each boy busy with +his thoughts. Yet those thoughts were much the same. + +Following that eventful discussion in Seattle, on their return from +South America and their adventures there in The Enchanted City of the +Incas, they had gone back to Yale and studied hard to make up for lost +time in the first half of the term. All three were clever and had the +knack of concentrating at their tasks, and all as a consequence had +succeeded in making up back work in classroom and lecture. As a result +they had entered the succeeding term, or at least were prepared to do +so, without conditions. This was a matter for congratulation, indeed, +and deserving of especial reward. + +That reward had been theirs. For Mr. Hampton and Mr. Temple both decided +that their respective sons and Frank, Mr. Temple's ward, should be +permitted to accompany Mr. Hampton on his trip to attempt to find some +trace of the "Lost Expedition" and of the reputed oil field in search of +which Thorwaldsson had set out. + +"Farnum is reputed a wizard in knowledge of the Northland," Mr. Hampton +had explained to Mr. Temple, "and, as a consequence, I do not consider +that we will run any danger. Our greatest danger, of course, would be to +become trapped in the Far North in the Fall and be prevented by the +rigors of Winter from regaining the outside. For I do not intend to +spend the Winter there. Instead, I hope to be back in civilization by +the early Fall. + +"That," he added, "will give us plenty of opportunity to seek traces of +the 'Lost Expedition.' I have been in communication with Farnum. His +plan is for us to push up the MacKenzie to one of its tributaries, and +then strike eastward. We will leave the gasoline schooner to make its +way back to Nome, while we push on overland, lightening our journey on +rivers and lakes, in the hope of finding the River of Oil flowing north. + +"If we are unsuccessful, when the seasonal warnings of approaching +Winter come, we will turn to the southeast and come out in northern +Canada. + +"The boys are hard and fit, and such a trip will be of inestimable value +for them. It will make them self-reliant and teach them to depend upon +themselves. Not that they are not in a fair way to be youths of that +sort already," he added, smiling. "If you could have seen them in South +America, George, it would have done your heart good." + +"I know, I know," said Mr. Temple, shaking his head slightly, and +smiling. "Several years ago, that time when you were captive in Mexico +and they set out to rescue you--" + +"Yes, and did," supplied Mr. Hampton. + +"And did," agreed Mr. Temple. "Well, they showed the stuff that was in +them then. And the very same Summer, when I took them to San Francisco +on what I considered was going to be a little pleasure trip combining a +bit of business with sight-seeing, and--" + +"And you became involved with the Chinese smugglers, and imprisoned, and +ended up by busting up their show--" + +"Yes," resumed Mr. Temple, "and ended up by bringing the whole outfit +into the hands of Uncle Sam's men. Well, I can tell you, they certainly +showed their calibre." + +"So, I reckon it will be all right to take them along on this trip," +said Mr. Hampton. + +"I suppose so," agreed Mr. Temple. "But innocent as it looks now, I have +my doubts. I have my doubts. Wherever those three boys are found, there +you can look for things to move fast. Trouble courts them, it seems to +me." + +Accordingly, the boys had been told they would be taken on the trip into +the Far North. And wildly excited they had gone about their +preparations. Jack, the keenest radio enthusiast, was all for packing up +radio field equipment of every sort right at home. But his father had +dissuaded him, pointing out that Seattle was a large city and there +everything necessary in the way of an outfit could be purchased, thus +saving the trouble and expense of transporting overland to the Pacific +port. + +"All right, Dad," Jack had agreed. "But, remember, the selection of the +radio equipment is to be left to the fellows and me. We've had a lot of +experience with the value of radio when in a tight place, especially in +South America, and we want to put that experience to use and be prepared +for every contingency this time." + +To this Mr. Hampton readily had agreed, with the result that in Seattle +the three boys had revelled in the radio equipment stores, which they +found well stocked, as the use of radio had developed greatly on the +Pacific. + +In consequence, their outfit included radio field equipment of the most +powerful, yet most compact, designs. For while Mr. Hampton fully +realized the value of having the very best yet he had issued a solemn +warning that bulk must be considered. + +"We will have to travel as lightly as consistent with safety and the +purpose of our expedition," he had said. "So don't pile up anything too +heavy or bulky, or it will have to be discarded." + +Jack knew well that the distance which can be covered with a radiophone +transmitter is only about one-fourth as great as that of a wireless +telegraph transmitter having the same input of initial current. +Therefore, as a means of sending messages, supposedly for aid, over long +distances, the wireless telegraph would be the better, inasmuch as +equipment for it would be less bulky to transport than equipment for +transmitting the human voice. Nevertheless, he was reluctant to place +their sole dependence upon the wireless telegraph. + +"You see, Dad," he had pointed out to his father, when the outfit was +being assembled, "to reach the outside we shall have to depend upon +wireless telegraph. But we will also need the radiophone for this +reason: that each one of us ought to have a means of calling the main +party in case we become separated through going on scouting or hunting +expeditions, or for any reason." + +"Well, that sounds sensible," his father had agreed. "Go ahead with your +plans, but, remember, hold down the bulk." + +The result was that equipment capable of telegraphing five hundred miles +was assembled, but also Jack made up five light field sets of radio, one +for each of their party and for Farnum, which the user could pack in his +clothing and which had a radius up to twenty-five miles. The instrument +was Jack's now famous ring radio, worn on the finger, with a setting +only one inch by five-eighths of an inch. Formerly an umbrella as aerial +had been employed but Jack had done entirely away with that in his +improved set. + +"Well, fellows," said Jack, at last, as Nome faded entirely from view, +"I wonder what lies ahead. I wonder whether Thorwaldsson's expedition +was stricken down by a plague, which seems hardly likely, as in that +case surely somebody would have managed to get word to the outside by +wireless or airplane, or whether it fell victim to a surprise attack by +Indians at night, as I understand from Dad that Farnum believes." + +"Is that so," said Frank, in surprise. "That's the first I heard of +that." + +"Yes," said Jack. "Dad told me of it when we were coming aboard this +schooner. He said it was the first intimation Farnum had given him that +such might be the case, and also his first intimation that there were +hostile Indians in this country into which we are going. If it weren't +too late, he told me, he would have turned back rather than imperil us, +as it is, we shall go pretty warily and try to steer clear of the +hostile Indian country." + +"Whew," said Bob, "this sounds interesting, hey, what?" + +His eyes began to shine. + +"Old Bob. Always ready for a fight," said Frank. "Well, let's give him +one." + +And incontinently, he and Jack fell upon the big fellow and a tussle +followed that ended only when they almost fell overboard. + + + + +CHAPTER III.--IN THE WILDERNESS. + + +"Well, boys, tomorrow we leave the schooner." + +It was Tom Farnum who made the announcement over dinner which was eaten +on deck. The boat was anchored offshore, far up the Hare Indian River, +one of the great tributaries of the MacKenzie. How long it was since +they had left Nome none could tell, for in that land of perpetual +daylight it was hard to keep track of time. + +"Tomorrow," said big Bob, "when is tomorrow?" + +He looked at the sun which was still high, despite the lateness of the +hour, and would make only an ineffectual attempt to dip below the +horizon at midnight, before resuming its upward climb. + +Everybody laughed. + +"What a topsy turvy land," said Jack. "Well, I, for one, will be glad to +go ashore and stretch my legs. Wonderful as the trip has been so far, +I'm eager to get started." + +"Same here," agreed Frank. + +Little of moment had occurred to interrupt the monotony of the trip up +the coast and along the northern edge of Alaska and the North American +continent to the mouth of the MacKenzie. Of course, occasional ice floes +had been encountered and the little schooner had been compelled to make +wide detours. But that was to be expected in that Far Northern latitude. + +In fact, when they had arrived at the mouth of the MacKenzie, the ice +was only recently dissipated from the great river. There, at a dock +where a little sidewheel steamer that plied on the MacKenzie in Summer +was tied up for repairs, they had replenished their stock of gasoline +and then continued the ascent, passing between willowed banks, where +huddled occasional trading posts surrounded by native villages, with the +snow-capped mountain peaks always in the distance. + +Then they had reached the mouth of the Hare Indian River and soon had +put beyond them all appearance of the presence of man. + +"This is the way Thorwaldsson's party expected to go," Farnum had said. +"For it was this route which Farrell and Cameron, the two prospectors, +followed on their way in. They were prospecting for gold, you know, had +no idea of finding oil. It was their original intention to strike +northeast across the numerous streams at the head of the Hare Indian in +search of gold. And Farrell reported, when he reached the outside, that +he had found traces and, in fact, several sizable pockets of gold." + +Accordingly they pushed on up the Hare Indian a number of days until, in +fact, the extra supplies of gasoline which had been taken aboard on +leaving the MacKenzie dwindled to the point where it became advisable +for the party to go ashore in order that the schooner might turn about +and have sufficient fuel to make its way downstream to the supply depot. + +It was a period of time that, in fact, however, could hardly be +considered in terms of days. So far north had the party come that the +sun shone perpetually. It was only at midnight, for a brief space, that +it dipped to the horizon. + +And what a gorgeous time it had proven to be for all concerned, but +especially for the boys. As the powerful little schooner forged ahead, +there was not a bend the rounding of which did not afford a surprise. +Sometimes it would be caribou or reindeer, probably an escape from some +Eskimo herd, which would be surprised standing in the water, and +breaking for the timber on the bank at their approach. Again brown bear +would be seen on the bank, or beaver swimming strongly across the +stream. As for fishing, it was an Izaak Walton paradise. All Bob, Frank +and Jack did for hours on end was to lean overside with hooks baited +with bacon rind dangling in the water astern, and pull in speckled +beauties. And many a meal was made, too, on wild duck or geese, picked +off with a light rifle. + +Then came the time when Tom Farnum announced that they would stay ashore +on the morrow. And little sleep did the boys have that night, as they +lay awake on deck, whispering to each other, an awning shading them from +the sun. + +Early the next morning they went ashore with their outfit, and then +watched the gasoline schooner throb off downstream, around the last +bend, and out of sight. As it disappeared, for the first time there came +to each of the three boys the feeling of isolation natural to their +situation. The last settlement was two hundred miles behind them. They +were going into the great unknown, into the regions marked "Unexplored" +on the maps of that great northern rim of the North American continent. + +True, the weather was fine now and the country green and pleasant about +them. But how long would that endure? What if they were beset by +oncoming Winter before they could make their way to the outside? What if +they were attacked by hostile Indians? What obscure fate had met the +Thorwaldsson expedition, traces of which they sought? + +Into the mind of each thronged such thoughts, as they stood in unwonted +silence. Then Mr. Hampton called to them. + +"No time for day-dreaming. Each man to his job." + +With him Tom Farnum had brought two trusted men. They hailed from Nome, +but were old-timers who had been up and down Alaska for many years. Both +were men of forty, sober, steady fellows who would be useful in helping +distribute the burden of packs, and would, moreover, be of inestimable +value in keeping the party supplied with game as well as in almost any +situation that might arise. They were grizzled, weather-beaten men of +medium height, both with stout frames, and because of their long +existence in the lonesome north little given to talking. Their names +were Dick Fairwell and Art Bowman, and they were "Dick" and "Art" to +each other and the other members of the party. The boys had taken a +liking to both. + +Two light canoes had been brought along from Nome, lashed to the deck of +the schooner, and in these the seven set out. The boys with Dick +occupied one canoe, the other three men with a larger portion of the +luggage the other. + +When everything was in readiness, following a light breakfast on the +bank, the two canoes set out, that containing Farnum, Mr. Hampton and +Art taking the lead. About ten miles upstream a rapids was encountered, +and around this the first portage was made. Then once more they took to +the water. + +Day followed day, in this fashion, as they pushed steadily forward, +until almost a week had elapsed. On the fifth day Tom Farnum let out a +whoop of joy and headed his canoe for the right bank of the stream at a +little gravelly beach. His sharp eye had detected a small cairn of +stones on the edge of the brush, and when the others came up with him +and stepped from their craft he was busily demolishing the stones +comprising the mound. + +"A marker," was the only explanation he vouchsafed. "Must have been left +by Thorwaldsson. Ah." + +At the exclamation he stood upright, holding a small metal box in his +hand. The lid was rusted on, and in his impatience, Farnum whipped out a +knife and gouged it off while the others crowded around him. Inside was +a fold of oilskin, which he ripped open. A folded paper was revealed, +which he opened. Then he read aloud the message thereon. + +"It's from Thorwaldsson all right. Listen," he said, and read: + + "Please notify Mr. Otto Anderson, Ashland Block, Seattle, Wash., that + I passed here July 2. Party intact with exception of crew sent as he + ordered. Farrell says we are on right track. + + "Thorwaldsson." + +"What does he mean by that reference to the crew?" asked Jack. + +"Well," said Farnum, glancing at Mr. Hampton, "as your father knows, +that is one of the unexplained and puzzling facts of the situation, that +about the ship. You see, a skeleton crew was to be left aboard the ship +and it was to winter in the MacKenzie. But of ship or crew, we have +found no trace. Search for the ship was prosecuted at the first +opportunity this Spring, but it had disappeared. I made a trip up the +MacKenzie myself, but the only information I could gather was an +occasional rumor at a trading post that a schooner had gone by, on its +way out, at night. A ship that might have been the Viking, +Thorwaldsson's craft. That was last Fall. Perhaps, the skeleton crew +feared to winter in the MacKenzie and started for the outside, and was +caught in a storm which it was not sufficiently strong to weather. Only +three or four men were to be left aboard. That is the only explanation I +could think of." + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +"As I said before," he stated, "that seems a reasonable explanation. +Three or four men, left alone, might have feared to face the Winter iced +in, or might have been stricken ill, and so, for some reason that +appeared good enough to them, might have decided to violate orders and +start out. As to the disappearance of the ship, many an undermanned +vessel has gone down in a storm, without leaving a trace." + +"But, Dad, you've said nothing about this," protested Jack. + +Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. + +"There are a lot of things which I know I have never told you, Jack," he +said. "If I really have neglected to speak of this, however, it has been +through an oversight. I've had a lot of things on my mind. But, come. We +know this is the way Thorwaldsson passed. We are on the right track. So +let us push on. We have still four hours of travel to do before making +camp." + + + + +CHAPTER IV.--STRIKING GOLD. + + +Life flowed along very pleasantly indeed, for the boys, during the weeks +that followed. They were so far north that the sun shone constantly, and +never a cloud came to trouble the sky, never a storm to drive them to +take shelter. When they camped it was usually in the dim cool recesses +of a forest of firs, beneath the dense shade of which could be found the +only semblance of night. + +Never before had they known the delights of camp life, as they were now +living it. It was like being on one continuous picnic. For a +considerable period of time they found themselves in a mesh or network +of streams and lakes, through which Tom Farnum guided them steadily +northeastward, with never a sign of doubt as to the course to take. + +They wondered about this, asked why they took certain forks of river or +stream, why avoided others. Tom answered readily enough. From Mr. +Anderson he had received a minute report containing every scrap of data +Farrell had been able to furnish as to the course taken by him and +Cameron on going into the wild country. + +"So you see," he added, "while I may not be following in the exact +footsteps of Thorwaldsson, yet I am going over the same general route. +Sooner or later we will cover the same ground which he covered again, +and then I expect we shall find some other record which he has left +behind, just as in the case of that note on the Hare Indian." + +This was enough for the boys. It satisfied their curiosity. They +dismissed, or practically so, from their minds all worry as to the "Lost +Expedition." They were too busy enjoying life as they found it each +waiting moment. + +Around each bend in a stream that their paddles took them, on the shore +of each deep, silent lake, was some new marvel. Now it would be a bear +grunting on the bank. Again, a deer, probably a runaway from some Eskimo +herd on Summer pasture as Farnum explained, standing in the stream, and +starting with a snort into the timber at their approach. Occasionally a +gray wolf could be seen loping in the distance. Now and again a beaver +cut across stream. + +With their light rifles the boys occasionally were permitted to pick off +some game, usually wild ducks or geese, of which there were numbers +along the watercourses. But nothing was shot wantonly. Many a time, +youthful fingers itched on the trigger, only to be restrained by the +thought of the cruel uselessness of shooting merely for sport. + +Of other inhabitants in this vast northern wilderness, none were +encountered. And at this the boys marvelled. It was as if they had the +world to themselves. They could not understand it. To them it was a +paradise. + +"Wait till you see this in Winter," said Farnum grimly. "Or rather, pray +that you never do. It is a land of perpetual night, and the temperature +is so low that when you stop moving you must have a fire or you will +freeze to death. And it isn't every day that you can travel. For this +isn't a land of tame Winter as you boys know it. Out of the north comes +storms succeeding storm, pitiless in severity. Even the creatures of the +wild cannot stand it, in many cases, and drift to the south." + +"But how about the Eskimo?" asked Jack. "This is their country, isn't +it? How do they stand it?" + +"Sometimes they don't," said Farnum. "When the hunting is poor and +famine stalks through the Eskimo village, only the hardiest survive." + +"Where do they live, anyway?" struck in Frank. "Why aren't they around +here? Why haven't we seen any?" + +"They may have seen us," said Farnum, "and are avoiding us. They are a +timorous people, know the white man only by tradition. To the Eskimo, +the white man is a sort of god, at least to the Eskimo of all this +country north of us. Back along the coast of Alaska, of course, some +sort of contact has been made. But these Eskimo never come in touch with +the whites. They are a migratory people. In Summer they range far and +wide on the hunt. In the Winter, they retire to the edge of the Arctic +Ocean." + +"But why?" asked Bob, in surprise. "I should think that would be the +very place for them to steer away from." + +"Oh, no," said Farnum. "You see, all game goes far to the south in +Winter, so the Eskimo goes to the ocean because it is the home of the +only game left--the seal. He builds his snow house or igloo and camps +near the air holes of the seal, spearing them as they come up for air. +Occasionally he slays a polar bear, too." + +"I confess I know very little about the Eskimo," said Jack. "What are +his weapons?" + +"Bows and arrows tipped with flint or copper, copper-pointed spears, and +wooden knives edged with copper," said Farnum. + +"But, a bear," cried Bob, incredulously. "How could an Eskimo kill a +great polar bear with such weapons?" + +"Single-handed, he couldn't," said Farnum. "But when the bear is hunted, +the whole tribe of hunters go together. They attack in a circle. Their +spears or harpoons have lines attached. And as these harpoons sink into +the body of the bear, the lines pull him this way and that as he charges +on his tormenters. Eventually, if the Eskimo are lucky, they have him so +surrounded that he cannot move. Then one dashes in and administers the +death blow." + +"Then necessity forces them to live in tribal groups?" asked Jack. + +Farnum nodded. + +"In the Summer they often hunt alone, ranging far, for they are great +travelers. But in Winter, the hunters are all back with the tribe." + +"And the Indians?" asked Frank. + +Farnum's face darkened. + +"There are not many," he said. "I wish there were less. You may say all +you please about the 'noble red man.' But all I ever heard about the +Indians of the Far North doesn't predispose me in their favor. They are +cutthroats, thieves and liars. Usually they hunt somewhat to the south +of us, and make their way in towards the northern Canadian settlements +as Winter approaches. Let's hope we encounter none of them." + +The boys wondered as they went along whether this were gold-producing +country into which they were pushing. They spoke of the matter to Dick, +their canoe mate, at times. Taciturn though he was usually, at every +mention of gold his eyes brightened, and he became almost voluble. + +"Never been this far north," he said on one occasion, "no white man ever +has been in here, reckon. But I'd like to stop at the foot o' some of +these rapids and wash a little gravel for luck. I sure would like to." + +"Let's do it the next rapids we come to," suggested Frank, with eager +interest. "It wouldn't take long, would it?" + +"Orders is not to waste time." + +"Well, I'll speak to father," said Jack. "I'm sure he'd let us try it +just once." + +In this surmise he was correct, for the noon halt happened to be at the +foot of a rapids that would necessitate a portage, and Dick and Art +reported the graveled bank showed signs of "color." Even Farnum, his +mind concentrated on the task of getting his party along and on the job +in hand, showed interest when addressed on the subject. With pick and +pan, therefore, the two men got busy, while the boys watched with +breathless interest the process of rocking the pan and washing out the +gravel. + +"Whoopee," cried Dick, suddenly. "Thar she is. Color in the pan." + +"Sure as I'm born," ejaculated his partner. "Strong, too." + +All the boys could discern, however, were some dully gleaming particles +at the bottom of the pan, out of which most of the gravel had been +washed with the water. They had half expected to spy nuggets. Farnum and +Mr. Hampton, however, were as eagerly interested as the two old-timers. + +"Try another pan, men," suggested Mr. Hampton. "Let us go a little +farther upstream." + +Once more the process was repeated. This time the pan was rich in "pay" +and the excitement of the four older men mounted, hectic spots glowing +dull beneath their tan in the cheeks of the two old-timers especially. + +Then Dick, who was wielding the pick, attacked a clump of rocks in the +edge of the stream at the very foot of the rapids, standing in his boots +almost knee-deep in the water. For several minutes he picked and pried +and finally, with a shout of delight, turned to his audience behind him +on the bank and, having plunged an arm into the water, held it up +dripping. + +"Look," was all he said. + +They gazed, all eyes. + +"Well! Well!" cried Art. + +A small but sizable nugget lay on Dick's outstretched palm. + +"What luck," cried Jack. "You certainly looked in the right place." + +"Bet there's more gold around here," cried Frank. "Maybe a bonanza. Who +knows?" + +"You ought to stake a claim, Dick," said big Bob. "I don't know much +about the process. But that's the thing to do, isn't it?" + +"Huh," said Dick, generously. "Belongs to you boys well as me. You +thought of it." + +"Oughter work it," spoke up Art. "Might take out a good poke this +Summer." + +This remark recalled Tom Farnum to the object of his expedition. + +"No, no, men," he said, sharply. "Don't get bitten with the gold fever +now. We've got work ahead of us, work that we contracted to do." + +"Right," said Dick. + +Art's face fell, but he, too, nodded agreement. + +"Just the same," said Farnum, softening, "there's nothing to prevent you +two from staking a claim. Some day you may come back to work it." + +"Belongs to us no more'n the rest o' you," said Dick, sturdily. "The +young fellers wanted us to make a try at it here just for luck, an' we +did." + +A warm debate followed, the boys protesting they were not entitled to +any part in the find. Finally Dick capitulated. + +"Tell you what," he said. "Art an' me'll stake this claim an' file on +it. But if we ever come back to work her an' she pays, we'll declare you +in." + +"Not unless you let us help to finance the expedition," said Jack, +turning for confirmation to his comrades. "Isn't that right, fellows." + +Bob and Frank agreed. Farnum put an end to the discussion. + +"Good enough," he said. "Let it go at that. Now we must buckle into the +job. Do you realize we've spent more than two hours here, when we should +have stopped only a half hour? We've got to make this portage and push +on. Come on. Everybody to his task." + + + + +CHAPTER V.--A SURPRISE THROUGH THE AIR + + +Joyously though time flew by for the boys, with Mr. Hampton and Tom +Farnum it was a different matter. They were worried, that became +increasingly plain. Finally, although Mr. Hampton purposely refrained +from saying anything to disturb the boys, Jack took note of his father's +perturbation and questioned him about it. + +"Well, Jack," said his father, "we've been weeks on the trail. We can't +proceed much farther, without being compelled to start out. And yet so +far we have discovered no further trace of Thorwaldsson's party. When we +entered the MacKenzie, which flows north, we were going to the south. +Going up the Hare Indian we struck east. Since getting into the streams, +rivers and lakes we have been going east. Shortly we shall strike the +Coppermine, Beyond that lies the river of oil, as reported by Farrell. + +"So far we have made good time. With luck, we shall be able to reach +that territory before having to turn back or, rather, for we shall not +retrace our steps, turn south. And we should have struck some other +trace of Thorwaldsson's party long ere this, if we are on the right +track. However, you boys need not worry about this, so let's talk of +something else." + +Seeing that his father had sunk into one of his rare periods when he +wished to be alone with his meditations and did not welcome intrusion +even from Jack, the latter moved away to join his comrades. + +"Dad's plainly worried," he said. And he explained the circumstances. +"Wish I could find some way to make him forget his troubles," he said. + +"I know what," said Frank. "He loves music. We're camping for the night. +Although"--with a look at the sun--"there isn't much night, is there? +Well, anyhow, it's nighttime in Edmonton, where that new broadcasting +station was set up last Spring. Let's rig up our radio and see if we +can't pick up their concert, just for luck. What do you say?" + +"I say, good," declared Jack. + +"Edmonton's long way off," objected Bob. + +"That's nothing," said Jack. "I believe we can pick it up all right." + +"In this northern country we have no static problem, anyway," said +Frank. "We couldn't send to Edmonton with our equipment, but I'll bet we +can catch." + +While Farnum and Mr. Hampton put their heads together in low-whispered +conversation, poring over a map, and while Art and Dick lay outstretched +under some fir trees, already disposed for sleep, the three boys quietly +got out the necessary equipment from among the luggage and set to work. + +"A short distance up the stream," said Frank, "I saw two firs taller +than most, standing alone. They're a pretty good distance apart, too. We +can climb up those trees and string the aerial between them." + +They made their way to the trees noted by Frank, and found them exactly +suited to the purpose. Jack and Frank, were lighter than Bob, took turns +climbing the trees, and the wires were strung without any great +difficulty. They worked busily, and when everything was all connected +up, Bob looked at his watch. + +"Allowing for the difference in time," he said, "they're about ready to +begin their concert. On what meter wave length does the Edmonton station +send, Frank?" + +"I don't recall. About three hundred and fifty, I suppose. We'll tune up +and try, anyway." + +"What dubs we are, fellows, not to have thought of this before," said +Jack. + +"Oh, well," said Bob, "broadcast concerts never did interest me much, +anyway. I like to do the sending myself, we've always been dog-tired +when we made camp at night, and ready to turn in as quickly as Art and +Dick. If it hadn't been for your thought of bringing some relaxation and +amusement to your father tonight, Jack, we'd have been asleep already." + +"I guess that's right, old thing," Jack replied. "You would have been +asleep, anyway, even if the rest of us kept tossing. But what does she +say, Frank? Any luck yet?" + +Frank, who had been manipulating the controls, looked up mirthfully. + +"What do you think of your musical program, Jack?" he replied. "Listen +in a minute will you? They're sending out a crop and weather report." + +Jack's face fell, then he, too, laughed. + +"Oh, well," he said, "that's just a preliminary. The concert will +follow." + +"No," answered Frank, who had resumed his headpiece, "now it's a +bulletin report on the day's news events. Listen. Why, great--" + +His voice died. Over his face came an expression of surprise. + +Jack and Bob sprang to take up the other headpieces attached to the box. +Over their features also spread amazement and even consternation. They +listened intently. Then all three simultaneously tore off the receivers +and looked at each other. + +"Whew, what do you know about that?" said Bob, in an awed tone. + +"And on the very night that we decided to set up the radio, too," said +Frank. + +"It seems like the hand of fate," declared Jack. "Say, we must get +father and Tom Farnum." + +"Thorwaldsson's airship found wrecked on land near the mouth of the +MacKenzie," said Bob. "And the skeleton of the aviator. Can you beat +it?" he ejaculated again. + +"Hey, Jack, wait a minute," cried Frank, running after his companion, +who already had started for camp. "Discovered by Indians who were +bringing out furs, did you get that?" + +Jack nodded, but saved his breath as he continued to run. Frank fell in +beside him, Bob pounding at his heels. + +In a few moments they burst excitedly upon the graveled beach by the +river, where camp had been made for the night. Dick and Art lay +outstretched in slumber under the nearest fir trees. Mr. Hampton and +Farnum were still deep in their discussion, and apparently had not even +been aware of the absence of the boys, for they looked up in surprise as +the latter approached. + +"What is it, Jack? What's the matter?" demanded Mr. Hampton, rising to +his feet in alarm, as he noted his son's excitement. + +Quickly, Jack related what had occurred, describing their setting up of +the radio, their picking-up of the Edmonton station's nightly program, +and their discovery that Thorwaldsson's airship had been found far +behind them near the mouth of the MacKenzie. + +"It was only a bulletin news report, Dad," Jack explained, "yet I +suppose it contains all the facts. Evidently the discovery of the +airship had been made weeks ago by Indians, going to the mouth of the +MacKenzie with their Winter catch of furs. But, of course, it took a +long time for the news to reach civilization. It was just made public +today. The very day, too, that we decided to rig up the radio. It +certainly seems like the hand of fate, doesn't it, Dad? If we had waited +until tomorrow, or set up the radio yesterday, probably we would not +have known of this discovery." + +Mr. Hampton nodded, but absently. Already his mind was busy with the +problem. + +"Did the report state any message or papers of any sort were found on +the body of the aviator?" + +"No. Only that the body had been there a long time, as nothing but the +skeleton remained." + +"And that was all?" + +"That was all the definite information," said Frank. "Of course, there +was a word or two of speculation as to what had occurred. The theory was +advanced that the aviator was flying to summon aid for Thorwaldsson, who +was in some predicament, but that some accident occurred to his engine +while flying, and he fell to his death." + +"A plausible enough theory," said Farnum. "But, in that case, I can't +understand why the aviator did not bear some message from Thorwaldsson. +Can you, Mr. Hampton?" + +Mr. Hampton shook his head. + +"That's not the only puzzling thing," he said. "The disappearance from +the MacKenzie of Thorwaldsson's ship, the death of the aviator, the lack +of message on his body, the swallowing up of Thorwaldsson and his party, +Thorwaldsson's failure to send any radio messages--all these need +explaining. + +"We must face the fact," he continued, "that some disaster of a totally +unexpected nature has befallen Thorwaldsson's expedition. And I mean by +that a disaster of man's agency. They were prepared for practically all +eventualities in their grapple with nature. Although the Winter was +severe, yet they were well provisioned, had Farrell who knew the +country, and were prepared in every way for a lengthy stay. Even if +worst came to worst, and Winter proved too much for them, some would +have survived and brought out word of what had befallen." + +"Then you think, Dad--" + +Jack regarded his father, wide-eyed. + +"I think, Jack," said the latter firmly, "that it is time to take you +boys into our complete confidence, Farnum and I have been talking this +matter over. We feel pretty certain that some powerful man or group of +men has knowledge of Farrell's discovery of the river of oil, and is +working against us. How to explain the obtaining of that knowledge I do +not know, But, perhaps, some traitor in Anderson's employ, somebody high +in his confidence, got some word of it. Perhaps, Thorwaldsson in an +unguarded moment, let some bit of information fall. Oil, you know, is a +vital necessity of the world. Discovery of a vast new field would make +great fortunes. + +"Whoever heard of it, heard of Farrell's discovery, would realize that +the only way to come upon it would be to follow the Thorwaldsson +expedition, dog its steps and, at the psychological moment, strike. In +other words, when the field was rediscovered by Farrell, wipe out the +Thorwaldsson expedition, and claim possession. + +"Events, as they have occurred, seem to fit in with this theory. The +disappearance of Thorwaldsson's ship from the MacKenzie. Apparently it +traveled only at night, thus slipping by the scattered trading posts on +the great river. It has never been heard of since. It might very easily +have been scuttled and sunk, or else materially changed in appearance in +some little bay on that far northern coast of the Arctic. That would +mean that the crew was bought up, but that is not an impossibility, for +men I am sorry to say break faith for gain. As to the airship, the +aviator whom I know of as a man true and tried, may have sought to make +his escape to the outside when Thorwaldsson was captured--as I believe +likely--and may have paid with his life for his devotion, through some +unforeseen accident to his machine." + +The boys stood stunned. Finally Jack broke silence. + +"But, Dad, how terrible," he said in a shocked tone. "To think of men +being so unscrupulous." + +"Not all men, Jack," said his father. "Remember that." + +"Mr. Hampton," said Frank. "What do you intend to do?" + +"Frankly, I don't know," said the latter. "Now that we are within +striking distance of our objective--the river of oil--I do not want to +give up. If it lies where we believe it to lie, we can reach it before +necessity compels us to flee south to escape oncoming Winter. That will +mean that we can map the route for future operation. I had at one time, +too, although I did not mention it to you boys, some hope that we would +be able to follow the river out into the Arctic and discover a route of +approach by water. But we may not have time for that. However, once we +do locate the river by land approach, we will have a pretty accurate +idea of whether it can be reached by ship through the Arctic Ocean in +Summer. + +"But whether to push on and imperil you lads, and the rest of us, in the +light of what we suspect lies ahead, I do not know. We shall have to +sleep over it." + +After some further conversation, all returned to where the boys had +rigged up the radio. Dick and Art were childishly delighted at the +concert, the first in their experience. Farnum was almost equally +stirred. As to Mr. Hampton, for the time he forgot his worries in +enjoyment of the music. As showmen, the boys were in the element. + +More than an hour passed, and the concert was still in progress, when +Frank, who had been absent unnoted suddenly approached from the thick +forest of firs on the bend, below which lay their camp, with a face so +pale that Jack, who first caught sight of him, became alarmed. + +"What is it, Frank?" he asked, seizing his comrade by an arm. + +For a moment Frank was speechless. He swallowed convulsively, but was +unable to make a reply. The others looked at him in astonishment, and +all tore the headpieces off and neglected the closing number of the +concert, as they stared at him. + +With outstretched arm, Frank pointed towards the point of land, making a +bend in the stream, beyond which lay their camp. + + + + +CHAPTER VI.--INDIANS! + + +"Indians." + +That was all Frank said, but it was sufficient. Over the faces of Mr. +Hampton, Farnum and the two men, Dick and Art, came looks of alarm. + +"In camp," asked Jack, a sudden thought striking him. "Maybe they're +just visitors." + +But Farnum shook his head decisively, before Frank could reply. + +"The only Indians in this country hate the white man," he said. "They +have had some cause, goodness knows. But the point is, they hate us." +Turning abruptly to Frank, he said: + +"Do they know where we are? Were you seen?" + +"I was approaching our camp from this side," said Frank, who had +recovered his speech. "I was in search of a handkerchief, for I've got a +little cold, and found I did not have one with me. Anyway, my feet made +no sound on the pine needles, and I was screened from the camp by the +trees. Suddenly, as I neared the last fringe, I saw a dozen Indians or +more steal out of the trees on the other side of the clearing. They fell +upon our belongings and started going through them. I hurried away to +warn you." + +"Quick," said Farnum, "there is no time to lose. We are seven and all +armed. They saw us depart and probably thought this was a grand chance +to rifle our camp. Waited a while to see if we were coming back at once. +I imagine they are just thieves. Well, we'll give them a lesson. Come +on." + +Mr. Hampton laid a detaining hand on Farnum's arm. + +"Even if they are thieves," he said. "We want no bloodshed. Shoot over +their heads, if shooting is necessary." + +Farnum's face fell. + +"All right, sir," he said. "Just as you say. But we'll have to hurry, or +they'll get away with everything and escape in our canoes. Then we would +be out of luck, indeed." + +With beating hearts, the party stole back through the trees, spread out +with intervals of several yards between each. Dick and Art, who never +stirred anywhere without their rifles with them, being old-timers who +knew what it meant to be separated from their weapons in this wild land, +were on the ends of the line. The boys had left their rifles behind, as +had Mr. Hampton. Farnum, however, had brought his, and held the middle +position. The other four were armed with their revolvers. + +As they neared the fringe of trees forming the last rampart between them +and camp, crouching behind tree trunks as they stole forward, they could +see a group of Indians still busy over their disordered luggage, which +had been opened and tossed about near the fire. Another group was at the +water's edge, loading the canoes which had been drawn up on the sand. + +"Just in time," thought Jack. + +Then his eye was caught by a picturesque figure of a man emerging from +the little tent which Mr. Hampton employed, because he was a sufferer +from rheumatism and wanted some shelter to keep off night chills in case +they were late in getting out of the country, but which at present +frequently was not set up on their halts. The present occasion, however, +a whim to sleep under canvas rather than the fir trees had possessed +him, and the tent had been set up. + +The man who caught Jack's attention differed little in dress from Dick +and Art, but about his head was bound a red bandanna handkerchief in +piratical fashion, and this suggestion was increased by his long, +drooping black mustaches. Jack could see him clearly, and thought that +seldom had he looked upon a more villainous countenance. The fellow held +a piece of paper in his hand, and was reading it with evident +satisfaction. + +A low exclamation from Farnum, next in line on his left, drew Jack's +attention. He looked at the latter, crouching behind a tree. Farnum's +eyes were ablaze. He had raised his rifle and was pointing it at the man +before the tent. The next moment there was a report, the paper fell from +the fellow's hand, and he emitted a howl of surprise and pain. + +"Just the hand," Jack overheard Farnum say in a tone of vexation, as he +prepared to fire again. But the other, seizing his wounded hand in the +unwounded one, did not wait for the attack. Running low and in zigzag +fashion, he darted for the cover of the trees on the other side of the +camp, at the same time shouting an unintelligible warning to his +companions. + +"Fire," shrieked Farnum, pumping another shot after the fleeing man, +that kicked up the dirt at his heels. "That's Lupo the Wolf. Shoot to +kill." + +Jack shot with the rest, but remembering his father's exhortation fired +high. The volley was general. From the rifles of Art, Dick and Farnum +came deeper notes of heavy weapons, while from the four revolvers of the +others poured a succession of shots. It sounded as if an army were +opening fire from the woods. + +The Indians did not stay upon the order of their going. Those grouped +about the luggage ran after the disappearing man Farnum had called Lupo +the Wolf, while the other group at the canoes dashed away along the +graveled bank of the stream. One, however, sought to launch the canoes +into the swift current before departing, but his first effort was +ineffectual, and any further attempt was stopped by a bullet from Mr. +Hampton's revolver, which winged him in an arm and sent him scurrying +after his fellows. + +"Dick, Art, here," cried Farnum, peremptorily. + +The two ran to his side. + +"That was Lupo the Wolf," Farnum explained rapidly, his voice betraying +his excitement. "You can guess what that means?" + +The others nodded, with compressed lips. + +"I want you to trail them. Don't run into danger, but see if their camp +is nearby." + +With nods of understanding, the two frontiersmen were off at the run, +not crossing the open camp, but circling it amongst the trees. Then +Farnum turned to Mr. Hampton, and the boys crowding at his heels. + +"That wasn't just an attack from Indian thieves," he said. "Mr. +Hampton"--and his voice took on a solemn tone--"that was a blow from the +enemy." + +"What do you mean?" + +"They were desperadoes under the personal leadership of Lupo the Wolf." + +"And he?" + +"He is a cross-breed, half Indian, half white, and the most notorious +bad man in the north. He is known not only throughout the length and +breadth of Alaska, but throughout the Yukon of Canada, too. From +Ketchikan to Arctic City, and from Nome to Dawson, he has gambled, +fought, knifed, murdered, and never been brought to book. Ah, you +consider Alaska is law-abiding these days. To a certain extent, the +towns and mining camps have grown more orderly and there are sheriffs +'north of 54.' But might still rules in the camps." + +Farnum spoke bitterly, and leaned a moment on his rifle. As it was +evident, however, that he had not yet finished, the others did not +interrupt. Presently he resumed. + +"Lupo recruits his men from the fisheries. Men of the lowest type come +there in Summer, in droves, lured by the high wages. They form temporary +alliances with the native women. Then in the Fall, they depart. You can +guess what the children of such lawless unions are like. They are +cross-breeds, inheriting the most vicious and lawless characteristics of +the human race. It is from them Lupo recruits his following." + +"But why should they be away over here, in this unpeopled wilderness?" +asked Mr. Hampton. "Unless--" He paused and looked questioningly at +Farnum. + +The latter nodded. + +"That's it," he said. "Why? Unless, if you will let me finish for you, +Lupo is on our trail. And that I believe to be the case. When Frank here +first came with word of Indians in camp, I considered them merely +raiders from some passing body of hunters. But when I found Lupo at +their head, I knew better. The wonder to me is," he said, growing +thoughtful, "that he did not send men to trail us and kill us or take us +prisoner." + +Mr. Hampton shrugged. + +"Even the cunningest slip up now and then," he said. "Perhaps his men +wanted to loot first. And, anyway, they had only been here a few moments +when, thanks to Frank, we were able to surprise them. Well, thanks to +our good angel, we came off as well as we did. Nothing stolen, our +canoes still here, nobody hurt." + +"Ah," said Farnum, darkly, "we're not out of the woods yet. If Lupo the +Wolf is after us, well--there is trouble ahead." + + + + +CHAPTER VII.--A MAN OF THE "MOUNTED." + + +While Mr. Hampton and Farnum turned in to take inventory to discover +what, if anything, had been stolen, the boys went back to take down and +pack their radio outfit. As it lay in the opposite direction from that +taken by the Indians who, moreover, were being tracked by Dick and Art +and could not double back without warning being given, it was considered +safe for the boys. + +When they returned to camp, they found the two frontiersmen ahead of +them. These reported the Indian camp pitched some two miles in their +rear and that, upon arrival, Lupo and his men had packed up and taken +canoe on the back track. + +"Now what does that mean?" asked Farnum, thoughtfully. "It is probable +that Lupo has been behind us all the way, if what I suspect is true, +namely that they have been trailing us. But why should they be fleeing +now?" + +"They can't have been close to us all the time, Mr. Farnum," said Bob, +"or why weren't we attacked before?" + +Farnum nodded. + +"That's true enough," he said. "It may be that Lupo started late and has +been all this time catching up with us." + +Breaking a thoughtful silence, Mr. Hampton said: + +"As a matter of fact, that seems the most probable explanation. The +other side, Farnum, probably has a spy at Nome, of whom you are unaware. +But the spy knows your identity. Your story of taking us into the +wilderness to hunt may have deceived this spy. But then, later, word +would reach him from Seattle of my identity. Not that it is commonly +known. But if some traitor close to Anderson is trading on Farrell's +secret, my connection with Anderson would be suspected, especially as +several years ago I worked with the Anderson oil crowd in New Mexico. So +words would reach Nome to watch me. Then someone would start out on our +trail." + +"And that someone was Lupo," said Farnum. "A fine cutthroat." + +An earnest discussion followed. What did this turning back of Lupo the +Wolf mean? Did he intend to stick to their trail, but at a greater +distance in the rear? Or did he plan to encircle them and lie in ambush +ahead? That his retreat was other than momentary, and meant he intended +giving up their pursuit, nobody believed. + +"Look here, Dad," said Jack, during the course of this discussion, +"don't you consider it quite likely that Lupo intends to take us by +surprise and attack us, rather than to retreat?" + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +"I do, indeed, Jack," he said. "A cutthroat such as Lupo would have +brought his band of desperadoes here for only one purpose, and that is, +to dispose of us. We were lucky this time by reason of the fact that +they came upon our camp first, and stopped to loot. But from now on we +shall have to be continually on our guard." + +"It's a good thing, Mr. Hampton, that this is the long Summer, when +daylight never fails," said Frank. "That makes it easier to guard +against a surprise attack." + +"Yes," Mr. Hampton agreed, "that makes it easier. But from now on, we +shall have to be on the watch continually." + +He was silent a moment, thinking. Then he turned to the other members of +the party, Farnum, Dick and Art being gathered about him as well as the +boys, preparatory to the launching of the canoes, which were ready +loaded. + +"Are we making a mistake in letting these fellows out of sight?" he +asked. "Would it be better to set Dick and Art to watch them, and +appoint a rendezvous where we can come together later?" + +The two Alaskans were silent. Their faces, however, showed approval of +the plan. Farnum struck his forehead with clenched fist in a +characteristic gesture. + +"Just what I would have proposed myself, if I had been awake," he +confessed. "Dick, Art, do you think you could pick up their trail?" + +The two nodded. + +"They won't back track far," said Dick. "Art an' me can follow 'em +afoot. That last portage is only four miles back, an' we can catch up +with 'em there. Now about where to meet up with you again?" + +"None of us know this country," said Farnum, "and so it will be +difficulty to appoint a rendezvous. But, look here. Lupo undoubtedly +intends to continue our pursuit, and won't let our trail go cold. +Consequently, you will be near us. I think the best plan will be to +report to us at every camp. One of you can keep watch on Lupo while the +other brings in a report." + +"Good enough," said Dick, the more loquacious of the pair. "Look for us +at tomorrow's camp." + +Supplied with bacon and a little flour sufficient for a meal or two, +guns at the trail, the pair struck swiftly on the back trail, +disappeared among the trees at the bend and were gone from sight. + +"All right, boys," said Farnum. "Let's get going. Can you manage your +canoe all right by yourselves?" + +Mr. Hampton laughed. + +"I think they can scrape along, Farnum," he said. "Probably we'll be +asking one of them to help us before long. Well, come on." + +Paddles dipped into the stream once more, the canoes shot away, and, +with Farnum leading to set the course, the boys fell in behind. In the +leading canoe, as the two men settled down to the stroke a low-voiced +conversation began that lasted a long time. What Mr. Hampton and Farnum +were saying could not be heard, for the gap between the two canoes, +though not great, was considerable. Moreover, they spoke in low tones. +But the boys sensed an undercurrent of anxiety felt by both the older +men. As for themselves, however, they were not worried. On the contrary, +the excitement of finding themselves trailed had brightened them +wonderfully. + +"Old expedition was getting too monotonous, anyway," said Bob presently. + +"Oh, I suppose you'll want to challenge the best Indian wrestler now, +won't you?" said Jack, in a tone of mock seriousness. + +"Yes, Bob, why didn't you go back with Dick and Art and send in your +challenge?" asked Frank, in the same jollying manner. "You know you +haven't been in a match with anybody for some time. Here was your +chance, and you went and let it slip away from you. But, don't worry, +perhaps the Indians will return. Who knows? You may even have a chance +to exchange courtesies with no less a personage than Lupo the Wolf +himself." + +The big fellow grinned, but made no reply. And so the two canoes swept +on between the low banks of the stream, one weighted with anxiety, the +other filled with light-heartedness. The boys were not simpletons. They +realized, indeed, that they were in a precarious situation. They were +deep in the far northern wilderness. An enemy of superior numbers dogged +their heels. In all that vast country, was none to whom they could look +for help. But, for all that, they saw no occasion to worry. It was not +the first time in which they found themselves in a ticklish situation. +They had come unscathed out of other perils, even winning some honor in +the encounter. They would do the same again. Thus they put the matter to +themselves. + +Hour after hour passed, during which period they twice encountered +slight rapids, up which they waded with the canoes instead of portaging. +All were tiring rapidly, for not only was their number reduced by the +absence of Dick and Art, and the work made correspondingly heavy, but in +addition they were traveling now on reserve strength, as prior to making +the last camp they already had done a big day's work. + +Farnum, however, pushed ahead until at the end of four hours of travel +they came to the shore of a small lake. Here, in a secluded cove, +convenient to the stream on which they had been traveling, they were +about to make camp, when Frank approached Mr. Hampton and Farnum and +indicated an island a half mile away. + +"Isn't that smoke over there?" he asked, pointing. + +Farnum stared, and in a moment his keen eyes confirmed Frank's +observation. Mr. Hampton put up the field glasses which he always +carried strapped to him, and also saw the smoke. But he saw something +more--a skin kayak drawn up on the shore of the island. + +"Hard to tell from that what sort of man is camping out there," said +Farnum, when informed of the kayak. "Everybody uses 'em in this +country--Indian, Eskimo, and the occasional prospector. That smoke +doesn't indicate a big fire. Must be only one man, or maybe, two. Let's +investigate. If we decide to make camp out there, well, that island +would be a good place and it would be hard to surprise us there if we +kept guard." + +Once more, paddles were plied, and the two canoes cut diagonally across +the waters of the lake towards the island. As they approached, Farnum +raised his voice in a hail. A moment later an answering shout came back. +Then a figure stepped from the trees to the little stretch of sand upon +which the kayak was drawn up and stood, watching their approach, hand +shading eyes against the glare of the sun, head bare. + +"Great Godfrey's ghost," exclaimed Farnum in a low voice, turning his +head slightly to address Mr. Hampton, "it's a policeman." + +"What?" + +"A member of the Northwest--of the Canadian Mounted Police." + +"What's he doing here?" + +"I don't know. But we'll soon find out." + +"Welcome, strangers," said the other, a tall bronzed man, as they +approached. "Just in time for a snack." + +He advanced to the water's edge, and stood ready to help. Farnum's +appraising eye took in the approach. Shoal water and a sandy beach! He +decided to drive the canoe up on the sands. Shipping his paddle, he +leaped from the bow into the water, as the forefoot of the canoe grated +lightly. Relieved of his weight, the canoe rose at the bow and sank at +the stern under Mr. Hampton. Seizing the bow, Farnum ran it up on the +beach, the uniformed man lending a hand. A moment later, Jack, who was +in the bow of the boy's canoe, repeated the maneuver. The two craft were +drawn up side by side. + +"MacDonald's my name," said the Canadian simply. + +"Know Arkell of Dawson?" asked Farnum. + +"Know him well," said the other. "One o' the best on the Force." + +"Friend of mine," said Farnum. + +The two clasped hands warmly. Then Farnum introduced Mr. Hampton and the +boys. MacDonald led the way to a sheltered spot among the trees, where a +fire burned. + +"Just about to broil some fish," he said. "Lucky there's plenty. I'm +crazy about fishing," he continued, "and when they bit here I pulled out +mor'n I could use. Was wonderin' what to do with 'em when I heard your +hail. Guess I don't need to worry about that any longer." + +As he spoke he busied himself about preparations for dinner, and soon an +appetizing odor of frying fish rose to assail the twitching nostrils of +the hungry boys. + +"Suppose I get another pan and help, sir," proffered Bob. + +His comrades laughed, for the big fellow's appetite was proverbial among +them. MacDonald nodded with a grin of understanding. Bob tore back to +the canoes, and soon returned with a pan in hand. In a short time the +fish were fried, and all hands fell to right heartily. + +"Long way off your beat, aren't you?" asked Farnum, of MacDonald, as +they ate. + +The other nodded. Then he regarded them sharply. + +"Same to you," he said. "First white men I've seen in many days." + +Mr. Hampton read a challenge in the straight blue eyes under the +grizzled brows, and met it promptly. + +"Yes, and I'll tell you why we are here," he said. "I think our meeting +with you was providential. If you have been in this country long, you +may have heard something that will help us. At any rate, here's our +story." + +Whereupon, he proceeded to relate the reason for their presence. He made +a clean breast of it, keeping back nothing, telling MacDonald of the +alleged oil discovery by Farrell and Cameron, Cameron's death, Farrell's +return as guide to Thorwaldsson's expedition, and their presence now in +an attempt to trace the missing men. + +"So that's that," said MacDonald. "So that's the reason for +Thorwaldsson's 'Lost Expedition.' And it was into this country he come! +Well, well." + +In conclusion, Mr. Hampton told of their recent adventure with Lupo the +Wolf. MacDonald manifested keen interest. His hand, as he poured tobacco +into a pipe, shook slightly, and he spilled a little of the precious +tobacco. + +"You ain't heard of it likely," he said. "You wouldn't. But this Lupo +killed my partner on the Force, an' I asked the Inspector to let me go +after him myself. I followed him in from Dawson an' lost his trail +several days ago. Now, well--" + +MacDonald averted his face, rose and walked down towards the lake shore, +and the others respected his evident desire to be alone and did not +follow. + +"Out after Lupo single-handed," whispered Frank. "And the desperado +surrounded by all his men, too." + +Farnum nodded. + +"That means nothing to the Mounted," said he. + + + + +CHAPTER VIII.--FIRST BLOOD. + + +So tired were all members of the party after their unexpected exertions +of moving camp and trekking on, coming at the end of a day filled with +fatiguing labor, that now a haven had been reached and they had relaxed +from their tension, they were ready to go to sleep at once. First, +however, preparations had to be made not only to keep guard but to keep +watch also for Dick and Art. Although the latter did not know +definitely, of course, where they were encamped, yet it would not be +difficult for them to follow the trail at least to the shore of the +lake. + +"Look here," said MacDonald, returning to join the conference, "I'm not +near as tired as the rest of you. I'll keep watch for your friends for a +couple of hours while the rest of you get some sleep." + +"All right," said Farnum, gratefully, "that is, if you promise to wake +me at the end of two hours. I can use a little sleep right now." + +"Turn in, then," said MacDonald. "These spruces give you enough shade. +And, anyway, I guess you don't need much inducement to go to sleep." + +"I could sleep right out in the open sun with my face turned up to the +sky," said big Bob, yawning. "Well, nighty night, folks." + +Nothing occurred during MacDonald's watch, and at the end of the +two-hour period he awakened Farnum, in keeping with the agreement. + +"Thought some of letting you sleep on," he said. "But, to tell you the +truth, I been travelin' hard myself, and need a little sleep, too." + +"Right," said Farnum. "I'd have been peeved if you hadn't waked me." + +Several hours later, Farnum keeping lonely vigil among the bushes by the +lake shore, descried a canoe shoot out of the mouth of the stream down +which they, too, had come and swing into the lake. At first, as only the +bow of the canoe appeared, he was startled, believing Lupo's Indians +already were on the trail. But a moment later, with relief and yet +surprise to see them there, he made out the two figures in the boat as +those of Dick and Art. + +The pair rested on their paddles a moment, scanning the shore and also, +Farnum noted, apparently casting anxious glances behind them. He was too +far away, however, to see whether that were really the case. Farnum +realized that, with the skin kayak belonging to MacDonald now drawn +safely out of sight among the bushes, beside their own canoes, Dick and +Art would not have the same indications pointing to the island that had +he on arrival. Therefore, he stepped from the bushes and was just about +to set his cupped hand to his mouth and call when the unexpected +occurred. + +Dick and Art already had dipped their paddles into the water again and +were making a wide swing with the evident intention of bringing the +canoe parallel to the shore but some distance out, when Farnum's +startled eyes beheld another canoe arrive at the mouth of the stream +behind them. + +Action was as quick as thought. Dick and Art evidently had managed to +obtain one of Lupo's canoes and were being closely pursued. How closely, +moreover, apparently they did not know. He must warn them, not only of +his presence and of help close at hand, but also of the danger behind +them. The course they were taking would bear them away from the island +and, unless changed at once, would make it possible for Lupo to cut them +off from their friends. + +Although he had left his rifle at camp, as he stumbled out with sleep +filling his eyes and dulling his brain, Farnum had his automatic +swinging in the holster at his belt. Whipping it out, he shot three +times in rapid succession. + +At the sound, Dick and Art stared towards the island where Farnum, +stepping into the open, was vigorously waving his hat to attract their +attention. Lupo's men also set up a shout, as they churned the water +racing to cut off their quarry. + +"What is it?" cried Frank, first of the aroused camp to gain Farnum's +side. + +Then his glance took in the situation. + +"Look here, those fellows might pick off Art and Dick before they can +gain safety, even if they don't succeed in cutting them off," he said. +"Let's get our rifles, fellows, and open fire. A long shot, but they're +coming closer." + +"Anyway, it will make them draw in their horns," said Farnum. "Tell you +what, you boys run and get the rifles, and Mr. Hampton and I will launch +one of our canoes. We'll go out to help Dick and Art, if those fellows +keep closing in on them." + +The three boys sped away, nothing loath, but when they returned they +found Farnum's plan unnecessary. As the two canoes had swept along, +Dick, who was in the stern, suddenly had thrown down his paddle, and +taken up his rifle, while Art had swung the canoe about with one +dexterous stroke. Dick immediately had opened fire, and Art had followed +suit. + +The boys heard the shots as they ran down towards the shore. When they +reached the sand they found Lupo's men already had faced about and were +hurrying towards the mainland. One of their number evidently was hit. + +"Main good shootin' at long range a' so quick after paddlin'," commented +MacDonald appreciatively. + +Content with having beaten off their enemies, the two desisted, resumed +their paddles and soon were within hailing distance. Greetings and +congratulations were exchanged, and Dick and Art ran their canoe on +shore. As soon as the first hubbub of exclamations died away, Mr. +Hampton led the way to the camp. MacDonald put the coffee pot on the +fire and between draughts of the strong, hot liquid Dick told their +story. + +After leaving the previous camp, they had gone back to where they seen +Lupo break camp and start on the back trail. The meaning of this move, +they had discussed. It seemed to them folly to believe Lupo was +relinquishing the chase. They believed he would suspect Mr. Hampton and +Farnum would spy on him, and was merely trying to throw them off guard +by creating the impression that he was abandoning the chase. Therefore, +they had gone warily, convinced that at the end of a short withdrawal +Lupo would call a halt and prepare to 'bout face. + +This suspicion proved correct. Some two miles farther on they discerned +the four canoes of the half-breed halted alongshore while Lupo harangued +their occupants. + +"We wanted to listen powerful bad to what he was a-sayin'," explained +Dick. "But we couldn't get close enough. There wasn't much cover near +'em and we had to lay hid where the trees was thickest, quite a ways +off. Art and I lay there, a-strainin' our ears but without any luck when +suddenly somethin' happens. Most of 'em was on shore, listenin' to Lupo +but in one canoe was one man a-huntin' around like he'd lost somethin'. + +"What it was we never did know. But suddenly, this fellow shoves off +with a shout to Lupo. Lupo answers like he was agreein'. So then this +fellow comes a-paddlin' down stream like mad. As he goes by where we're +a-layin' low, Art whispers to me: 'This is where Lupo turns his gang +around. That's sure. Best thing we can do is to beat it back an' warn +our crowd. An' my legs is tired. I'd like to let my arms work for me. +Let's go.' + +"I nods, and without any more words we backed out and started down +stream after that canoe. The fellow is goin' like mad, which means he +ain't intendin' to go far. He's lost somethin' or other and thinks it +may be floatin' on the water or, maybe is layin' on shore where he +touched. Anyway, that's what we thought. We never did get to know. For +after we'd made a bend in the stream and put some distance between Lupo +and us, we decided it was no use runnin' any farther. + +"'Here goes,' said Art. And he let fly over the Indian's head. That +fellow didn't wait for more. He just jumped out of the canoe an' started +swimmin' for the other shore. So then Art give me his rifle an' he swims +out and brings in the canoe. Last we seen of that Indian he was +streaking it back on the other bank. I got in and--well, here we are." + +MacDonald, who had listened in silence, suddenly interrupted: + +"How many men has Lupo got with him?" + +"A dozen." + +MacDonald looked at Mr. Hampton. + +"You know why I want him," he said. "For murder. And then there's this +raid on you. There are eight of us, includin' these husky young fellows +of yours. Will you help me capture him an' his gang?" + +Mr. Hampton looked thoughtful. + +"But, MacDonald, what would you do with them? We can't turn aside from +our own object long? We couldn't help you guard them. And you couldn't +get twelve or thirteen men back to your Post single-handed, especially +if any of them are wounded." + +MacDonald's face fell. + +"Guess you're right," he said. "But when I think o' that skunk--murderin' +the best pal a man ever had--well, I see red, that's all." His head sank +to his clenched hands and he sat on a fallen tree, staring moodily at +the ground between his feet. + +"Certainly is a problem, Mr. Hampton," said Farnum, slowly. "If we don't +do something, Lupo will continue to hang to our trail as we proceed, a +constant danger." + +"I know," said Mr. Hampton. "Let me think." + +He, too, sat silent, staring meditatively at the ground. + +The boys had been listening with interest. Now Frank nudged Jack, with +whom he was standing by the fire, and whispered in his ear. Jack's face +brightened and he nodded. + +"I'll bet they have," he whispered. "Ask MacDonald." + +Frank turned to the ranger. + +"Mr. MacDonald, how far away is your Post?" he inquired. + +MacDonald looked up puzzled, but answered readily enough. + +"A good four hundred miles to the South." + +"Why do you ask, Frank?" Mr. Hampton wanted to know. + +"Just a minute, sir, please," begged Frank, once more turning to +MacDonald. "And how many men are at the Post?" + +"Captain and five men." + +"Oh, is that all?" + +Frank's tone was one of disappointment. MacDonald smiled slightly. + +"People think the 'Mounties' must be as many as an army," he said. +"Well, we keep this wilderness clean with a handful. O' course, when +necessary, too, we can swear in deputies." + +"Have you got wireless at the Post?" asked Frank. + +MacDonald nodded. + +"Captain equipped us some time back," he said. "All posts or forts, as +we call them sometimes, have wireless now." + +"Good for you, Frank. I see what you're driving at now," said Mr. +Hampton. "You--" + +Frank nodded. + +"Yes, sir. I thought if we helped Mr. MacDonald capture Lupo and his +gang, we could call his Post by wireless and have them send men to help +him take his prisoners in." + + + + +CHAPTER IX.--A CALL TO THE FORT. + + +"Now," said Jack, "is the time that I wish I had my 20-kilowatt radio +tube that I have been working on so long." + +Mr. Hampton, Bob and Frank nodded sympathetically. An enthusiast on +radio, Jack had developed a number of new appliances. The latest of +these was not yet completed. He had worked on it in the laboratories at +Yale during the Winter and Spring. The lateness of his return to his +classes, however, inasmuch as he did not arrive at college until after +Christmas, due to the delay occasioned by his adventures in South +America in search of "The Enchanted City of the Incas," compelled him to +devote most his time to catching up in his studies. He did not, +therefore, have as much time to devote to laboratory experiments as he +desired. As a consequence, the 20-kilowatt tube had not yet been +perfected, when time came for him to depart for Alaska with his father. + +Jack's 20-kilowatt tube, when completed, would be the most powerful in +the world, and he expected, moreover, to construct others of greater +kilo-wattage. A 75-kilowatt tube had been produced in England, it is +true, but it had not been found practicable. Jack's tube was to be +steel-jacketed and equipped with a water-cooling device, due to the heat +produced when in operation. His big dream was that this tube, when used +as an amplifier in conjunction with an alternator, would make +trans-atlantic telephonic communication as common as cabling or wireless +telegraphing. + +"If I only had one of my 20-kilowatt tubes now," he mourned, "we would +be able to talk not only with Mr. MacDonald's Post but with Dawson or +even Nome." + +"Well, Jack," said Frank, "it's too bad. Just the same, let's get busy. +For, with our 50-watt oscillator tube set we will be able to communicate +by telegraph up to 500 miles. And, as the Post is only 400 miles away, +we can reach it easily." + +For sending up to 500 miles, the boys knew they could use either three +or four 5-watt oscillator tubes in parallel, or one 50-watt oscillator +tube. They had decided on the latter method, in making their +preparations for departure in faraway Seattle. For one thing, and the +biggest, transportation was the most important item. And the 50-watt +tube set was the more compact. Quickly, then, with Mr. Hampton helping, +they got out the various parts from their baggage and made the +connections. + +Farnum, the Northwest policeman, MacDonald, and Dick and Art, watched +with puzzled interest and even awe as the four, working in unison, put +together the aerial series condenser, the blocking condenser, the grid +condenser, the telegraph key, the chopper, the choke coil in the key +circuit, the filament volt-meter, the protective condenser in the power +circuit, the storage battery and the motor generator. + +Farnum and MacDonald asked questions, although Dick and Art were content +to sit silent and watch, keen-eyed, as the construction work progressed. +Several times, too, Dick arose and went to the water's edge to keep +watch against surprise. That any would be attempted for the time being, +nobody believed, as they figured the enemy would consider them on guard. + +As they worked, Jack explained for the benefit of the others. His +description of how the low voltage current from the storage battery +flowed into one of the windings of the generator and drives it as a +motor thus generating higher voltage in the other winding both puzzled +and interested them. By the time, the set was ready for use, Farnum, who +was something of a mechanic by inclination, had a fair understanding of +the set, but MacDonald, though interested, was bewildered. + +"I'm fair beat," he confessed. "Anyhow, just so you boys can make it +work!" + +"Oh, we'll make it work, all right," Frank assured him. "Well, now, to +try to call the Post. What's its call, Mr. MacDonald?" + +"I happen to remember," said MacDonald. "We were all so interested when +wireless was put in that Captain Jameson gave us a little lecture on it. +He said our call would be JSN, abbreviation for his name. We were to +remember it, in case of need, when we were able to get to a wireless +station. Well, this is a case of need." + +"I'll say it is," said big Bob. "Well, come on, fellows, who's going to +call?" + +It was an honor or distinction that each was eager to have, yet each +wanted to force it on the others. A friendly argument developed, to +which Mr. Hampton, smiling, put an end. + +"Look here, boys, we are wasting time. Suppose you draw straws for the +privilege. You all know the Morse and Continental codes, so there is no +question of ability involved. Here--" breaking three matchsticks into +varying lengths and offering them--"take your choice. Longest wins." + +Frank drew the winning stick. The others laughed, clapped him on the +back, and without more ado he began pressing the key and sending out the +signal. + +"Is somebody on duty at the Post wireless station, do you think, +MacDonald?" asked Mr. Hampton. + +"Somebody there all the time," the latter replied. "Captain Jameson has +found wireless so useful in policing his vast district that he wonders +how he ever got along without it." + +"Hurray," shouted Frank, "listen. They're answering." + +To those who understood the code, the answer was plain: + +"JSN answering. Who are you?" + +"MacDonald," tapped off Frank, grinning mischievously. + +The receptor sounded almost angry. + +"Quit your kidding." + +"No, I mean it," replied Frank. "This is MacDonald of the Mounted." + +"Prove it." + +"That'll stump old Frank," chuckled Bob, in an aside. But he was +mistaken. + +"All right," replied Frank, confidently. "Do you know what my assignment +is?" + +"Yes," answered JSN, impudently. "Do you?" + +"I'm after Lupo the Wolf," tapped Frank. "Now call Captain Jameson." + +"You're not MacDonald," replied JSN, "because he doesn't know the code. +But you must be speaking for him, for that's right about his assignment. +I'll call Captain Jameson. You wait." + +"All right," tapped Frank. + +Then he turned to the eager MacDonald, who was itching to inquire what +was occurring, but had restrained himself until he should be appealed to +by Frank, in order not to interrupt. Like all men unfamiliar with +telegraphy, whether wireless or by wire, he stood in awe of an operator, +and believed it would be terrible, indeed, to interrupt that superior +being. Frank took pity now on his curiosity, as well as on that of +Farnum, Dick and Art, crowding behind him, and explained what had +happened. + +"And you actually got the Post?" asked MacDonald, doubt in his voice. + +Frank nodded. + +"My God," said the big policeman. "Think of the weeks I spent toiling up +here, and now you come along and talk across that distance without the +loss of a minute's time. Wonderful, well I reckon." + +"When Captain Jameson arrives," said Frank, smiling, "I want you to +stand close and I'll translate what he says, and you help me with the +replies, will you?" + +"Won't I be interrupting you?" + +"Oh, no," smiled Frank. "You just come close and wait until I speak. +It'll be all right. Well"--as the receptor began to click--"I guess this +is Captain Jameson now. Yes," with a nod, "it's he, all right. He's +asking where you are, Mr. MacDonald." + +"Tell him I'm four hundred miles away and close on Lupo. Tell him about +yourselves and the fight, and that we're going to round up Lupo's gang +and ask him how soon he can send men to help me out with any prisoners +we take, and if he can send any at all, and--" + +"One minute," said Frank. "I understand. Just wait a bit now, while I +telegraph." + +To explain at length the details of that telegraphic conversation is +unnecessary. Suffice it to say, that the situation was fully explained +to Captain Jameson, and that the latter agreed to start a half dozen +deputies under a Sergeant to MacDonald's aid, as soon as he should hear +again as to the outcome of the expedition against Lupo. + +"It'll take a while for the men to reach MacDonald," said Captain +Jameson. "But with game plentiful and the season open, he can camp until +they arrive, and thus keep watch over his prisoners, providing he makes +any. You people go ahead with your rounding up of Lupo's gang, and then +let me hear from you again." + +On that agreement, Frank finally closed the conversation, as there was +nothing further to be said. + + + + +CHAPTER X.--THE BOYS LEFT BEHIND. + + +"MacDonald, I'll agree to help you round up Lupo and his gang," said Mr. +Hampton. + +They were all sitting in conference, so to speak, about the camp fire, +over which Dick was busy broiling fish which he and Art and the boys had +just pulled out of the lake. The appetizing odor made the nostrils of +the three hungry boys twitch with anticipatory delight. + +"Fine," said the big ranger, "that's the way I like to hear you talk." + +"Yes," said Mr. Hampton, meditatively, "I've got a very good reason why +we should cast in our lot and help you, even supposing Lupo flees and +draws us off our course." + +"What's that?" + +"Well, it's an easy enough one to guess. Lupo evidently is after us. +That means that he is being paid by somebody to do us in, or at least +thwart us in our search. I want to know who that somebody is. And the +only way to find out is to make Lupo prisoner and question him. +Moreover, it is possible we may be able to learn something about the +mysterious fate of Thorwaldsson and his expedition." + +Farnum had been listening closely. He nodded with satisfaction. + +"Just what I was thinking myself." + +"You're right, Mr. Hampton," said MacDonald. "But such being the case, +we'll have to be mighty careful that Lupo doesn't get shot, as then your +prospective source of information would vanish." + +"True enough, MacDonald," said Mr. Hampton. "We'll all have to be on +guard against that misfortune, for misfortune it would be." + +He raised his voice, calling the boys and Dick and Art to him. Then he +explained how matters stood. + +"As soon as we finish breakfast," he said, "we'll start, and you must +all be very careful not to shoot Lupo, if it comes to a battle." + +As they ate breakfast, Bob who seldom spoke but always to the point, +raised a question which had been puzzling him. + +"Mr. Hampton, what will we do with all our outfit?" he asked. "And with +our radio transmitter, especially? Shall we dismount it? Must we take +all our outfit along?" + +"It would be too bad to dismount the radio, after our trouble in getting +it erected," said Mr. Hampton. "And to take all our outfit with us would +be to hamper our movements. On the other hand, we can't very well leave +everything here, for some of Lupo's men might slip away from the main +body, in fact, they may already have done so, and they would put us in a +terrible plight if they raided the camp, in our absence." + +There was silence for a minute or two, then MacDonald spoke. + +"We can certainly travel faster without your outfit to hold us back," he +said, "especially if Lupo tries to run away. For then we could gain on +him at the portages, by traveling light. Look here, Mr. Hampton, this +island is easily defended. We've been going to the shore to keep watch +on the mainland against surprise. But just a little ways through the +trees is a little rise, a knoll, from which you can see the waters all +around the island. One man alone could keep guard here." + +"But one man couldn't keep off an attack in numbers," objected Mr. +Hampton. + +"I don't know," said MacDonald. "With them high-powered rifles of yours, +it might be done. They carry far, farther than any guns Lupo's Indians +and breeds will have. Anyway, two men certainly could manage to hold +this place against all comers." + +"And three," added Farnum, with a significant look at Mr. Hampton, +"could do it even better." + +The boys again were at the fire some distance away, helping Dick broil +more fish. Mr. Hampton looked at them. He understood the significance in +Farnum's tone. + +"You don't think they would be in danger here?" + +"Less than they would be in with us, Mr. Hampton," said Farnum, lowering +his voice as the other had done. + +Mr. Hampton considered. The proposal hinted by Farnum, namely, that the +boys should be left at camp, tempted him. It was most assuredly true +that they would be in far less danger than if they accompanied him +against Lupo. And that appealed to him, appealed powerfully. He was +grateful to Farnum in his thoughts for his solicitude for the boys' +welfare. + +On the other hand, he knew them for resourceful in an emergency, and +good fighters. And since the idea that information might be obtained +from Lupo had come to him it had taken firm possession of his thoughts. +Lupo must be captured. Would it not be folly to weaken their force by +leaving three young huskies, each of whom, moreover, was a fine rifle +shot, behind? + +Besides, what would the boys say? If necessary, he could command and +they would obey. But Mr. Hampton was not one to exercise his authority +dictatorially. + +"I confess I don't know what to do, Farnum," he said finally. + +At that moment, a laughing hail from the boys announced the completion +of the second batch of food, and their imminent return. + +"Make it a post of honor and danger," whispered Farnum, urgently. "Tell +them the radio must be guarded, and the outfit, and that if we take +these things along our movements will be so hampered that Lupo might +escape. Tell them there is a big possibility, too, that some of Lupo's +gang may attempt to raid the camp while we are absent." + +The boys were so close at hand that Farnum desisted. Mr. Hampton nodded. +As they ate, he broached the subject of leaving a guard in camp. + +"Three of us ought to stay behind," he added. "That will give sufficient +protection for each other, and provide a sure safeguard against +surprise. Also, that leaves five of us to go after Lupo. Four of us can +go in that bigger of our canoes easily, without any baggage. It carried +three of us, with baggage, so far, MacDonald can go in his kayak. So we +can hit a fast pace, and make speed at the portages, if any are +necessary." + +"Who do you intend to leave behind, Dad?" asked Jack quietly. + +Mr. Hampton realized from his son's tone that Jack understood his +thoughts. + +"Well, you three boys would be the natural ones to be selected," he +said. + +"Oh, I say," protested Bob. + +"That's not fair, Mr. Hampton," cried Frank. + +Jack was silent. He knew his father. Close association of the motherless +boy with the older man since boyhood had attuned their minds. He +understood how troubled his father was over the possibility of running +them into danger. And he decided he would not add to his difficulties, +but would keep quiet, although inwardly he felt dismayed at the prospect +of "missing the fun." + +"You see how it is, fellows," said Mr. Hampton, and he proceeded to +elaborate on the theme furnished him by Farnum. "It's a post of honor +and danger combined." + +Bob and Frank, however, were not convinced. They started anew to protest +But Jack silenced them. + +"All right, fellows, let's be sports," he said. "If the older heads +decide they don't need us, we won't force ourselves on them." + +"But, Jack," cried Bob and Frank in chorus. + +"No, I mean it, fellows," said Jack. "Come over here with me, and I'll +tell you something." + +Drawing them out of earshot, he added: + +"Don't let us make it hard for Dad. He's got troubles enough. He'll feel +a lot easier if we aren't along. I know how you feel. I feel the same +way about it. But let's make it as easy for Dad as we can. Besides, +there is something in what he said, after all. There is no guarantee +that some of Lupo's men won't attempt to raid us. For my part, I believe +some of them must be watching this island right now, and the minute they +see the others safely out of sight, they'll attack us. For they know our +numbers, and they will realize the three of us are here alone." + +"All right," grumbled Bob. "Have it your own way, let's get some more to +eat. I haven't filled up yet." + +"This outdoor life makes me ravenous, too," agreed Frank. "And I used to +be such a dainty eater. Why, I just pecked at my food." + +"You mean you ate food by the peck," said Bob. "For a little guy, you're +the heftiest eater I ever saw." + +"Little guy, is it?" cried Frank. "I like that." + +And without more ado, he made a flying tackle, his arms locking about +Bob's knees. The big fellow came down in the brush and Frank piled on +top of him with a shout of glee. + +"Come on, Jack. We haven't had a good rough-house for a long time." + +Grinning, Jack joined in, and the three went rolling and threshing about +the bushes like a trio of young bears. + +At the fireside, Mr. Hampton's worried look relaxed, and he grinned with +enjoyment. + +"It's all right, now," he said contentedly. "They'll take their +disappointment out in a grand wrestling jamboree. Well, let's pack up a +little grub and get ready to go." + + + + +CHAPTER XI.--BOB FALLS ASLEEP. + + +In no time at all, Mr. Hampton and his party were ready to set out. Of +one thing they were reminded by Jack, the individual radio sets +constructed along his own lines, the instrument of which was so small +and compact it was contained in the panel of a ring. + +"Only trouble with these," Jack said, "is that you can receive but can't +transmit. However--" + +"However," his father interrupted, "that is all that will be necessary." + +"Why?" asked Farnum. + +"It is hardly likely that the five of us will get into such a +predicament that we shall fail to return," explained Mr. Hampton. "But +the boys may be attacked when we are gone, and may be placed in a bad +position. Then they can call for us." + +"At least we could send out a hurry up call over those sets," said Jack. +"As for your calling us, well, that will be a little more complicated, +Dad, but it can be done, if necessary. I insist on your taking that army +field set. It came in mighty handy in South America. It is no great job +to set it up. And it weighs little. You are taking no other equipment, +and you can afford to take it along. It won't be in your way. Here it +is, you see, all boxed up complete, handle on the box and everything." + +"Right, Jack," said his father. "Now we can communicate with each other +easily enough. Well"--looking about him--"are we ready?" + +The others nodded. + +"Then," Mr. Hampton said, "I propose that we bring our canoes back +through the trees, cross the island and make for the mainland on the +other side." + +Farnum and MacDonald nodded agreement. + +"This island is pretty long," said MacDonald, "and it will screen our +departure on the other side, in all likelihood. It is hardly likely, as +a matter of fact, that we will be seen, for Lupo's party has not shown +itself since we beat off that canoe, and probably is somewhere back up +that stream out of which your party came." + +"You think they cannot see the mainland on the other side of this island +from there, Dad?" + +"I don't believe so," said Mr. Hampton. + +"Even if they do catch a glimpse of us," suggested Farnum, "isn't it +probable they'll believe we are pushing on? As a matter of fact, +however, we'll land on the mainland, and carry our canoes inland and +then up along the lake till we are out of sight, when we can cross +again, I suppose that's your idea, Mr. Hampton?" + +"My idea exactly," answered the other. "Well, let's get the canoe and +MacDonald's kayak. They have been pulled well up into the bushes, and we +can bring them across the island without detection easily enough." + +"Wait a minute, Dad," said Jack, laying a detaining hand on his arm. "If +they do see you crossing the channel to the mainland, on the other side +of the island, they'll know the whole party isn't along, and will +realize you aren't leaving, but merely carrying out some maneuver." + +"Maybe, that's what they will think, Jack. On the other hand, they might +figure some of the canoes got across beforehand. Anyway, leaving by the +back door, so to speak, is our wisest plan, I am sure. The channel to +the mainland on the other side is only a narrow one, and the +probabilities of our escaping detection are all in our favor." + +The largest of the canoes, together with MacDonald's kayak were dragged +back through the underbrush and carried across the island to be launched +on the other side. Nor did Jack neglect to load the compact field +transmitting set in the canoe, as the party pushed off. Then, amid +farewells from both sides, Mr. Hampton and his party set out for the +mainland. + +Jack watched the canoe and the kayak depart, with something of a sinking +of the heart. The same feeling, he suspected, possessed his father. +Neither, however, presented other than a brave and cheerful front. As +for Bob and Frank, they had gotten over their disappointment at not +being permitted to accompany the expedition, to a certain extent, and, +cast for the first time since the start of the trip, on their own +resources were beginning to enjoy the situation. + +"First thing, fellows," said Frank, as the party reached the mainland, +hauled up canoe and kayak and struck into the trees, "first thing is to +go to this knoll about which MacDonald spoke, and take a view of the +field." + +"Yes," said big Bob, "then let's divide up into watches, so that the +pair of us not drawn for the first watch can get some rest." + +"You certainly were born in the Land o' Nod, Bob," scoffed Frank. + +"Yes," said Jack, grinning, "if you're as sleepy as all that, we'll +count you out right away. Frank and I will draw for the first watch, and +you can hit the hay." + +"Not so fast," said Bob. "I'll take my chance with the rest of you." + +Meantime, they had been mounting the tree-covered hill to which +MacDonald had referred and now, reaching the top, found that, despite +its low elevation, it was still so much higher than the rest of the +island and than the shores of the lake as well, that they commanded a +sweeping view not only of the nearer shore to which Mr. Hampton had gone +but also of the farther one whence they had come. + +Not a sign of human occupation, however, was anywhere apparent. +Eastward, although they knew Mr. Hampton and his companions could not +have progressed far, yet the trees rimming the lake shore were +sufficiently dense to hide any sign of movement. Westward, toward the +farther shore, was a thick belt of trees about the mouth of the stream, +thinning out farther along the shore in both directions. Neither among +the trees nor on the glades, could they discern anybody although Jack, +who had been thoughtful enough to bring along their field glasses, +scanned the prospect through them a long time before passing them on to +the others, who did likewise. + +"Well, so far so good," said Jack, with a sigh of relief. "Evidently, or +so far as we can see, anyway, Dad and the rest got across undiscovered +and now stand a fair chance of crossing the lake farther up undetected." + +"Maybe so," said Frank. "Maybe, too, Lupo got discouraged and quit." + +"Retreated you mean?" asked Jack. + +Frank nodded. + +"Oh, you fellows are full of prunes," said Bob. "Why should he quit now, +just because we have added one more man to our forces? He's hung to our +trail a long time. That means he's not going to quit in a hurry. No, +we've got to keep our eyes open." + +"That's right," said Jack, thoughtfully, "It won't do to get +overconfident and relax our guard." + +"Just the same there's no sign of trouble now," said Frank. "And I've +got a suggestion." + +"Don't lose the idea," said Bob, anxiously. "Hold on to it. Ideas are +rare." + +"With some people yes," said Frank, grinning. "Not with me." + +"Huh." + +Bob clutched at Frank, but the other wriggled out of his grasp. + +"My idea," he said, "is to take a plunge in the channel your father +crossed, Jack. I'm hot and sticky and tired, and a swim would go fine +just before I turn in and leave Bob on watch. What do you say?" + +"So I'm to have the first watch, hey?" said Bob. "It's been all decided, +has it? Well, well. All right, run along, Frankie, me lad. I'm not so +anxious for a swim. I'll just start my watch here and now." + +"Bob, you're a good sport," said Frank, throwing an arm over the +shoulders of his big chum, between whom and himself was a depth of +feeling which seldom was expressed in words. + +"Oh, run along and take your swim." + +Bob playfully shoved the pair of them down the hill. Laughing, they +obeyed. As they disappeared among the trees, Bob selected a spot at the +base of a spruce on the top of the knoll, sat down with the glasses in +his lap and his eyes on the westward shore of the lake, where Lupo's +half-breeds had last been seen, and prepared to keep watch. His back was +against the trunk of the tree, and he made himself as comfortable as +possible. + +It was a really comfortable position and, when one is tired and sitting +idle, a comfortable position is conducive to drowsiness. It was so with +Bob. He had had but little sleep in the last two days. He had worked +hard. The air was warm and drowsy, as only the air of the short hot +Summer of the north country, when the sun never sets, can be. Presently +his head began to nod, and there was a buzzing in his ears as of the +drowsy hum of bees. He caught himself, and sat bolt upright, rubbing his +eyes vigorously with his fists. Then he leaned back against the tree +trunk again, and again began to nod. This time, the jerk with which he +awakened was longer in coming. + +Bob got up and stretched. + +"Mustn't go to sleep," he reflected. "Nothing in sight, though. Not much +use to worry. Ho, hum." + +He resumed his seat. Imperceptibly, his eyes drifted shut. He sat +through the transition period between sleeping and waking, unaware that +he was yielding to slumber, merely pleasantly conscious of relaxed limbs +and thoughts. Before he was aware his head nodded, his eyes closed, his +chin touched his chest, and he slept. + +Meanwhile Jack and Frank were thoroughly enjoying their plunge. The +water was warm, there was no wind, and they swam, dived, floated to +their heart's content. Neither realized the passage of time until Frank, +suddenly filled with compunction at their long absence, while Bob kept +watch, scrambled ashore and looked at his watch, laid out on top of his +clothes. + +"Great guns, Jack," he announced, "we've been gone an hour. Good old +Bob. He was mighty nice about sending us off to swim while he kept +watch, but you know he likes to swim, too. He'll be thinking it's a low +trick on our part to stay so long. Maybe he'll want to come and take a +plunge himself, when one of us gets back to relieve him." + +Jack also had a guilty feeling and, as is the way with most of us, +attempted to make excuses. + +"He might just as well have come along," he said. "Nothing's going to +happen." + +They were pulling on their clothes. + +Suddenly they heard Bob's voice raised in a distant shout, calling their +names. Then followed a brisk outbreak of rifle shots. + + + + +CHAPTER XII.--THE SURPRISE ATTACK. + + +"An attack," gasped Jack. + +"And we're not there to help old Bob," cried Frank, in an agony of +apprehension. "Come on. Don't stop to finish dressing." + +Shirt flapping out over his trousers, shoes unlaced, Frank frantically +buckled on his revolver and cartridge belt, seized his rifle and started +on a dead run through the trees. Jack did likewise. As they ran, they +heard the shots continuing intermittently, and then once more--clearer +and closer at hand, as they neared the knoll--came Bob's voice: + +"Frank, Jack, they're rushing me. Look out for yourselves." + +There was a crashing in the brush ahead. + +"Down, Jack, some of them coming." + +The two flung themselves prone behind a spruce whose low branches swept +the ground. The sounds were off to their left. A moment later the forms +of four men, hurrying towards the channel whence they had just come, +could be seen eight or ten yards away. + +Jack's face was pale, his lips set. Frank was trembling with excitement +and fear--not for himself, if the truth must be told, for the plucky lad +was not thinking of himself, but for his chum, who was holding off the +main attack alone. + +"Steady, Frank," whispered Jack. "Bob's life depends on us. This is no +time for false compunctions. You'll have to shoot to kill." + +"All right, Jack." + +Then the two rifles spoke as one, and two of the runners stumbled, flung +out their arms to save themselves, and pitched forward. The others spun +about towards the direction whence the boys had fired, but a second time +Frank and Jack fired, and they, too, fell. + +"No time to see how badly they were hit," said Jack. "Come on. Old Bob's +still alive and shooting." + +Forward they dashed once more, not neglecting, however, to keep wary +watch as they ran. No more of the enemy were seen, however. There was a +sudden uproar ahead, the shots ceased. Cries of astonishment, +stupefaction, even a note of fear, went up from several throats. Above +all was a bull-like roar that they readily identified as coming from +Bob's throat. + +Frank's heart gave an exultant leap. He knew that yell. It came only +when Bob went berserk, and fought with his hands. He had heard it when +they fought Mexican bandits, Chinese smugglers, rum runners on Long +Island and Incas in the Andes. He knew well what it meant. + +Almost at the same moment, they burst into the glade at the base of the +knoll, and came to a dead halt, eyes popping, standing as if rooted to +the spot. + +But only for a moment. Then they started tearing up the hillside, among +the scattered trees. For at the top was a whirling heap of figures, as +if caught up in a cyclone, and well they knew what it portended. +Somewhere in the center of the group was big Bob, at close grips with +the enemy, and not caring how many they numbered. + +Would they be in time? Could they help Bob before some half-breed +succeeded in sticking a knife into him? + +But Bob proved that he could handle his own affairs, for while they were +still several yards away, first one and then another half-breed was +spewed from the miniature whirlwind, and then Bob could be seen with +several men clinging to his legs and another on his back, attempting +apparently to throttle him. The big fellow's hands went up and back. +They settled under the other's armpits. There was a sudden mighty heave +and wrench, and then the man on Bob's back came flying through the air, +straight for Bob's two comrades. He had been tossed from Bob's +shoulders, as a strong man would toss a sack of meal. Frank and Jack +leaped aside, and the man struck the ground, rolled over and over and +then lay still, crumpled up against the trunk of a spruce. + +Recovering from their surprise, Jack and Frank leaped forward. But their +intervention was unnecessary. Standing like a young Colossus, legs +apart, with a man wreathed about each, Bob bent down. One big hand +seized each by the neck. Then the two heads were bumped together once, +twice. The half-breeds collapsed. Their grip on Bob's legs relaxed, and +he tossed them aside, and they, too, lay still. He had knocked them out. + +Then Bob did a surprising thing. He leaped with a murderous look for the +two boys. + +"More of you, hey?" + +They sprang aside nimbly, eluding his grasp. + +"Bob, Bob, it's us." + +"What? What? Oh, you--" + +Bob looked at them, the battle lust dying in his eyes, and recognition +dawning. It was followed by a wide grin. + +"Oh, it's you." + +"Bob, old thing, that was the greatest fight in history," cried Frank, +hysterically, clapping his chum on the back. + +"Never saw the like," said Jack, doing likewise. "Thank God, Bob, you're +alive." + +"Never was more alive in my life," said Bob. "Hey, they're running +away." + +He darted away from his chums and sprang downhill. True enough. The two +whom he had disposed of first, who had dropped out of the fight, had +gained their feet and were running madly through the trees. + +Jack ran after Bob and restrained him. + +"Let them go, Bob. They are alone. There are three others here we must +tie up before they come to." + +Bob followed him back to where Frank was bending over the man whom the +big fellow had tossed over his head. The half-breed was recovering +consciousness, and beginning to moan. + +"Broken arm, I think," said Frank. "He'll not bother us. How about the +two whose heads you bumped together?" + +"They're recovering consciousness, too," said Jack. "Nothing much the +matter with them. We had better tie them up, so they can't cause us any +trouble." + +"Here, take the other fellow's belt and tie his hands behind his back +with it," said Bob. At the same time, he suited action to word in the +case of the nearer of the two, whipped off the fellow's belt and tied +him with it. + +"Won't they try to run away, Bob? Ought we to tie their legs, too?" + +"No, we'll just keep an eye on them. Let's take a look at the other. If +his arm is broken we'll have to set it somehow, I guess. Rather pitch +him in the lake, though. He's a villainous looking rascal. Tried to +choke me, too, and darn near succeeded." + +While Frank kept an eye on the two other prisoners, who had now +recovered consciousness and were beginning to realize their situation +but lay still under the threat of Frank's rifle, Bob and Jack examined +the third man. + +His senses were returning, and he moaned a good deal. Examinations +revealed, however, that his arm had not been broken, merely badly +wrenched. + +"I'm mighty glad of that," said Jack. "We'd have been up against it to +set a broken arm." + +"Oh, we could do it, all right, if necessary," said Bob. "But I'm glad, +too, that it isn't necessary. But, say, Jack"--with sudden recollection, +and an air of anxiety--"there were four more of these scoundrels. We'll +have to look out for them." + +Jack's voice shook a little as he replied. + +"I think not, Bob," he said. "Frank and I saw them first. We ambushed +them, practically. They didn't have a chance." + +"You don't mean--" + +Jack's gaze was steady but troubled. + +"We had to do it, old man," he said. "It was our life or theirs. And +yours, especially. When we heard your shout, and those first shots, +Frank went wild with fear that you had been trapped while we were away +enjoying ourselves. And I guess I felt as bad as he did." + +"Hey, fellows," interrupted Frank, hailing them, "the two that got away +must have been all that were left. They've jumped in a canoe and are +paddling like mad for the mainland." + +"Can you see them?" called Jack, starting to the top of the knoll to +join his chum. + +"How would I know what they were doing if I couldn't?" rejoined Frank. +"Yes, I can see them. Look there." + +He pointed. + +"Tie up that other fellow, Bob, and make him walk up here to join his +little playmates," Jack called back. + +Bob complied. The man groaned, but by now he had fully recovered his +senses, and he obeyed Bob's order to move with an alacrity that showed +he stood in abject fear of the husky young American. + +Frank pointed out the fleeing men, who were nearing the mainland, and +paddling with superhuman energy, as if fleeing from the Old Nick, no +less. + +"That accounts for all of them, I guess," he said. "So we can sit down +now, Bob, while you tell us how it happened." + +"Not much to tell," said Bob, sinking to a seated position against the +tree trunk. "Except I went to sleep and was almost surprised, but not +quite. My first intimation that the enemy was near was when I heard +somebody talking in the trees at the foot of this knoll. Or, did I hear +anybody? Was it just the old sixth sense giving warning of danger? I +don't rightly know. At any rate, I woke with a start and looking down +through the trees saw a bunch of half-breeds making their way towards +the other side of the island. + +"I tell you I was scared. I felt guilty as sin. Here I had promised to +keep watch, and, instead, had fallen asleep. As a result, the +half-breeds had landed on the island, and were heading for where you +fellows were swimming. I had endangered your lives. What should I do? +That was the question. + +"But I didn't waste must time, puzzling over it. I knew I had to give +you fellows warning or you would be taken by surprise. So I yelled to +you as loud as I could to look out. I guess they hadn't seen me up till +then. But when I yelled, they saw me quick enough, and several of them +opened fire, and----" + +"Wait a minute, Bob," Frank interrupted, his eyes shining. "They hadn't +seen you, and you could have let them pass without attracting their +attention, but you yelled, just to give us a chance for our white alley. +That's, that's--" + +"Oh, forget it," said Bob, uncomfortably. "You'd have done the same. +Anyway," he hurried on, "they split up into two groups, and one kept on +going, while the other rushed me before I could do much shooting, +and--well, I guess you know the rest," he concluded, lamely. + +"I'll say we do," said Frank, gripping his big comrade's shoulder. "Boy, +I'll never see the like of that fight again." + +"But, Bob, I wonder why they rushed you instead of trying to shoot you +down," said Jack. + +"Search me," said Bob. + +"I'll bet I know," said Frank. + +"What?" asked both. + +"They wanted to take you alive, Bob, for some reason of their own. +Probably, would have tried to take us alive, too, if they'd gotten the +chance." + +"Well, maybe so," said Bob. "Anyhow, that's that. Now what shall we do?" + + + + +CHAPTER XIII.--MR. HAMPTON RECALLED. + + +Jack and Frank regarded each other with distaste and even horror in +their eyes. + +"Has to be done, though," said Jack, as if in answer to a remark of +Frank's. + +Frank nodded. + +"I know." + +"What are you two chumps talking about?" asked Bob. + +"Those four men we shot down, you know," Frank explained. + +"Think you--" + +Bob's question went uncompleted. + +"I don't know," Frank replied. "We shot straight. It was your life and +ours against theirs." + +"Well, come on. I know how you feel, but I expect that's the first thing +to be attended to. If any of them is no more than wounded, it will be up +to us to do what we can for him." + +"Right, Bob," said Jack. + +"Come on," Frank said shortly, starting down the hillside, in the +direction of their successful, though impromptu, ambuscade. + +"Go easy," warned Bob. "If they're able to shoot, they'll take a crack +at us." + +Bob's advice was followed, and the trio approached the spot warily. But +precaution was needless, or, while still some distance away, they could +see the four bodies outstretched motionless where they had fallen. +Frank's face went white, and he shuddered. Jack was pale. Big Bob, +although he had had no hand in the affray, had to take a grip on +himself, in order to force his laggard steps to continue. Though many +were the affairs of danger in which they had been, the boys had never +before shot to kill nor had death been brought so close to them. + +Frank stopped. He was trembling violently. + +"I--I can't look at them," he gasped. + +Bob threw an arm over his shoulders. + +"You and Jack stay here," he ordered, gruffly. "I had no hand in this. +I'm the fellow to attend to it. Wait for me." + +At that Frank protested, and started to proceed. But Bob shoved him +back, kindly but firmly. + +"The pair of you have been through enough," he said. "Do as I say. Wait +here." + +And with quick, firm step, keeping himself to the task, he plunged on +through the trees. For a moment or two both Frank and Jack watched him +fascinatedly, then Frank sank down to a sitting position, elbows propped +on his knees, his face in his hands. Jack faced about, and stared +unseeing through the trees. + +Presently, Bob's solid, crunching footsteps could be heard approaching, +and they looked up. His face was grave, but unflinching. + +"Look here, fellows," he said, firmly, "may as well face the facts. All +four were killed instantly. Drilled through the---- But why discuss it? +The fact is, they're dead. They were rascals of the first water, and, as +you say, it was their lives or ours. Self-preservation is the first law +of Nature. Now, what are we going to do about it? We haven't any tools +to dig with." + +Frank shook himself into alertness. + +"Let's get the axes--our outfit has some--and cut off some spruce boughs +and cover them over. Then we can roll some stones on top." + +As quickly as possible, without speaking during the task, and working +feverishly, the three carried out Frank's idea. Then, back at camp, they +sat down and brewed a pot of coffee. The hot, scalding liquid steadied +their shaken nerves. + +"Guess we better try to get in touch with your father, Jack," suggested +Bob, at length. + +"How long have they been gone?" + +Bob looked at his watch. + +"Three hours. Seems like a lifetime." + +"Things have certainly happened fast," said Frank. "Thank goodness, that +party missed our radio. If they had destroyed it, we would have been out +of luck." + +"More luck than I deserve," said Bob, savagely. "Think of going to sleep +on the job. If I had been awake, they never would have been able to +land." + +"Forget it, Bob. You certainly have nothing to reproach yourself with." + +"Oh, that's nonsense," said the big fellow. "I'm always getting you into +trouble." + +Frank smiled. + +"Yes, and then getting us out again," he said. + +"Well, let's try the radio, anyway," suggested Jack. "They've been gone +three hours. With the best of luck they can't have made more than eight +or ten miles, considering the detour they planned to take, and +everything." + +"Couldn't have gotten that far away in a straight line," said Frank. + +"No, I guess not. But what if they aren't prepared for a call from us?" + +"Oh, with that improved ring set of yours, your father will be +proceeding fully equipped to hear from you," said Frank. "He need only +wear the headphone, and I seem to remember he said on leaving that he +would keep it on most of the time." + +Jack nodded. The improvement in the ring set, spoken of by Frank, had +done away with the necessity for the umbrella aerial. + +"All right," he said. "I'll call Dad on 200 meters. If he gets the +message we ought to hear from him shortly, for he'll at once unlimber +the field transmitting set and call us back." + +While Jack sent out a terse description of the fight and its outcome, +Frank and Bob decided to steady their nerves by fishing and went down to +the lakeside. They had reasonable success and had pulled out a number of +fish when Jack joined them. + +"Send out your message, Jack?" Frank inquired. + +"Yes, and heard from Father in reply, too." + +"What? Why, great guns, how long have we been here? Surely, you can't +have had time to hear from your father?" + +"But, I have," affirmed Jack. "You've been here more than an hour." + +Bob and Frank looked at each other. In all that time, neither had spoken +a word. They had just dozed over their lines, pulling in an occasional +fish. Frank laughed. + +"I guess we went to sleep with our eyes open," he confessed. "Well, what +did your father say?" + +"They made a long trek up the lake before crossing over, and are not +very far away--somewhere up in that direction--on the other shore, there," +said Jack, pointing. "Dad was worried as the deuce at my story, and +they're coming back." + +"Coming back? Why? It's all over now." + +"That's what I told him, Frank. But he's coming back, anyway. They're +going to get back to the lake, and come straight down to the island. +Ought to be here in a couple of hours or less." + +"May as well wait dinner for them, in that case," observed Bob. "Or what +meal is it? Breakfast, lunch, or dinner? I'm sure I don't know. This +perpetual sunshine has me all turned around. I don't know whether it's +day or night." + +"Same here," confessed Frank. "I do know, though, that I'm beginning to +get up an appetite." Then a thought, a thought which his somnolent +daydreaming over the fishing lines had driven away for the time, crossed +his mind, and he paled. "I don't know though"--catching his +breath--"whether I'll ever want to eat again." + +Jack looked at him sharply. So did Bob. The big fellows noted with +apprehension the twisted, stricken look on their slighter chum's face, +and the haunted appearance of his eyes. To Bob's keen eyes, moreover, +two hectic spots glowing brightly in the dark tan of Frank's cheeks were +apparent. + +"Look here, old man," said Bob, anxiously, "you want to quit thinking +about that or you'll be sick." + +"Sick?" Frank tried to force a laugh. "I'm the healthiest invalid ever +you saw." + +"No, Frank, I mean it. Put that thought out of your mind, or you will be +sick. Why--"laying a hand on his brow--"you've got a fever right now." + +Jack was worried, too. + +"Great guns, Frank, you must take Bob's advice. What if you came down +sick? We'd be in a pretty fix." + +"Oh, you fellows make me tired," said Frank, irritatedly. "I'm all +right." + +But Bob's worry was not routed. He took his chum by an arm and started +marching him toward camp. + +"I'm going to give you a dose of calomel and make you lie down," he +said. "Come on." + +"Calomel? Have a heart." + +"Yes, calomel," said Bob, firmly. "That's what you need, that and a +nap." + +Picking up the fish, Jack followed. And at the camp, despite Frank's +vehement protests, he was made to swallow a liberal dose of calomel, and +then to lie down on a couch of spruce boughs, over him the little tent +belonging to Mr. Hampton to provide shade from the northern sun. Jack +and Bob sat down, some distance away, and started cleaning the fish. +They talked together in low tones. Presently, after several glances +toward the motionless figure, Bob arose and tiptoed close to it. On his +return, he nodded, smiling slightly, at Jack. + +"Asleep," he said. "Didn't want to do it, but overworked Nature was too +much for him. I'm a little bit worried. His nerves got a severe shock. +But I guess he'll be all right when he wakes up." + +Then he glanced more keenly at Jack. + +"Look here, you've been through the same experience. I had a nap. Now +you're going to take one. Sleep will be good medicine for you, too. We +don't want two sick ones on our hands." + +Jack didn't protest, but also turned in beside Frank, and in a few +minutes was sound asleep. As Bob had said, overworked Nature claimed her +dues. + + + + +CHAPTER XIV.--A REVELATION. + + +This time Bob did not go to sleep on the job, but at the first faint +indication that somnolence was stealing upon him, arose and stamped +about vigorously. Once, prompted by a humane inclination, he paused by +the three prisoners who lay in the shade, hands and feet tied, and +proffered them a drink of water. The courtesy and thoughtfulness was +totally unexpected, as Bob could see by the surprise in their eyes, +although no words were exchanged, and they drank eagerly in great gulps. +The half-breed whom Bob had pitched over his head was in considerable +pain because of his wrenched arm, as Bob could see from his occasional +writhings, and Bob decided to chance trouble by loosening his bonds. In +addition, he rummaged their stores and brought out a bottle of liniment +for sprains and bruises, with which he bathed the twisted member. + +"You good man," whispered the other, gazing at him, as Bob bent to the +task, and speaking in a voice barely audible to Bob's ears, and +certainly not to the other two men a short distance away. "I tell you +something--not now--bimeby--when they not know." + +Bob thought quickly. + +"All right," he responded, in the same low tone. "I'll fix it." + +"Yes." The other nodded. "You fix it." + +"Now what in the world has he got to tell me?" Bob asked himself, as he +moved away. "Probably, something about Lupo the Wolf. At any rate, I +can't see what else it can be. Was grateful because I gentled him a +little--after first maltreating him." He smiled at the irony of this +thought. "Well, Mr. Hampton will soon be here, no doubt. Then there will +be a chance to question him apart from his fellows." + +And with that, he dismissed the matter from his mind. Jack now rolled +over, sat up and came out from under the tent, yawning. Frank continued +sunk in heavy slumber. + +"By George," said Bob, looking at his watch, "two hours since you +started to take your nap. Run down to the shore, will you, and take a +look to see if there is any sign of your father. We left these fellows +alone once"--nodding to their prisoners--"but I felt it wasn't wise to try +it too often. Something might happen. So I've been sticking close to +camp." + +Jack nodded. + +"Yes, that time you were fishing. It was foolish for me to run down +after you, but I just had to tell you about hearing from Father." + +He set out for the shore. + +A few minutes later, Bob heard his comrade give a joyful shout. It was +answered by a fainter hail from the water. Faint though it was, however, +it was unmistakable. Mr. Hampton was approaching. + +Presently there was a babble of voices approaching, and the returning +party came into view, Jack in the lead flanked by his father and Farnum, +with MacDonald, Dick and Art bringing up the rear. Jack was eagerly +explaining what had occurred at camp since his father's departure. + +"Hello, Bob," said Mr. Hampton, coming up, and gripping the big fellow's +hand hard. "Had some excitement while we were gone?" + +"Yes, we did, Mr. Hampton. Thought this was going to be a loafing +assignment you left us on--nothing to do but hang around camp and swim +and fish--and the minute you turn your backs something happens." + +"How's Frank?" + +"Jack told you, did he?" + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +"He's still asleep," said Bob. "The necessity of shooting to kill was a +shock to his nerves. Nature took him in hand. See." He indicated where +Frank lay as in a stupor in the tent, unmoved by the arrival of the +returning party. + +"He'll sleep for hours yet," said Mr. Hampton, "if we don't make too +much noise. I'll caution the others. Best medicine in the world for him. +He'll be all right when he wakes, I expect." + +While Dick put on the fish, for all were hungry, Bob and Jack, in +lowered voices, told the others all that had occurred. Bob repeated his +condemnation of himself for having fallen asleep and permitted the enemy +to land unopposed, but Mr. Hampton rested a hand on his shoulder, and +told him not to be foolish. + +"In the first place," he said, "there seemed to be no reason why you +should keep strict watch. It hardly seemed likely these fellows would +boldly approach the island." + +"Expect they saw us set out, after all," suggested MacDonald, "and +figured the whole party hadn't gone, and that them left behind would be +on 'tother side of the island, so's they could land and surprise 'em." + +Nods of agreement followed this statement. It was, indeed, the most +likely explanation. Over the puzzle as to why Bob had not been slain by +those attacking him, but who, instead, had tried merely to make him +prisoner, nobody had any suggestion to offer other than that earlier +advanced by the boys themselves, that they enemy wished to take them +alive. + +"Reckon Lupo thought he'd get some information from you," said +MacDonald. + +"But he wasn't here," Bob protested. + +"No, but you can bet they were actin' on his orders." + +Bob bethought him of the prisoner, who had whispered that he had +something to tell him. He explained to the others. Mr. Hampton thought +for a moment. + +"I have it," he said. "Art, bring the others here and we'll question +them. At the same time, Bob, do you slip off and talk to your man. We'll +keep the pair occupied, so that they won't be able to see. Tell your man +that presently, then, we'll call him up to be questioned, too, and that +he's to pretend sullen obstinacy and refuse--in the presence of his +comrades--to answer any questions." + +Bob nodded and, as Art went for the pair, he slipped away in an opposite +direction. Executing a flank movement through the trees, he presently +arrived on the opposite side of the camp and got behind the tree, +against which the man with the wrenched shoulder was sitting. In a rapid +whisper he communicated Mr. Hampton's instructions to the other. The +fellow comprehended, and then in a low tone, scarcely audible to Bob, +who strained to hear, communicated surprising intelligence. + +Bob heard him out, then with a final word of caution, again slipped +away, once more skirted camp through the trees, and approached the group +from the waterside. The two other half-breeds were being grilled, but +without success. At Bob's approach, Mr. Hampton turned again to Art. + +"Bring that other fellow here," he commanded. "See if he knows any more +than these men." + +The man was brought into the council, but, acting on instructions, +maintained an obstinate silence. + +"Oh, take them away, and feed them," said Mr. Hampton finally, as if +despairing of obtaining any information. "We'll talk to them later, +after I've eaten. Dick's fish will get cold if we don't fall to, and I'm +too hungry to delay with these rascals." + +The men, whose ankle bonds had been removed, were returned to the other +side of the camp and, with their hands untied, were permitted to eat +under the watchful eyes of Dick and Art. Then once more they were tied +up. + +Meantime, Mr. Hampton turned eagerly to Bob, as soon as the trio of +prisoners was out of hearing. + +"Out with it, Bob," he said. "I can see you're dying to tell us. Must be +important." + +"It is," said Bob, emphatically. + +"What did he say?" + +"Mr. Hampton, you think we're alone in this wilderness except for Lupo's +gang?" + +"I don't know who else would be here. This is country that white men +never get into." + +"Well, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and three followers of their party of ten +are not more than two hundred miles away; perhaps less than that." + +"What! Say that again." + +Mr. Hampton was so excited he almost dropped his portion of fish into +the fire. + +"It's true," said Bob. "At least that's what this fellow, Long Tom, +declares. Long Tom--that's his name." + +"How does he know?" + +It was MacDonald who asked the question, and Bob turned to him. + +"That's what I asked him. He said Thorwaldsson had been attacked before +he reached the oil country, and Thorwaldsson, Farrell and four of his +men cut off from their camp. Those in the camp were killed, and +Thorwaldsson's supplies looted. He says a big band of Indians committed +the outrage." + +"At whose orders?" asked Mr. Hampton. + +"Merely operating on their own, says Long Tom. He was with them. They +wanted the loot. What they didn't understand, they destroyed." + +"That's why nothing has been heard of Thorwaldsson," said Mr. Hampton, +"for his radio equipment must have been among 'the things they didn't +understand.' Go on, Bob." + +"Long Tom thinks Thorwaldsson spent the Winter with the Eskimos up on +the rim of the Arctic Ocean." + +"Where has he been? What became of the Indians?" + +"They were a hunting party, as far as I could gather, who, after chasing +Thorwaldsson up to the Eskimos, left the country. But Long Tom wintered +with some Eskimos near Union Straits himself, and this Spring started +out. Then he fell in with Lupo, who he knew, and joined him." + +"And how does he know where Thorwaldsson is now? Why does he say +Thorwaldsson is so close?" + +"Says he ran across an Eskimo hunter on his way out, who told of +Thorwaldsson having wintered with his tribe, and learned Thorwaldsson +was on his way out down the Coppermine--or up it, whichever you choose to +call it. Though that was weeks ago, he believes Thorwaldsson would be +following watercourses that would put him about one hundred and fifty or +two hundred miles to the northeast of us." + +"Well, Bob, you certainly learned a lot," said Mr. Hampton. "Was that +everything? Or did Long Tom know or have anything to say about Lupo?" + +"He doesn't know why Lupo is after us, except that it has something to +do with Thorwaldsson. That's all I could get out of him. Pretty +indefinite, but it was the best I could do." + +"Indefinite! Nonsense, Bob. That is something to go on, indeed." + +"And to think that old Bob got it all just because he was kind to a +fellow with a sore arm and put some liniment on it," said Jack. + + + + +CHAPTER XV.--MACDONALD TURNS BACK. + + +Taking everything into consideration, Mr. Hampton decided that before +any further steps were taken, the wisest plan would be for all to get a +good rest. Frank still lay as if in a stupor; Jack looked and confessed +to being shaky; even Bob was tired from the strain of the terrific fight +through which he had gone, coming upon the top of many hours of +exhausting travel. As for the rest, they had done practically three +days' work with little or no rest in the short interval between. + +"Altogether," said Mr. Hampton, summing up, "we are in no fit condition +to set out in immediate pursuit of Lupo and the remainder of his men, +nor even to decide wisely as to what to do. It may be that the best plan +would be not to pursue Lupo but to set off at once to try and find +Thorwaldsson. I, for one, am too tired even to think straight. So I vote +that we make camp, set watches and turn in for a good rest. I believe I +could sleep the clock around." + +"If you think you can trust me with the first watch, Mr. Hampton," +muttered Bob, shamefacedly, "I'd like to have it. I'll promise you not +to go to sleep on the job again." + +Mr. Hampton slapped the big fellow on the back in kindly fashion, as Bob +leaned forward, seated on the ground beside him. + +"Forget it, Bob," he said. "You have nothing with which to reproach +yourself. Certainly you can have the first watch, if you want it. I +expect the rest of us will be only too glad of the opportunity to turn +in at once. As to there being any further danger, however, I very much +doubt it. You boys have given Lupo a terrible blow. With four men killed +and three prisoners, he must be short-handed. If he had only twelve or +fourteen, as we believe, his number now is less than ours. The +consequence is, that I cannot conceive of his attempting again to attack +us here on the island. However, a watch must be kept, so go to it." + +Everybody agreeing with this program, Bob took the first watch and the +rest scattered around the camp, under the spruces, and soon were +sleeping soundly. When the time to change watches came, with nothing +alarming having broken the calm, Bob waked MacDonald, and himself turned +in. After that, he did not have even a disturbing dream and was +disturbed by nothing until awakened by being shaken. He looked up and +found Frank bending above him, his face alight with merriment. + +"Hey, which of the Seven Sleepers are you?" demanded Frank. + +Bob ignored the query, his mind leaping at once to the picture of Frank +as he had last seen him. In his voice was a note of thankfulness at +finding Frank thus carefree, as he said: + +"How do you feel, old man?" + +"Never better," confessed Frank. "Sleep is certainly the right medicine, +isn't it?" + +"Don't I know it!" + +Bob yawned luxuriously, and rubbed his eyes. + +"Come on, Bob, let's take a plunge in the channel. Just got up myself. +It'll wake us up, make us feel good. Everybody's up now, and Dick fixing +to get breakfast. He and Art and MacDonald are fishing. Mr. Hampton and +Farnum are talking things over. And here comes Jack, just piled out of +the feathers, too. The three of us can have a fine swim." + +Bob was agreeable to this proposition, and they set out for the place +where Frank and Jack had gone in for a plunge before. Without referring +to the tragic little mound beneath which lay the bodies of the four +half-breeds shot down by Frank and Jack, the boys, as if by common +consent, lay their course through the trees so as to avoid passing near +it. + +The water, as Frank had predicted, was delightfully invigorating, and +refreshed and with the young blood tingling in their veins, after a long +sleep and a good swim, they returned to camp. They brought voracious +appetites with them, but fortunately the fishermen had pulled in a big +haul of beauties, and these, together with flapjacks made by that +skillful chef, Art, and washed down with coffee tasting like none ever +made in city restaurants, the whole having the tang of the outdoors and +woodland smoke for sauce, made a delectable repast. + +"Now," said Mr. Hampton, at its conclusion, "now for a discussion of +what's to be done." + +Thereupon he set forth the facts of the situation. Lupo with five or six +men at most was still at large. He might have turned back. He might be +in hiding nearby. He might have gone on ahead in search of Thorwaldsson. +In any case, Mr. Hampton declared, he felt it would be a waste of time +to search for him in view of the fact that they had learned Thorwaldsson +was somewhere to the north and east and their primary object was to join +forces with that explorer. He wanted to know what the others had to say. + +Farnum, who had been talking matters over with Mr. Hampton, sat silent, +nodding approval. The other was stating his own views. But MacDonald +voiced a protest. + +"From your point of view, sir," he said, "I reckon you're right. But am +I to let Lupo escape now that I come so close to gettin' him? And what +am I to do with three prisoners on my hands?" + +"I've been turning that phase of the situation over and over," said Mr. +Hampton. "I cannot see that we can afford to diverge in pursuit of Lupo, +now that we have pretty definite information through that fellow, Long +Tom, of Thorwaldsson's presence alive and with some of his men in this +wilderness. I know what a blow it will be to you to give up the chase, +but it can't be helped. You have three prisoners, and can't very well +watch them and pursue Lupo, too. They are criminals, and as a member of +the Mounted you must take them in. We can't leave you to handle them +alone, however, and----" + +He paused. + +"And what, sir," prompted MacDonald. + +"Well, the least we can do, MacDonald, is to leave one of our number +with you. That will enable you to keep guard against surprise, watch +over your prisoners, and wait for the arrival of aid from your Post. +We'll wireless your Captain Jameson full details of all that has +occurred, give him your position here, and then you can wait for +relief." + +MacDonald looked thoughtful. He was silent several minutes, while none +spoke, but all watched him expectantly. + +"If you won't help me try and round up Lupo, you won't, and that's all +there is to it," he said, finally. "Not as I blame you, neither. You got +your job, to git hold of Thorwaldsson and help him. With only a handful +o' men he may be in trouble, too. Seems natural-like, if whoever is agin +you fellows sent this cutthroat Lupo to cut you off, he'd likely be +after Thorwaldsson, too." + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +"That's what I'm afraid of," he said, "that Thorwaldsson may need our +aid." + +"Just so," continued MacDonald. "Such bein' the case, your best plan is +to try and find him soon as you can." + +"Then you agree to my plan?" + +"Not so fast," said MacDonald. "You'll give me a man, hey?" + +"Yes." + +"Who?" + +"Why--I----" + +"Give me this feller," said MacDonald, laying a hand on Bob who sat +beside him. "He's a fighter." + +"I couldn't do that, MacDonald. The boys must come with me." + +"All right. Only that fight he put up--that was a good one. Kind o' +wished I could have him by me. Well, then, let me have this feller. Kin +see he's used to big woods and river country. He'd make a good Mounty." + +This time MacDonald pointed the stem of his pipe at Dick. + +"What do you say, Dick?" asked Mr. Hampton. "It's up to you?" + +"I'd have to go out with the Mounties to their Post, wouldn't I? +Probably have to winter there." + +MacDonald nodded. + +"Get you a job on the Force," he said. + +Dick's eyes shone. Middle-aged though he was, he was alone in life, +loved the wilderness, and still thrilled to adventure. + +"That so?" he asked. "Need men?" + +"Always room for a good one." + +"All right. It's a go," said Dick. + +MacDonald nodded approval, spat in the fire, then turned again to Mr. +Hampton. + +"Such being the case," he said, "when you talk to Captain Jameson over +that there contraption, just tell him I'm on my way in." + +"What?" + +"Sure. Think Dick and me would sit here with three no-account breeds on +our hands and wait for help from four hundred miles away to arrive? No. +We'll take 'em in." + +"But two of you, alone, and with three prisoners on your hands!" + +"Nothing to that. Once I brought in four single-handed. Never thought of +calling for help except I had luck enough to capture Lupo and more of +his gang." + +Mr. Hampton looked astounded. He turned to Dick. + +"But how about you, Dick?" + +"If MacDonald says so, I'm game." + +"Knew you would be," said MacDonald. "That's settled. Now call Captain +Jameson, and let's get goin'. You want to be on your way, and we may as +well be on ours." + +"But, MacDonald," said Mr. Hampton, trying one last protest, "suppose +Lupo and the remainder of his gang see you start, and follow and attack +you. What then?" + +"Huh." MacDonald's eyes snapped. "Couldn't ask for no better luck. I'd +get a shot at him then." + +Farnum interrupted at this stage. + +"It's no use trying to stop him and Dick," he said. "I know Dick and I +know these men of the Mounted. They're holy terrors. And the pair of +them will get away with it, too." + +Mr. Hampton knew when he was beaten, and abandoned his protests. Captain +Jameson once more was called by wireless, and given a full account of +what had occurred. He approved MacDonald's scheme and promised there +would be a position on the Force for Dick when he arrived. + +"Well, Dick," said Mr. Hampton, after all arrangements were made for +departure, and he led him aside, "I've been pleased, indeed, with your +ready help and cheerfulness on the trip. I hate to part company with +you. Here is a check for the full sum I promised you for this Summer's +work. And here in addition is something to remember me by." + +Into Dick's unwilling hand he pressed a handsome gold watch which he +himself had worn for some years. + +"Oh, Mr. Hampton, this is too good for a rough fellow like me to carry," +protested Dick. + +"Now, now, nonsense," said Mr. Hampton. "Nothing is too good for you, +old man. I want you to keep that to remember me by." + +"I don't need the watch for that, sir," said Dick gruffly, sticking it +in his pocket nevertheless. + + + + +CHAPTER XVI.--REINDEER SIGHTED. + + +The big canoe which Dick and Art had captured from the Indians was +turned over to MacDonald. It was easily capable of transporting five--the +three prisoners, MacDonald and Dick. With the two latter in the bow and +stern respectively, and the prisoners unarmed between, there was little +danger so long as MacDonald and Dick maintained reasonable watchfulness. +Two of the half-breeds were cowed and broken in spirit, moreover, while +Long Tom was _hors de combat_ on account of the injury to his arm, and +would be for some time to come. MacDonald's skin kayak was to be towed +behind, containing his slender outfit, and one of the prisoners could +carry the whole business alone at portages. + +MacDonald had entered the lake by a considerable stream flowing into it +from the southwest, and not the stream down which the Hampton party had +come. He set out for this other stream before the others quit the +island, with the intention of retracing his steps into the wilderness in +large measure. This would facilitate his travel. Farther to the south, +he said, was a large river which could be reached by a ten-mile portage, +and down which they could travel for many miles. + +"If you ever want to join the Mounted," he said to Bob, to whom he had +taken a great fancy, "let me know. I'll fix it for you." + +Bob laughed, but he was young enough to be flattered by the sincere +compliment. + +"I may take you up on that some day," he said. "Who knows?" + +Then MacDonald stepped into the canoe, goodbyes were said, and the craft +shot away. + +"There go a couple of good men," commented Farnum, as under the powerful +strokes of the paddles the canoe drew swiftly down the lake. + +"One good man, anyhow," said Art, who overheard the observation. "Ol' +Dick an' me had a li'l talk. I'm going to join up with the Mounted, too, +when we git back. We been pals fifteen year." + +"Fifteen years," exclaimed Frank. "In the wilderness all that time?" + +Art nodded absently, his eyes on the retreating canoe. + +"Sure," said Art. "It's home to us. Ain't no wilderness. Cities is the +real wilderness. Dick an' me's been separated now and then, like now, +but we always come together agin. I expect when we git to be old men +like some prospectors I seen we'll be together all the time, fightin' +and jawin' each other, but ready to tear the heart out o' anybody that +jumps one of us." + +"It's a wonder Dick went off with MacDonald like he did, in that case," +said Jack. + +"Huh. Somebody had to go. He knew we'd meet agin." + +Art said no more, but turned away to busy himself with the outfit. + +Presently everything was in readiness for departure and then the two +remaining canoes, with the outfit distributed between them, the three +boys in one and the three men in the other, started up the lake in the +opposite direction from that taken by MacDonald and Dick. Previously, +when in pursuit of Lupo, Mr. Hampton had discovered the lake was of so +considerable extent that, despite their hours of travel up the side, +they had been unable to discern the farther end. In fact, the lake +broadened out considerably some distance beyond the island. It was his +intention, inasmuch as it followed the general northeastward direction +they would pursue, to stick to it as long as possible. He believed there +would be some stream at the farther end sufficiently large to float +their canoes. + +In this he was not mistaken, for after four hours of steady paddling, +they discerned the outlet of a stream of considerable width, quartered +across the lake and entered it. Almost immediately Jack called to his +father, in surprise: + +"Dad! Oh, Dad! This stream flows out of the lake; not into it. Do you +notice?" + +The leading canoe slowed up while the boys approached. + +"It certainly does, Jack," said his father. "What do you make of it, +Farnum?" + +The latter shook his head, puzzled. + +"I don't know," he said. "You must remember this is unexplored country. +We're liable to find anything here. But, maybe----" + +"What?" + +"I don't know. We're near the Coppermine, aren't we, Art?" + +"Figure we must be." + +"Maybe this stream flows into the Coppermine." + +"I'll bet that's it," Art approved. "The waters of that lake empty into +the Coppermine. Yes, sir; I'll bet that's what it is. Well, that makes +travel easy for awhile, anyhow." + +Two days of travel, unbroken by any but routine incidents such as the +occasional shooting of wild duck Or geese, brought the party at camping +time at the end of the second day to a pleasant, open, grassy prairie +between two low-wooded hills. Here it was decided to make camp. + +After the evening meal was over, and while Mr. Hampton, who was feeling +out of sorts, retired to his little tent to try and sleep without taking +part in the usual desultory conversation about the fire--which was kept +going for the companionship and cheer it imparted and not from any need +of warmth you may be sure--Jack arose and stretched. + +"My legs are stiff from that position in the canoe all day," he said. "I +want to stretch them a bit. Who'll come with me to the top of that +nearest hill? The sun is pretty low, but we ought to get a considerable +view." + +Bob and Frank both volunteered to accompany him. Farnum sat, smoking his +pipe and staring into the fire absently. He didn't care to go. But Art +arose and joined the party. It was not far to the top of the hill, +although a stiff climb through the trees and brush. The crest, however, +was bare of timber. + +Frank, who lighter than the others, was first to reach the top, stood +struck with amazement. He turned to beckon the others forward with one +hand, while laying the other over his mouth in a gesture enjoining +silence. + +"For the love o' Pete," whispered Art, eyes bulging, as he stood beside +Frank and peered down into the grassy vale beyond, half overgrown with +young willows. + +"Are they caribou?" asked Jack, low-voiced. "They don't look like the +caribou we've run across along the streams." + +"They ain't, neither," said Art. "They're reindeer." + +"Must be Santy Claus's," chuckled Bob. "Always did believe there was +something to that story about the old boy living up here near the North +Pole, even though people insisted on calling it a fairy tale. Now I +know." + +His joke was ignored, however, as Art continued: + +"Yes, sir, reindeer. Caribou are always brown. Some o' these are white, +some brown, and some spotted. Then they ain't the size o' caribou. +Besides, I know they're reindeer. I see 'em often enough in Alaska to +know." + +"Alaska? Do these reindeer come from there?" + +Art nodded. + +"Look at 'em. They're tame. Must'a winded us, but that don't scare 'em +none. They're used to humans. No more scared o' bein' hunted than cattle +are back in the States." + +"Tame?" queried Frank. "What do you mean?" + +"Why, the Eskimos in Alaska, not the wild one, of this Far North, but +the regular ones that come in touch with the white man, they keep herds +o' reindeer just like a farmer in the States keeps cows. Look at 'em. +Must be two-three hundred there right now. They're eight-ten hundred +miles from home, too. Must 'a wandered away. Bet you there's a desprit +Eskimo lookin' for 'em right now." + +Jack looked thoughtful. + +"What a shame for a man to lose a big herd like that," he said. + +"Yes, sir," affirmed Art emphatically. "Must be six-seven thousand +dollars worth o' tame reindeer there. Pretty tough." + +"We can't do anything about it, though," said Bob. + +"Seems a pity-like we can't ride herd on 'em till some Eskimo shows up +to claim 'em," said Art. "But it can't be done. Yore father, Jack, is +all for pushin' on fast as we kin." + +After some further discussion, the party retraced its steps, with Art +explaining to the boys the big difference existing between the +semi-civilized Eskimos of Alaska and the little that was known of the +wild Eskimos of the Arctic. + +"Folks think Alaska's right up next to the North Pole," he said. +"Leastways folks in the States do. People comin' to Nome from the States +every so often give me that knowledge. But they're shore mistaken. +Alaska's great country that'll be settled up some day. Shore, we got +hard Winters. But boys, in the Summer, with the sun a-shinin' all the +time, everything grows just three times as fast as in the States. My Pap +was a farmer back in York State, an' I was raised on a farm. We had hard +scratchin' an' our Winters was long an' hard, too. An' we didn't have +Summers like in Alaska to make up for 'em. I'll bet if my Pap were +livin' today an' farmin' in Alaska he'd find life a lot easier than what +we had it on the old farm." + +"But why don't more people live in Alaska, then?" asked Frank. + +"Oh, I don't know. Hard to get to, for one thing. Ain't developed up +with railroads, neither. Some day, though, you'll see 'em forced to come +here, the way they're a-crowdin' up down in the States. Why, we got only +60,000 people in all Alaska, yet she's quarter as big as the States an' +could darn near feed the whole push herself, if she was put to it and +farmed right." + +"Art, why don't you go to farming? I'd think that would be the thing for +you to do." + +"Mebbe I will some day," said Art. "But I'm an old batch. Got no wife, +an' kind o' like to feel free to knock around instead o' bein' tied to +one place." + +It was a feeling with which the boys could sympathize. They were young, +with life ahead of them, and they wanted to see the world. In fact they +had seen a good deal of it already, as those who have followed them +through their various adventures, know. Of this they spoke as they made +their way back to camp, where they discovered Farnum ready to turn in, +and merely awaiting their return before doing so. Since their first +encounter with Lupo, and their discovery that they were not alone in the +wilderness, a watch was always kept, and Farnum had combatted sleepiness +in order to keep guard until their return. + +"Art, you've got the first watch," he said, when they appeared. "The +rest of you better turn in, and not sit up talking. With luck we ought +to make the Coppermine tomorrow, I figure, and then we'll do some +traveling. We've got to hit a fast pace from now on, for already we are +having real twilight, and pretty soon we'll be having short nights while +the sun dips entirely below the horizon. That means the season is +growing short, and we have not got much time left before we'll have to +start for the outside." + +Jack and Bob heeded the injunction and followed Farnum's example +shortly, but Frank, who did not feel sleepy and, moreover, loved to +talk, sat up a considerable time gossiping with Art and telling him of +some of their previous adventures. + +Suddenly, as he talked along, low-voiced so as not disturb the nearby +sleepers, Frank noticed Art was not paying attention, and stopped. + +"Oh, well," he said, half petulantly, "if I'm boring you----" + +Art leaned close, and laid a hand on his arm. + +"Sorry, Frank," he said, in a whisper, "but I was a-listenin.' I got a +strange feelin' like as if somebody had his eyes on the back a' my head. +I wasn't payin' no attention to you but a-listenin' to see if I could +hear anything." + +He was so intense that he communicated some of his trepidation to Frank. +Instinctively, the latter reached for his rifle as Art half stood up to +peer at their twilit surroundings. They were camped in a tiny grove of a +half dozen spruces, like an islet in a midst of long, matted grass. + +As Art stood up, a single shot rang out, shattering the stillness. He +threw himself prone, dragging Frank down with him. Then a fusillade was +poured in on them, seemingly from all sides. + + + + +CHAPTER XVII.--SURPRISED. + + +"Watch my back, Frank. Keep low behind that nearest tree and let 'em +have it. They're in that long grass." + +As he spoke Art, worming his way rapidly forward to a position behind +the trunk of one of the spruces, began firing rapidly. + +Frank, in the opposite direction, fired several shots into the long +grass. He had an uncanny feeling, for he could see no forms at which to +fire, and the preliminary volley poured into the camp was not repeated, +so he had no index as to the enemy positions. + +Jack, Bob and Farnum, rolled over, awakened by the shots, but Frank +called fiercely: "Keep down." + +Realizing something of the situation, the three grabbed their rifles, +laying by their sides, and, keeping down, prepared to fire as soon as +they could see something at which to aim. + +Mr. Hampton stirred in his tent a moment later. He had been sleeping +hard, and had not awakened instantly as had the others. Moreover, a dull +ache gripped his head, preventing him from thinking clearly and from +comprehending instantly what was occurring. He lay a moment, wondering +what had awakened him. All was still outside, for Frank and Art had +ceased firing to await some sign from the unseen enemy. Mr. Hampton +decided to peer out and investigate what had disturbed him. He crawled +from his dog tent and stood up. + +At his appearance, a ragged volley burst once more from the long grass +surrounding the tiny grove, for his figure stood forth clearly and made +an excellent target. Spinning about, Mr. Hampton fell heavily to the +ground. + +A wild yell of triumph went up at this indication that the leader had +been hit. Jack leaped up regardless of consequences and ran to his +father, dragging him into the tent, while bullets whipped around him. +Bob ran to his assistance. To the hidden enemy it must have seemed as if +their opponents were demoralized. At any rate, they grew more +courageous, and started a rush. + +From three sides, it came, the figures of the oncoming men only +partially seen as they crouched low and darted through the grass. But +the long stems waving above them marked their paths, and there were +three still on watch who would have to be dealt with. + +Frank, Art and Farnum marked where the waving grass indicated the enemy. +Each guarded a side of the little grove. On the fourth side lay the +stream. + +"Wait'll they're close, fellows, then give it to 'em," cautioned Farnum. +"Ready. Let's go." + +The three repeating rifles spoke as one, and from the long grass came +howls and shrieks of pain and terror. What followed was brief but +lively. Each of the three pumped his rifle as fast as possible, and the +bullets poured into the grass almost as fast as if sprayed from the +throat of a machine gun. The return fire was heavy but high, whipping +through the branches of the spruce trees overhead. + +Reinforcements added to the strength of the defenders, for Bob darted +out of the tent, crouched over, and flung himself beside Frank, +beginning to shoot even as he talked. + +"Mr. Hampton escaped by a miracle," he said. "Bullet creased his head +and stunted him. He'll be all right." + +The rush was broken. Whoever was in the grass, feared to advance farther +in the face of that fire. The long grass ceased to wave, indicating the +attackers had come to a halt. But they did not retreat. The menace was +still there. + +"Anybody hit?" Farnum called out. + +"Not me," said Art. + +"Nor me," answered Frank. + +"Thank our lucky stars for that," answered Farnum. + +They all lay in a semi-circle, facing different directions, but close +enough to each other to make communication in ordinary tones possible. +Relieved to discover that all were untouched, despite the bullets that +had rained on the camp, Farnum next inquired anxiously after Mr. +Hampton, and Bob answered he had been only stunned. + +"I reckon these fellows are Lupo and his gang," Farnum remarked. "But he +must have had more men than we expected, or he wouldn't be attacking us +like this." + +"What'll we do?" growled Art. "Looks like they got us penned in." + +"Oh, but we stopped their rush," protested Frank. + +"Yes," said Art, "but they ain't beatin' it as I can see. An' when we +want to up an' leave camp, what's goin' to happen?" + +Frank was about to reply, when Bob who was beside him, pointed with his +rifle toward the gap between the two hills, from the top of one of which +they earlier had seen the reindeer herd in the next valley. + +"Look there, Frank," he exclaimed excitedly. "What do you make of that?" + +"Where? I don't----Oh, yes; now I see. Something moving." + +"Sure is something moving," Bob said. + +Already the short twilight was beginning to lighten, as the sun after +its dip to the edge of the northern horizon now swung higher. + +"Bob." + +"What?" + +"I believe that's the reindeer herd." + +"From that valley over the hill? The reindeer we saw when we were up +there on the hill top?" + +"Yes, sir." + +"But how in the world?" + +"Why, I noticed that the other valley swung around between those two +little hills. The reindeer are just grazing along, hunting new pasture. +And, say, Bob!" + +"Well, what now?" + +"I've got a bully idea." + +Abruptly, Frank wormed his way around to face Art on his right, who was +keeping watch against surprise on his side of the little clump of trees +sheltering them. + +"Art," said he, "look over there, between those two little hills. Are +those reindeer? The reindeer we saw from the hilltop?" + +"Reckon so," said Art, after a critical inspection. + +"Well, Art, can reindeer be stampeded? Like cattle, I mean." + +"Reckon so. Why?" + +"Well, I'm going to try it," Frank declared in a determined tone. Still +prone, he began to wriggle out of his clothes, and pulling up his legs, +to unlace his boots and kick them off. + +"Are you crazy, Frank?" Bob demanded, puzzled, while Art and Farnum took +their eyes from the coverts ahead to look at Frank in astonishment. + +"Crazy? No more than usual," Frank replied, as he completed disrobing, +and now lay naked under the spreading branches of the spruce. "But I'm +going to slip into the water and float down to that hill, then get in +behind the reindeer and stampede them. You see what'll happen then, +don't you?" + +Bob stared at his companion, wide-eyed. Dawning comprehension crept into +his eyes, and he began to smile. Then he chuckled. + +"You little hound," he said, employing a pet expression among the boys, +denoting admiration. + +"But, say, what's the idea?" demanded Art sharply, from his position +several yards away. + +Frank had started wriggling forward, and waited until he was close to +Art and Farnum before replying. Then he repeated his assertion that he +intended floating downstream until behind the slow-moving herd of +reindeer, when he would land and attempt to stampede them. + +"You see how it is," he said. "You yourselves admit that we're in a +tight place. Lupo's forces have cover in that long grass, and can wait +us out. Here among the trees there is no grass to hide us. The minute we +get up and start to move around, we expose ourselves. Therefore, the +best thing to do, is to drive them out of their cover, isn't it?" + +"Sure," said Art. "But how you going to do it with----" + +He was about to ask how Frank intended to drive their enemies from cover +by stampeding the reindeer, but Frank grinned at him, and he paused. +Dawning comprehension came into his eyes, too. + +"That's it," Frank said. "I see you get my idea." + +He turned his gaze toward Farnum, farthest from the center, but who had +overheard the conversation. + +"You see, Mr. Farnum," he said, "when the reindeer come dashing down, +Lupo's men will have to run for it to get out of the way. A stampeding +herd isn't anything to monkey with, I expect. Then you'll have your +chance. But the reindeer won't dash in among these few close-set trees, +so you'll be safe. No, sir; as I figure it, they'll just head right on +past here and try to get through the hills beyond." + +Farnum's glance approved. + +"A fine idea," he said, but then he added in a tone of doubt: "I don't +know as I ought to let you go, though. Mr. Hampton wouldn't like it, +maybe, putting yourself into danger like that." + +"Oh, nonsense," said Frank. "I can slip unseen into the water. And I can +swim like a seal. Ask Bob." + +And at once, to prevent any interruption of his plans, he resumed +worming his way to the bank of the river. + +The river ran at this point between six-foot banks, and the clump of +trees in which camp was situated stood so close to the water that the +roots of several projected through the soil of the land. Frank had +little difficulty in getting down to the water, and felt sure that he +accomplished the feat unseen by the enemy. He let himself into the +stream, which was of sufficient depth right up to the bank to enable him +to float downstream under the protection of the high bank, without the +necessity of wading out to get to deeper water. + +"For God's sake, be careful, boy," whispered Farnum, as Frank +disappeared. + +Frank was naked, and unarmed except for a long knife. He had not figured +out how he would set about stampeding the reindeer. He was leaving that +to chance. What concerned him now was to get to a position behind the +herd without discovery. He stuck close inshore, floating, his eyes +roving along the edge of the bluff above him for signs of the enemy. + +None was to be seen. After all, he thought, it was hardly likely that +any of the enemy lay in hiding here, as none of the shots fired at them +had come from so close to the river. On the contrary, the enemy lay +inland, showing they had come upon the camp from the landward side. +Becoming bolder, therefore, he turned over and struck out, swimming +strongly, the long knife in a sheath at his belt. He felt for it several +times, to reassure himself it was there and had not fallen out. + +Frank was a strong swimmer. Indeed, this was the one athletic sport at +which he excelled both Bob and Jack, although they, too, were excellent +swimmers. It did not take him long, therefore, aided by the current, to +come abreast of the trees clothing the first of the two hills between +which the reindeer had entered their valley. The hill sloped abruptly +down to the water, and Frank had marked from camp how trees clothed it +entirely, even dipping into the stream. When he had passed, as he +believed, beyond a point at which there was any possibility of his being +seen, he seized a branch of a willow tree and pulled himself ashore. +Then, after climbing a short distance up the hill, he began working his +way around it through the trees. Presently he was on the hillside facing +the valley where were his friends in the distant clump of trees, and the +enemy hidden in the long grass. The reindeer had not moved far. They +were only a short distance from him, and Frank hurried forward at the +best pace he could command. + + + + +CHAPTER XVIII.--THE STAMPEDE. + + +For the first time since starting on his wild project, a doubt as to its +success entered Frank's mind. But he put it resolutely aside as he sped +forward, crouching, sliding under the low branches, determined to make +the best speed possible. His companions were in a ticklish situation. He +wanted to do what he could to relieve them as soon as possible. As to +his own danger, he gave it not a thought. + +What worried Frank was the possibility that he would be unable to +stampede the reindeer herd. This was the thought which he put aside. But +it kept recurring. And when he had come into position behind the herd, +and saw them feeding quietly below him, not a stone's throw away, at the +foot of the hill, where the trees ended abruptly and the grassy plain +began, he was still without an idea as to what to do. + +Originally, he had thought that stoning the herd might set them into +motion and stampede them forward. But doubt as to the workability of +that method had seized him as he first climbed from the water and, from +among the trees, obtained his first view of the herd. The animals, +grazing quietly, were so well spread out that he feared stoning them +would not alarm them sufficiently to start a stampede. + +"Well, here goes for a try, anyway," he muttered to himself. + +Fortunately, there were numerous pieces of rock lying about. Collecting +a heap of these, he began pelting away at the nearest reindeer, a brown +and white spotted cow. His aim was good, and the startled animal, struck +on the flank, snorted, tossed her head and gave a little jump. She went +forward only a step or two, however, and then settled down to grazing +again. + +Once more Frank let fly, and this time the stone caught her on the side +of the neck. She tossed her head angrily, and sidled forward again. The +movement brought her sharply into contact with another cow, and for a +moment Frank was filled with hope that the pair would start fighting and +alarm the rest of the herd. He was disappointed. The first cow sheered +away from the other, and both resumed grazing. + +What should he do now? Frank was perplexed. He had already considered +the possibility of startling the reindeer by shouting at them, but had +given up that idea because it would apprise the hidden enemy in the +grass ahead of his presence. He wanted them to know nothing of the +menace in their rear until the stampeded herd should sweep down upon +them. + +"I wonder----" he said, muttering the words for the comfort of hearing his +own voice. + +Then he fell silent, thinking. Art had said they were tame reindeer, +accustomed to the presence of man. Yes, but of man clothed and in his +natural state. And of Eskimos at that--men dressed a good deal +differently from the way in which he ordinarily clothed himself. What +would those reindeer think if they saw a naked, white body dash down +upon them suddenly? + +"I'll do it," he said. "That's the only way. And it will work, too, I'll +bet." + +Drawing his long knife from the sheath, he looked around and selected a +tough branch the thickness of his thumb. This he cut off, stripped from +it the projecting twigs, and made of it a long, pliant whip. + +Whip in one hand, knife in the other, eyes gleaming and determined, +Frank made his way to the edge of the trees, and then stole out into the +long grass, crouching low. He did not want the reindeer to see him until +he was upon them, and as they were grazing away from him, this was not +so difficult. In fact, he was within several yards of a clump of cows +before one swung about and looked at him. + +The minute that occurred, Frank realized there was no longer any +possibility of concealment, and that the time had come to strike. And +strike he did. Jumping to his feet, he bounded forward, swinging his +whip so that it sank through the air. + +Bringing the whip down with a cruel lash on the flank of the nearest +reindeer, Frank swung it around on all sides. Every swing landed. The +swish as the pliant green wood struck the animals reminded him oddly of +the sound of a stick beating rugs at home. Many a time he had heard that +same thud-thud from behind his house. + +Not a sound did he make as he lashed about him, for he felt that if no +sound indicating that he was human came from him, the consternation of +the reindeer would be increased. + +And that he had not miscalculated became at once apparent, for the +reindeer near him lifted up their sharp little hooves and sprang to get +out of the vicinity of this strange animal with the lash. Naturally, to +escape him, there was only one way for them to go, and that was forward, +so forward they went. Right into the main body of the herd they dashed, +with Frank prancing and bounding behind them, with each leap bringing +his whip down upon the flank of a laggard. + +Suddenly, one reindeer, nearer than the rest, dashed by so close on his +right as to brush Frank. He was not being charged. The animal was +panicky, and merely seeking to escape. But he had to leap nimbly aside +to avoid being bowled over. And as he leaped, the long knife clutched in +his hand pricked the animal's flank. + +The reindeer screamed, a shrill, terror-stricken cry, and launched +itself forward like a thunderbolt into the midst of the disturbed herd. +That, apparently, was all that was needed to complete the impending +panic. Frank's inexperienced eye could not have told the composition of +the herd, but Art, when they had first caught sight of the reindeer from +the hilltop, had pointed out the majority were cows, and the bucks +numbered only a handful. If any buck had a masculine curiosity to +discover what this strange white-skinned animal that looked so like and +yet so unlike a man was, he did not get the chance to gratify it. For +the now thoroughly frightened cows started forward in a rush that would +have overborne any animal foolish enough to try to stem it. + +And then Frank did what might have been considered a foolish thing. +Carried away by the enthusiasm engendered by seeing his plan to stampede +the herd work out successfully, he continued to bound along behind, at +first able to whip the bunched-up stragglers, but soon falling +hopelessly behind as the herd picked up speed and swept forward like the +wind. + +Straight toward the clump of trees sheltering Frank's friends dashed the +reindeer. And an exultant throb filled his breast. For the hidden enemy +lay in the long grass between the herd and the trees, and inevitably, +therefore, the stampeding animals would drive them out. + +Regardless of the risk to himself, Frank continued on his way, running +as fast as the nature of the ground permitted. The herd beat the long +grass flat in its advance, as flat as if a great board had been pressed +down on all, and the going was easier than he had looked for. + +Suddenly a shot rang out, then another, and a little wisp of smoke +showed the young fellow the discharge came from the trees. His own +friends were shooting. At what? Again an exultant thrill swept over him. +He felt certain his friends were firing at the enemy, and that the +stampeding herd was driving the latter ahead of it, although because of +the presence of the animals between himself and the enemy he could not +see whether such was the case. + +That Frank's surmise was correct, however, was soon borne out. For the +first shots fired from the trees were succeeded by a rapid rattle that +told him everybody was in action. + +Then followed a confused medley of shots interspersed with shouts and +cries, and Frank, pausing a moment to peer ahead and listen came to the +conclusion that the enemy was desperately shooting at the reindeer in an +effort to turn the herd aside. If that was the case, however, their +efforts were unsuccessful, for the animals filled with the unreasoning +spirit of panic did not swerve from their course. + +"By golly," Frank exclaimed aloud, "I believe I can reach camp all +right." + +And once more he began to run forward. For it seemed to him that the +herd, sweeping the enemy before it, would leave the ground free for him +to reach the clump of trees and rejoin his friends. + +On swept the herd, and on ran Frank in the beaten down grass behind it. +His eyes were strained towards the trees. He began to wave and shout, as +he came closer and made out the outline of Mr. Hampton's tent. He paid +no attention to his surroundings. + +Then a form rose up from the long grass beside the swathe beaten down by +the reindeer, there was a shot, and Frank fell forward on his face, a +buzzing in his ears, and lost consciousness. + + + + +CHAPTER XIX.--LUPO'S END. + + +When next Frank opened his eyes, he lay on a blanket in camp and the +sight of Bob and Jack bending anxiously above him while Mr. Hampton and +Farnum worked at his shoulder greeted him. + +"Hello," he said, trying to grin, but wincing as a sharp stab of pain +passed through his shoulder. + +"Don't move, Frank, We'll have you fixed up right in a minute," said Mr. +Hampton soothingly. + +"Is it bad, Dad," Jack anxiously inquired. + +"Just grazed the bone," said Mr. Hampton, putting the finishing touches +to the bandage, and straightening up. "There, Frank, now you'll be all +right." + +"What happened to me?" asked Frank, struggling to a sitting position, +and finding his right arm bound across his chest. + +"Bullet through your shoulder brought you down," said Mr. Hampton. "And +your head struck a rock hidden in the grass, so you were knocked out." + +"Good enough," said Frank, "but who shot me? I was dashing along, +yelling to attract your attention, and never knew what hit me." + +"I guess you didn't," said Jack. "If it hadn't been for Art, you might +have been finished. But he shot down the fellow that winged you." + +"Yes, and your two pals ran out as if there wasn't an enemy in sight and +carried you in," said Art, as he saw Frank about to thank him. "Give +your gratitude to them." + +Frank smiled. + +"I guess I owe it to you all," he said. + +"You were foolish to follow the reindeer herd so closely, Frank," said +Mr. Hampton, reprovingly. "Unarmed, too." + +"Well, I was stampeding 'em, Mr. Hampton," said Frank. "I couldn't do +that, you know, without being there." + +The older man shook his head. + +"If I had been myself, Frank, I wouldn't have let you take that chance," +he said. "No, Farnum," he hastened to add, "I'm not criticizing you. +When these boys take it in their heads to do something it's hard to head +them off. However, it all turned out for the best." + +"Tell me about it," Frank said. "How did my scheme work out?" + +"Couldn't have been better, old thing," said Bob. "Lupo's men ran like +rabbits when those reindeer swept down on them. They tried a few shots +in an attempt to head them off, but seeing the uselessness of their +efforts, turned and ran. We gave them a few shots to help them on their +way. We counted nine." + +"And they got away?" + +"All but the man Art shot," said Jack. "The fellow who shot at you. And +you haven't heard who he was." + +Jack's eyes were bright. Frank looked at him questioningly. + +"Not----" + +"Yes," said Jack. "It was Lupo himself. Art wounded him in the chest. He +died before we could do anything for him. But Dad got some information +from him first." + +He looked at his father. Mr. Hampton's face was both grim and sad. + +"Yes, Frank," he said. "We learned who set these men on us, and who +plotted against Thorwaldsson. But let us not discuss it now. It's bad +business all the way through." + +Mr. Hampton turned aside, taking Farnum with him, and the two fell into +a low-toned discussion. Bob and Jack, meanwhile, helped Frank to resume +his clothing which still lay where he had discarded it before taking to +the river. Art busied himself at packing up the camp equipment. + +Presently, the two older men called Art to them and, after a few words +of discussion, rejoined the boys. + +"Boys," said Mr. Hampton, "we want your opinions on this, too." + +"On what, Dad?" + +"Well, we saw nine men go bounding off away from the reindeer, and we +accounted for Lupo. That makes ten, and it doesn't seem likely there +were more. Yet there is the bare possibility that out there in the grass +may be one or more badly wounded men, fellows whom we shot at one time +or another, who were too hard hit to escape. If there are any such, we +can't go off and leave them there to die. I wouldn't treat a dog like +that." + +"They're not dogs," muttered Farnum, bitterly. "They're wolves." + +"Mr. Farnum considers we would be taking too great a risk," Mr. Hampton +continued. "He says that if we go out to search for wounded, we are +likely to be shot for our pains." + +"Oh, surely not by a wounded man whom you were going to help," protested +Jack. + +"You don't know them," said Farnum. + +"Well, just the same," said Jack, "I think Dad is right. It would be +shameful for us to go away without investigating." + +"I'd feel like a murderer," said Bob. "Shooting 'em down in a fight is +one thing. It was their lives or ours. But leaving a wounded man to die +in the wilderness is something entirely different." + +Farnum made a gesture of surrender. + +"I guess I seem hard-hearted," he said. "But you don't know what I've +been through in the past. All right, we'll make a search. But I warn you +to be on guard." + +"Hardly likely after all that there are any wounded out there," remarked +Frank, taking part in the discussion for the first time. "They must have +been in hiding right in the path of the reindeer, and you can't see any +forms there now. If there were any too badly wounded to escape, they'd +also have been too badly wounded to drag themselves to the side." + +Mr. Hampton nodded. + +"The grass is so beaten down, too," he said, "that if there were anybody +out there, we could see him. However, I cannot rest easy without making +a search. Now, you three boys remain in camp and keep watch. The rest of +us will take care of the search." + +To this the boys made no objection. As a matter of fact, it was one time +that exclusion from activity did not irritate them. They had no stomach +for what they might discover. Frank and Jack, especially, thinking of +the terrible affair on the island in the lake, kept silence. Bob +protested, but more as a matter of form and because he considered +manliness demanded it, than otherwise. + +Mr. Hampton shook his head. + +"None of us want to do this, Bob," he said. "It has to be done, however. +But I certainly don't want you boys along." + +The three men, revolvers clasped in their hands for use in case of +emergency, set out, while the boys watched from the trees. Keeping close +together, they quartered the plain, going far beyond the beaten down +stretch of grass left by the passing of the reindeer herd. Presently, +the boys saw them return, and with a sigh of relief, Jack said: + +"Well, thank goodness, that's over." + +Mr. Hampton's spirits were considerably higher on his return, as the +boys could see by his features. + +"Nobody anywhere," he reported, "and we made a thorough search, too." + +"More thorough than there was need for," said Farnum, grumpily. + +Mr. Hampton smiled slightly. On long trips into the wilderness, where +men are thrown into intimate contact every hour of the day and night, +they get to know each other better than would be the case through a +lifetime of association under ordinary circumstances. It was so here. +Mr. Hampton had come to love the silent, capable Farnum. Behind the +latter's bitter hatred of Lupo and his like, the easterner knew there +was some good reason. He sensed a tragedy in Farnum's past, about which, +perhaps, the other would some day speak in a moment of confidence. And +he forgave the man's seeming brutality accordingly. + +"All right, everybody," said Mr. Farnum, cheerily. "Let's pack up and be +on our way." + +Thanks to Art's previous preparations, the business of breaking camp was +speedily concluded, and the party embarked in the canoes and once more +got under way. Farnum and Art both considered that, because of Frank's +wounded shoulder and his inability to paddle, Art should take his place +in the canoe with Bob and Jack while Frank went with Mr. Hampton and +Farnum. But to this arrangement the boys protested vigorously, and Mr. +Hampton settled the matter by supporting them. + +"Bob and Jack are splendid canoeists," he said. "They have given plenty +of evidence of that on this trip, and at home they are always in the +water when they aren't flying. No, let Frank stay with them. They don't +like to be separated." + + + + +CHAPTER XX.--IN THE FOG. + + +Another period of uneventful canoe travel followed, corresponding in +time to the passage of a day, although there was nothing to mark the +lapse except the slightly-deepened twilight preceding the reascension of +the sun. Camp was pitched on an island in the stream which was small and +compact and could be easily defended in case attack on them was renewed. + +Of the latter contingency, however, Mr. Hampton felt there was little +danger. With Lupo gone, the rascals composing his party would no longer +be held to their purpose, and start to make their way out of the +wilderness and back to their accustomed haunts. + +When travel was resumed after an undisturbed camp, everybody felt rested +and in a more cheerful frame of mind. + +"We ought to be reaching the Coppermine soon," Farnum exclaimed, as they +set out. + +His words were prophetic, because at the end of two hours, on rounding a +bend, they discerned not far ahead a broad and rapid river, into which +emptied the stream they had been following. + +"The Coppermine beyond a doubt," said Farnum. + +In this diagnosis, Mr. Hampton and Art agreed. And, before long, all +question of doubt was conclusively settled by the discovery of great +rocks of a dull reddish color lining the banks. These were the copper +deposits from which the river took its name. + +"Sometime, when the transportation problem has been solved, this region +will be supplying copper to the world," Mr. Hampton observed. + +The canoe containing the boys was close alongside, as the older men had +let their paddles swing idly to enable Bob and Jack to catch up with +them. + +"Why can't it be taken out now, Dad?" asked Jack. + +"Because," explained Mr. Hampton, "the only method would be by ship +through the Arctic, and even in the short Summer that is a passage often +blocked by ice. No, development of the copper resources of this +wilderness, as well as of the oil we hope to find, will have to wait on +the building of a railroad." + +"But ice and snow will block the railroad." + +"Not nearly to the same extent," Mr. Hampton said. "Throughout the +Summer, such a road could be in continuous operation. Even in Winter, +with properly designed equipment, the road could be kept open--perhaps. +That, however, is doubtful, for of the continuous severity of Winter +here you boys can have no conception." + +"Well, if we don't turn back soon, they'll get some idea of it, all +right," said Farnum, grimly. + +"You mean we'll be caught by Winter before we can get out?" asked Mr. +Hampton. + +"When the old North Pole starts sliding south, she slides fast," said +Farnum, sententiously. + +As if spurred by the specter of approaching Winter, all dug their +paddles into the stream with renewed vigor, and the two canoes swept on +between the dismal, rocky banks hour after hour. + +That night there was real twilight, and a sharpness in the air to which +the party was not accustomed. Art pointed skyward, as he and the boys +worked at building the campfire. Their gaze followed whither he +indicated. + +"The moon," he said. "Sure sign the season's getting late. That's the +first time you could see it real good." + +"How late in the Summer is it, anyway?" asked Frank. "I, for one, have +kept no track of time. And I don't see how anybody else could with the +continuous daylight we have had." + +"Dad religiously checks off the days every twenty-four hours," said +Jack. "I've seen him do it." + +Over the evening meal, Mr. Hampton explained that from Long Tom, the +Indian they had taken captive on the island in the lake, he had gotten +directions as to where the latter believed Thorwaldsson and his men to +be. The explorer, according to Long Tom, was making his way along the +Coppermine, in an endeavor to get out to the south before caught by the +Winter. He had started late, and in all likelihood, Mr. Hampton's party +was still to the south of Thorwaldsson. + +"From now on, however," said Mr. Hampton, "we must keep our eyes open as +we proceed for any signs along the way which would indicate Thorwaldsson +already had passed, going south. Not that I consider that to be likely, +however," he added. "On the contrary, if Long Tom wasn't lying, and I +believe he was telling the truth, Thorwaldsson should be close at hand, +and we ought soon to encounter him." + +Camp again was uneventful, but when the boys awoke in the morning they +found a thick wet fog over all. Their blankets were wet with it, the +rocks were wet, and the river which had lain spread out before them +under the moonlight when they turned in for the night, now could not be +seen. Only a gray wall of fog greeted them, blurring the outlines even +of Mr. Hampton, Farnum and Art, who stood in anxious conversation. + +When the boys joined their elders, they found the question up for +discussion was the question of whether to proceed or remain where they +were until the fog lifted. + +"We've had unexampled good weather so far, Mr. Hampton," said Farnum. +"But this fog may mark the breaking-up. We may be in for it from now +on." + +"I realize all that," Mr. Hampton said, his slight impatience mute +evidence to Jack, at least, that his Father was worried. "What I'd like +to know now, is whether to move on or wait till the fog lifts." + +"Why not move on, Dad?" asked Jack. + +"Oh, you boys up, hey? Well, for one thing, if we travel in this fog we +run the danger of being caught in rapids and sucked forward before being +able to reach the bank. For another, we might--just might--pass +Thorwaldsson, in the fog, without knowing it. He might be traveling, +too." + +After some further discussion, it was decided the party should remain +until the fog lifted, and that all should be on guard to catch any sound +of movement out of the fog which would indicate somebody, presumably +Thorwaldsson, was passing. Following breakfast, in fact, all but Mr. +Hampton, who remained in camp, as a guide in case the others blundered +and lost their way in the fog, took up positions along the bank of the +river, some twenty yards apart to maintain "listening posts." + +An hour passed, and then another, with no indication that the fog was +thinning out, and with no sound coming to straining ears except the lap +of the water along the rocks at their feet. It was nerve-trying work in +a way, to sit there for so long a period, isolated, as if entirely alone +in an unpeopled world. The boys, at their various stations, felt the +strain considerably, more so, indeed, than did Farnum or Art who were +old hands at the wilderness game. + +In assigning all their stations, Mr. Hampton had decided, because of the +greater experience of the two older men, that they should take up their +positions at the south end of the line. If any party south-bound along +the Coppermine escaped the attention of the boys, Farnum and Art would +be pretty likely to remedy the oversight. + +To Bob fell the most northerly position. And, as he sat there, hunched +up on a rock, staring out into that thick greasy wall of mist, he felt, +if anything, more lonely than his companions. Jack and Frank, at least, +had the consolation of knowing there was someone to either side. But, +with none of his friends beyond him on the north, Bob felt very much +alone, indeed. + +All sorts of reflections entered his mind, reflections that had no +bearing whatsoever on the situation in which he found himself. He +thought of sunny days on Long Island, of flights in his airplanes or +zipping trips along the coast in his speed boat. He thought of one thing +and another, classroom, Mexican mountains, that strange city of another +world found immured in the Andes, and--of Marjorie. Ever since his first +meeting with his sister's friend, Miss Faulkner, she had occupied a +position of growing importance in Bob's scheme of things. Someday---- + +"Some girl," Bob said to himself. "I'll have to see more of her." + +He leaned forward, elbows planted on his knees, eyes staring into the +fog. In reality, his thoughts, as can be seen, were far, far away. But +presently, a sound, muffled and faint, pierced his consciousness and he +sprang into instant alertness. He listened, holding his breath, +straining to hear. + +It came again. + +Bob started on a stumbling run for Jack, the first man to the south. + + + + +CHAPTER XXI.--A WAILING CRY. + + +"Jack, Jack," he shouted, as he ran through the fog, blindly, but +remembering to veer away from the river bank a little to avoid the +danger of tumbling in. "Jack, Jack, where are you?" + +A shadow, fog-distorted, loomed before him, big, enormous. A hand +gripped his shoulder and brought him to a halt. + +"Here I am, Bob. What's the matter?" + +Bob rubbed the back of a big hand across his eyes. + +"I heard something out there," he said, pointing into the fog upon the +river. "I guess I'd been asleep, or daydreaming, anyway. I couldn't be +sure I had heard anything. It came twice--that sound. Then there was +silence. So I came down here to ask whether you had heard, too." + +"But, Bob, what was it? What did you hear? I heard nothing." + +"Jack, it was the sound of a baby's cry." + +Bob's voice was solemn. A shiver ran through Jack, as if a breath of +cold air had fanned him. In that fog-enwrapped isolation, in that far +northern wilderness, what could a baby be doing? It was preposterous. +More, it was uncanny. + +"Bob, you were asleep. Yes, sir, you certainly were dreaming. A baby. +Huh." + +"Maybe so," Bob said, reluctantly. "But, true as I live, Jack----" + +The other's grip on his shoulder tightened. + +Out of the fog came a wailing sound, distant, thin, but unmistakable. It +was the cry of a baby, if ever there was such a thing. + +But this time it came not from the river, but from inland. The two +listened, straining to hear, but the cry died away without being +repeated. They looked at each other, an unnamable fear gripping them. + +"Jack, I'm afraid," confessed Bob in a whisper. "I don't know--there's +something strikes a chill into me--I--I----" + +He paused. Jack nodded. + +"I feel the same way, Bob," he said, low-voiced. "What a pair of fools +we are, though," he added, brightening. "That must be some bird, or +animal, perhaps." + +Almost unconsciously, they had been making their way southward and now +another figure rose up in the fog before them--that of Frank. He was +about to speak, when once more the wailing cry rose, and this time it +came from two quarters, from the river and from farther inland. The +three stood, silent, speechless, and in that moment, while the echoes of +the cries still rang in their heads, Farnum and Art materialized out of +the fog. + +"Good, there you all are," said Farnum, in a low, tense voice. "Follow +me to camp." + +And without a word of explanation he started at right angles away from +the river, for they had taken their stations in such fashion that Frank, +holding the middle position, would be directly opposite the camp. This +was in order to enable them to reach it without losing their way in the +fog. + +"What is it, Art?" asked Jack, his voice matching Farnum's. + +"Indians," answered Art, tersely. "Stick close together and don't make +no noise." + +It was a situation to tax the nerve of the bravest, and the three boys +hurrying along in the wake of Farnum and Art could not be accused of +cowardice for experiencing a chill premonition of trouble ahead. Often +had Farnum spoken of the cruelty of these far northern Indians. Bitter +had been their experiences with Lupo's half-breeds, in whose veins +flowed the blood of the Indians of the north. + +As they hurried along, there flashed through their minds some of the +stories Farnum had told. Had they gotten so far, so near the end of +their quest for the "Lost Expedition" only to be wiped out by Indians, +on the very eve of success? Such thoughts raced through the mind of +each. But they were determined fellows, accustomed to confront danger, +used to tight places. The first onrush of panic was swept aside, and, by +the time they tumbled into the little hollow in which camp had been +pitched, and where Mr. Hampton awaited them, each had himself well in +hand. + +Mr. Hampton looked at their determined faces, and a smile of grim +approval was his greeting. + +"Indians, boys," he said. "Farnum told me. I suspected as much. Now, we +have no trees here for bulwark, but this little hollow is good enough. +Let us lie down and line the edge of the pit. We'll be pretty close +together, and if any Indians stumble on us they'll get a warm reception. +Listen." He spoke in a low voice. "There goes that cry again. Does it +sound closer? Yes," as the other nodded, "I thought so. Quick. Take your +positions. Jack, my boy, you stay beside me." + +There was a little tremor in his voice. That was all. But Jack +understood. He clasped his father's hand strongly, then threw himself +prone beside him, while the others ranged themselves in a circle as +commanded. + +Once more came the wailing cry from the inland. Once more it was +answered in kind from the water. But to all it was apparent that the +sounds were farther removed, and Mr. Hampton broke the painful silence +with a whispered: + +"They're moving on, moving away." + +"Look, Dad," Jack exclaimed excitedly. "I can see those rocks ahead +where a minute ago was only the white fog. Why, the fog's lifting. It's +lifting, Dad, sure enough." + +"You're right, Jack," his father replied, low-voiced, but there was +anxiety rather than jubilation in his tone. "That will make it bad for +us. We'll be exposed to sight." + +Once again came the wail, faint and far away. As faint came the reply +from the water. Both cries were to the north. Originally they had come +from that direction. Now they were withdrawing whence they had come. +What could it mean? + +The next minute a rattle of rifle fire broke the silence. At the same +time a cold breeze blew across the crouching figures in the shallow pit +and the fog began to shred out fast before it. + +Farnum sprang upright, gazing to the north. The others also gained their +feet. The shooting now was fast and furious. + +"I can't understand," said Farnum, in a puzzled tone. + +With an exclamation, Jack seized his father's arm. + +"Dad," he cried, "you said Thorwaldsson might be near." + +"Yes, why--" + +"That's it," said Art, in a tone of conviction. Mr. Farnum turned +towards him. + +"You mean?" + +"Jack guessed it. Thorwaldsson's being attacked." + +Jack nodded. + +"That's what I meant, Dad." + +"You're right, Jack," said his father. "Come on. It can't be anything +else. Nobody but Thorwaldsson is in this wilderness. We must help him. +Stick close together." + +And scrambling out of their shallow pit, Mr. Hampton started on the dead +run towards the direction of the shooting, with the others at his heels. + +The ground was bare of verdure, and great rocks of the copper ore were +scattered around. On this account their view was restricted, but the +sound of the rifle fire grew momentarily louder, apprising them that +they were nearing the scene of conflict. Suddenly Bob, who was in the +lead, having out-distanced the others several yards, rounded a big rock +and found himself on a bank above a narrow strip of beach. + +Below lay a number of forms, as of men dead or wounded. Two canoes were +drawn up on the beach, and behind one of these, using it as a bulwark, +crouched a man, rifle to shoulder. Farther down the beach were three +other canoes grounded, and beside them several forms of wounded men, and +five or six men, crouching, firing at the lone defender of the attacked +position, creeping up on him. + +Just as Bob reached the edge of the bank, the attackers mustered up +courage for a rush, and with wild shouts swept forward. It looked dark, +indeed, for the lone defender of the upturned canoes. Bob looked back to +see how close were his companions, but they were not yet in sight. His +dash had carried him farther than he had believed to be the case. + +It had taken only a glance to show Bob which way the land lay. The lone +defender was the survivor of Thorwaldsson's party, if the explorer's +party it was, of which Bob had little doubt. He was a white man. The +others were half-breeds, and if Bob was not mistaken they were of the +same gang which he had encountered before. + +It was distinctly up to him to lend a hand. Throwing his rifle to his +shoulder, he prepared to open fire on the crushing enemy. But as his +finger pressed the trigger, he groaned. The mechanism of the rifle had +became jammed in some fashion. Desperately he worked to release the +trigger, but to no avail. + +Then the light of battle came into big Bob's eyes. The half-breeds were +just below him now. Several of their number had fallen in the rush, shot +down by the defender of the canoes. Four were left, and they evidently +were bent on polishing off their lone opponent. So absorbed were all in +their own drama, they had not seen Bob. + +Clubbing his rifle, Bob leaped. He came down on the back of one of the +attackers, and bore him to the ground. With catlike swiftness, Bob, who +himself had fallen on his hands and knees, gathered himself together, +regained his feet, and swinging his clubbed rifle, let out a yell fit to +"frighten a wolf pack," as Frank later described it. + +The stock of the rifle came down with a thud on the shoulders of another +of the half-breeds, felling him as if he had been struck by lightning. +So tremendous was the blow, that it tore the rifle from Bob's grasp. But +he leaped for another of the enemy, a fellow whose startled face was +close to his, seized him about the waist and whirled him aloft to be +tossed aside as if he were a sack of meal. The fourth man was dropped by +a shot from the defender of the canoe. + +"Attaboy, Bob," came Frank's voice, from the bluff above. + +One after the other, Bob's friends leaped to the beach. + +As Frank and Jack clapped him on the back, and tried to grasp his hand, +uttering enthusiastic praise the while, Bob looked around. + +"Say, where's that chap? Why, he's fainted." + +Freeing himself from his companions' clutches, Bob leaped over the +up-ended canoe and bent above the recumbent body of the doughty +defender. + +"Why, he's badly wounded," he cried. + +Mr. Hampton pushed him aside. + +"Here, let me look, Bob," he said. "You fellows help Farnum and Art in +looking after the others. The place is a shambles, with wounded men +everywhere." + + + + +CHAPTER XXII.--OUTWARD BOUND. + + +It was a week before the wounded could be moved. At close range though +the fight had been, none had been killed. When the boys exclaimed in +amazement at this, Art shrugged his shoulders. + +"More bullets fly in a fight than ever reach their mark," he said. "I've +seen men, tough fellows, regular two-gun men, shoot at each other in +Alaskan saloons in the old days without anybody being killed. When a man +sees red, he don't take no good aim." + +The majority of the wounded were not hit in vital spots, but +Thorwaldsson had been shot in so many places that his recovery at first +was a matter of doubt. It was he who had been the last of his party to +keep firing, he whom Bob had rescued in the nick of time. + +From Farrell and others of Thorwaldsson's five companions, however, the +story of what had occurred had been obtained. They had been on their way +down the Coppermine when they, too, had been overtaken in the fog. They +had landed in the little beach to wait for the fog to lift. There the +half-breeds, survivor's of Lupo's gang, who had been dogging the trail +of Mr. Hampton and his party, had come upon them. + +The surprise had been mutual, for the half-breeds had been looking for +the Hampton party and not for Thorwaldsson. However, they had attacked, +the majority from the canoes, and three who had been scouting along +shore, from the land. Surprised thus, Thorwaldsson's party had put up a +game fight, but one after the other had been shot down until only the +leader was left. He, barricaded behind the canoes, had held off the rest +of the attackers until the final rush and Bob's timely arrival. + +As the days passed by, with the twilight deepening into short nights, +Art and Farnum both grew increasingly anxious to be on their way for the +outside. They knew their North, and they realized that the time +remaining to them before Winter set in was narrowing down to a +perilously small edge. + +"We'll have a mighty hard job of it, Mr. Hampton," Farnum pleaded. "What +with wounded on our hands, and prisoners to guard, it looks almost +hopeless as it is for us to get out. But, anyway, we can't afford to +waste time. Can't Thorwaldsson be moved? He'll be all right in a canoe." + +"As long as the traveling is easy, yes," said Mr. Hampton. "He will be +all right. But how about at the portages? He's lost lot of blood +already. He can't afford to lose any more. However, I expect that with +care we can prevent his wounds from reopening. We'll start tomorrow." + +Accordingly, on the day appointed, camp was broken, and the party got +under way. Frank's shoulder was healed sufficiently to permit him once +more to wield a paddle, although still a trifle stiff, and he took his +place in the canoe with Bob and Jack. They had another passenger this +time in Farrell, whose right arm had been broken by a shot in the +sanguinary fight on the river beach. Thorwaldsson was taken in the canoe +occupied by Mr. Hampton and Farnum, Art going in one of the other craft +with members of Thorwaldsson's party. Several of the latter had been +creased by rifle bullets and one shot through a leg, but all could wield +paddles. + +And so the long trip out of the wilderness began, with the half-breeds +in three canoes, deprived of arms and closely watched by their captors +in the four canoes bringing up the rear. With reasonable care, it was +felt, the prisoners could be controlled until they should near +civilization. Without weapons they would be in a hopeless plight in the +wilderness, unable to defend themselves against wild animals, unable to +provide food for themselves. Therefore, no attempt on the part of their +captives to escape was looked for by the others, until they should near +the outlying settlements of the inhabited country. + +"When that time comes," Mr. Hampton had warned the boys, "we must be on +the lookout, for the half-breeds, unless closely watched, will try to +get back their weapons and make a break for it. And I am determined to +take them into civilization as witnesses to prove my statement of the +murderous conspiracy against us on the part of an eminent gentleman in +faraway New York." + +Mr. Hampton spoke bitterly, for from all that had occurred and from the +accounts, first of Long Tom and of the dying Lupo, and again of Farrell +and the surviving members of Thorwaldsson's party, he had pieced +together the story of the conspiracy against them. + +To the boys he confided this tale, the main theme of which was that when +Farrell had told his story to Mr. Otto Anderson concerning the discovery +of the oil-bearing region in the Arctic, Mr. Anderson's confidential +secretary had gone to a New York financier and sold him the information. +He had not been able to tell definitely, however, the location of the +oil region, for the very good reason, as before related, that Farrell +was not certain of it himself, his vicissitudes in getting out of the +country having unsettled his mind. Therefore, this financier had sent +his agents westward with word that Thorwaldsson be tracked. + +"Perhaps this financier, Old Grimm, ordered the mere tracking of +Thorwaldsson," said Mr. Hampton. "But I doubt it. The attacks on +Thorwaldsson's expedition, the disappearance of his ship and crew, all +look like parts of a deep-laid plan to attain Grimm's ends at whatever +cost in human life. And, on top of it all, the attack on us by Lupo, who +was paid a handsome sum down in Dawson by Anderson's former secretary, +acting as agent for Grimm, show the latter aimed to put us all out of +the way." + +"And all for money," said Jack. "It's hard to believe." + +"Ah, you don't know Grimm," said his father. "The man who develops this +Arctic oil region may become the richest in the world. Grimm is +ambitious for that position. He's got a lot of money so far, in one +crooked way or another. But he's not one of the big ones yet, not one of +the richest. And he wants to be supreme. Well, he has overreached +himself this time, for I've got the evidence, and I'll see that we get +more in Dawson and Seattle and New York. Mr. Grimm will no longer have +the power or freedom to toy with men's lives when I get through with +him." + +Although Thorwaldsson lay as in a stupor and could not be questioned, +the full account of what had befallen his expedition since it set out +from Seattle was learned from the others. First of all, they had +succeeded in retracing Farrell's earlier footsteps, and had found the +oil region and the river running through it. A thorough survey of the +country had been made, with maps showing the outlet by water to the +Arctic Ocean. + +In fact, the party had made its way out the river into the Arctic Ocean +and around the coast into the Coppermine. There they had encountered and +made friends with a tribe of Eskimo. They had started down the +Coppermine, or rather up, as it flows north into the Arctic, but had +been attacked, losing half the members of their party and a large part +of their equipment, including the radio. It was after this that the +aviator of the expedition had attempted to fly to the outside with news +of Thorwaldsson's plight, the latter meanwhile being cared for through +the following Winter by the friendly Eskimo at the mouth of the +Coppermine, to which they had put back. The death of the aviator, near +the MacKenzie, of course, was not known to the Thorwaldsson party until +the news was imparted by the boys. + +The course followed as they struck southward was not that pursued by +Farrell when he had made his way back to civilization. On that occasion +he had frequently been light-headed, and it was felt it would be unwise +to trust now to his guidance. Instead, Mr. Hampton and Farnum decided to +retrace their own trail back to the island in the lake where MacDonald +had been encountered, and thence follow his course to the Fort of the +Northwest Mounted Police. + +Day after day they pushed ahead, the nights ever growing longer and +colder, with frost on the ground in the mornings. The honking of the +wild geese overhead, as they made their way south, also was a warning +that the mantle of Winter soon would settle down. + +"You see," Art said to the boys one day, "Winter in this country not +only means dreadful cold for which we ain't prepared in the matter of +clothing or snowshoes or nothing, but also it means there ain't no food +to be had. Yes, there's plenty of game now, geese and duck everywhere +along the streams, caribou plentiful. But you notice they're all going +south. When Winter strikes, there'll be nothing in this wilderness but +rabbit and beaver. Beaver's all right--if you can dig 'em out o' their +huts. But rabbit--huh! Well, you can starve fine on rabbit." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIII.--LONG JIM APPEARS. + + +Winter, after all, caught them in its icy grip far north of where they +had planned to be when the cold should really set in. This was due to a +variety of circumstances. The slowness of Thorwaldsson's recovery was +one of the retarding influences, which prevented them making the desired +speed. After weeks of travel he was still in a comatose condition, and +Mr. Hampton feared his brain had been affected by a bullet that ploughed +along the left side of his head. The other wounded, although quick to +recover, also acted as a hindrance, especially at the first. + +Then, too, the season was unusual. Winter arrived weeks ahead of the +expected time. And daily, as the ice on stream and river thickened, it +became increasingly hard to break a way. Yet the canoes could not be +abandoned, for, once snow began to fly, the travelers would have been +helpless on land, without sleds or snowshoes. Sleds of a sort could be +constructed, of course, and makeshift snowshoes made, too, but neither +would be worth much, and the manufacture of them would take a good deal +of time. + +Two sentries were always posted at night now; one by a fire around which +slumbered the prisoners, the other by a fire in the midst of a circle +composed of the Hampton and Thorwaldsson parties combined. It was Jack's +turn to keep guard one cold but clear night, after a heavy snowfall, +which had caused a great deal of suffering to all, and had brought them, +indeed, to the verge of despair. For they were insufficiently clad, even +though the skins of many animals slain for food in the past weeks had +been saved and roughly cured for wraps; and, in addition, with the +closing-in of Winter game had become so scarce that the camp was +virtually on the verge of starvation. + +Jack was mounting guard by the fire around which lay his friends. One of +the Thorwaldsson party, Swenson, did sentry duty by the other fire. +Looking across the little space which separated the two parties, Jack +could see the huddled figures of the half-breeds lying so close to the +fire, which Swenson fed constantly with fuel, that they seemed almost to +be in it. Around him the members of his own party were similarly +disposed. + +With a sigh, Jack arose, caught up an armful of wood and tossed it into +the fire. The flames at once shot high and, as if that were a signal, +out of the darkness beyond came a robust hail. + +"Hello, there. Keep 'er goin', sonny." + +Into the light of the fire a moment later strode a big fur-clad figure +of a man on snowshoes. On his back was a pack which he dropped to the +ground with a sigh of relief. Then he leaned his rifle in the crook of +an elbow and, pulling off great fur mittens, spread his hands to the +blaze, working his fingers gratefully back and forth. + +"Cold an' gittin' colder," he announced, casually. "Got a nice fire +here." + +Jack was nonplussed. In the first place, to find another wanderer in +this wilderness which they believed unpeopled was exciting enough. But +to have him walk in casually and without vouchsafing any explanation of +his presence took Jack's breath away for the moment. Yet Jack knew +enough of the woodland lore to realize that hospitality is the first law +of the wilds, and that questions distinctly would not be in order. He +decided the best thing for him would be to wait for the other to take +the lead in the conversation. + +This the intruder was not slow to do, beginning even as he eased his +stiffened fingers in the warmth of the fire. + +"Didn't know there was anybody else in this country," he said. "Been +around here long?" + +A look of clumsy craft from under shaggy brows accompanied the question. +Jack had to smile to himself. + +"No; not long," he said composedly. "And you?" + +"Oh, I been huntin' an' trappin' 'round here," the other said. + +To Jack it seemed the man was an honest enough, even a likeable, type, +and yet that he was acting evasively. He decided it would be a good plan +to get a more experienced head to help him deal with the situation. None +of his party apparently was awake, all being worn out with the terrific +strain of the day's travel. But Art lay near him. In fact, his foot was +not six inches from Jack. + +Unostentatiously, in order not to attract the newcomer's attention, Jack +moved his foot to a position where with his toe he could tap on Art's +ankles. It was sufficient for the purpose apparently, for, out of the +tail of his eye Jack saw Art's body stiffen and his head lift up +slightly from the ground. For what followed, however, he was totally +unprepared. + +Art sprang to his feet, leaped forward and began thumping the newcomer +vigorously on the back. + +"Why, you ol' son-of-a-gun," he cried. "You ol' son-of-a-gun." + +"Li'l Artie, or I'm goin' blind," cried the other, seizing Art by the +hand and pumping up and down. + +Jack turned in amazement to Art. + +"Why--why--you know each other!" he cried. + +"Know each other? Har, har, har," roared the giant, in a guffaw that +aroused the others about the campfire. "Know each other? That's a good +one." + +Mr. Hampton, Farnum, Bob and Frank, Farrell and several of the others +gathered around, looking their questions, and Art turned to satisfy +them. + +"Ever hear o' Long Jim Golden?" he asked. "Well, this is him--the +daggonedest trapper on the face o' the earth. Ain't seen him in years +since he left Circle City in the rush. Where you been, Jim?" + +"Trappin'." Jim looked around at the interested faces. "You tol' who I +am," he said. "Now tell me who's your friends, Artie." + +"Sure," said Art heartily, effecting introductions. "Here we all are," +he concluded, and then his face fell as he added: "but where we'll be +soon, I don't know, nor what's to become of us." + +Long Jim looked first at one, then at another, then his eyes roved over +the camp. + +"How come?" he asked. "No sleds nor dogs nor snowshoes nor nothin'. How +come?" + +"Sit here by the fire and I'll tell you, Jim," said Art. "The rest o' +you, we won't bother you none with loud voices. We'll jest whisper-like. +You'll want to turn in and sleep, so go to it." + +Nothing loath, the others with the exception of Jack, who moved to one +side so as not to intrude on the two old acquaintances thus strangely +reunited, turned in and soon were once more asleep. + +Briefly as possible, Art explained to Long Jim the circumstances leading +up to their present position. From across the fire, Jack watched them. +He saw that Long Jim paid close attention to Art's narrative and that, +indeed, it seemed to affect him strangely. For over his open, rugged +features, not constructed to conceal their owner's moods, swept doubt, +uncertainty, indecision, as if within the man was going on a fight +between two contending forces. Jack was puzzled. What could Long Jim be +thinking of? + +Then Long Jim slowly rose to his feet, placing a hand on the shoulder of +his companion who remained seated but looking up at him. Jack +unconsciously moved closer as the big trapper appeared about to speak. +He did not want to eavesdrop, but Long Jim's expression had puzzled him +greatly. What could it mean? + +"Artie," said Long Jim in a louder tone than that in which their +whispered conversation had been carried on, and one that reached Jack's +ears, "Artie, my boy," he said, "I wish you didn't have them skunks with +ye." + +"Them breeds," said Art, jerking a thumb back over a shoulder to +indicate the prisoners sleeping about the other fire. + +"Them same," said Long Jim. "Cause why, you asks me? Cause I got a +paradise to take you all to, where you can spend the Winter lapped in +comfort. An' I don't want to take no rascals like them half-breeds +there. But----" + +Art was on his feet, excitement struggling with disbelief. + +"What? What you mean, Long Jim?" + +"Jest what I says," answered the other emphatically. "A paradise, I +calls it. An' a paradise it is. An' the quicker we git there the better, +so wake up your friends an' let me talk to 'em. If we have to take them +skunks, why, we'll take 'em." + + + + +CHAPTER XXIV.--A TALE OF PARADISE. + + +At the insistence of Long Jim, Art and Jack, who had been called to join +the pair, speedily re-aroused their friends. + +"I ain't no hand for talkin'," Long Jim declared in answer to Art's +requests for further information. "I got to tell this. But onct oughter +be enough. No use my tellin' you an' then tellin' the rest o' them all +over agin." + +Jack smiled discreetly. Long Jim claimed he was "no hand for talking," +yet his tongue wagged continually. However, his heart seemed in the +right place, and certainly he spoke emphatically enough of a haven not +too far away to which they could go for refuge. What was it he called +it? "Paradise." Jack was anxious to hear, and wasted no time on gentle +methods in arousing the sleepers. + +"Lookit here," said Long Jim, as the circle gathered around him. "Art's +been tellin' me the trouble you folks is in. Looks to me like you +moughtn't be able to make it out o' this country." + +Mr. Hampton nodded grave confirmation. + +"Well, I know of a place that's paradise," said Long Jim, impressively. +"An' I'll take ye all there, an' ye can spend the Winter--warm, game, +everything there. Only thing, like I tol' Artie here, is I hate to have +to take them skunks o' half-breeds in there. They'll be a-comin' back +later an' ruin the country." + +"But I don't understand," said Mr. Hampton. "What is it you are talking +about?" + +"Don't blame ye," said Long Jim. "Think maybe the ol' man's crazy, don't +ye? Don't blame ye for that, neither. But, look here, night's dyin' an' +if ye stand up an' look where I'm pointin' ye'll see somethin'." + +Mr. Hampton arose wonderingly, and the others also stood up. + +"Thar," said Long Jim, stretching an arm to the westward. "What d'ye +see?" + +"Why--a great bank of fog," said Mr. Hampton, after gazing intently. "How +strange. Fog in Winter. I don't understand." + +"An' ye all think that's fog, hey?" asked Long Jim, turning to the +others. + +Nodding heads answered. + +"Well, it ain't," he said. "That's the vapor from hot springs." + +"Hot springs?" Mr. Hampton sounded frankly incredulous. + +"Wait'll you see for yourself," said Long Jim, tolerantly. "I wouldn't +believe it, neither, when I first saw it. I thought it was fog, too. But +bein' as how heavy fog in the Winter were strange, I went to +investigate. An' I found paradise." + +Then, under Mr. Hampton's skillful questioning, Long Jim told his story. +He declared he had lived in this region now these two years, and that +since first arriving he had seen nobody except themselves. Drawn by the +seeming fog to investigate, he had come upon an almost tropical valley +through which ran not only one but several rivers of water forever at +the boiling point. These rivers, moreover, he said, were fed by hundreds +of hot springs, which bubbled out of the ground in all directions. It +was the steam from these which, condensing as it rose above the valley +and struck the cold Winter air, had formed the fog which first attracted +his attention. + +"Once I were in South America," said Long Jim. "Down clost to the +Equator. Well, I'm tellin' you, it were that hot all last Summer right +in that valley. As for right now, ye'll find it mighty pleasant an' +warm, an' when snow falls it's only rain by the time it passes through +the heat hangin' over that valley all the time." + +"Hurray," cried Frank, exuberantly. "Let's go. No snow fellows. Get +that? I've had all the snow I need for one season, anyway, and I guess I +can get along without any more for some time to come." + +Mr. Hampton smiled, but, disregarding Frank's jubilation, proceeded with +his questioning. And Long Jim, delighted with an audience to which he +could talk all he pleased, after having been without companions for +several years, continued unfolding new wonders. + +This valley, he declared, was about 200 miles long and 40 miles wide. +They were now near its upper end, to which point Long Jim had made his +way by slow travel and exploration during the two years since his +arrival at the southern end. + +Game? + +At the question, Long Jim grew even more eloquent. + +He declared that, due to the heat generated by the hot springs and the +boiling rivers, the fertility of the soil was amazing. The vegetation, +in fact, achieved a jungle growth. Wild rose bushes grew tall as trees, +with stems as thick as a man's forearm and so dense that it was +impossible to force a way through them. Willows grew to the size of big +trees, with branches so thick it was possible to walk along them. + +"An' birches," added Long Jim, "git to be hunderds o' feet tall, so +tall, in fact, they can't hold themselves up but bend over an' touch the +ground. + +"Likely you think I'm out o' my head. Oh, I kin see it in your eyes. But +I'm tellin' you the God's truth, men." And Long Jim spoke with such +honest sincerity, they were compelled to believe him. "In sich a place," +he continued, "it ain't likely there wouldn't be no game. Why, the +animals there is thick as flees on a ol' hound. + +"Mountain sheep, goats, caribou, moose, bear, deer, wolves, foxes, oh, +every wild animal o' the whole North kin be found there--down in that +valley an' in the mountains enclosin' of it. An' I tell you the truth," +he concluded, his voice sinking for effect, "the moose git so fat +they're almost square an' they're so darn tame ye can almost touch 'em." + +As Long Jim's speech came to a halt, Mr. Hampton turned and stared +across the brightening landscape to the distant bank of vapor. Soon the +short days would end entirely, and the perpetual night of the Arctic +would arrive. Only a miracle could save them from perishing, all +unprepared to face further travel as they were. Could it be possible +that miracle had occurred, and that this trapper was telling the truth? + +Jack looked at his father, and sensed what was passing through the older +man's mind. Truth to tell, some such thoughts were in his own. He went +up to him and laid a hand across his shoulders. + +"Come on, Dad," he said. "I believe Long Jim is telling the truth. And +we better make the effort to get to this valley. He may be exaggerating +a little, but certainly it looks like a promised land." + +"That's right, Jack," said his father, shaking off his reverie, and his +alert self once more. "We'll have a hard enough struggle getting there, +what with having to cross this waste of new-fallen snow without +snowshoes or sleds. Well, let's see what can be done." + +Eventually, the party got into motion. The canoes were cached, where +they could be recovered in the Summer. There was little likelihood +anybody else would pass that way, to appropriate them. Equipment was +made into packs shouldered by everybody except Art and Bob. These two +were to carry Thorwaldsson on a stretcher, improvised out of poles cut +on the river bank, and blankets. + +Fortunately, the crest of the valley to which Long Jim was guiding them +was distant not more than five or six miles. Even at that, however, the +going was tremendously difficult because of the mass of new-fallen snow. +Had it not been for Long Jim to break the way on his snowshoes, +moreover, it is doubtful whether they could have made it, heavy laden as +they were. But Long Jim worked patiently backward and forward, breaking +down the snow, and packing it a second and even a third time with his +webs. + +"How come you were out here, ol' timer?" asked Art once, as Long Jim +paused, and he caught up with him. + +"Well, I git lonesome a leetle," said Long Jim. "I was prospectin' +around in the mountains rimmin' the valley yestiddy, an' I saw you +across the snow. Jest leetle specks you were, but agin the snow I +thought you were humans. I couldn't hardly believe my eyes, but I come +along investigatin'. An' then when night come on, you lit your fires, +an'----" + +"Sure was lucky for us, Long Jim, if you ain't a-lyin'," said Art. + +Long Jim stiffened, and for a moment was prepared to stand on his +dignity but then he smiled in a jolly way that sent crinkly wrinkles all +around his blue eyes. + +"Don't blame ye for that, Artie," he said. "Sounds like I were crazy, +don't it? But jest wait till you see." + + + + +CHAPTER XXV.--VOICES FROM THE WILDERNESS. + + +But Long Jim had not falsified. The valley proved, indeed, to be more +even than he described, for as the world now knows important mineral +deposits were discovered, including gold, silver, copper, coal, iron and +oil. But of the development going on to bring not only this marvelous +region but the vast oil region beyond the Coppermine into the world's +resources naught need be said now. Suffice it to say that such +development is under way, for Mr. Hampton had the ear of the great +financiers, and was able to bring it about; and also that Farrell and +Long Jim are receiving handsome incomes from their shares in the various +projects. + +Here the party settled down, constructed huts, and prepared to await the +coming of Spring when the snow should disappear from the vast wilderness +separating them from the northern edge of the civilized lands and the +ice in the rivers be unlocked. + +One of the first things done by the boys was to erect their radio plant, +and they succeeded without much difficulty in opening communication with +the little Fort of the Northwest Mounted Police on the farthest rim of +the settled country. MacDonald and Dick, with their prisoners, had +arrived only a day or two before communication was opened, and the two +parties exchanged the stories of their adventures by radio. + +To Long Jim the radio was as great a source of wonder as Long Jim's +valley was to the boys. He could never get over marveling at it, and +every time that it was brought into use, Long Jim, if he were in the +vicinity, was on hand, sitting in rapt and open-mouthed astonishment +while the boys operated the instruments. + +Much time was spent in exploring this wonderful valley, at the resources +of which Mr. Hampton could never express sufficient astonishment. + +"It is a freak of nature, of course, boys," he explained on one +occasion. + +"How wonderful that it should have remained undiscovered for so long," +said Jack. + +"Not so marvelous," said his father. "Few, indeed, are the people who +ever have penetrated any distance into all this vast wilderness of +northern Canada. It was supposed, and still is generally supposed, to be +bleak and uninhabitable. You know from experience that the contrary is +the case. It is delightful country in Summer, and man is so constituted +that, if properly clothed and housed, he can stand any severity of +Winter. Some day, I predict, all this vast wilderness through which we +have been making our way will be settled. That day is far off, of +course, but it is coming. The growth of world population will force the +conquest of the sub-Arctic." + +The one thing making their stay in this valley of marvels unpleasant was +the constant rainfall. For in the Arctic storm succeeds storm, sweeping +down from the North Pole in never-ending succession. And these storms +which they knew were burying the land beyond the valley under a pall of +ice and snow poured torrents of water on them. The peaks of the mountain +ranges rimming the valley were buried under snow, gleaming wan in the +occasional moonlight between the storms, for by now the long night had +come. But on them no snow fell, for as Long Jim had foretold the snow as +it passed through the temperate air created by the eternally hot rivers +and springs was transformed into rain. + +Two events of importance marked their stay. One was the escape of their +prisoners, together with some rifles which they succeeded in stealing. +Pursuit in the darkness, and through the jungle-like reaches of the +forest was almost hopeless and was quickly abandoned. Nor, although +vigilant watch was kept to prevent surprise, did they ever see sign of +the half-breeds again. + +"It's a big valley," said Mr. Hampton, "and I doubt whether they will +attempt to attack us. Rather, they will keep out of our way. They are +poorly armed and inferior in numbers, since we have all come together. +Their escape, I imagine, was incited by a fear of what awaited them if +we succeeded in getting them back to civilization and the courts. Well," +he said, with a sigh, "I regret, of course, the loss of witnesses to +substantiate the charges of deviltry which I shall surely bring against +Grimm. Nevertheless, I am glad to be rid of them." + +It was a sentiment in which all concurred. + +The other event referred to was the opening by means of relayed messages +via the Mounted Post and Edmonton of communication by radio with Mr. +Temple in faraway New York. When word reached Bob's father that the +Hampton party was safe and sound and wintering in the wilderness, he +quit work for the day, despite the fact that a big business deal was +clamoring for his attention, and sped by motor down to his Long Island +home. + +Bob's sister, Della, was sitting in the library, staring spiritlessly +out at the Winter landscape. Mr. Temple stole up behind her and, +reaching over her shoulder, thrust the message from the radio +corporation under her eyes. + +Della's glance fell and she began to read the printed words. Then she +leaped up, whirled around, her eyes like two stars, and threw her arms +around her father's neck. + +"Oh, Daddy, Dad-dee," she screamed. + +He held her off at arm's length and looked at her. Her eyes began to +fill up with happy tears, and once more she threw herself into his arms. + +"Well, kiddy, cry all you want to," he said, comfortingly, patting her +on the back. "I guess that's the medicine you needed. You'll be all +right now." + +Mr. Temple's words bore reference to the fact that for months Della's +health had been failing, and she had shown so little interest in her +studies that it had been considered wiser to take her out of the +boarding school which she attended, and bring her home. + +"Oh, yes, Dad-dee," she sobbed, her face buried in his coat. "I'll be +all right now." + +Then she lifted her tear-stained cheeks and asked anxiously: + +"It says they are all safe--_all_? Doesn't it?" + +Mr. Temple nodded, a mischievous twinkle in his eyes. + +"Yes, kiddy," he said. "Frank's safe, too." + +"Oh, Dad-dee, I didn't mean that," said Della, blushing furiously. + +"No need to fib to me, kiddy," said her father. "Bob is only a brother; +but Frank----" + +"No, you shan't say it," laughed Della, and she placed a hand over his +mouth. + +Nevertheless, it was to be noted that from that time on Della no longer +moped and looked ill, but took an intense interest in all the daily +affairs of life, even wanting to return at once to school. + +"Marjie Faulkner will be dying to talk things over with me," she +explained to her mother. + +"Why, dear, what do you mean?" + +"Well--you know--she's sweet on Bob." + +"Oh, you girls," said Mrs. Temple, with a sigh. "You'll be the death of +me. At your age----" + +"At our age you were engaged to Father," said Della. "Now don't deny it. +Dad has even told me how you planned to elope, but were overheard by +your mother who persuaded you to be conventional and have a wedding at +home." + +Mr. Temple looked across the dinner table at his wife and grinned +shamelessly. + +"George, did you tell her that?" + +"Why not? It was the truth." + +"Oh, George. Aren't children nowadays hard enough to handle as it is, +without letting them know how silly we older people were once?" + +"Now, Mother," said Della, rising quickly and going to her mother's +side, and kissing her. "Don't scold Father. Can't you see he's dreaming +of that day again?" + +And dancing to her father's side, Della dropped a kiss on the spot where +his hair was thinning out, and then danced gaily from the dining-room. + +Once more Mr. Temple grinned at his wife, as he sipped his coffee. Then +putting down the cup, he leaned forward and said confidentially: + +"You do remember that time, don't you, dear?" + +Mrs. Temple started to say something sharp by way of reproof for his +silliness, but a softened look came into her eyes as she stared back. +The years that intervened since their youth seemed to slip away. + +"Why, George," she said. "You look positively handsome." + +As for Della, a telegram to her friend, Marjorie Faulkner, apprised the +latter of the message from the Far North to the effect that the lost had +been found. And Della soon followed her message in person. Thereafter +the two girls were never tired of talking about the possible adventures +that had befallen the boys, and while Marjorie sang Bob's praises, Della +sang Frank's. Poor Jack, it is to be feared, was somewhat slighted in +these discussions. + +"I'll warrant you that Bob saved the day for them all," Marjorie said on +one occasion. "He's so big and strong." + +"Well," flashed Della, "Bob's my brother, and that's all right. But if +they ever got in a tight pinch, I'm _sure_ it was Frank that got them +out. He's got more brains than all the rest put together." + +"Oh, Della, how can you say that?" cried Marjorie. + +"Well, just because Bob is my brother must I be always praising him?" +demanded Della. + +For a moment the two girls positively glared at each other. + +Then the twinkle began to come, and they laughed. + +Then they were hugging each other. + +And then they were at it again. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVI.--TREED BY WOLVES. + + +One more adventure, and that a serious one, was to befall the boys as a +final taste of life in the wilderness. One day towards the end of +Winter, when the sky cleared after several days of tremendous rain, the +three boys who had been cooped up in their quarters and had worn out +even the amusement of listening to the Edmonton radio concerts or +communicating with the Post of the Mounted, announced they were going +hunting. + +The supply of fresh meat had fallen pretty low, and additions to their +larder would not be unwelcome. Accordingly, Mr. Hampton made no +objection to their departure, but insisted that Art or Long Jim +accompany them. + +"I'd be no good," said Long Jim. "Sence I did that fool trick o' cuttin' +my hand with the axe a couple-three days ago, I cain't set finger to +trigger. You better go, Art." + +"All right, boys," said Art. "I'd like to stretch a leg, too." + +The four, accordingly, set out. In the forest surrounding the spot where +they had chosen to erect their huts, there was no longer any game, for +the animals had come to learn that these strange creatures brought +destruction and had decamped elsewhere. Finally, after they had +proceeded some distance without sighting anything, Art suggested they +strike for a higher level on the adjacent mountain side. The huts had +been erected near the foot of one of the ranges rimming the valley. + +"Maybe we'll run into a mountain sheep or a goat," he said. "Anyhow, we +can see better from a higher lever, for this forest down here is so +thick you can hardly see a yard away. The moon's out an' up there the +trees is thinner." + +With Art leading the way, the party began its upward climb. For some +time they toiled upward until presently they reached a level unaffected +by the more temperate air of the valley floor, and where, as a +consequence, snow covered the rocks. Across a bare shoulder of rock from +which the wind had swept all but a trace of snow they made their way and +then plunged into a thick woods beyond. + +Frank, who was in the rear, laid down his rifle and bent over to adjust +the clumsy lacing of a thick shoe pack of the kind they had made for +themselves from the skins of slain animals. The others plodding along, +head down, did not notice he had stopped, and kept on going. He spent +more time at the task than he had anticipated, and when finally he +straightened up and picked up his rifle, they were not in sight. + +Frank was not worried, however, for he felt sure he would be able to +trace them in the snow and would soon catch up with them. He set out at +a brisk pace. The snow grew deeper, however, where the wind had not had +a chance to whisk it away, and the going was hard. He had proceeded some +distance before he noticed that he had gotten off the trail left by his +companions. Angry with himself for his carelessness, but still not +worried, he halted to consider what was best for him to do. + +"Shucks," he said aloud. "Guess I better go back over my steps till I +find where I left their trail." + +And with this intention, he turned to go back. Even as he did so, he saw +a pack of long gray bodies racing through the trees in his direction. At +the same instant they gave tongue. It was a pack of wolves. They had +scented him and were now lifting the cry which announced their prey was +near. + +Frank started to fling the rifle to his shoulder, but then he lowered +it. The flitting forms were still yards away. And although moonlight +sifted through the bare limbs of the trees, it did not sufficiently +illumine the scene to make the wolves good targets. He decided his best +plan would be to seek refuge in a tree first of all, and then he could +fire at the wolves at his leisure and with a sureness of aim that would +not now be his. These thoughts or reflections flashed through his mind +in an instant. The next moment he was putting his plan into execution, +and climbing into a tall fir. + +He was not a moment too soon, either, for the baying came closer and +closer and even as he struggled frantically to climb higher the leader +of the wolf pack reached the foot of his refuge, and sprang high into +the air. Frank heard the snap of the great jaws, and looked down into a +yawning red cavern of a mouth. + +The next moment his rifle slipped from his grasp, and fell on the snout +of the wolf who leaped aside in temporary panic. Then the rest of the +pack arrived on the scene, jumping and snarling, their heads in the air, +their wicked eyes agleam as they scented the prey they had treed but +which temporarily had escaped them. + +Frank threw an arm around the main trunk of the tree to steady himself, +for he was sick with vexation at his own carelessness in not having +properly, secured his rifle. Meantime the wolves circled close about the +tree, looking up, and one big fellow even put his forefeet against the +trunk and reared high till his head rested on the lowermost branch. Then +he retired to join the others, and all squatted in an expectant ring +close about the foot of the tree. + +When his vexation had passed, Frank set himself to a serious +consideration of his position. And at once he realized that he must try +before it was too late and they got out of earshot to attract the +attention of his comrades. Perhaps already they had gotten beyond reach. +At that he had a moment of panic. Then he grew calmer. If they had moved +away, he told himself, they would discover his absence presently and +retrace their steps in search of him. + +He still had his revolver. At first he did not trust himself to handle +it, because of the trembling of his hands. Then he grew cooler. His hand +steadied. He thought he would shout to attract his companions' attention +first of all. And raising his voice, he sent call after call ringing +through the forest. + +The wolves gave back yelp for scream, and soon the whole pack was +snarling and yowling and making a terrific, demoniac din. + +The sound steadied him. + +"Good," he thought, "the boys will know there are wolves, anyway." + +Their own snarls reacted on the wolves, exciting them. And once more +they came up to the foot of the tree, rearing their forefeet against it +and leaping upward. It was Frank's chance, and he took it. + +With one arm clasping the trunk of the tree, he leaned forward and took +careful aim at the biggest of the grey shapes below. At that moment, the +wolf opened his mouth in a jaw-clashing howl. It was his last. Frank's +bullet plunged down his throat, and the wolf rolled over in the snow. + +His mates without a second's hesitation deserted their attempts to get +at Frank, and began snarling over the dead body. The sight sickened +Frank, and he closed his eyes a moment. Then the thought occurred that, +if he added several more corpses to the ghoulish feast, he might divert +the attention of the rest of the pack to such an extent that he would be +able to slip away unseen, perhaps by making his way through the trees +for a short distance before jumping to the ground. + +There was no need now for care in aiming, as the wolves were in a thick +mass over the body of the fallen, so Frank fired several shots in rapid +succession into the mass. The effect was instantly apparent, for two +more wolves went down, and the tearing and crunching announced a renewal +of the awful feast. + +Now, thought Frank, was his time to escape, if possible. He had heard no +answering replies, and believed his companions must have gotten out of +earshot. If so, he must depend on his own resources to make his escape. +He was about to start swinging to a nearby tree, the branches of which +interlocked with those of the tree in which he had found refuge, when +the thought occurred that, perhaps, he would be able to obtain his rifle +undiscovered by the wolves. + +Cautiously he started to descend, his eyes alternately on the snarling +wolf pack several yards from the tree and on the limbs he must grip in +his descent. He had almost reached the lowermost limb when his grip +slipped and he fell. + +Frank thought his end had come, but as he struck the ground his hands +closed on the coveted rifle, and he scrabbled to regain his feet, +flinging the rifle to his shoulder as he did so. + +His fall had been seen. One of the wolves turned aside from the +outskirts of the pack, where he was not getting his share of the +gruesome feast, and sprang for him. The next moment, as a shot rang out +from behind Frank, the wolf dropped quivering at his feet. + +"Steady, Frank," cried Art's voice. "Give 'em all you've got." + +Without looking around, mastering his trembling by a supreme effort, +Frank brought the rifle to his shoulder and began firing into the pack, +even as the three rifles of his companions also opened fire. + +At that close range every shot told and not a wolf escaped. Eleven +bodies, including the mutilated remains of the three which Frank had +slain with revolver shots, were stretched on the snow under the trees. + +When it was all over, his companions gathered about Frank and +explanations followed. Then they made their way back to camp. + + + + +CHAPTER XXVII--CONCLUSION. + + +Far to the southward, late in the Summer, the party containing our +friends and the Thorwaldsson party as well as Long Jim Golden, all +bronzed and hardy, and with Thorwaldsson recovered in body and mind, +swung around a bend in a river and came to the landing which marked the +first outpost of civilization--the trading post where was also located +the Fort of the Mounted. + +A little boy playing on the edge of the pier was first to see them, and +whooping and shouting he ran up the bank towards the store. Out of the +door of the trading post came a figure in uniform. + +"Dick." + +"Art." + +The two pals were reunited. + +And then followed the biggest surprise of all, for out of the store came +Mr. Temple and Della. For ten minutes the kissing and hugging went on, +while Farnum, Thorwaldsson, Farrell and the rest stood to one side, +their faces set in wide grins. + +"What in the world?" demanded Mr. Hampton, at length, holding his +partner and neighbor at arm's length. "What in the world brought you +here?" + +"A motor boat," said Mr. Temple. "That was a surprise for you. When we +received your radio message via the post here, which relayed it to +Edmonton--that first one, you know, announcing you were leaving for the +outside--I decided I would have to be on hand to greet you. So I got into +communication with Captain Jameson, and learned from him that I could +reach one of his posts farther south by motor car, and then come up the +river in a launch. So I decided I would come here to the edge of the +wilderness." + +He looked at his son, Bob, about whom he still kept an arm, and smiled. + +"Good old Dad," said Bob, giving him a hug. "But what brought Della?" + +"Oh, the same means," answered his father. + +"No, Dad. You know what I mean. Was it love for her straying brother?" + +"Well, now, Bob, you'll have to form your own opinion," said Mr. Temple, +eyes a-twinkle. + +Della who had been standing close to Frank, her hands clasped in his, +looked calmly at Bob. + +"Marjie wanted to come, too, you know, Bob," she said. "But her mother +wouldn't let her. She sent you a message." + +"Huh." + +Big Bob blushed, and let the conversation drop. Nevertheless, at the +first opportunity he got his sister to one side, and, snatching the +letter she tendered him, went off by himself to read it. + +There was room for Mr. Hampton and the boys on the launch, and in a +canoe towed behind, and so, after a short rest, a start downstream was +made at once. Thorwaldsson and the others set off with them, but soon +fell behind amid a gay waving of farewells. Mr. Hampton was to make +arrangements for their reception at the next post and at Edmonton. The +launch would be sent back for them when the post was reached. + +At Edmonton, a thriving city which in the comparatively few years of its +existence has grown to the proportions of a metropolis, the boys got +their first taste of the publicity which was to pursue them across the +continent, reaching its height on their arrival in New York. For word of +their coming had gotten out, and hosts of reporters awaited them, +representing the great newspapers and news-gathering syndicates of not +only North America but of Europe, too. + +"You see, boys," said Mr. Hampton, in their hotel rooms, when they +protested to him at being besieged every minute of the day by reporters, +"you are the center of the romantic interest of the world. You rescued +the Lost Expedition and discovered strange new territory. You have had +the wildest kind of adventures. How do you expect the world to take that +calmly? It can't be done. No, you may as well submit gracefully, and +talk when questioned." + +The romance of Frank and Della also was exploited by the newspapermen, +and pictures began to appear throughout the country, showing the daring +young explorer and his sweetheart. When they were taken, neither Frank +nor Della knew, but the truth of the matter was that they were together +so much of the time it was the easiest matter in the world for a +photographer to snap them. + +In New York the same thing was gone through with again, only, if +anything, worse. And this time, the reporters finding that Marjorie +Faulkner appeared to greet the returned heroes, scented a new romance, +and questioned the boys about it. Bob and Frank refused to answer, but +Jack slyly tipped off the newspapermen that between Marjorie and Bob a +real romance was, indeed, budding. + +In reprisal, Bob and Frank put their heads together, and gave the +newspapermen a story to the effect that Jack was champing at the bit to +be off to old Mexico, there to greet a sweetheart who awaited him, none +other, in fact, than the Senorita Rafaela y Calomares, daughter of an +old Don who had a palace in the Sonora mountains. And in support of the +story they told the newspapermen of their adventures several years +before on the Mexican border, when they had rescued Mr. Hampton from +captivity and Jack, they said, had fallen in love with the daughter of +the Mexican leader responsible for Mr. Hampton's capture. + +It all made good copy for the reporters, who had about exhausted the +possibilities of the northern adventure, and who now plunged head first +into this former adventure, of which nothing had been known at the time. + +Jack was furious, and threatened to wreak dire vengeance on Bob and +Frank. But the latter pointed out that they had but turned the tables on +him. + +"Well, anyway," he said, finally, beginning to smile, "you haven't got +the best part of the story yet." + +Their curiosity aroused, they tried to get him to tell what he meant. +But he refused. Several days later he disappeared. When they asked Mr. +Hampton what had become of him he finally surrendered and gave the +secret away. + +"Well, boys," he said, "when we returned I found a courteous note from +Don Fernandez y Calomares, saying he was in Washington on business +connected with the government, and asking me to call. I guess Jack has +taken a train for Washington, and gone calling." + +With which happy forecast of good luck to come to all three of the Radio +Boys, we shall leave them for the present, secure in the belief that if +at any future date they go adventuring they will be well able to take +care of themselves, and also that they will get into adventures well +worth reading about. + + + THE END + + + + +The Radio Boys Series + +BY GERALD BRECKENRIDGE + +A new series of copyright titles for boys of all ages. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE RADIO BOYS ON THE MEXICAN BORDER + THE RADIO BOYS ON SECRET SERVICE DUTY + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE REVENUE GUARDS + THE RADIO BOYS' SEARCH FOR THE INCA'S TREASURE + THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE LOST ALASKA EXPEDITION + THE RADIO BOYS IN DARKEST AFRICA + THE RADIO BOYS SEEK THE LOST ATLANTIS + THE RADIO BOYS WITH THE BORDER PATROL + THE RADIO BOYS AS SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Golden Boys Series + +BY L. P. WYMAN, PH.D. + +Dean of Pennsylvania Military College. + +A new series of instructive copyright stories for boys of High School +Age. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE GOLDEN BOYS AND THEIR NEW ELECTRIC CELL + THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE FORTRESS + THE GOLDEN BOYS IN THE MAINE WOODS + THE GOLDEN BOYS WITH THE LUMBER JACKS + THE GOLDEN BOYS RESCUED BY RADIO + THE GOLDEN BOYS ALONG THE RIVER ALLAGASH + THE GOLDEN BOYS AT THE HAUNTED CAMP + THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE RIVER DRIVE + THE GOLDEN BOYS SAVE THE CHAMBERLAIN DAM + THE GOLDEN BOYS ON THE TRAIL + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Lakewood Boys Series + +By L. P. WYMAN, Ph.D. + +A new series of copyright stories for boys of High School Age by the +Author of "The Golden Boys Series." + +Cloth Bound with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS ON THE LAZY S + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE LOST MINE + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE FROZEN NORTH + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS AND THE POLO PONIES + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE SOUTH SEA ISLANDS + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN MONTANA + THE LAKEWOOD BOYS IN THE AFRICAN JUNGLE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +Boy Scout Series + +By LIEUT. HOWARD PAYSON + +A series of stories in which self-reliance and self-defense through +organized athletics are emphasized, also depicting an accurate +description of Boy Scouts activities. + +ATTRACTIVELY BOUND IN CLOTH + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE BOY SCOUTS OF THE EAGLE PATROL + THE BOY SCOUTS ON THE RANGE + THE BOY SCOUTS AND THE ARMY AIRSHIP + THE BOY SCOUTS' MOUNTAIN CAMP + THE BOY SCOUTS FOR UNCLE SAM + THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA CANAL + THE BOY SCOUTS UNDER FIRE IN MEXICO + THE BOY SCOUTS ON BELGIAN BATTLEFIELDS + THE BOY SCOUTS WITH THE ALLIES IN FRANCE + THE BOY SCOUTS AT THE PANAMA-PACIFIC EXPOSITION + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +Border Boys Series + +By Fremont B. Deering + +Mexican and Canadian Frontier Stories for Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + +With Individual Jackets in Colors. + +Cloth Bound + + BORDER BOYS ON THE TRAIL + BORDER BOYS ACROSS THE FRONTIER + BORDER BOYS WITH THE MEXICAN RANGERS + BORDER BOYS WITH THE TEXAS RANGERS + BORDER BOYS IN THE CANADIAN ROCKIES + BORDER BOYS ALONG THE ST. LAWRENCE RIVER + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Ranger Boys Series + +BY CLAUDE H. LA BELLE + +A new series of copyright titles for Boys 12 to 16 years telling of the +adventures of three boys with the Forest Rangers in the state of Maine. + +Handsome Cloth Binding. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE RANGER BOYS TO THE RESCUE + THE RANGER BOYS FIND THE HERMIT + THE RANGER BOYS AND THE BORDER SMUGGLERS + THE RANGER BOYS OUTWIT THE TIMBER THIEVES + THE RANGER BOYS AND THEIR REWARD + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Boy Troopers Series + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +Author of the Famous "Boy Allies" Series. + +The adventures of two boys with the Pennsylvania State Police. + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Copyrighted Titles. + +Cloth Bound, with Attractive Cover Designs. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + THE BOY TROOPERS ON THE TRAIL + THE BOY TROOPERS IN THE NORTHWEST + THE BOY TROOPERS ON STRIKE DUTY + THE BOY TROOPERS AMONG THE WILD MOUNTAINEERS + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +Frank Armstrong Series + +By MATTHEW M. COLTON + +Six Exceptional Stories of College Life, Describing Athletics from Start +to Finish. For Boys 10 to 15 Years. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + +Cloth Bound + +With Attractive Jackets in Colors. + + FRANK ARMSTRONG'S VACATION + FRANK ARMSTRONG AT QUEENS + FRANK ARMSTRONG'S SECOND TERM + FRANK ARMSTRONG, DROP KICKER + FRANK ARMSTRONG, CAPTAIN OF THE NINE + FRANK ARMSTRONG AT COLLEGE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Army + +BY CLAIR W. HAYES + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound + +Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +Postage 10c extra. + +In this series we follow the fortunes of two American lads unable to +leave Europe after war is declared. They meet the soldiers of the +Allies, and decide to cast their lot with them. Their experiences and +escapes are many, and furnish plenty of good, healthy action that every +boy loves. + + THE BOY ALLIES AT LIEGE; + or, Through Lines of Steel. + + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE FIRING LINE; + or, Twelve Days' Battle Along the Marne. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE COSSACKS; + or, A Wild Dash Over the Carpathians. + + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE TRENCHES; + or, Midst Shot and Shell Along the Aisne. + + THE BOY ALLIES IN GREAT PERIL; + or, With the Italian Army in the Alps. + + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALKAN CAMPAIGN; + or, The Struggle to Save a Nation. + + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE SOMME; + or, Courage and Bravery Rewarded. + + THE BOY ALLIES AT VERDUN; + or, Saving France from the Enemy. + + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE STARS AND STRIPES; + or, Leading the American Troops to the Firing Line. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH HAIG IN FLANDERS; + or, The Fighting Canadians of Vimy Ridge. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH PERSHING IN FRANCE; + or, Over the Top at Chateau Thierry. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH MARSHAL FOCH; + or, The Closing Days of the Great World War. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Boy Allies + +(Registered in the United States Patent Office) + +With the Navy + +BY ENSIGN ROBERT L. DRAKE + +For Boys 12 to 16 Years. + +All Cloth Bound + +Copyright Titles + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +Postage 10c Extra + +Frank Chadwick and Jack Templeton, young American lads, meet each other +in an unusual way soon after the declaration of war. Circumstances place +them on board the British cruiser, "The Sylph," and from there on, they +share adventures with the sailors of the Allies. Ensign Robert L. Drake, +the author, is an experienced naval officer, and he describes admirably +the many exciting adventures of the two boys. + + THE BOY ALLIES ON THE NORTH SEA PATROL; + or, Striking the First Blow at the German Fleet. + + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER TWO FLAGS; + or, Sweeping the Enemy from the Sea. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE FLYING SQUADRON; + or, The Naval Raiders of the Great War. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE TERROR OF THE SEA; + or, The Last Shot of Submarine D-16. + + THE BOY ALLIES UNDER THE SEA; + or, The Vanishing Submarine. + + THE BOY ALLIES IN THE BALTIC; + or, Through Fields of Ice to Aid the Czar. + + THE BOY ALLIES AT JUTLAND; + or, The Greatest Naval Battle of History. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH UNCLE SAM'S CRUISERS; + or, Convoying the American Army Across the Atlantic. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE SUBMARINE D-32; + or, The Fall of the Russian Empire. + + THE BOY ALLIES WITH THE VICTORIOUS FLEETS; + or, The Fall of the German Navy. + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Oakdale Academy Series + +BY MORGAN SCOTT + +A series of real boys' stories at the Oakdale Academy. Ben Stone, the +hero, wins his way under peculiar circumstances and against great odds. + +Clean-cut stories of real experiences in athletics and sports of academy +life, with adventures, mysteries and clever descriptions. + +Just the kind of books a boy 12 to 16 years would like to read. + +HANDSOME CLOTH BINDING. + +JACKETS IN COLORS + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + +Copyright Titles + + BEN STONE AT OAKDALE + BOYS OF OAKDALE ACADEMY + RIVAL PITCHERS OF OAKDALE + OAKDALE BOYS IN CAMP + THE GREAT OAKDALE MYSTERY + THE NEW BOYS AT OAKDALE + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + +The Rex Kingdon Series + +By GORDON BRADDOCK + +A fine series of stories for boys of High School age, written in an +interesting and instructive style. + +Rex Kingdon, the hero, a real, wide-awake boy, interested in outdoor +games, enters into the school sports with enthusiasm. A rattling good +baseball story holds the interest to the very end. Rex and his Ridgewood +friends establish a campfire in the North woods; there, mystery, +jealousy and rivalry enter to menace their safety, fire their interest +and finally cement their friendship. + +Stories boys will want to read. + +CLOTHBOUND. JACKETS IN COLORS. + +Copyright Titles. + +PRICE, 50 CENTS EACH + +POSTAGE 10c EXTRA + + REX KINGDON OF RIDGEWOOD HIGH + REX KINGDON IN THE NORTH WOODS + REX KINGDON AT WALCOTT HALL + REX KINGDON BEHIND THE BAT + REX KINGDON ON STORM ISLAND + +For sale by all booksellers, or sent on receipt of price by the +Publishers + +A. L. BURT COMPANY, 114-120 E. 23d St., NEW YORK + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Radio Boys Rescue the Lost Alaska +Expedition, by Gerald Breckenridge + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE RADIO BOYS RESCUE THE *** + +***** This file should be named 36314-0.txt or 36314-0.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/3/6/3/1/36314/ + +Produced by Roger Frank and the Online Distributed +Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/36314.zip b/36314.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..e88ad2f --- /dev/null +++ b/36314.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b887448 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #36314 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/36314) |
